Liebherr 712 752 PDF

en
Service Manual
(20
Crawler Dozers
ints)
PR 712 - 752
(10
1 General Information
2 Special Tools, Application Guidelines
3 Technical Data - Maintenance Guidelines
Service Manual 4 Engine

Property of Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH I
5 Coupling and Splitter Box
Crawler Dozers
6 Travel Hydraulic
SERIES
7 Working Hydraulic
Table of Contents
8 Hydraulic Components
Issue 01/2004
II 9 Electrical System
10 Electronic Control
11 Travel Gear
12 Track Components
13 Attachments - front
14 Attachments - rear
III
15 Main Frame - Add On Components
16 Tank Installation's
Book No.: 17 Operators Platform, Heater, Air Conditioner
Name of Manual Owner: 18 Special Attachments
19 Miscellaneous Informations
Sub Group Index
Foreword and explanation 1.1
Safety guidelines 1.2.01

Hand signals 1.2.02
Service items 1.3.01
Table - charts 1.4

Conversion table 1.4.01
Tightening torques standard screws 1.4.02
Tightening torques SAE screws 1.4.03
Hole diameter before tapping 1.4.04
Couplings 1.4.05
ISO - tolerances 1.4.06
Code letters + terminal designations electric 1.5
Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de
Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 01 General information Blatt

Page 1.0.00.01
Feuille
For your information
This manual contains technical data, descriptions of design and function, repair and adjustment guidelines as well
as numerous drawings, functional views and illustrations
LIEBHERR - crawler dozers (PR), crawler loaders (LR) or pipelayers (RL).
This manual should simplify competent customer service of our products, does however, not replace expert and
qualified training and an attendance of our factory schools.
Information which is in trade considered basic knowledge is not included. Operation and spare parts information can
be found in separate manuals.
The manual will be updated as necessary when changes occur in series.
This symbol is used in the manual for very important notes.
During the activities on the machine, accident prevention regulations and safety guidelines must be strictly
observed.
This manual is intended for the exclusive use of the registered owner and may not be reproduced complete or in
part or passed on a third person without written permission.
This manual is still on property of LIEBHERR-Werk Telfs GmbH.
All rights reserved - Printed in Austria.
We reserve the right to make changes of technical details on the machine in comparison to the information and
drawings in this manual.
Printed and published by

LIEBHERR-Werk Telfs GmbH., Service -Training Department.
Explanation of structure (page numbers)

In order to find specific information and add supplements more easily, the following numbering system is being
used:
main group sub group model group page No.
6. 3. 10 01
main group according sub group of main group division based on continuous running
to manual index according to sub group information content or number within the model
index machine model group group, illustrations or
parts list with .00 may be
added at the beginning or
end of each group.
Updated pages retain the same page number, but receive a more recent date when mailed. Supplements have a
new number. If the page is only valid for a certain machine model group, it will so be indicated on the page.
We hope that with the enclosed information we have taken yet another step to improve the service on the
LIEBHERR - crawler dozers, crawler loaders and pipelayers.
LIEBHERR-Werk Telfs GmbH.

Service-Training Dept.
Foreword and explanation LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 03 General Information Blatt

Page
Feuille 1.1.00.01
Service Items
Notes for the disposition of service fluids and filter:
- Service fluids may not be discharged into the ground, drainage system or waterways.
- Different service fluids and filters should be collected and disposed of in separate containers.
- Do not use containers, which previously held food items or drinks - to prevent danger of mix-ups.
- Dispose of these items in an environmentally friendly manner according to applicable guidelines and
regulations. Observe all state, local and national regulations.
- Do not use old or incorrectly stored service fluids and filters, dispose of them properly.
1. Service fluids for Diesel engines with turbo chargers
1.1. Engine lube oil

Engine lube oils must meet a certain quality and a certain viscosity, depending on their use and ambient
temperatures. Problem-free operation can only be ensured only if the requirements for both areas are met.
1.1.1 Oil quality

To meet the technical demands, only highly alloyed lube oils are used in modern Diesel engines. They
consists of high-quality base oils, mixed with additives. These additives provide the required properties for
these oils.
For LIEBHERR Diesel engines with turbo chargers, oils of the following specifications are approved, the higher
quality oils are preferred:
API - classification : CF-4, CG-4, CH-4, CI-4,
(American Petroleum Institute)
ACEA (CCMC) - classification : E2 (D4), E3 (D5), E4, E5

(Association des Constructeurs Europens de lAutomobile)
Note: For older machines / Diesel engines, if still in use, engine oils according to the lower specification as
noted in the original operation manuals may be used. However, we recommend the use of these new
oils, since the service life of the engine can be extended significantly by using these higher quality
oils. The originally noted oil and filter change intervals may be extended.
1.1.2 Oil viscosity

Z In addition to the quality, the oil must also provide a certain viscosity the selection is made according to the
SAE - classification (Society of Automotive Engineers).
The determining factor for the correct selection of the SAE classification is the ambient temperature. In most
regions, SAE 10W-40 is recommended (see chart below).
If the viscosity is too high, starting problems can occur, if it is too low, the lubrication efficiency can be
endangered, both factors can lead to increased engine wear.
The temperature ranges shown in the following chart are guidelines and may be exceeded or fallen below for a
short time.
For the operation in extreme climate zones, such as in arctic regions, special guidelines apply and are
available from the manufacturer.
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 04 Service Items Blatt

Page
Feuille 01.3.01.01
1.1.3 Oil change intervals
The oil change intervals noted in the Maintenance and Inspection schedules always apply to "normal operating
conditions". They apply for normal, central European temperatures, annual operation of approx. 1000
operating hours, use of oils of the required minimum quality and fuels with a sulfur content of less than 0.5%.
When using higher quality oils, the operating hours per interval may be doubled - see the following chart.
However, the 500 hour interval may not be exceeded.
Engine oil and filters must be changed at least once a year, even if the given change interval has not yet been
reached.
In difficult circumstances, such as repeated cold start, higher sulfur content (above 05.%) in the fuel, more
severe climatic conditions (for example continuous temperatures below -10C) etc., the intervals must be cut in
half. This means, for each difficulty, the permitted operating hours per interval must be multiplied by a factor of
0.5.
Permissible oil change intervals in operating hours:
Oil quality:
Oil quality:
Applications
CF-4, CG-4, CH-4,
E3 (D5), E4, E5,
CI-4, E2 (D4))
Ambient Sulfur content
Change interval Change interval
temperature in fuel
above -10C to 0,5% 250 hrs. 500 hrs.

(Normal
temperature) above 0,5% 125 hrs. 250 hrs.
below -10C to 0,5% 125 hrs. 250 hrs.

Continuous
temperature above 0,5% 60 hrs. 125 hrs.
1.2. Diesel fuels

Diesel fuels must meet the minimum requirements of the following specifications.
The sulfur content may not exceed 0.5%. A higher sulfur content has negative effects on oil change intervals
and engine service life. A higher sulfur content above 1% is not permitted.
Fuels with low sulfur content (for example, according to European regulations <0.05 %) must contain additives
to retain the lubrication efficiency according to HFRR(60)-Test <400m - . Insufficient lubrication causes
premature wear of the injection system components, especially distributor injection pumps. The additives should
be added by the fuel supplier, as he is responsible for the quality of the fuel. We do not recommend addition of
secondary lubrication additives by the user.
Approved fuel specifications:

DIN EN 590 + HFRR(60)-Test <400m
ASTM D 975 - 89a 1D and 2D + HFRR(60)-Test <400m + cetane rating >45 (recommendation: >50)
Diesel fuels in very low temperatures
At ambient temperatures below freezing (0 C), the flow properties of warm temperature Diesel fuel can become
insufficient due to paraffin excretion. The same applies to cold temperature Diesel fuels in temperatures below.
-15 C.
In order to prevent operating problems in even lower temperatures, Diesel fuel with an additive is sometimes
available, for use in temperatures to -20 C.
In order to prevent operating problems in even lower temperatures, mix Diesel fuel with normal gasoline or
petroleum. Addition of normal gasoline is a makeshift measure and may not exceed 30% per volume. Do not
use Super gasoline for mixing.
Mixing fuel can diminish engine performance, for that reason, keep the added fuel as low as possible,
depending on the ambient temperatures.
For safety reasons, mix fuel only in the fuel tank. When refueling, add the lighter additive before the Diesel fuel.
Then let the engine run for a short time until the mixture has been distributed throughout the fuel system.
Diesel fuels - Mixing ratio ( Vol.-%)
Ambient Winter Diesel fuel Winter Diesel fuel
Summer Diesel fuel
temperature to -15C to -20C
C % Fuel % Additive % Fuel % Additive % Fuel % Additive
0 to -10 70 30 100 -- 100 --
-10 to -15 50 50* 100 -- 100 --
-15 to -20 -- -- 70 30 100 --
-20 to -25 -- -- 50 50* 70 30
* = If an addition of more than 50% is required, use only petroleum (no regular gasoline). The Diesel fuel part
may never be more than 50% .
Additives to Diesel fuel (flow improvers)

Commercially available flow improvers can also improve Diesel fuel properties in cold temperatures. Always
read and observe the manufacturers user guidelines and quantities.
1.3. Coolant
Coolants, containing unsuitable anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids or wrong mixed coolants could damage the
engine or its parts, caused by cavitation or corrosion. Additionally heat isolating deposits could be created on
heat transferring parts, which overheat and lead to the damage of the engine.
For a long term, fault free operation, the coolant must be filled year round with a mixture of at least 50%
anticorrosion/antifreeze fluid. This concentration protects the system to approx. -37C / -34F.
Antifreeze protection chart
Protection to
Percentage of antifreeze (%)
Note: Do not use more than 60% anti-corrosion / antifreeze fluids, a higher percentage would actually
reduce the cooling and antifreeze protection and causes gel formation in the coolant fluid. Danger of
engine damage!
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille 01.3.01.02
Coolant filters are used on some engine series, which filter the coolant in the auxiliary flow and in addition, a
chemical additive in the filter (DCA 4) reinforces the protection against cavitation, corrosion, scale deposits and
foam formation. The DCA4 concentration must be between 0.3 and 0.8 units per liter of coolant. See the
following chapter Coolant with DCA4. This results in a mixing ration of approx. 48.5 % water, 48.5 % anti
corrosion /antifreeze fluid and 3 % DCA4.
Check the mixing ratio regularly during maintenance work. See instructions in section 3.4.
If coolant must be replaced, make sure that the given mixing ratios are retained. Do not fall below this ratios nor
exceed it.
Due to the natural aging process of the coolant, it must be replaced at least once every 2 years. Use only
suitable coolant, free of contaminants. Clean contaminated cooling systems. Note the following regulations.
To replace or add coolant in larger quantities, mix the given parts outside the cooling circuit in a suitable, clean
container first.
Fresh water guidelines:

To mix coolant fluid, use clean, clear water, which is not too hard. Often, but not always, regular tap water may
be used.
Seawater, brine, brackish water, or industrial waste water is not suitable.
Approved fresh water quality (as of 2001) for use with anti corrosion / antifreeze fluid -
- without DCA4 - with DCA4
Sum of alkaline earths (water hardness): : 0,6 to 3,6 mmol/l 0,6 to 2,7 mmol/l
(3 to 20d) (3 to 15d)
Ph - value at 20 C : 6,5 to 8,5 6,5 to 8,0
Chloride / ion content : max. 80 mg/l max. 80 mg/l
Sulfate / ion content : max. 100 mg/l max. 80 mg/l
Presently approved anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids (as of December 2003):

Brand name Manufacturer
Agip Antifreeze Plus Agip Petroli S.p.A, Rom / Italien
Agip Langzeit-Frostschutz Autol-Werke GmbH., Wrzburg / BRD
Antigel DB 486 Sotragal SA, St. Priest / Frankreich
Aral Khler-Frostschutz A Aral AG, Bochum / BRD
AVIA Frostschutz APN (G48-00) Deutsche AVIA-Minerall GmbH, Mnchen / BRD
BP Antifrost X 2270 A Deutsche BP AG, Hamburg / BRD

BP Napgel C 2270/1 BP Chemicals Ltd., London / England
Caltex Engine Coolant DB Caltex (UK) ltd., London / England

Caltex Extended Life Coolant Caltex
Castrol Anti-Freeze O Deutsche Castrol Vertriebs-GmbH, Hamburg /BRD
Century F.L. Antifreeze Century Oils, Hanley, Stoke-on-Trent / England
Chevron DEX-COOL Extended Life Anti-Freeze/Coolant Chevron Texaco
Deutz Khlschutzmittel 0101 1490 DEUTZ Service International GmbH, Kln / BRD
Esso Khlerfrostschutz Esso AG, Hamburg / BRD
Fricofin Fuchs Mineraloelwerke GmbH, Mannheim / BRD

Frostschutz Motorex (G48-00) Bucher+Cie, Langenthal / Schweiz
Frostschutz 500 Mobil Oil AG, Hamburg / BRD
Glacelf Auto Supra Total

Glycoshell AF 405 Shell
Glycoshell N Shell
Glysantin (G 48-00) BASF AG, Ludwigshafen / BRD
Havoline XLC ARTECO

Havoline DEX-COOL Extended Life Anti-Freece/Coolant Chevron Texaco
Igol Antigel Type DB Igol France, Paris / Frankreich
Labo FP 100 Labo Industrie, Nanterre / Frankreich
Motul Anti-freeze Motul SA, Aubervilliers Cedex / Frankreich
OMV-Khlerfrostschutzmittel OMV AG, Schwechat / sterreich

Organifreeze Total
OZO Frostschutz S Total Deutschland GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD
Total Antigel S-MB 486 Total Deutschland GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD

Total Frostfrei Total Deutschland GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD
Veedol Antifreeze O Deutsche Veedol GmbH, Hamburg / BRD
Wintershall Khlerschutz Wintershall Minerall GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD
Presently approved anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids / 50:50 Premix (as of December 2003):
(50 % water : 50 % corrosion/antifreeze fluids)

Liebherr Anti-Freeze APN mix Id.Nr. 8611 045 - 20 l bundle LIEBHERR
Caltex Extended Life Coolant Pre-Mixed 50/50 (ready-to-use-version) Caltex
Chevron DEX-COOL Extended Life Prediluted 50/50 Antifreeze coolant Chevron Texaco
Havoline XLC, 50/50 ARTECO
Havoline DEX-COOL Extended Prediluted 50/50 Antifreece coolant Chevron Texaco
Organicool 50/50 Total
Presently approved anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids with DCA4 - ready to use (as of December 2003):
Liebherr Anti-Freeze "pret a l'emploi" Id.Nr. 10 005 347 - 20 l bundle LIEBHERR
The given anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids are approved for all Liebherr Diesel engines (with and without coolant
filter / DCA4).
1.3.1 Coolant with DCA4 (DCA = Diesel Coolant Additive)

The additive DCA4 is "used up" during use. The DCA4 concentration in the filter compensates for this loss
accordingly, if there is no loss of coolant and the correct filter is used at the given change interval.
The DCA4 concentration must be between 0.3 and 0.8 units per liter of coolant. To check, refer to the
"Maintenance and inspection guidelines", section 3.4.
For change intervals for filter and coolant, see Maintenance and inspection schedule , section 3.2.
If the cooling system is filled initially or refilled after repairs, then DCA 4 in liquid form must be added to the
50% anticorrosion / antifreeze and 50% water mixture. The mixture should be mixed outside the cooling
system. Note the safety guidelines issued by the additive manufacturer.
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille 01.3.01.03
This results in a coolant mixture ration of approx. 48.5 % water, 48.5 % anticorrosion / antifreeze fluid and 3%
DCA4.
In addition, use a new coolant filter, according to the filling quantity. The correct Id. No. of the filter can be
found in the Parts Manual or the Operation and Maintenance manual of the machine.
Overview chart DCA4 and filter requirements (as of 2001)
Coolant system contents Required quantity of liquid DCA 4 DCA 4 - water filter
Liter Container approx.0.5 liter appr. liter Id. No.
24-39 3 oder 1,5 7367 045
40-59 4 oder 2,0 7381 493
60-79 5 oder 2,5 7367 052
80-115 8 oder 4 7367 052
Container liquid DCA4 at approx. 0.5 l -Id. No. 7363 898
Liebherr coolant (ready to use, 20 liter, above mixing ratio) - Id. No. 10 005 347
1.3.2 Coolant - special filling - with anti corrosion fluids, without antifreeze fluids
In exceptional cases and if ambient temperatures are constantly above the freezing point, for example in
tropical regional, where no anticorrosion / antifreeze fluids is proofed available, fresh water and water-soluble
anticorrosion fluids (Inhibitors) may be used as coolant.
Do not use coolant refiners (anticorrosion oils) with emulsifying capacity. If necessary, flush the cooling system
before refilling.
The fresh water quality must meet use with DCA4 - see chart Approved fresh water quality.
The coolant must be changed once a year.
Use of DCA4
To provide sufficient protection against corrosion, approximately twice the amount of DCA4 must be used as
compared to the above mixing ration, when using anticorrosion / antifreeze fluids and DCA4 - see above
"overview chart and filter requirements".
The DCA4 concentration must be between 0.6 and 1.06 units. It must be checked during maintenance work or
when the coolant filter is changed, and corrected, as necessary.
This results in a mixing ratio of
max. 94 % fresh water and
min. 6 % DCA4 additive
Use of products from Caltex / Chevron Texaco / Havoline / Total

To provide sufficient protection against corrosion with these products, a mixture of 92,5 vol.% coolant and 7,5
vol.% anti corrosion fluid must be kept.
The mixture ratio must be checked during maintenance work and corrected, as necessary. The concentration
of the anti corrosion fluid must not fall below 5 vol.% nor exceed 10 vol.%.
Presently approved anti corrosion fluids (as of December 2003):

DCA4 Diesel Coolant Additives Fleetguard
Caltex CL Corrosion Inhibitor Concentrate Caltex
Chevron Texaco Heavy Duty Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite Free Chevron Texaco
Havoline Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor (XLI) ARTECO
Total WT Supra Total
2. Oil for hydraulic system
In the hydraulic system, use only Diesel engine lube oils or special approved oils.
2.1. Oil quality
2.1.1 Approved engine oil classifications

API - classification : CF-4, CG-4, CH-4, CI-4,
(American Petroleum Institute)
ACEA (CCMC) - classification : E2 (D4), E3 (D5), E4, E5,
(Association des Constructeurs Europens de lAutomobile)
Note: The API classifications CC, CD, CE and CF are now obsolete, however, in quality, they had been
approved for use in the hydraulic system.
2.1.2 Special oils

Approval is given for each machine type separately. Special guidelines are issued with the release.
The following product presently considered to be an environmentally friendly hydraulic fluid:
Panolin - HLP Synth - VG 46
2.2. Oil viscosity

In addition to the quality, the oil must also provide a certain viscosity, the selection is made according to the
SAE classification (Society of Automotive Engineers).
The determining factor for the correct selection of SAE classification is the ambient temperature, single grade
oils are preferred.
If the viscosity is too high, it can cause cavitations, if it is too low, the lubrication efficiency may be endangered.
Both can cause failure of hydraulic components.
The temperature ranges shown in the following chart are guidelines. When operating the machine within the
black temperature range, the following warm up procedure should be carried out.
Single grade oils
Multi grade oils
Viscosity for environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids according to ISO: VG 46

(covers SAE 10W and SAE 20W-20 or SAE 10W-30)
For operation in extreme climate zones, such as arctic regions, special guidelines are available from the
manufacturer.
Warm up procedure:
a) In temperatures up to 10 C below the given limit (black range)
After starting, run the Diesel engine at medium speed. Warm up the hydraulic system by carefully actuating
the hydraulic cylinders. Extend and retract the hydraulic cylinders fully for short periods. After 5 minutes,
carefully engage the travel hydraulic as well. Total warm up period is approximately 10 minutes.
b) At even lower temperatures:
Before starting the Diesel engine, preheat the oil in the hydraulic tank, then proceed as described in paragraph
a).
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille 01.3.01.04
3. Gear oil
The lube oil specification for gears is based on API and SAE classification. The oil chamber in travel gears for
double lifetime seal is filled with oil from the hydraulic system - see section 2.
3.1. Oil quality
As a general rule, only oils meeting API - classification GL-5 may be used.
3.2. Oil viscosity
The following oils must be used in travel gears, and are highly recommended for use in splitter boxes:
Viscosity classification SAE 85 W - 140 EP
For splitter boxes, oils of Viscosity classification SAE 90 EP or SAE 80 W - 90 EP may also be used.
For the operation in extreme climatic conditions, such as in arctic regions or in extreme temperatures ranges, such
as in slag applications, special oils may be approved if the prevailing ambient temperatures are known operations.
3.3. Lube oil for final drive - sealing chamber

For oil quality and viscosity see section 2, Oil for hydraulic system, but do not use special oils.
4. Lube oil for support shaft bearing

For oil quality and viscosity see section 2, Oil for hydraulic system, but do not use special oils.
5. Hoist gear oil - pipe layers

As a general rule, the guidelines noted in the Operation and Maintenance manual and the winch manufacturer
should be observed.
For lubrication technical reasons, we recommend the use of Diesel lube oil, which meets at least one of the
following quality and viscosity classifications.
5.1. Oil quality
according to API - classification : CF, CF-4, CG-4, CH-4, CI-4,
ACEA (CCMC) - classification : E2 (D4), E3 (D5), E4, E5,
5.2. Oil viscosity
according to SAE - classification : 10W
ISO - classification : VG 32
6. Grease
6.1. General lubrication points and track tensioner

The grease must meet specification KP 2 k - consistency 2 according to NL GI - class and DIN 51818 and DIN
51825 or EP 2 according to NF-T-60 132 .
The grease must also be lithium based, with a VKA value of at least 2300 N according to DIN 51350 or ASTM D
2596.
6.2. Long term grease / grease to protect against corrosion
For the lifetime lubrication of bearing points of lift cylinder suspensions and to protect against corrosion at the
initial installation of dry bearing points, to protect exposed piston rods, to prevent rust formation, etc., a special
calcic, acid free grease should be used.
We recommend LIEBHERR's special paste CTK - Id. No. 8613 313 01
For general conservation - see section 19, Conservation guidelines - other acid free anticorrosion grease may
be used.
7. Miscellaneous
Always observe all guidelines issued in the Operation and Maintenance manuals, repair manuals and on
drawings.
7.1. Rubber seals on doors and covers

Use silicon spray or Talcum powder.
7.2. Hydraulic cylinder installation

Lubricant for threads of pistons, piston nuts and piston rod bearings -
Liebherr High performance lubricant Id. No. 8300 004
Special protection against corrosion for installation of sealing elements -
Liebherr Special anticorrosion grease Id. No. 8300 005
To obtain To
Unit of Measure Multiply by by
Multiply obtain
Length mm 0,039 inch 25,4 mm
m 3,281 feet 0,305 m
m 1,093 yard 0,914 m
km 0,621 mile 1,609 km
Area cm 0,155 sq. inch 6,452 cm

m 10,764 sq. feet 0,093 m
m 1,196 sq. yard 0,0863 m
km 0,386 sq. mile 2,59 km
Volume cm 0,061 cu. inch 16,387 cm

m 35,314 cu. feet 0,028 m
m 1,308 cu. yard 0,764 m
l 61,025 cu. inch 0,016 l
l 0,035 cu. feet 28,316 l
l 0,264 gallon 3,785 l
l 1,057 quart 0,946 l
Weight g 0,035 oz. 28,349 g

kg 2,204 lbs. 0,453 kg
t 1,102 short t 0,907 t
Force N 0,225 lbs. 4,449 N

kN 224,732 lbs. 0,0044 kN
Torque Nm 0,737 ft. lbs. 1,356 Nm

Power kW 1,342 HP 0,745 kW
PS 0,736 kW 1,358 PS
PS 0,986 HP 1,014 PS
Pressure bar 14,5 PSI 0,069 bar

(hydraulic) kpa 0,145 PSI 6,896 kpa
Ground pressure kg/cm 14,223 lbs. sq. inch 0,0703 kg/cm

kg/m 0,205 lbs. sq. ft. 4,878 kg/m
Compression g/cm 0,036 lbs. cu. inch 27,78 g/cm

kg/m 0,062 lbs. cu. ft. 16,13 kg/m
Speed km/h 0,621 mph 1,609 km/h

m/min 3,281 ft. / min 0,305 m/min
Temperature C (Cx1,8) + 32 F (F-32)/1,8 C

C C+273 K K-273 C
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 01 Conversion table Blatt

Page 1.4.01.01
Feuille
The preload and tightening torques listed in the chart are from VDI guidelines 2230 of July 1986.
Installation preload FM and tightening torques MA for shaft screws with metric standard or fine thread per DIN ISO
262 and DIN ISO 965 T2 (replacement for DIN 13 part 13) and screw head dimension of hex head screws with shaft
DIN EN 24014 (replacement for DIN 931 part 1) or socket head screws DIN EN ISO 4762 (replacement for DIN
912).
The chart values are valid for lubricated screws, surface black treated, phosphated or galvanic zinc plated and for
dry screws, surface according to flZn - LH-Norm 10021432 (replaces DACROMET 500)
Medium friction G = 0,12.

Always observe the tightening torques and/ or procedures listed in drawings / parts lists, instructions of
component descriptions, if noted, they override the factory standards listed in the torque charts.
Never use a standard lock washer with 10.9 or 12.9 screws. If a washer is necessary, use only "heavy duty"
washers, made from hardened material.
Always use torque wrenches with the correct range - the upper third of the range should include the listed torque
value according to the chart.
When using impact screws, make sure that the given tightening torque is observed - should be checked before and
during the tightening procedure with torque wrench (Nm x 0,7375 = ft.lbs.)!
Preload forces and tightening torques for screws with standard metric thread according
to factory standard WN 4037 I
Wrench size
Preload values FM based on Tightening torques MA are (x) = per DIN931, for
screw grades and are given based on screw grades and
Standard Hex head
in N are given in Nm Socket head
metric thread
screws screws
8.8 10.9 12.9 8.8 10.9 12.9 mm Inch mm Inch

M 4 x 0,7 4 050 6 000 7 000 2,8 4,1 4,8 7 9/32 3 --
M 5 x 0,8 6 600 9 700 11 400 5,5 8,1 9,5 8 5/16 4 5/32
M 6 x1 9 400 13 700 16 100 9,5 14,0 16,5 10 -- 5 --
M 7 x1 13 700 20 100 23 500 15,5 23,0 27,0 11 -- -- --
M 8 x 1,25 17 200 25 000 29 500 23 34 40 13 1/2 6 --
M 10 x 1,5 27 500 40 000 47 000 46 68 79 (17) 16 (11/16) -- 8 5/16
M 12 x 1,75 40 000 59 000 69 000 79 117 135 (19) 18 (3/4) -- 10 --
M 14 x 2 55 000 80 000 94 000 125 185 215 (22) 21 (7/8) -- 12 --
M 16 x 2 75 000 111 000 130 000 195 280 330 24 -- 14 9/16
M 18 x 2,5 94 000 135 000 157 000 280 390 460 27 1-1/16 14 9/16
M 20 x 2,5 121 000 173 000 202 000 390 560 650 30 1-3/16 17 --
M 22 x 2,5 152 000 216 000 250 000 530 750 880 (32) 34 -- 17 --
M 24 x 3 175 000 249 000 290 000 670 960 1120 36 1-7/16 19 3/4
M 27 x 3 230 000 330 000 385 000 1000 1400 1650 41 1-5/8 19 3/4
M 30 x 3,5 280 000 400 000 465 000 1350 1900 2250 46 1-13/16 22 7/8
M 33 x 3,5 350 000 495 000 580 000 1850 2600 3000 50 2 24 --
M 36 x 4 410 000 580 000 680 000 2350 3300 3900 55 2-3/16 27 1-1/16
M 39 x 4 490 000 700 000 820 000 3000 4300 5100 60 2-3/8 27 1-1/16
Standard screws LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Tightening Torques Blatt
01 04 Factory standard WN 4037 I Page
Feuille
1.4.02.01
Preload forces and tightening torques for screws with fine metric thread according to
factory standard WN 4037 I
Wrench size
Preload values FM based on Tightening torques MA are (x) = per DIN931, for
screw grades and are given based on screw grades and
Fine metric
in N are given in Nm Socket head
thread
Hex head screws screws
8.8 10.9 12.9 8.8 10.9 12.9 mm Inch mm Inch

M 8 x1 18 800 27 500 32 500 24,5 36 43 13 1/2 6 --
M 9 x1 24 800 36 500 42 500 36 53 62 -- -- -- --
M 10 x 1 31 500 46 500 54 000 52 76 89 17 11/16 8 5/16
M 10 x 1,25 29 500 43 000 51 000 49 72 84 17 11/16 8 5/16
M 12 x 1,25 45 000 66 000 77 000 87 125 150 19 3/4 10 --
M 12 x 1,5 42 500 62 000 73 000 83 122 145 19 3/4 10 --
M 14 x 1,5 61 000 89 000 104 000 135 200 235 22 7/8 12 --
M 16 x 1,5 82 000 121 000 141 000 205 300 360 24 -- 14 9/16
M 18 x 1,5 110 000 157 000 184 000 310 440 520 27 1-1/16 14 9/16
M 18 x 2 102 000 146 000 170 000 290 420 490 27 1-1/16 14 9/16
M 20 x 1,5 139 000 199 000 232 000 430 620 720 30 1-3/16 17 --
M 22 x 1,5 171 000 245 000 285 000 580 820 960 32 -- 17 --
M 24 x 1,5 207 000 295 000 346 000 760 1090 1270 36 1-7/16 19 3/4
M 24 x 2 196 000 280 000 325 000 730 1040 1220 36 1-7/16 19 3/4
M 27 x 1,5 267 000 381 000 445 000 1110 1580 1850 41 1-5/8 19 3/4
M 27 x 2 255 000 365 000 425 000 1070 1500 1800 41 1-5/8 19 3/4
M 30 x 1,5 335 000 477 000 558 000 1540 2190 2560 46 1-13/16 22 7/8
M 30 x 2 321 000 457 000 534 000 1490 2120 2480 46 1-13/16 22 7/8
M 33 x 1,5 410 000 584 000 683 000 2050 2920 3420 50 2 24 --
M 33 x 2 395 000 560 000 660 000 2000 2800 3300 50 2 24 --
M 36 x 1,5 492 000 701 000 820 000 2680 3820 4470 55 2-3/16 27 1-1/16
M 36 x 3 440 000 630 000 740 000 2500 3500 4100 55 2-3/16 27 1-1/16
M 39 x 1,5 582 000 830 000 971 000 3430 4890 5720 60 2-3/8 27 1-1/16
M 39 x 3 530 000 750 000 880 000 3200 4600 5300 60 2-3/8 27 1-1/16
Note: Observe notes on front page!

Tightening torques for screws for SAE split flange installation
Not part of factory standard WN 4037 I

Listing per LFR - Quality service 2QA 6 051 00 as of Oct. 2001
1. Flange and half flange for high pressure (Norm 62)
Tightening torques in Nm for screw grade 10.9

Flange nominal size Screw size flat flange without Flange with
Half flange
reinforcement reinforcement
" M8 31 -- --
" M 10 62 45 65
1" M 12 108 70 110
1 " M 14 172 120 180
1 " M 16 264 170 250
2" M 20 350 250 450
2. Half flange for low pressure (Norm 61)
Tightening torques in Nm for

Flange nominal size Screw size
Screw grade 8.8 Screw grade 10.9
" M8 22 31
" M 10 44 62
1" M 10 44 62
1 " M 10 44 62
1 " M 12 76 108
2" M 12 76 108
2 " M 12 76 108
3" M 14 122 172
3 " M 16 187 264
4" M 16 187 264
5" M 16 187 264
Tightening torques for oil drain plugs at travel gears
Not part of factory standard WN 4037 I

Listing per LBC - Quality service as of Oct. 2003
Oil drain plug Tightening torque

thread size in Nm
M 14x1,5 40
M 16x1,5 40
M 18x1,5 40
M 22x1,5 80
M 33x1,5 160
Standard screws LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Tightening Torques Blatt
01 04 Factory standard WN 4037 I Page
Feuille
1.4.02.02
1. Hole diameter for tapping ISO standard Metric (internal) thread
Hole diameter
Thread
limits Drill bit
size
max. min.
M1 0,785 0,729 0,75
M 1,1 0,885 0,829 0,85
M 1,2 0,985 0,929 0,95
M 1,4 1,160 1,075 1,1
M 1,6 1,321 1,221 1,25
M 1,7 1,346 1,258 1,30
M 1,8 1,521 1,421 1,45
M2 1,679 1,567 1,6
M 2,2 1,838 1,713 1,75
M 2,3 1,920 1,795 1,9
M 2,5 2,138 2,013 2,05
M 2,6 2,176 2,036 2,10
M3 2,599 2,459 2,5
M 3,5 3,010 2,850 2,9
M4 3,422 3,242 3,3
M 4,5 3,878 3,688 3,7
M5 4,334 4,134 4,2
M6 5,153 4,917 5
M7 6,153 5,917 6
M8 6,912 6,647 6,8
M9 7,912 7,647 7,8
M 10 8,676 8,376 8,5
M 11 9,676 9,376 9,6
M 12 10,441 10,106 10,2
M 14 12,210 11,835 12
M 16 14,210 13,835 14
M 18 15,744 15,294 15,5
M 20 17,744 17,294 17,5
M 22 19,744 19,294 19,5
M 24 21,252 20,752 21
M 27 24,252 23,752 24
M 30 26,771 26,211 26,5
M 33 29,771 29,211 29,5
M 36 32,270 31,650 32
M 39 35,270 34,670 35
M 42 37,799 39,129 37,5
M 45 40,799 40,129 40,5
M 48 43,297 42,587 43,0
M 52 47,297 46,587 47,0
M 56 50,796 50,046 50,5
M 60 54,796 54,046 54,1
M 64 58,305 57,505 57,6
M 68 62,305 61,505 61,6
Dimensions are in mm
mm x 0,03937 = inches
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 04 Hole diameter before tapping Blatt

Page
Feuille 01.4.04.01
2. Hole diameter for tapping ISO fine Metric (internal) thread
Hole diameter Hole diameter

Thread size limits Drill bit Thread size limits Drill bit
max. min. max. min.
M 1 x 0,2 0,821 0,783 0,8 M 25 x 1 24,153 23,917 24
M 1,1 x 0,2 0,921 0,833 0,9 M 25 x 1,5 23,676 23,376 23,5
M 1,2 x 0,2 1,021 0,983 1 M 25 x 2 23,210 22,835 23
M 1,4 x 0,2 1,221 1,183 1,2 M 26 x 1,5 24,676 24,376 24,5
M 1,4 x 0,25 1,185 1,129 1,15 M 27 x 1 26,153 25,917 26
M 1,6 x 0,2 1,421 1,383 1,4 M 27 x 1,5 25,676 25,376 25,5
M 1,8 x 0,2 1,621 1,583 1,6 M 27 x 2 25,210 24,835 25
M 2 x 0,25 1,785 1,729 1,75 M 28 x 1 27,153 26,917 27
M 2,2 x 0,25 1,985 1,929 1,95 M 28 x 1,5 26,676 26,376 26,5
M 2,5 x 0,35 2,201 1,121 2,15 M 28 x 2 26,210 25,835 26
M 3 x 0,35 2,721 2,621 2,65 M 30 x 1 29,153 28,917 29
M 3,5 x 0,35 3,221 3,121 3,15 M 30 x 1,5 28,676 28,376 28,5
M 4 x 0,5 3,599 3,459 3,5 M 30 x 2 28,210 27,835 28
M 4,5 x 0,5 4,099 3,959 4 M 30 x 3 27,252 26,752 27
M 5 x 0,5 4,599 4,459 4,5 M 32 x 1,5 30,676 30,376 30,5
M 5,5 x 0,5 5,099 4,959 5 M 32 x 2 30,210 29,835 30
M 6 x 0,75 5,378 5,188 5,2 M 33 x 1,5 31,676 31,376 31,5
M 7 x 0,75 6,378 6,188 6,2 M 33 x 2 31,210 30,835 31
M 8 x 0,75 7,378 7,188 7,2 M 33 x 3 30,252 29,752 30
M8x1 7,153 6,917 7 M 35 x 1,5 33,676 33,376 33,5
M 9 x 0,75 8,378 8,188 8,2 M 36 x 1,5 34,676 34,376 34,5
M9x1 8,153 7,917 8 M 36 x 2 34,210 33,835 34
M 10 x 0,75 9,378 9,188 9,2 M 36 x 3 33,252 32,752 33
M 10 x 1 9,153 8,917 9 M 38 x 1,5 36,676 36,376 36,5
M 10 x 1,25 8,912 8,647 8,8 M 39 x 1,5 37,676 37,376 37,5
M 11 x 0,75 10,378 10,188 10,2 M 39 x 2 37,210 36,835 37
M 11 x 1 10,153 9,917 10 M 39 x 3 36,252 35,752 36
M 12 x 1 11,153 10,917 11,1 M 40 x 1,5 38,676 38,376 38,5
M 12 x 1,25 10,912 10,647 10,8 M 40 x 2 38,210 37,835 38
M 12 x 1,5 10,676 10,376 10,5 M 40 x 3 37,252 36,752 37
M 14 x 1 13,153 12,917 13 M 42 x 1,5 40,676 40,376 40,5
M 14 x 1,25 12,912 112,647 12,8 M 42 x 2 40,210 39,835 40
M 14 x 1,5 12,676 12,376 12,5 M 42 x 3 39,252 38,752 39
M 15 x 1 14,153 13,917 14 M 42 x 4 38,270 37,670 38
M 15 x 1,5 13,676 13,376 13,5 M 45 x 1,5 43,676 43,376 43,5
M 16 x 1 15,153 14,917 15 M 43 x 2 43,210 42,835 43
M 16 x 1,5 14,676 14,376 14,5 M 45 x 3 42,252 41,752 42
M 17 x 1 16,153 15,917 16 M 45 x 4 41,270 40,670 41
M 17 x 1,5 15,676 15,376 15,5 M 48 x 1,5 46,676 46,376 46,5
M 18 x 1 17,153 16,917 17 M 48 x 2 46,210 45,835 46
M 18 x 1,5 16,676 16,376 16,5 M 48 x 3 45,252 44,752 45
M 18 x 2 16,210 15,835 16 M 48 x 4 44,270 43,670 44
M 20 x 1 19,153 18,917 19 M 50 x 1,5 48,676 48,376 48,5
M 20 x 1,5 18,676 18,376 18,5 M 50 x 2 48,210 47,835 48
M 20 x 2 18,210 17,835 18 M 50 x 3 47,252 46,752 47
M 22 x 1 21,153 20,917 21 M 52 x 1,5 50,676 50,376 50,5
M 22 x 1,5 20,676 20,376 20,5 M 52 x 2 50,210 49,835 50
M 22 x 2 20,210 19,835 20 M 52 x 3 49,252 48,752 49
M 24 x 1 23,153 22,917 23 M 52 x 4 48,270 47,670 48
M 24 x 1,5 22,676 22,376 22,5
M 24 x 2 22,210 21,835 22
Sub Group Index
Special tools 2.1
Special tools Liebherr Diesel engine 2.1.10
Special tools general hydraulic repair 2.1.20
Special tools hydraulic pressure testing 2.1.21
Special tools hydraulic cylinder 2.1.22
Special tools general - electric repair 2.1.30
Special tools wiring harness 2.1.31
Special tools mech. components 2.1.40
Repair welding 2.2.00
Installation guidelines 2.3.01

Installation guidelines Duo-Cone-Seals 2.3.01
Wiring installation guidelines ITT-Cannon plug 2.3.02
Wiring installation guidelines Harting plug 2.3.03
Wiring installation guidelines AMP plug 2.3.04
Special tools LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 01 Application guidelines Blatt

Page 2.0.00.01
Feuille
Description Id.No. Remarks Illustration
Digital Electronic Impulse 7009 538 test range:

Tachometer 400-6000 RPM
accuracy
all engines 1 RPM
Tachometer - mechanical 5003 069 test range:

100-3000 RPM
accuracy:
1 RPM
Tachometer cable 5003 070 to be used with

Id.No. 5003 069
D904 TB / 904 T
Tachometer cable extension 8122 902 to be used with

Id.No. 5003 070
D904 TB / 904 T
Battery charge / coolant 7408 922 to test the condition of

condition tester the battery charge and
the percentage of
antifreeze in the engine
coolant.
Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de
Diesel engine LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 04 Special tools Blatt

Page
Feuille
2.1.10.01
Illustration Description Id.No. Remarks
DCA4 Test kit 5608 459 to test the DCA4

CC2602M concentration in
coolant.
includes:
test strip container all engines
50 test strips
plastic container
eye dropper
Compression tester 8008 782 to check the engines

compression pressure.
all engines
Test adapter for 0524 044 to be used in place of

compression tester injector when checking
compression
all engines
Injector tester 7361 236 to check injector

opening pressure
all engines
High pressure hand pump 7009 318 to check the injection

with accessories, complete pump timing.
all engines
Slide hammer 0524 072 to remove injectors
all engines
Adapter 0524 029 to be used with

Id.No. 0524 072
all engines
Angle method torque fixture 0524 062 to torque screws

- cylinder head
- main bearings
- rod bearings
all engines
Engine turning fixture 0524 045 mounted on the flywheel

housing
all engines
(not useable at
D 9406 TI - PR 752,
RL 52, use
Id.No. 9183 785)
Dial gauge to control the delivery

Pos.1 7022 418 begin
from the distribution
Dial fixture Pos.2 7022 420 injection pump
all engines with

distribution injection
pump
Diesel engine LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.1.10.02
V - Belt Measuring Tool 8042 829 to measure V - Belt

Krikit2 tension
All engines
Holding fixture 0527 462 to eliminate starting fuel

quantity when adjusting
the delivery begin
motors with MW
injection pumps
D914/916
D924/926
D9306/9308
D9406/9408
Sampling pump pos. 1 8145 666 used for taking oil

samples for the oil
1 Sampling valve for oil analysis.
samples pos. 2 7019 068
Oil analysis set German analysis at WEAR

6 samples 7018 368 CHECK Germany,
12 samples 7018 369 analysis report in
German language.
Oil analysis set French Analysis at WEAR

6 samples 8503 561 CHECK Belgium,
analysis report in
French language
Engine turning fixture 9183 785 to turn the Diesel engine

with " square head drive D 9406 TI - PR 752,
RL 52, for adjustments
fits on the fan side end

of crankshaft
Description Id. No. Remarks Illustration
Vacuum pump, complete 7408 148 for faster bleeding of

with the following accessories: the hydraulic system
the vacuum pump can
Vacuum pump with electr. produce low pressure
cord 7407 987 (appr. 0.4 bar) by
Hose assembly 7407 985 reversing the PVC
Hose assembly 7407 986 hose. The connecting
Fitting S8M 7404 619 point for the machine is
Fitting L6R 4901 110 the bleeder screw on
PVC hose 7360 127 the hydraulic tank.
Terminal clamp - pos. 7408 149
Terminal clamp - neg. 7408 150
Plug - 2 connectors 7408 151
Temperature gauge 7020372 accuracy:
2%/2
test range:
-18C - +260C
Adjustment tool commercially to adjust pump end

for BPV 50, 70, 100 available position via eccentric
screw
Tool to loosen / counter
Note: The 12 point
Item.1 socket stub should
12 point socket SW 13 x 85 have an outer diameter
of 18 mm over a length
Adjustment tool of approx. 35 mm
Item.2
Hex head screw handle SW 4 x 200
Item.3 socket wrench SW13 x 120

Hook wrench 7900 282 to loosen / tighten when
58 - 62 mm adjusting the regulating
range of BPV pumps
Adjustment tool for slotted 9792 711 to loosen / tighten lock

nut at HPV 130 nut when adjusting
pump end stop - Qmax
(also usable when
adjusting regulating
range at BPV)
use together with hook
wrench
Id. No. 7900 282
General hydraulic repair LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page 2.1.20.01
Feuille
Illustration Description Id. No. Remarks
Adjustment tool for 9749 025 to loosen / tighten lock

mechanical neutral position nut when adjusting
slotted nut mechanical neutral
HPV 135-02 position.
Clamping tool for clamping 6427 521 to tighten the spring and
spring at BPV remove ball socket
BPV 35 - 200 trumpet tube when
changing swash plate
bearing
Pin puller 6427 516 used to remove the pin

for pump BPV 35 - 100 for the swash plate
bearing cage retainer
clip
Punch to punch the studs -

for stud BPV 70 - 100 change of needle
bearing segment
Swash plate 7413 894
Housing 4713 895
Installation sleeve for radial for correct mounting the

shaft seal radial shaft seal on the
pump drive shaft
BPV 35 70 7404 289
Note:
BPV 100 install seal rings with
HPV 135-02 7404 298 Loctite 270
BPV 200 7404 567

Description Id. No. Remarks Illustration
Measuring device for to measure pressure,

differential pressure 7025 376 differential pressure
contents - 230V and used for Data
230V transfers to the PC
contents of:
measuring device M - H 2045
2 pressure sensors 0-600 bar
2 test fittings
2 test hoses MK 12m
Measuring device for 7025 755 connecting wire - board circuit
differential pressure adapter wire - data transfer
power supply unit
contents 120V
Pressure gauge accuracy:

0-10 5002 865 1% of end value
0-25 7361 289
0-40 7361 288 all pressure gauges are
0-60 5002 867 glycerin filled
0-100 5602 903
0-160 7361 286
0-250 7361 285
0-400 7500 002
0-600 7361 294
0-1000 4601 115
Digital pressure gauge resolution
0,1% of end value
0 - 100 7412 643
accuracy:
0 - 500 7412 644 0,2% of end value
Lithium battery for digital 6002 780 gauge range - static:

pressure gauge up to max. 50 % above
the listed end value
Gauge - coupling to seal the coupling

during pressure tests, a
R 7002 436 seal ring,
Id. No. 7409 794, must
be installed.
Test hose NW 2 to avoid loss of

pressure during tests,
1000 mm 7002 437 use the shortest
1500 mm 7002 475 possible test hose
4000 mm 7009 134
5000 mm 7363 732
Test fitting , complete union nut and ferrule

mounted on test fitting.
R6L 7409 916
R 10 L 7406 864
R 12 L 7409 918
Hydraulic pressure testing LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.1.21.01
Illustration Description Id. No. Remarks
Screw coupling to connect to additional

machine measuring
M 8x1 7615 321 points
M 10x1 5608 462
M 12x1,5 7409 783
M 14x1,5 7406 865
R 7409 720
Schott screw coupling to connect shorter test
lines or connection
M 16x2 7407 070 between test connection
and pressure sensor
Test plate A to close high pressure

for SAE-flange 7370 092 ports when checking
Size (in mm) system pressures
A 90
B 40
C,r 5 material:
Test plate B ground resilient steel
for SAE - flange 1 7370 093
Size (in mm)
A 90 taper rounded plate
B 44 ends, round off edges
C,r 5
(simplifies installation,
Test plate C
7370 094 prevents damage to O -
for SAE flange 1
Size (in mm)
ring)
A 90
B 52 or to be made in
C,r 5 house
Flange, complete ( 2 each to close high pressure
with O - rings and screws) ports when checking
for support shaft system pressures and
when shaft flange is
PR712/722 9787 796 removed
LR622
RL(4)22 also to protect front
surface when removing
PR732/742 9787 798 support shaft bearings.
LR632
RL(4)42
Fitting to close off control lines
for adjustment of hydr.
pos.1 stopper 2 x 4900 038 motors on the
pos.2 union nut 2 x 4774 001 PR 752
pos 3 elbow fitting 2 x 7403 569
pos 4 reducer fitting 2 x 7404 259
pos 5 fitting 2 x 7410 458
Diagnostic box with adapter 9796 653 required for

and connecting cables, checking/ adjusting
complete travel drive
all machine types with
(consists of following parts marked electronic control system/
with *)
E-Box Version CEP
for application guidelines,

* Diagnostic box without 7409 318 see group 10.4.
adapter/connecting cables
Time delay fuse - 6.3 A 6002 702

(spare fuse)
*Adapter CET-14/05 7413 106 adapts diagnostic box for

all machine types with E -
box Version CEP
*Adapter cable - straight 9814 970 required for all tests

55-connectors
*Y - Adapter cable 9747 733 additional cable for special

checks in travel operation
Accessory
Protective cap-male plug 6002 655
Protective cap- female socket 6002 654
*Power supply cable 6002 697 power supply cable

complete, consists of:
plug 3 - connections
Instrument panel plug 7409 682
Plug - 3 connectors 7409 676
A: +
Shrink wrapping for 7409 681
B: -
instrument panel plug
C: free
Shrink wrapping - for 3- 7409 679
pole plug
cable 6000 738
instrument panel plug:
Accessory
contact middle: +
Protective cap for plug - 3 7409 677
contact lateral: -
connectors
Electric system - general LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page 2.1.30.01
Feuille
E-box evaluation kit 9812 435 to read E-box memory

consists of for use on CEP 12/08C,
CEP 12/20 and CEP 12/22
Pos. 1 floppy disk with
software CEP 12 7415 329
Pos. 2 adapter cable 9812 434
Pedal tester 7414 235 required for
PR-2-Litronic:
test/adjustment
inch/brake pedal
LR-2 Litronic:
test/adjustment
steering and brake pedal
LIKOM - Service Set 9793 970 required for

consists of: checking/adjusting
LIKOM-Software pos. 1 9758 760 01 travel drive
Interface cable pos. 2 9794 550 - all machine types with
Instructions - not shown electronic control system /
E-Box version RST
for application guidelines,

Accessories
see group 10.5
Note Book
6140 645 01
Voltage transformer 24/230 V
6004 217
Digital multimeter complete 6001 231 for
with harness and case voltage (V)-
amperage (A)-
resistance ()-
and
frequency(Hz)-
tests
Battery charge / coolant 7408 922 to test the condition of the

condition tester battery charge and the
percentage of antifreeze in
the engine coolant
Socket wrench for 9797 973

adjustable sensor motor / gear
or
remachined12 rework as shown in
point socket drawing:
wrench size27 shaded areas must be
mm ground out.
Hand crimp tool - Cannon 7367 086 to produce flawless

crimp connections.
M 22 5 20/1-01
application, see group
02.3.02.
Crimp insert - Cannon used with hand crimp

tool
CT 120090-20 7409 779 Id.No. 7367 086
TH 452 7367 084 application, see group

02.3.02.
Reference gauge to check the hand

crimp tool
M 22 5 20/3-1 7409 718 Id.No. 7367 086
application, see group

02.3.02.
Insertion tool for CA - B to insert wired crimp

Crimp contacts contacts into the plug
connectors.
CIT-F80-KIT complete 7409 721
consisting of:
1 Handle 7409 693
1 Insert CIT 20 7409 694 application, see group
1 Insert CIT 16 7409 695 02.3.02.
1 Insert CIT 12 7409 696
1 Insert CIT 8 7409 697
1 Insert CIT 4 7409 698
1 Insert CIT 0 7409 699
Extraction tools for CA - B to remove wired crimp

crimp contacts contacts from the plug
connectors.
CET-F80-KIT complete 7409 700 depending if socket or
consisting of: pin contacts are
1 Handle 7409 701 removed, the
1 Insert CET 20 7409 702 corresponding side of
1 Insert CET 16 7409 703 the tool insert should be
1 Insert CET 12 7409 704 used.
1 Insert CET 8 7409 705 application, see group
1 Insert CET 4 7409 706 02.3.02.
1 Insert CET 0 7409 707
Insertion tool for KPSE application, see group

crimp contacts 02.3.02.
MS 24256 A16 7409 708
MS 24256 A20 7409 709
Electric system - wiring harness LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.1.31.01
Extraction tool for KPSE application, see group

crimp contacts 02.3.02.
MS 24256 R16 7409 710
MS 24256 R20 7409 711
Insertion tool for SURE application, see group

SEAL crimp contacts, 02.3.02.
complete
CITG-SS-1 7367 023
Insertion tip
CIT-SS-1-TIP 7409 712
Contact holder
CT 317-8666-005 7409 713
Extraction tools for SURE P - valid for extraction
SEAL crimp contacts, of socket contacts.
complete S - valid for extraction
CET-SS-P 7367 020
CET-SS-S 7367 022 application, see group
02.3.02.
Extraction tips
CET-SS-P-TIP 7409 714
CET-SS-S-TIP 7409 715
Guiding pin - Cannon for: when installing socket
CA-B Crimp contacts contacts, guiding pins
Size 15S, 16S, 15, 16: must be used.
226-1017-000 7409 716
Size 25, 12 protection against
226-1018-000 7409 717 damage.
SURE SEAL crimp contacts
CT 317-8588-000 7409 745 application, see group
02.3.02.
Auxiliary tool - Cannon for device for holding
SURE SEAL connectors during
insertion and extraction
CIEF-SS-5-6-7 7367 085 of crimped contacts.
4 notch hand crimp tool for creating perfect

Buchanan crimp connections on
Harting plug
pos1 - Crimp pliers 8123 551 connectors
pos2 - Positioning sleeve 8123 552
Test gauge for inspecting crimp

depth in Harting"
0,5-1 und 2,5 mm 8123 553 connector
1,5 mm 8123 554
Extraction tool for Harting 8123 556 for extraction of crimp

crimp contacts contacts from the
Harting - connector
Insertion tool for Harting 8123 555 for insertion of

crimp contacts connected crimp
contacts into the
Harting connector
Crimp tool to crimp contacts of

for MATE - N - LOK
MATE-N-LOK crimp contacts connectors
for 1,5 mm 7367 025

for 2,5 mm 7366 314
Extraction tool AMP extraction tool to push a

for crimped contact of the
MATE-N-LOK crimp contacts 7366 655 MATE - N - LOK
connectors
substitute insert 7015 180
Insertion tool AMP 8145 432 to insert pin and socket

for contacts in connectors
MATE-N-LOK Crimp type MATE - N - LOCK
contacts
Hand crimp tool - Cannon 8503 647 to crimp correct

for DEUTSCH Connectors contacts of connectors
type DEUTSCH
crimp turret 7409 779
Extraction tool Cannon extraction tool to push

for crimp contacts pin contacts and socket
DEUTSCH contacts of
AWG 4 8503 633 theDEUTSCH
AWG 8 8503 632 connectors
AWG 12 10 114 733
AWG 16 885 563 714
AWG 20 10 114 732
Crimp tool AMP 7415 333 to crimp the JUNIOR
AMP Certi-Lock POWER TIMER
contacts
Electric system - wiring harness LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.1.31.02
Extraction tool AMP 7370 373 extraction tool to

remove contact of the
JUNIOR POWER
TIMER housing
Crimp tool 7409 781 to crimp insulated wire

CSA 0760 contacts 0,75 - 6,0 mm
Example: isolated
connectors
Crimp tool 7409 782 to crimp non insulated

CRB 0560 wire contacts
0,5 - 6,0 mm
Example: connection to
wiper motor
see picture group 9
Wire stripper complete to remove the insulation

on individual wires on
Type 5011-26 7409 777 the electronic wire
harness.
Spare blades 7409 778 0,75 mm
Blade inserts to strip metric to be installed in wire

wires with the following wire stripper
diameters Id.No. 7409 777
1,5 - 6,0 mm 7409 788
0,15 - 2,5 mm 7409 789

track component 7402 603 application, see

measuring tool group 12.2.
R = ring wrench and to adjust bearing play of

E = adjustment template cross roller bearings
for
PR 712 (B) FAT 400/523 R/E 9054 282* *= with new adjustment R =
template bearings
400C563 R 9790 992
E 8123 439
**= with new adjustment
400P553 R 9790 992 template and new
E 8123 438 pin, can also be
used for newer gear
PR 722 (B) FAT 450/514 R/E 9054 281* types see Service
information
450C564 R 9790 996 11-3-5/94 Litronic)
E 8123 440 E=
PR +LR 622 450P554 R 9790 996

+RL (4)22 E 8123 440
1)
PR 732 (B) FAT 500/525 R/E 9054 280** = 8123 445
500C565 R 9790 999 substitution - carrier / bolt

1)
E 8123 442 = 8123 445
for wrench IdNr. 9790 992 and
PR +LR 632 500P555 R 9790 999 IdNr. 9790 996
E 8123 441 bolt IdNr. 9790 995
1)
PR 742 (B) FAT 550/516 R/E 9054 279** = 8123 446 for wrench IdNr. 9790 999
bolt IdNr. 8123 445
550C566 R 9791 003
1)
E 8123 444 = 8123 446 for wrench IdNr. 9791 003
bolt IdNr. 8123 446
PR +RL 42 550P556 R 9791 003
E 8123 443
special wrench - support to loosen and tighten
shaft the ring nut on the
support shaft
9054 840
PR 712/722
LR 622
RL(4)22
9785 922
PR732/742
LR 632
RL 42
Mech. components LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.1.40.01
Illustration Description Id.No Remarks
socket wrench - size 22 mm 9745 376 to release / tighten the

for cable fittings on axle flange cable fittings on the
support axle
PR 732 / LR 632
PR 742
RL 42
clamping tool for parking 9814 884 to dissemble and

brakes assemble of the parking
FAT - Type P/D brake at FAT type - P/D
all types measurements for

except PR 752 / RL 52 manufacturing the
clamping tool see page
2.1.40.02
press - in punch for installation of radial

shaft seal in hoist
Pos.1 installation flange cylinder support.
see chapter 15.2.
PR712/722 A 9786 683 A = fr Pos.12
B 9786 684 B = fr Pos.11
PR732 A 9786 685 for dimensions to

B 9786 687 manufacture the punch
see page 2.1.40.02
PR742/752 A 9786 686
B 9786 687
Pos.2 screw in handle for all
installation flanges 9786 688
puller commercially to pull out bushings
Pos.1 with counter support available toll Pos.3 ad Pos.4 from
Pos.2 for the following hoist cylinder bearing
dimensions (in mm) cut open support
bushings, pos. 3
from 120mm
PR712 PR732 PR742 PR752
PR722
A 90 110 120 120
B 70 90 90 90
C 247,5 273 273 280
D 90 96 94 120
tension tool track adjuster to install and remove

unit the spring in the track
roller frame on the PR
Pos. 1 - installation flange 9798 353 752. absolutely requires
Pos. 2 - bar 9798 352
Pos. 3 - hex head screw (6 4601 217 application, see

pieces.) group 12.5.50
M16x310mm - 10.9
Mounting sleeve 9817 062 for installation of

outside bearings at the
equalizer bar PR 752
Dimensions to self - manufacture from special tools

1. For disassembly and assembly of the brake housing travel gear FAT - type A / C (without Id. No.)
PR 712 PR 722 PR 732 PR 742

Dim FAT 400/523 FAT 450/514 FAT 500/525 FAT 550/516
(mm) FAT 400 C 563 FAT 450 C 564 FAT 500 C 565 FAT 550 C 566
A 315 340 360 395
B 380 400 420 460
C 22 22 22 26
D M20 x 2,5 M20 x 2,5 M20 x 2,5 M24 x 3
E 130 150 170 190
F 30 30 30 36
G 16 16 16 18
H 21 21 21 25
I 36 36 36 44
Dimensions on drawing are valid for all travel gears FAT 400 to
550.
2. For disassembly and assembly of the brake housing travel gear FAT - type P / D (Id. No. see page 2.1.40.01)
Pos. Description Id.No.
1 washer with nut M20 (welded on) 160 mm 9814 883

2 washer for machine size X32, X42 160 mm 9814 881
3 washer for machine size X12, X22 130 mm 9814 882
4 screw M20 x 110 10.9 A3C 4600 161
5 washer A3C 4600 222
Mech. components LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.1.40.02
3. Mandrel for radial seal ring in lift cylinder bearing
see crawler dozers service manual, chapter 15.2.(Id. No. see page 2.1.40.01)
3.1. Screw type handle

page 2.1.40.01 - item 2, fits for following installation flanges
all dimensions in mm
3.2. Installation flange

page 2.1.40.01 - item 1
A for Pos.12, B for Pos.11 from group 15.2.
Id.No. Ma A Ma B Ma C DIM D
-0,3 0,1
PR 712 / 722 A 9786 683 119 89 12 23
-0,3 0,1
B 9786 684 71 57 8 18
-0,3 0,1
PR 732 A 9786 685 139 109 14 23
B 9786 687 89
-0,3
69
0,1
10 18 *edges rounded
-0,3 0,1
PR 742/752 A 9786 686 149 119 14 23
-0,3 0,1
B 9786 687 89 69 10 18
4. Intermediate flange travel pump to regulating pump, see 8.1.01.02

PR712(B) - PR732(B), LR622/LR632, RL(4)22 B
With pulling device, IdNo.0524 072 - section 02.1.10.02.,
or with screw M10x100
all dimensions in mm
Prior to beginning any welding on earthmoving equipment, the battery cables and the wires on connection B+ and
D- on the alternator must be disconnected and the electronic control box must be removed. In addition, the ground
cable of the welding unit must be connected directly to the bare metal of the part to be welded.
1. Preparation of a crack
The crack must be free of paint, grease and dirt.
To prevent the crack from extending during the preparation or the welding process, the end of the cracks should
be drilled with a hole of at least 0.32" (8mm) in diameter.
The crack should now be ground, chiseled, torch cut or arced out at a 60 angle. Be certain the edges are clean
and extend through the full cross section of the material, without exceeding the 0.04" (1 mm) space in the lower
part. On larger grooves, a welding safety should be installed.
Certain materials must be preheated to 300F (150C) prior to welding.

Special preparations are necessary when preparing a crack in manganese steel. Due to its hardness,
mechanical preparation, such as a chisel or hobbing machine is not possible. We suggest that the crack is
prepared with a slow running and water cooled grinding wheel to prevent overheating.
Other possibilities for preparing cracks or removing high alloy welding seams are the use of cutting electrodes of
the type UTP 82 AS.
2. Preparation of a weld
The area to be welded must be free of paint, grease, oil, moisture and dirt. During rain, the area to be welded
must be covered. Materials with a thickness above 0.60" (15 mm), high carbon steel or steel which is difficult to
weld, the material must be preheated to approximately 176- 392F (80- 200C).
Pre-heating is also necessary when the ambient or component temperature is below 40F (5C) or when the
construction of the component prevent the welding stress to be released.
3. Storing Electrodes
Use only dry and undamaged electrodes. Electrodes which are rusty or damaged should not be used. Electrodes
should be stored in a dry room with a minimum temperature of 59F (15C). Open packages should be carefully
closed and stored after the welding work is completed.
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 04 Repar Welding Blatt

Page
Feuille 2.2.00.01
4. Welding Technique
The welding of material with the necessary electrodes (see table under paragraph 7) is in accordance with DIN
1912.
The adjustment of the welding machine - dictated by the different thicknesses of the electrodes - can be taken
from the table of the electrode package.
Beginning with a material thickness of 1/4" (8 mm), butt welds must be made in several layers. The weld is
applied in several beads. Wide butt welds are filled with several side by side beads, with the last layer covering
the center. The electrode should melt evenly without creating burrs and peaks. The valley or crater, which is
created when changing electrodes must be filled in and overlapped with the next electrode. To prevent cracks in
those craters, care must betaken that they are properly filled.
If the crack extends towards the outer edge of the material, slag may be trapped or burn holes may be created.
To prevent this, the following aid may be used: Tack a piece of sheet metal to the outer edge of the material. The
welding seam begins now at the sheet metal in the direction of the arrow. After the welding is completed, the
sheet metal is removed and the edge of the material is ground smooth.
The weld must cool off slowly and should therefore be protected from rain and wind.
5. Reinforcement of the welding seam

If the crack of the material is due to an overload or abuse, a reinforcement plate should be welded over the
crack. The selection of the correct reinforcement plate is based on the construction and load factors of the
component to be repaired.
For this reason, only general recommendations can be made as to the size and shape of the reinforcement
plates.
6. General application of reinforcement plates
6.1. Shape of reinforcement plates

The crossover or connection between the reinforced and not reinforced part should be as gradual as possible.
This means that the size of the plate should be selected in such a way that new or unacceptable high stress in
the repaired parts are avoided. Plates with sharp corners (such as a rectangular plate) should not be used.
Suitable reinforcement plate with Suitable reinforcement plate against

high tensile strength. bending and alternating loads.
6.2. Plate Thickness
The thickness of the reinforcement plate should be up to 2/3 (66%) of the thickness of the material to be
reinforced.
6.3. Plate Quality

The yield and tensile strength of the reinforcement plate should be equal to the material to be reinforced.
6.4. Plate Installation

The welded area of the crack should be ground so it is smooth and level.
The size of the plate must be selected in such a way that the longer sides of the plate extend into the
connecting construction of the material to be reinforced. The plate should also overlap the crack on each side
by at least 1" (20 mm). The correct position and fit of the reinforcement plate is achieved through clamping and
spot welding.
6.5. Plate Welding

The reinforcement plate should be welded on by running a welding bead alternately on both sides. The welding
should always start in the middle of the plate and run towards the outside. Be certain to observe that each
welding seam has proper run out.
Direction of weld Direction of weld

The size of the welding run "a" is figured out in reference to the thickness "k" of the reinforcement plate.
Use formula: a=0,5 k
Up to a welding run "a" of approx. 1/8" (3 mm) a single run can be made, however, as a general rule, a double
run should be preferred.
Above a welding run "a" of 1/8"(3 mm), the first run provides excellent penetration between the reinforcement
plate and the basic material. Subsequent runs are added on top of the first run.
After the welding is completed, clean the welding seam as necessary. Grind the run out between reinforcement
plate and basic material.
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille 2.2.00.02
7. Selecting the correct electrodes
For repair welding, only lime based {Kb} electrodes should be used, and as a rule, the electrodes {additional
material} should be "softer" than the basic material. Exceptions to this rule should be observed.
Important: To reach the theoretical welding quality, the work must not only be performed in a
professional manner, the electrode manufacturer's guidelines must absolutely be observed as
well.
Welding of vertical-down welds on steel components is not permissible!
7.1. Electrode Selection

Electrode - Protective gas welding wire
Welding area Material
norm description norm description
BASIC MACHINE
Roller frame - Main St 52 - 3 according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
frame QStE 380 N E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
according to AWS A5.1-91: according to AWS A5.18-93:
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
LH 690 according to EN 757: according to EN 12534:
preheat to app. E 69 6 Mn2NiCrMo B 4 2 H5 G3CrNi1Mo
100-150C according to AWS A5.5-96: according to AWS A5.28-96:
(210-300F) E 11018-G ER110S-G
ATTACHMENT
Blade Q St E 380 N according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
Bucket HARDOX 400 E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
Push frame St 52 - 3 according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
Bucket arm E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
RL-Boom according to AWS A5.1-91: according to AWS A5.18-93:
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
LH 690 according to EN 757: according to EN 12534:
preheat to app. E 69 6 Mn2NiCrMo B 4 2 H5 G3CrNi1Mo
100-150C according to AWS A5.5-96: according to AWS A5.28-96:
(210-300F) E 11018-G ER110S-G
Ripper St 52 - 3 according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
Q St E 380 N E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
HARDOX 400 according to AWS A5.1-91: according to AWS A5.18-93:
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
WEAR ITEMS
Adapter, Tooth adapter Special steel Root runs Root runs
Ripper according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
Cover layers with Cover layers with
high-strength electrode high-strength electrode
according to EN 1600: according to EN 12072:
E 18 8 Mn B 2 2 G 18 8 Mn
E 307-15 ER307
7.2. Steel Table
Description Explanation Analysis

HARDOX 400 Weldable, low alloy special steel highly C 0,27% Si 0,7%
wear resistant, tensile strength 1250 N/mm Mn 1,6% Cr 1,4%
yield strength 1000 N/mm Mo 0,6%
Q St E 380 N Structural steel poured at low turbulence C 0,18%

with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength Si 0,5%
of 500 - 640 N/mm and minimum yield Mn 1,6%
strength of 380 N/mm
Special steel Highly abrasion resistant steel with a tensile C = 0,3% Mn = 0,7%
strength of 1720 N/mm Si = 0,5% Cu = 0,65%
Mo = 0,3% V = 0,05%
St 52 - 3 Structural steel poured at low turbulence C 0,22%
S355J2G3 with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength
of 510 N/mm
LH 690 Heat treated fine grain structural steel with C 0,18% Si 0,50%
a tensile strength of 770 - 940 N/mm and Mn 1,5% Mo 0,5 %
yield strength of 690 N/mm Ni 1,5 %
lightly alloyed with V, AI and Cu
7.3. Welding addition chart
7.3.1 For arc welding
Description Explanation Analysis - Value in % / Use

according to EN 499: E = Arc welding, Rod electrode C = 0,07, Si = 0,5, Mn = 1,1
E42 5 B 4 2 H5 42 = 500-640 N/mm Tensile strength
5 = Value for resistance to impact For connection and application
e.g. Bhler B = Shielded metal arc welding, especially for steel with low
FOX EV 50 4 = Reference number for run out and purity and higher carbon content.
type of flow Weldable with direct current, electrode
2 = Reference number for welding connected to plus terminal (+).
positions No vertical seams
H5 = maximum hydrogen content
according to EN 757: E = Arc welding, Rod electrode C = 0,05, Si = 0,4, Mn = 1,5,
E 69 6 Mn2NiCrMo B 4 2 H5 69 = 760-960 N/mm Tensile strength Cr = 0,4, Ni = 2,0, Mo = 0,5
6 = Value for resistance to impact
e.g. Bhler Mn2NiCrMo = Chemical composition For welding, which require high
FOX EV 85 B = Shielded metal arc viscosity and crack resistance. Use for
4 = Reference number for run out and high tensile refined fine-grained steel.
type of flow Very low hydrogen content in weld
2 = Reference number for welding metal.
positions Weldable with direct current, electrode
H5 = maximum hydrogen content connected to plus terminal (+).
No vertical seams
according to EN 1600: E = Arc welding, Rod electrode C = 0,1, Si = 0,7, Mn = 6,5,
E 18 8 Mn B 2 2 18 = 620-770 N/mm Tensile strength Cr = 18,8, Ni = 8,8
e.g. Bhler Mn = Chemical composition For connections between various
FOX A 7 B = Shielded metal arc alloyed and steel which is difficult to
2 = Reference number for run out and weld.
type of flow Weldable with direct current, electrode
2 = Reference number for welding connected to plus terminal (+).
positions No vertical seams
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille 2.2.00.03
7.3.2 For MIG welding with solid electrodes:
Description Explanation Analysis - Value in % / Use

according to EN 440: G = MIG welding with solid electrodes C = 0,1, Si = 1,0, Mn = 1,7
G4Si1 4 = 500-640 N/mm Tensile strength
Si = Chemical composition For connection and application welding,
e.g. Bhler 1 = Reference number for run out and especially for steel with low purity and
EMK 8 type of flow higher carbon content.
Weldable with direct current, electrode
connected to plus terminal (+).
Protective gases: Argon + 15-20% CO2
or 100% CO2
No vertical seams
according to EN 12534: G = MIG welding with solid electrodes C = 0,1, Si = 0,6, Mn = 1,6, Cr = 0,25,
G3CrNi1Mo 3 = 900 N/mm Tensile strength Ni = 1,3, Mo = 0,25, V = 0,1
CrNi1Mo = Chemical composition
e.g. Bhler For welding, which require high viscosity
X 70 - IG and crack resistance. Use for high
tensile refined fine-grained steel.
Protective gases: Argon + 15-20% CO2
or 100% CO2
No vertical seams
according to EN 12072: G = MIG welding with solid electrodes C = 0,08, Si = 0,9, Mn = 7,0,
G 18 8 Mn 18 = 580-730 N/mm Tensile strength Cr = 19,2, Ni = 9,0
e.g. Bhler Mn = Chemical composition For connections between various
A7 IG alloyed and steel which is difficult to
weld.
Protective gases: Argon+max. 2,5% CO2
No vertical seams
Duo-cone seal design for: sealing against outside, sealing against inside
1 Retainer
2 O-ring
3 Metal ring
4 Sealing surface
Note: At the present time, for design reasons, we

only use seals protecting against the outside.
Duo-cone seals are precision components made out of chilled cast iron. They are manufactured in pairs and should
never be mixed whether they are new or used.
Avoid shocks and beats as the sealing surfaces of the metal seal rings can get damaged.
Eliminate sharp edges on the seal-retainers.
Before installation the Duo-Cone-Seals and the retainers must be clean and free of grease. The toric or O-rings may
not be oiled.
Installation: Push the seal rings (with toric ring) with an installation tool into the seal seat. Even pressure must be
exerted on the toric ring around the complete circumference to push the toric ring past the seal
retaining lip.
A standard installation tool, as shown on the reverse side, is folded over the seal ring and transfers
even pressure directly onto the toric ring.
If no suitable installation aid is available, place a round rubber cord or coil spring (as shown below) to
provide a distance between the seal ring and the O-ring and hold it so that the O-ring cannot roll up on
the conical seal ring surface when each half of the seal ring is pressed in.
1 Retainer
2 O-ring
3 Metal ring
5 Installation tool
6 Installation aid, such as coil
spring, rubber cord or rope,
etc.
If no installation tool is used, the toric O-ring can roll up on the conical seal seat surface. If pressure is exerted only
on one side, the seal may not be positioned vertically and / or the O-ring can be distorted. These installation
problems can cause leaks as well as damage to the sealing surfaces.
Installation position: incorrect - incorrect -
correct O-ring Seal

distorted is not vertical
Before the components are assembled, check if the seal rings protrude evenly. Measure the distance from the seal
seat to the seal rings on at least 3 locations, 120 apart.
Check the sealing surfaces again to ensure they are clean and lightly lubricated.
Installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 02 Duo-Cone-Seals Blatt
Page
Feuille 2.3.01.01
Listing of available installation tools for travel gear - Duo-Cone seals:
The tools may be ordered by the spare parts dept. from Liebherr Werk Telfs
GmbH. - under the description of "Duo-Cone-Seal installation tool" and the
corresponding Id. No.
Gear - Gear - Machine - Duo cone seal - Installation tool -

Type Ident-No. Type PR/LR/RL Ident-No. tool number Ident-No.
FAT 400 / 523 9443 850 712 7610 242 07590 39022 1001 7428
FAT 450 / 514 9443 090 722 7610 243 07590 38886 1001 7430
FAT 500 / 525 9443 100 732 7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
FAT 550 / 516 9443 105 742 7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
FAT 400 C 563 9443 410 712 7610 544 07590 39022 1001 7428
FAT 450 C 564 9443 430 722 7610 545 07590 38886 1001 7430
FAT 500 C 565 9443 450 732 7610 543 07590 38891 1001 7436
FAT 550 C 566 9443 470 742 7610 546 07590 39023 1001 7433
FAT 500 P 595 D 9444 380 x32 7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
7610 249 00100 07500 1001 8934
FAT 550 P 596 D 9444 390 x42 7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
7610 548 07590 41339 1001 7456
FAT 400 P 553 9443 340 x12 7610 242 07590 39022 1001 7428
FAT 450 P 554 9443 270 x22 7610 243 07590 38886 1001 7430
FAT 500 P 555 9443 310 x32 7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
FAT 550 P 556 9443 390 x42 7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
FAT 400 D 583 9444 305 x12 7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
7610 242 07590 39022 1001 7428
FAT 450 D 584 9444 315 x22 7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
7610 243 07590 38886 1001 7430
FAT 500 D 585 9444 260 x32 7610 237 07590 41338 1001 7468
7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
FAT 550 D 586 9444 325 x42 7610 548 07590 41339 1001 7456
7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
FAT 650 / 508 9443 830 x52 7610 241 00100 01300 1001 7472
7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
1 General repair guidelines
2 Crimp tool and use
3 Installation guidelines - CA - B / CA - COM - B cable connector
4 Installation guidelines - KPSE cable connector
5 Installation guidelines - SURE SEAL cable connector
6 Installation guidelines - DEUTSCH cable connector
1. General Repair Guidelines

When working with cable connectors, the following must be observed:
Keep hands, work place and connectors clean, dry and free of grease.
Always use the special installation tool - see paragraph 3.1.31 - for installation. For CA - COM - B connectors
use the same special tool as for CA - B connectors. Check tools for wear before use - a wrong or defective
tool as well as improper handling can damage the cable connector components.
When cutting cables to proper length, make sure they are the same length and the cutting edge is straight.
Do not compress or squeeze the cable.
For 90 cable routing, cut the cable to proper length when in angled position.
The cable covering must reach under the crimp joint.
Check installation guidelines for correct length to be stripped. When stripping the cable, make sure that the
individual wires are not damaged, kinked, bent or soiled.
Before installation, check crimp connections of all contacts:
- Individual wires must be visible in the inspection hole of the

contact.
- All wires must be tightly caught in the crimp connection.
- The wire insulation must reach the contact.
When removing and reinstalling contacts, make sure to check the

flow direction and use isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) as a lubricant, do not twist contacts and tool.
Do not reuse damaged parts. Contacts in size 60/100, 160 and 500 can only be crimped hydraulically. If
these contacts are damaged, the complete wire must be replaced.
Make sure all parts are positioned correctly, check charts!.
On straight cable feeds, insert the contacts from the center to the outside. On 90 cable feeds, insert them in
a row from the bottom to the top.
Even contacts, which are not wired, need to be installed. Close off any empty chambers with a plug.
Visually check if all mating ends of the contacts are at the same level.
Route the wires free of tension and fasten them.
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 04 ITT-Cannon plug Blatt

Page
Feuille
2.3.02.01
2. Use of crimp tool
2.1. Adjust the manual crimp tool - M 22 520 / 01 - 01
Set the selector dial on the handle to the appropriate diameter, see installation
guidelines on wiring chart.
2.2. To adjust turret head TH 452 and CT 1200 90 - 20

Install the proper turret head with a 9/64 Allen wrench.
Push switch 1.
Adjust color coded crimp position on knob 2 according to the wiring chart.
Push knob 2 in to the stop and push the tool once more.
2.3. Use
Before crimping, strip the wire endings to the length noted in the
installation guidelines, using the appropriate tool - see paragraph
2.1.31.
Insert the stripped wires into the contact crimp sleeve as far as possible
until they are visible in the inspection port
Insert contact and wire into the preset crimp tool.
Push the tool handles together all the way.
Note:
The locking mechanism will not allow you to open the tool until the crimping operation has been completed.
Pull the crimped contact with wire from tool. Check the crimp, see paragraph 1.
2.4. Check crimp tool wear.

Check the crimping die for wear with a M 22 520 / 3 - 1 gauge (see paragraph
2.1.31.02), without the crimping head in place.
Set the dial on the handles of the crimp tool to No. 4.
Turret both sides of the gauge into the crimp opening of the tool.
The GREEN - side (good) must fit easily between the crimp dies, or the
adjustment of the tool and the crimp die must be checked.
The RED - side (oversize) may not fit, or the tool are not closed all the way
or the crimp dies are worn and must be replaced.
Caution: Do not operate the crimp tool when the gauge is inserted!
3. Installation Guidelines for CA - B / CA - COM - B Cable Connectors
3.1. Description
A = Plug B = Socket
Components
1 Grommet
2 Insulator
3 Cylinder barrel
3.1 Seal ring
4 End bell with nut
5 Bayonet coupling nut
5.1 Spring washer
(on CA-COM-B)
6 Socket contacts
7 Pin contacts
Tightening torque for end bell: CA 3106 E 32- 8SB 03

Size: CA 06COM E 32- 8SB 03 LH
10 SL max. 3 Nm Other specifications
14S/14 max. 5 Nm Size
20 max. 9 Nm Classification
32 max. 15 Nm Type of housing
Model
3.2. Overview table

Number / Type of
Plug Description Contact - Size Insertion Tool Crimp Tool Notes
S=Socket, P=Pins
Removal: CET-F80-16 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15
CA 3106 E 32-8SB-03 24 / S - 15
CA 06 COM-E 32-8SB- Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
03-LH
Socket (30 pole) on main Removal: CET-F80-12 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 25
wiring harness - large 6 / S - 25
Installation: CIT-F80-12 Turret: TH 452 metric
24 / P - 15
CA 3106 E 32-8SB-04 Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
Plug (30 pole) in
instrument panel for main Removal: CET-F80-12 M 22520/1-01
Tool: Contact size 25
wiring harness large 6 / P - 25
16 / S - 15
CA 3106 E 32-6SB-03 2 / S - 25
CA 06 COM-E 32-6SB- Installation: CIT-F80-12 Turret: TH 452 metric
03-LH
Socket (23 pole) on main Removal: CET-F80-8
wiring harness small 3 / S - 60
Installation: CIT-F80-8 If these crimp contacts
Hydraulic crimp tool and
are damaged, replace
hand pump
Removal: CET-F80-4 small instrument cable kit
2 / S - 160
Installation: CIT-F80-4
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.3.02.02
Number / Type of
Plug Description Contact - Size Insertion Tool Crimp Tool Notes
S=Socket, P=Pins
16 / P - 15
2 / P - 25
CA 3106 E 32-6PB-04 Installation: CIT-F80-12 Turret: TH 452 metric
Plug (23 pole) in
instrument panel for main Removal: CET-F80-8
wiring harness small 3 / P - 60
Installation: CIT-F80-8 If these crimp contacts
Hydraulic crimp tool and
are damaged, replace
hand pump
Removal: CET-F80-4 small instrument cable kit
2 / P - 160
Installation: CIT-F80-4
CA 3102 E 20-27 SB-03-

A176 Removal: CET-F80-16 M 22520/1-01
CA 06 COM-E 20-27 SB-
Tool: Contact size 15
14 / S - 15
03-LH Socket (14 pole) Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
on electronic wiring
harness for joystick
CA 3106 E 14S-6 SB-03-

A176
CA 06 COM-E 14S-6 SB-
03-LH Socket (6 pole) on Removal: CET-F80-16 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15S
electronic wiring harness 6 / S - 15 S
for engine speed sensing
potentiometer and
outrigger wiring harness -
right / left
CA 3106 E 10SL-3SB-03
CA 06 COM-E 10 SL- Removal: CET-F80-16 M 22520/1-01
3SB-03-LH Plug (6 pole)
Tool: Contact size 15S
6 / P - 15 S
on outrigger wiring Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
harness right / left for
electronic wiring harness
CA 3106 E 10SL-3SB-03
CA 06 COM-E 10 SL- Removal: CET-F80-16
3SB-03-LH Socket Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15S
(3pole) on electronic and 3 / S - 15 S Installation: CIT-
Turret: TH 452 metric
variable motor wiring F80-16
harness - left / right for
solenoid valves
For guide pins and various additional tools , see paragraph 2.1.31
3.3. Removal of Contacts

Note general guidelines in paragraph 1.
Carefully lift the plastic insulation (see manufacturer s guidelines), slit it

carefully and remove.
Caution: Do not damage the insulation and wires inside the
cover insulation!
Unscrew the housing from the cylinder and push the seal over the wires.
Push out the contacts with appropriate tool out of the insulator - see paragraph 3.2 by applying even and
continuous pressure towards the connector, keep the tool parallel to the axis of the plug connector. Stop when
the shoulder of the tool touches the front of the insulator. Carefully pull
the tool from the insulator.
Remove all contacts in the same way, make sure to note different
versions / tools.
Important: The tool must fit properly into or over the contacts.
The housing and seal normally stay on the wiring. If necessary, pull the
wires and contacts carefully from the seal, remove the housing from
the wires.
3.4. To wire the Contacts

Contact size Contact Wire diameter Adjustment - Crimp tool
Stripping
type Color
length
Metric AWG S=Socket mm AWG Dial No. Crimping
(mm)
P=Pin insert
P +0,5 5 blue
1,0 18 6,0
S 5 green
15S 16S
P 6 blue
1,5 16 6,0+0,5
S 6 green
P 5 green
1,0 18 6,0+0,5
S 5 red
15 16
P +0,5 6 green
1,5 16 6,0
S 6 red
P +0,5 8 red
25 12 2,5 12 6,0
S 8 red
Strip the wire as noted on chart and crimp - see paragraph 2.1 to 2.3
3.5. Insertion of Contacts

Push the plastic insulation over the housing onto the wires.
If housing and sealer were removed, push on housing, dip seal into isopropyl alcohol and guide contact with
cable from the side marked with letter. Use the appropriate insertion tool.
Important: The seal housing must align with the insulator housing!
Note the installation position of the wire as noted on number coding plan.
Insert contacts into the guide tool, push the insertion tool to the top of the
connector tip.
On socket type contacts, insert guide pin. Dip in isopropyl alcohol and insert
straight into insulator until it snaps into position.
Important: Make sure to check number coding chart.
Remove guide pin and insertion tool. Slightly pull the wire to check proper
seating of the contact, plug chambers with empty contacts.
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.3.02.03
Push sealer and housing into cylinder housing, carefully tighten nut. If necessary, use the counter part of the
connector as a retainer.
To retain all parts, loosen nut by 1/4 turn and retighten properly, secure with adhesive.
On electronic wiring harness, insert heat seal (Ray-blocker) on end of insulation and adhere during the following
shrinking procedure.
Pull shrink fit sleeve over housing and evenly heat with hot air blower
until all parts are tightly covered.
Caution: Do not pull the wires during the shrink fit procedure. Do
not apply heat above 125 C (257 F).
4. Installation Guidelines KPSE plug Connector
4.1. Design
A = Socket B = plug
Item listing
1 Insulator
1.1 Contact retainer
(integrated in insulator)
2 Barrel
2.1 Seal ring
3 Cone ring
4 Housing
5 Bayonet coupling nut
6 Socket type contact with crimped
wire
7 Pin type contact with crimped wire
Tightening torque for end bell:

Size:
8, 10 max. 4 Nm
12,14,16 max. 6 Nm
18, 20, 22, 24 max. 10 Nm
KPSE 06 E 22- 21PB DN
Other specifications
Size
Classification
Type of housing
Model
4.2. Chart
Number / Type of
contact size Insertion tool Crimp tool Notes
Plug description
S=Socket, P=Pins
Removal: MS24256 R16
KPSE 06E22-21PB-DN Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 16 per
Plug (21 pole) on wiring 21 / P - 16 Installation: MS24256
Insert: CT120090-20 AWG
harness - Cab A16
KPSE 07E22-21SB Removal: MS24256 R16

Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 16 per
Socket (21 pole) in 21 / S - 16
instrument panel for Installation: MS24256 AWG
Insert: CT120090-20
Wiring harness - Cab A16
KPSE 06E22-55SB-DN Removal: MS24256 R20

Socket (55 pole) on 55 / S - 20
electronic wiring harness Installation: MS24256 AWG
Insert: CT120090-20
for electronic box A20
KPSE 06E8-3A SB-DN Removal: MS24256 R20

Plug (3 pole) on var. 3 / S - 20
motor wiring harness left / Installation: MS24256 AWG
Insert: CT120090-20
right for RPM sensor A20
4.3. Removal of contacts

Note general guidelines in paragraph 1 .
Carefully cut and remove shrink fit sleeve per manufacturers guidelines.
Important: Do not damage insulator and inside wires.
Remove housing, loosen cone ring, housing cone and push nut over the wires.
Select proper removal tool for contact size per paragraph 4.2.
Check and apply tool first while empty, check the ejector point and hollow needle for damage. Improper or
damaged tools can damage plug parts.
On pin contacts set tool above the pin until mark 1 straight on the
insulator. On jack contacts, insert tool over socket until mark 2 into
the insulator.
Applying even pressure to tool, move ejector with thumb and

forefinger forward and push contact from retainer clip.
Carefully remove tool from insulator and pull contact by the wire from
the socket.
Remove all contacts the same way. Remove all connector

components from wire harness.
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.3.02.04
4.4. Wiring of contacts
Contact size Contact Wire diameter Adjustment - Crimp Tool
Insulator
type Color
Length
AWG S=Jack mm AWG Dial No. Crimping
(mm)
P=Pins Insert
P
20 0,96 18 5,0 5 red
S
P
16 1,5 16 6,5 6 blue
S
Insulate wire as noted on chart and crimp - see paragraph 2.1 to 2.3
4.5. Installation of Contacts

Note general guidelines in paragraph 1..
Push the shrink fit sleeve and nut in proper sequence over the wires.
Insert contact (see chart) by hand into reverse side of plug, until the top of the
contact is no more than 3 mm from the insulator.
Push appropriate guide tool over the contact connector and hold it vertical to
the front the insulator. Contact size 16 and 12 are inside the tool, the tool
pushed against the top of the contact. On contacts, size 20, the side pushes
against the end of the contact, therefore the contact is farther outside the tool.
Dip all parts in isopropyl alcohol and push evenly into insulator until you hear
the contact click in.
Remove the tool and check if the contact is seated properly by a slight pull on the wires. Close off empty
chambers with plug.
Push cone ring as far as possible over the insulator. Apply isopropyl alcohol to lubricate contact surfaces. Push
housing, on sockets also nut, onto cylinder housing and tighten carefully. If necessary, use plug connector part
as holder. To set the parts, loosen the housing by 1/4 turn, retighten and secure with adhesive.
Pull shrink fit sleeve over housing and evenly heat with heater fan until
all parts are tightly covered.
Caution: Do not pull the wires during the shrink fit procedure.
Do no apply heat above 125 C (257 F).
5. Installation Guidelines SURE SEAL Plug Connector
5.1. Design
A = Plug B= Socket
1 Housing
2 Pin type contact
3 Socket type contact
4 Seal
5.2. Chart
Number / Type of
contact Insertion Tool Crimp Tool Notes
Plug description
S=Jack, P=Pin
SURE SEAL SS 5 P plug
2-P Removal: CET-SS-P/S Tool: M 22520/1-01
P valid only for
(5 pole) on electronic - removal of socket
3-S Installation: CITG-SS-1 Insert: CT120090-20
wiring harness
SURE SEAL SS 5 R plug S valid only for
(5 pole) on var. motor 3-P Removal: CET-SS-P/S Tool: M 22520/1-01 removal of pin type
wiring harness - left/ right 2-S Installation: CITG-SS-1 Insert: CT120090-20 contacts

Remove the plug, loosen connection. Remove shrink fit sleeve as described by manufacturer, or carefully slit
open and remove.
Caution: Do not damage the insulation or wires inside the cable!
Use proper extraction tool - see paragraph 5.2 - insert from contact side parallel to the plug axis into the socket
or over the pin contact. Apply even pressure and push contacts out in direction of the cable.
Carefully pull extraction tool from plug, clean wire.
5.4. To wire contacts

Contact size Contact Wire diameter Adjustment - crimp tool
Stripping
type
length Color Crimp
AWG S=Socket mm AWG Dial. No
(mm) insert
P=Pin
P 5 gray
SS10 0,96 18 6,0+0,3
S 5 gray
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.3.02.05
Depending on the number of poles, the minimum stripping length must be adhered to on covered cables.
No. of Min. stripping
poles length (mm)
2, 3, 4 40
5, 6, 7 45
8, 9, 10 50
Strip the wire to the length shown on chart and crimp - see paragraph 2.1 to 2.3
5.5. To install contacts

Note general guidelines described in paragraph 1.
Push shrink fit sleeve onto wires. Insert plug into installation tool, see paragraph 2.1.31 to facilitate this process.
Insert wired contact into the insertion tool, see paragraph 5.2,
keeping contact 1, cable 2 and tool 3 in a straight line and push until
tool shoulder touches contact..
On socket type contacts, add guide pin.
Dip parts into isopropyl alcohol and push into plug, see chart,
applying even pressure parallel to the length axis until it snaps in
place. Remove guide pin, pull tool carefully from plug and check if
wire is seated properly, by pulling slightly..
Remove plug from installation tool.
Check seating and position of contacts again. On the end of the cover, insert seal (Ray-Block), and push shrink
fit sleeve over plug. Evenly heat is with hot air fan until the Ray-Block is melted and the components are
covered tightly.
Caution: Do not pull on the wires during the shrink fit procedure. Do not overheat the connector..
6. Installation Guidelines DEUTSCH Plug Connector

General:
In machines, plug connections type Deutsch DT and Deutsch HDP Series are used - see the following overview
chart.
Plug Connector series DT
A = Socket B = Plug
Item listing:
1 Housing
2 Grommet
3 Locking wedge socket
4 Locking wedge plug
5 Seal plug
6 Pin
7 Socket
Plug Connector series HDP
A = Socket B = Plug
Item listing:
1 Socket housing with pin

2 Plug housing with socket
3 Grommet
4 Union nut
6.1. Overview chart

Number / Type of
contact - size Notes
Plug description Plug series Crimp tool for designations
S=Socket, P=Pins see group. 09
Deutsch plug 2-S Tool: M 22520/1-01

(2 pole)
DT
CT120090-20 Y14
2-P Insert:
Deutsch Plug 3-S Tool: M 22520/1-01

(3 pole)
DT
CT120090-20 B5, B6, X34(S2)
3-P Insert:
Deutsch Plug
(4 pole) 4-S Tool: M 22520/1-01 X69, X70, X71, X72,
DT
4-P Insert: CT120090-20 X77
Deutsch Plug
(6 pole) 6-S Tool: M 22520/1-01
DT
CT120090-20 X6, X7
6-P Insert:
Deutsch Plug
(8 pole) 8-S Tool: M 22520/1-01
DT
CT120090-20 X6, X/
8-P Turret:
Deutsch Plug
(12 pole) 12 - S Tool: M 22520/1-01
DT
CT120090-20 X65, X73
12 - P Insert:
Deutsch plug
(18 pole) 18 - S Tool: M 22520/1-01
HDP
CT120090-20 X64
18 - P Insert:
6.2. Wiring of contacts

contact size contact Wire diameter Adjustment - Crimp tool
Insulator
type
Length color crimping
AWG S=Jack mm AWG Dial No..
(mm) insert
P=pin
P
20 0,75 20 5,0 4 red
S
P
18 1,0 18 5,0 5 red
S
P
16 1,5 16 6,0 6 blue
S
P
12 2,5 12 6,0 8 gray
S
In case of repairs, crimp contacts >2,5 mm must be soldered on the central cable harness.
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

Page
Feuille
2.3.02.06
6.3. Crimping of contacts
See installation instructions, point 1 to 2.4
6.4. Installation of contacts DT Series:

Contacts must engage properly at installation (click). Installation is made without tools.
Inserted Engaged
After positioning the contacts, the locking wedge must be inserted, see illustration DT-Series.
Note: Insert the contacts straight, do not kink. Use Isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) .
6.5. Removal of contacts DT Series:

Remove the locking wedge and use a small screw driver to loosen the pin or bushing lock and pull the contact
with the cable from the housing .
6.6. Installation of contacts HDP Series:

Installation is made without tools.
Contacts must engage properly (click).
Inserted Engaged
Note: Insert the contacts straight, do not kink. Use Isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) .
6.7. Removal of contacts HDP Series:

To remove the contacts, use special tool, see section 02.1.31.
Select tool according to cable diameter and push over cable and pin
or bushing contact. Push the lock in to loosen and pull out the cable
together with contact and tool.
Loosen the lock Pull out

Directions for use of Four Notch Hand Crimping Tool
1. General:
Protect the pliers from contamination.
Do not open with force.
When crimping, push the tool together all the way before opening it again.
Use positioning sleeve for HAN D contacts, see section 02.1.31.
2. Four notch hand crimping tool, see section 02.1.31.

Parts list:
1 Pliers
2 Positioning sleeve
3 Locking bar
4 Lock screw
5 Adjustment scale
6 Adjustment screw
2.1. Attach the positioning sleeve

Loosen the lock screw 4 on the locking bar, pull the bar 3 back and insert the sleeve 2,
close the bar and retighten the lock screw 4.
Set the crimping depth.
Determine the diameter of the conductor and select the corresponding pin = crimping
depth.
For pin Id. No., see section 2.1.31.
Conductor Pin
mm AWG HAN D
0,50 20 1,55
0,75 18 1,55
1,00 18 1,55
1,38 16 1,60
1,50 16 1,80
2,10 14 1,45
2.50 14 1,55
Open and close the crimping tool several times and then hold in open position.
Turn the adjustment screw, pos.6 until the edge of the indicator bar aligns with the line of the selected pin
diameter.
Close the tool and check the setting with the pin.
If set correctly, the pin * must fit without a clearance into the existing tool opening.
Caution: When the pin is inserted, do not open or close the tool - danger of breaking
correct incorrect
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 01 Harting plug Blatt

Page 2.3.03.01
Feuille
2.2. Crimping
Before crimping, insulate the ends of the wire with a suitable tool - see section 02.1.31.
8 mm on 0.75 1.50 mm contacts
6 mm on 2.50 mm contacts
Note: The cable wires must be visible in the control bore.
All cable wires must be caught in the crimping point.
The insulation must reach the contact.
Insert the cable with the contact into the pre-set tool.
Push the tool together, quickly and all the way.
Pull the cable with the crimped contact from the tool and check the
crimping.
Note: The tool can only be opened when the cable is crimped
completely.
2.3. Installation of pin contacts - plug section on instrument

panel
Set the plug section, pos.1 into the instrument panel.

Set the pin contacts, pos.3 in to the contact base, pos.2. Screw
the base with the plug section, pos.1.
2.4. Installation of bushing contacts / plug section central wiring

harness
Push the shrink fit sleeve or shrink fit part over the cable before
installation of the contact base .
Push the clamping section, pos.5, rubber seal with washers,
pos.4, screw fitting, pos.3 and plug housing, pos.1 over the
cable.
For installation of contacts, use insertion tool, see section
02.1.31.
Insert the bushing contacts into the contact base, pos. 2, screw the base together with the housing, pos. 1.
Caution: The cables can be stuck / damaged when connecting. Screw the screw fitting, pos. 3 into the plug
housing and tighten. Insert the rubber seal with washers and attach wiring harness with clamping section on
the plug housing, pos. 1.
Note: Do not use damaged parts.
Make sure all parts are positioned correctly, check corresponding plug illustrations (see section
9.2).
Visually check the installation position of the contacts, route the cable free of tension.
2.5. Sealing
Push the shrink fit sleeve over the clamping section, pos.5 and push in the screw fitting, pos.3 and use a hot air
blower to heat evenly until the sleeve is shrunk in place.
Note: Do not heat the components of the screw connection above 125C ( 257F).
2.6. Removal of pin and bushing contacts

For removal, use removal tool, see section 02.1.31.
Push the removal tool over the pin or bushing and loosen the lock, push the contacts out.
Installation guidelines for MATE-N-LOK and JUNIOR POWER TIMER plug connectors
1. MATE-N-LOK
Design:
Plug with contact pin Socket with contact bushings
1.1. Use of hand crimping tool

Profile 1 Pos.2 Wire diameter 0.5 1.3 mm
Profile 2 Pos.3 Wire diameter 1.3 2.1 mm
Open the pliers, pos.1 all the way to insert the contact, which is to be crimped (note the
correct profile) and slowly push the pliers together until the contact is lightly clamped on
the crimping sleeve.
Insert the wire, which is to be insulated (insulation length 5 mm).
Push the pliers all the way together.
Pull the crimped contact from the pliers and check the crimping.
Contact pin with crimped wire Contact bushing with crimped wire
* = Contact notch
1.2. Installation of contacts

Note: Check contact notches before installation for damage or breaks.
Contacts must audibly click when engaging in the housing.

Use:
Push the tool, pos.2 over the pin or bushing contact and push the
contact notches together, pull the contact on the cable from
housing, pos. 1 .
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 01 AMP plug Blatt

Page 2.3.04.01
Feuille
2. JUNIOR POWER TIMER
Design:
Plug with contact pins Socket with contact bushings
2.1. Use of hand crimping tool
Mark:
Red for cable diameter 0.25 - 1.60 mm
Blue for cable diameter 1.00 - 2.60 mm
Yellow for cable diameter 2.70 - 6.60 mm
Open the pliers all the way to insert the contact, which is to be crimped with the seal and slowly push the pliers
together until the contact is lightly clamped on the crimping sleeve.
Insert the wire, which is to be insulated (insulation length 5 mm).
Push the pliers all the way together.
Pull the crimped contact 1 from the pliers.

Check the crimping with seal 2.
2.2. Installation of contacts

Note: Check contact notches before installation for damage or breaks.
Contacts must audibly click when engaging in the housing.

Use:
Push the tool, pos.2 over the pin or bushing contact and push the
contact notches together, pull the contact on the cable from housing,
pos. 1.
Sub Group Index
Technical data 3.1
PR 712 F/N xxx-01030500 3.1.10

PR 712B F/N xxx-05012999 3.1.11
PR 712B F/N xxx-30003083 3.1.12
PR 712B F/N xxx-30845599 3.1.13
PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 3.1.14
PR 722 F/N xxx-01031000 3.1.20

PR 722B F/N xxx-10013000 3.1.21
PR 722B F/N xxx-30013170 3.1.22
PR 722B F/N xxx-31715599 3.1.23
PR 722B F/N xxx-5600 3.1.24
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032500 3.1.30

PR 732B F/N xxx-25012999 3.1.31
PR 732B F/N xxx-30003135 3.1.32
PR 732B F/N xxx-31365599 3.1.33
PR 732B F/N xxx-5600 3.1.34
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500 3.1.40

PR 742B F/N xxx-25012999 3.1.41
PR 742B F/N xxx-30003088 3.1.42
PR 742B F/N xxx-30895233 3.1.43
PR 742B F/N xxx-52345599 3.1.44
PR 742B F/N xxx-5600 3.1.45
PR 752 F/N xxx-20025599 3.1.50

PR 752 F/N xxx-56006199 3.1.51
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200 3.1.52
Maintenance and inspection guidelines 3.2
PR 712 F/N xxx-01010500 3.2.10

PR 722 F/N xxx-01011000
PR 732 F/N xxx-20012500
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500
PR 712B F/N xxx-05012999 3.2.11

PR 722B F/N xxx-10012999
PR 732B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 742B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 712B F/N xxx- 3000 3.2.12

PR 722B F/N xxx- 3000
PR 732B F/N xxx-30003039
PR 742B F/N xxx-30003024
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022008
PR 712B F/N xxx-30013083 3.2.13

PR 722B F/N xxx-30013170
PR 732B F/N xxx-30403135
PR 742B F/N xxx-30253088
PR 752 F/N xxx-20092059
Technical Data -
Datum Edition Date
01 03 Maintenance Guidelines Blatt

Page 3.0.00.01
Feuille
PR 712B F/N xxx-30845599 3.2.14
PR 722B F/N xxx-31715599
PR 732B F/N xxx-31365599
PR 742B F/N xxx-30895599
PR 752 F/N xxx-20605599
PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 3.2.15

PR 722B F/N xxx-5600
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600
Maintenance and inspection instructions 3.4
Adjustment checklist and quick reference 3.5
PR 712 F/N xxx-01030384 3.5.00

PR 722 F/N xxx-01030563
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032500
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-03855599 3.5.01

PR 722(B) F/N xxx-05645599
PR 732B F/N xxx-25015599
PR 742B F/N xxx-25015599
PR 712B F/N xxx-56006199 3.5.02

PR 722B F/N xxx-56006199
PR 732B F/N xxx-56006199
PR 742B F/N xxx-56006199
PR 712B F/N xxx-6200 3.5.03

PR 752 F/N xxx-20025599 3.5.50
PR 752 F/N xxx-56006199 3.5.51
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200 3.5.52

PR 712 > 103 L > 103 M>103
Type No. 348 415 349
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 904 TB LIEBHERR
Engine version in line 4 > mildly turbocharged
Rating to DIN 6271 kW 74 (98.6 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
High idle RPM 1/min 2100+80
Displacement l (cu. in) 5.6 (342)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake/ / exhaust mm 0.20 / 0.25
Firing order 1>3>4>2
Coolant capacity l (gal) 52 (13)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (82)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 11 > 18 (2.9 > 4.75)
SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 266
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,803
Oil quantity l (qt) 2.5 (2.65)
Oil specifications see lube oil group 1.3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2BPV 50
max. flow> Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2 125 (33)
max. operating pressure bar 420
Gear pump > repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 79 (21)
max. operating pressure (Sp) bar 16+4
Travel motors type 2BMV 105
Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type A 10 V 045

max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 112 (29.6)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25
Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 / 157 * (47 / 41 *)

> + circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5.4
Automatic circuit breaker A 60
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 400 / 523
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..
Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de

PR 712 F/N xxx> 0103 0500
Datum Edition Date

Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.10.01
PR 712 >103 L > 103 M > 103
Type No. 348 415 349
TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 46,5
Oil quantity l (qt) 24.5 (4,8)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 171.5 (6.7) 171.5 (6.7) 171.5 (6.7)
Track chain length links 42 44 44
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 457 / 560 457/560/610/711 610/711/762/864
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF 5/8UNF 5/8 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 2 3 3
Track roller location s>d>s>s>d>s s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 2.5 +/> 2.5 +/> 2.5
ATTACHMENT
Lift cylinder bearing > lube oil quantity l (qt) 0.50 (0.52)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group1.3
Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1100

6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850 90/50/1100 90/50/850
Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 90

6 > way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 150
Angle cylinder 6 > way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 275
Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450
GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 (0 > 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4,6 (0 > 2.8)
Basic machine: height over cab mm 3100
overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3675
overall length with straight blade mm 4475 4665 4645
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 4810 4835 4810
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5255 5335 5360
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad=total width) mm 1630 1750 1930
ground clearance mm 370 370 370
11550 / 11800/12000/ >>>>>>/12450/
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width ) kg
11750 12100/12300 12600/12800
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 11500 / >>>>> 11850/12050/>>>>> 12200/12300/12500
Straight blade: blade width mm 2750 3000 3350
blade capacity m3 1,96 2,14 2,08
weight > attachment complete kg 1200 1270 1300
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0,51 /0,43 0.49/0.41/0.38/0.33 >>>/0.33/0.32/0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 2650 2950 3235
width (angled) mm 2440 2750 3000
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 / >>>> 0.50/0.42/>>>> 0.38/0.33/0.31
Ripper: add. length ripper lowered mm 1185
add. length ripper raised mm 925
weight > ripper complete kg 850
max. slope angle 31
Winch: additional length mm 635
weight kg 800
max. slope angle 25
height cable exit mm 1130
height drawbar pull mm 515
max. line pull kN (t) 228 (23,2)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 78 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 19
max. length m 70
*) PR 712 / 103 > 113, M/103>109
PR 712 B >F/N 348 > B L >F/N 415 > B M >F/N 349 >
05012999 05012999 05012999
DIESEL ENGINE
Engine version in line 4 > mildly turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 77 (103 HP)
Displacement l (cu.in) 5,6 (342)
Valve clearance > cold intake/exhaust mm 0.20 / 0.25
Coolant capacity l (gal) 42 (11,1)
Fuel tank > capacity l (gal) 310 ( 81,8)
SPLITTERBOX
Type 250 B 266
Ratio i 0,803
Oil quantity l (qt) 2,5 (2.65)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2125 (33)
max. operating pressure > p max. bar 420
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 79 (20,8)
max. operating pressure (Sp) > p max. bar 16+4
Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A10V045

max. flow > Q max. l /min (gal/min) 112 (29,5)
standby pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) > p max. bar 160
Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 5.4
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 400 P 553
/..

PR 712 B F/N xxx> 0501 2999
Datum Edition Date

Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.11.01
PR 712 B >F/N 348 > B L >F/N 415 > B M >F/N 349 >
05012999 05012999 05012999
TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 45.4 :1
Oil quantity l (qt) 210 (10.6)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 171,5 ( 6,7) 171,5 ( 6,7) 171,5 ( 6,7)
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 457/560 457/560/610/711 762/864
ATTACHMENT


GENERAL DATA
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4.6 (0 > 2.8)
Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 146
Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 740

overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 4835 4810
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5335 5360
11550 / 11750 11800/12000/ 12600/12800
12100/12300
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 11850/12050/>>>>> 12300/12500

blade capacity m3 2.18 2.14 2.15
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0,51 /0,43 0.49/0.41/0.38/0.33 0.32/0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 2950 3235
width (angled) mm 2750 3000
blade capacity m3 2.42 2.20
weight > attachment complete kg 1270 1250
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.50/0.42/>>>>> 0.33/0.31
Ripper (3): add. length ripper lowered mm 1185
max. slope angle 31
weight kg 1200
max. line pull kN (t) 227 (23.1)
cable size a mm 19
max. length m 70
PR 712 B >F/N 348 > B L >F/N 415 > B M >F/N 349 >
30013083 30013083 30013083
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T>E A1
Engine version in line 4 > turbo charged
Displacement l (cu.in) 6,64 (405,2)
Valve clearance > cold intake/exhaust mm 0.25 / 0.30
Coolant capacity /DCA 4 l (gal) 52 (13.7)/2 (0.5)
Fuel tank > capacity l (gal) 310 (81,8)
SPLITTERBOX
Type 250 B 266
Ratio i 0,803
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
max. operating pressure > p max. bar 420
max. operating pressure (Sp) > p max. bar 16+4
Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A10V045

standby pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) > p max. bar 160

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 5,4
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 400 P 553
/..

PR 712 B F/N xxx>30013083
Datum Edition Date

Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.12.01
PR 712 B >F/N 348 > B L >F/N 415 > B M >F/N 349 >
30013083 30013083 30013083
TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 45,4 :1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 10 (2.75)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 171.5 ( 6.7) 171.5 ( 6.7) 171.5 ( 6.7)
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 457 / 560 457/560/610/660 762/864
ATTACHMENT


GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 ( 0> 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4.6 (0> 2.8)

11550 / 11750 11800/12000/ 12600/12800

12100/12300
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 11850/12050/>>>>> 12300/12500

ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 /0.43 0.49/0.41/0.38/0.33 0.32/0.28
blade capacity m3 2,42 2,20
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.50/0.42/>>>>> 0.33/0.31
max. slope angle 31
weight kg 1200
cable size a mm 19
max. length m 70
PR 712 B - F/N 348 - BL - F/N 415 - BM - F/N 349 -
30845599 30845599 30845599
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T - E A1
Construction 4 cylinder in line - turbocharged
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 2100
Displacement l (cu. in) 6,64 (405,2)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 52 / 2 (13,7 / 0,5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (81,8)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 10 - 17 (2,6 - 4,5)
SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 266
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,803
Oil quantity l (qt) 2,5 (2,65)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 50
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 125 (33)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Gear pump - repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 79 (20,8)
+4
max operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 105
Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 045

max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 112 (29,5)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

+ circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 110 Ah (in series)
Starter kW 5,4
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 450 D 583
Construction 2 stage planetary gear
Ratio i total 45,4 : 1
/..

PR 712 B F/N xxx-3084 5599
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date
01 03 Technical Data Blatt

Page 3.1.13.01
Feuille
PR 712 B - F/N 348 - BL - F/N 415 - BM - F/N 349 -
30845599 30845599 30845599
TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 5,5 (5,8)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 171,5 / 6,7
Track chain length links 42 44
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 457 / 560 457 /560 /610 /660 762 / 864
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 2 3
Track roller location s-d-s-s-d-s s-d-s-d- s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 2,5
ATTACHMENT
Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1100

6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850 90 / 50 / 1100 90 / 50 / 850
Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 90

6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 150
Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 275
Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450
GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6,8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2,8)


overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 4835 4810
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 5335 5360
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1630 1750 1930
ground clearance mm 370
11800 / 12000 /
Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 11550 / 11750 12600 / 12800
12100 / 12300
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 11850 / 12050 / --- 12300 / 12500

3
blade capacity m 2,18 2,14 2,15
weight - attachment complete kg 1200 1270 1300
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,51 / 0,43 0,49/0,41/0,38/0,33 0,32 / 0,28
6-way-blade: blade width mm 2950 3235
3
blade capacity m 2,42 2,20
weight - attachment complete kg 1270 1250
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,50 / 0,42 / --- 0,33 / 0,31
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1185
length add.(raised) mm 925
weight kg 850
slope angle 31
Winch additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
max. line pull kN 227 (23,1t)
max. line speed m/min 0-105 infinitely variable
cable size mm 19
max. length m 70
PR 712 B - F/N 348 - BL - F/N 415 - BM - F/N 349 -
5600 5600 5600
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T - E A1
+80
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 22,5 (23,7)
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 52 / 2 (13,7 - 0,5)
SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 266
Ratio i 0,803
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Tandem gear pump - replenishing / fan drive type 32 ZP + 16 ZP
max. flow replenishing - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 79 (20,8)
+4
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
max. flow fan drive - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 39 (10,3)
+10
max. operating pressure (electronic regulated) pmax bar 110
Gear motor - fan drive type ZM 0511
+100
operation RPM 1/min 1850


ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 5,4
TRAVEL GEAR
/..

PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

Page 3.1.14.01
Feuille
PR 712 B - F/N 348 - BL - F/N 415 - BM - F/N 349 -
5600 5600 5600
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 457 / 560 457 /560 /610 /660 762 / 864
Track roller location s-d-s-s-d-s s-d-s-d- s-d-s
ATTACHMENT

6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850 90 / 50 / 1100 90 / 50 / 850

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)


track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1630 1750 1930
11800 / 12000 /
Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 11550 / 11750 12600 / 12800
12100 / 12300
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 11850 / 12050 / --- 12300 / 12500

3
blade capacity m 2,18 2,14 2,15
weight - attachment complete kg 1200 1270 1300
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,51 / 0,43 0,49/0,41/0,38/0,33 0,32 / 0,28
3
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,50 / 0,42 / --- 0,33 / 0,31
weight kg 850
slope angle 31
weight kg 1200
cable size mm 19
max. length m 70
PR 722 > 103 L>101 M > 103
Type No. 281 397 347
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 904 T LIEBHERR
Engine version in line 4 > turbocharged
Rating to DIN 6271 kW 94 (126 HP)
Displacement l (cu. in) 5.6 (342)
Valve clearance > cold intake / exhaust mm 0.20 / 0.25
SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Ratio i 0,914
Oil specifications see lube oil group. 1.3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
max. flow > Q max. l /min (gal/min) 2154 (40)
max. flow Q max. l /min (gal/min) 83 (22)
Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type A10V071

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178/ 157* (47/ 41*)

> +circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 110 AH (in series)
Starter kW 5.4
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 450 / 514
/..
PR 722 F/N xxx> 0103 1000
Datum Edition Date

Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.20.01
PR 722 >103 L>101 M > 103
Type No. 281 397 347
TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 26 (6,4)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm(inch) 175,5 (6,9) 175,5 (6,9) 175,5 (6,9)
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 508 / 610 508 / 610 711 / 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF 5/8 UNF 5/8 UNF
Track roller location s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 2.5 +/>2.5 +/> 2.5
ATTACHMENT
Oil specifications see lube oil > group. 1.3
Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1140 90 / 50 / 1030 90 / 50 / 1030
6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850

Angle cylinder 6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 325
GENERAL DATA
overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3890 3910 3910
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 4890 5190 5190
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5480 5780 5895
track gauge (+1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1800 1800 2084
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 / 13980 14400 /14600 /14850
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13795 / 14035 14300 /14550 /14800
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 / 0.43 0.46 / 0.39 0.35 / 0.31 / 0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 3200 3200 3790
width (angled) mm 2950 2950 3490
max. slope angle 30
weight kg 900
max. slope angle 25
height cable exit 1135
cable size a mm 22
max. length m 65
*) PR 722/103>108, M/103>112
PR 722 B >F/N 281 > B L >F/N 397 > B M >F/N 347
10013000 10013000 10013000
DIESEL ENGINE
Displacement l (cu. in) 5,6 (342)
SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Ratio i 0,914
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 5.4
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 450 P 554
/..
PR 722 B F/N xxx> 1001 3000
Datum Edition Date

Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.21.01
PR 722 B >F/N 281 > B L >F/N 397 > B M >F/N 347>
10013000 10013000 10013000
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 175,5 ( 6,9) 175,5 ( 6,9) 175,5 (6,9)
ATTACHMENT

GENERAL DATA

track gauge (+1width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1800 1800 2084
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 /14000 14400 /14600 /14850

ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.46 / 0.39 0.34 / 0.31 / 0.28
max. slope angle 30
weight kg 1200
cable size a mm 22
max. length m 50
PR 722 B >F/N 281 > B L >F/N 397 > B M >F/N 347
30013170 30013170 30013170
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T>E A1
Displacement l (cu. in) 6.64 (405.2 )
Valve clearance > cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Coolant capacity /DCA 4 l (gal) 52/2 (13.7/0.5)
SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Ratio i 0,914
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 5,4
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 450 P 554
/..
PR 722 B F/N xxx>30013170
Datum Edition Date

Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.22.01
PR 722 B >F/N 281 > B L >F/N 397 > B M >F/N 347>
30013170 30013170 30013170
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 175.5 (6.9) 175.5 (6.9) 175.5 (6.9)
ATTACHMENT

GENERAL DATA

Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 /14000 14400 /14600 /14850

ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.46 / 0.39 0.34 / 0.31 / 0.28
max. slope angle 30
weight kg 1200
cable size a mm 22
max. length m 50
PR 722 B - F/N 281 - BL - F/N 397 - BM - F/N 347 -
31715599 31715599 31715599
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T - E A1
+80
SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Ratio i 0,914
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
max flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
+4


ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 5,4
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-3171 5599
Datum Edition Date

Page 3.1.23.01
Feuille
PR 722 B - F/N 281 - BL - F/N 397 - BM - F/N 347 -
31715599 31715599 31715599
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 711 / 812 / 914
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
ATTACHMENT
Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1140 90 / 50 / 1030


GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6,8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2,8)


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3890 3910
overall length with straight blade mm 4695 5045
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1800 2084
Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 / 14000 14400/14600/14850
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13795 / 14035 14300/14550/14800
Straight blade: blade width mm 3000 3600

3
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,51 / 0,43 0,46 / 0,39 0,35 / 0,31 / 0,28
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,46 / 0,39 0,34 / 0,31 / 0,28
weight kg 1100
slope angle 30
weight kg 1200
cable size mm 22
max. length m 50
PR 722 B - F/N 281 - BL - F/N 397 - BM - F/N 347 -
5600 5600 5600
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T - E A1
+80
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 22,5 (23,7)
SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Ratio i 0,914
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
max. flow replenishing - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
+4
+10
Gear motor - fan drive type ZM 0511
+100


ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 5,4
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date

Page 3.1.24.01
Feuille
PR 722 B - F/N 281 - BL - F/N 397 - BM - F/N 347 -
5600 5600 5600
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 711 / 812 / 914
ATTACHMENT
Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1140 90 / 50 / 1030


GENERAL DATA


Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 / 14000 14400/14600/14850
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13795 / 14035 14300/14550/14800

3
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm2 0,51 / 0,43 0,46 / 0,39 0,35 / 0,31 / 0,28
3
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,46 / 0,39 0,34 / 0,31 / 0,28
weight kg 1100
slope angle 30
weight kg 1200
cable size mm 22
max. length m 50
PR 732 > 2003 L>2003 M > 2003
Type No. 350 412 351
DIESEL ENGINE
Engine version 6 Cyl. V
Rating to DIN 6271 kW 132 ( 180 HP)
Low idle RPM 1/min 800+50
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25.5 (27)
Valve clearance > cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1>6>3>5>2>4
Coolant capacity l (gal) 59 (15.5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 375 (98.7)
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 500 / 515
/..
PR 732 F/N xxx> 2003 2500

Datum Edition Date
Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.30.01
PR 732 >2003 L>2003 M > 2003
Type No. 350 412 351
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 203,2 ( 8,0) 203,2 ( 8,0) 203,2 ( 8,0)
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 508 / 610 508 / 610 711 / 812
Track roller location s>d>s>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 3 +/>3 +/> 3
ATTACHMENT

6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm

Angle cylinder 6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm
GENERAL DATA
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 17150 / 17400 17900 / 18100 18730 / 19150
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.63 / 0.53 0.57 / 0.48 0.37 / 0.32
6>way blade: blade width mm
width (angled) mm
blade capacity m3
weight > attachment complete kg
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2
max. slope angle 31,5
weight kg 1400
max. slope angle
max. line pull kN (t) 390 (39)
cable size a mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
25012999 25012999 25012999
DIESEL ENGINE
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - turbocharged
+50
+80
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 22 (23,25)
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity l (gal) 56 (14,7)
50
Visco fan - at rated RPM 1/min 1630
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Ratio i 0,860
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
+4

max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 209 (55)

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 500 P 555
Gear ratio i total 46,5 : 1
/..
Mjfcifss!
PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 2999
Datum Edition Date

Page 3.1.31.01
Feuille
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
25012999 25012999 25012999
TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 18 (19)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 812 / 965
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track roller location e-d-e-e-d-e e-d-e-d-d-e-d-e
Max. roller frame oscillation 3
ATTACHMENT


GENERAL DATA


Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 17150 / 17400 17900 / 18100 18730 / 19150
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 20000 / 20250 20650 / 20950

3
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,63 / 0,53 0,57 / 0,48 0,37 / 0,32
6-way-blade: blade width mm 3600
width (angled) mm 3390
3
blade capacity m 4,13
weight - attachment complete kg 3120
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,74 / 0,62 0,66 / 0,56
weight kg 1720
slope angle 31 / 36,5
weight kg 1400
max. line pull kN 390 (39t)
cable size mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
30003135 30003135 30003135
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 T - E A2
+50
+80
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 59 / 1,9 (15,5 / 0,5)
50
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
+4


ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss!
PR 732 B F/N xxx-3000 3135
Datum Edition Date

Page 3.1.32.01
Feuille
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
30003135 30003135 30003135
TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 18 (19)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track roller location e-d-e-e-d-e e-d-e-d-d-e-d-e
ATTACHMENT


GENERAL DATA



3
2
3
2
weight kg 1720
weight kg 1400
cable size mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
31365599 31365599 31365599
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 T - E A2
+50
+80
50
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
+4


ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss!
PR 732 B F/N xxx-3136 5599
Datum Edition Date

Page 3.1.33.01
Feuille
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
31365599 31365599 31365599
TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 11 (11,6)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track roller location s-d-s-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
ATTACHMENT


GENERAL DATA



3
2
3
2
weight kg 1720
weight kg 1400
cable size mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
5600 5600 5600
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 T - E A2
+50
+80
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
+10
Axial piston motor - fan drive type A 10 FSM
+100


ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss!
PR 732 B F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date

Page 3.1.34.01
Feuille
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
5600 5600 5600
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track roller location s-d-s-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
ATTACHMENT


GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal range km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
reduced range km/h (mph) 0 4,6 (0 2,8)
Travel speed normal range = III km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)

reduced range - II km/h (mph) 0 6,5 (0 4,0)
reduced range - I km/h (mph) 0 4,0 (0 2,4)



3
2
3
2
weight kg 1720
weight kg 1400
cable size mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 742 > 2001 M > 2001
Type No. 352 353
DIESEL ENGINE
Engine version 6 Cyl. V
Rating to DIN 6271 kW 172 (234 HP)
Low idle RPM 1/min 800+50
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25.5 (27)
Firing order 1>6>3>5>2>4
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 460 (121.5)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 35>40 (9.2 > 10.5)
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 376
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2HPV 130
Gear pump > replenishing / coolant circuit type BOSCH ZP 56
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 117 (30.9)
max. operating pressure (Sp) bar 25
Gear pump > pump control / replenishing type BOSCH ZP 16
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 33 (8.7)
max. operting pressure (St) bar 50
Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type HPR 130

stand by pressure (HD) bar 30+5
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

> +circuit capacity l (gal) 77 (20.3)
Oil specifications see lube oil>group 1.3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6.6
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 550 / 516
/..
Datum Edition Date PR 742 F/N xxx> 2001 2500

Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.40.01
PR 742 >2001 M > 2001
Type No. 352 353
TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 42.9
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm(inch) 215.9 ( 8.5) 215.9 (8.5)
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 508 / 610 / 710 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size 3/4 UNF 3/4 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 3 4
Track roller location s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s
Max. roller frame oscillation +/>3 +/>3
ATTACHMENT


Angle cylinder 6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm
GENERAL DATA
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1980 2180
ground clearance mm 410 410
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 21600 / 21900 / 23000 / 23300
22200
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg
blade capacity m3 6.53 6.23
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.72 / 0.61 / 0.53 0.43 / 0.39
6>way blade: blade width mm
width (angled) mm
blade capacity m3
weight > attachment complete kg
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2
max. slope angle 29
weight kg 2250
max. slope angle
max. line pull kN (t) 520 (53)
cable size a mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
25012999 25012999 25012999
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 TI LIEBHERR
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - intercooled
+50
+80
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607.9)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 22 (23.2)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 450 ( 118.9)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 32 - 37 (8.4 - 9.8)
50
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 376
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x HPV 130
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 272 (2 x 72)
Tandem gear pump - repl.- / cool.- / pump contr. circuit type PRN 55 + 17S SC37 G
replenishing / coolant circuit - max. flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 117 (31)
pump control / replenishing - max. flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 33 (8.7)
max. operating pressure (St) pmax bar 50

max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 292 (77.1)
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

+ circuit capacity l (gal) 88 (23.2)
ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 2999

Page 3.1.41.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
25012999 25012999 25012999
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 / 710 812 / 914
Carrier rollers each side 2
ATTACHMENT
GENERAL DATA


22150 / 22450 / 22925 / 23225

Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 23550 / 23850
22750 23525

3
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,73 / 0,62 / 0,54 0,69 / 0,58 / 0,50 0,44 / 0,40

weight kg 2600

weight kg 2550
max. line pull kN (t) 520 (53t)
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
30003088 30003088 30003088
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 TI - E A2
+50
+80
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25,5 (27)
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 62 / 2,4 (16.4 / 0.66)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 20 - 35
50
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 376
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM


ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742 B F/N xxx-3000 3088

Page 3.1.42.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
30003088 30003088 30003088
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
ATTACHMENT
GENERAL DATA


22150 / 22450 / 22925 / 23225

22750 23525

3
2

weight kg 2600

weight kg 2550
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
30895233 30895233 30895233
DIESEL ENGINE
+50
+80
50
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 376
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM


ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742 B F/N xxx-3089 5233

Page 3.1.43.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
30895233 30895233 30895233
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
ATTACHMENT
GENERAL DATA


22950 / 23350 / 23700 / 24100

23750 24450

3
2

weight kg 2600

weight kg 2550
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
52345599 52345599 52345599
DIESEL ENGINE
+50
+80
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 450 ( 118,9)
50
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 374
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Tandem gear pump - replenishing - coolant circuit / fan drive type PRN 55 + 17S SC37 G
max. flow - Qmax total(Q1+Q2) l/min (gal/min) 150 (39,6)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 88 (23,2)
ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
TRAVEL GEAR
/..
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742 B F/N xxx-5234 5599

Page 3.1.44.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
52345599 52345599 52345599
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty.4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty.3 4
Carrier rollers each side qty 2
ATTACHMENT
GENERAL DATA


22950 / 23350 / 23700 / 24100

23750 24450

3
2

weight kg 2600

weight kg 2550
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
5600 5600 5600
DIESEL ENGINE
+50
+80
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 374
Ratio i 0,860
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 282 (2x 75)
Tandem gear pump - replenishing - coolant circuit / fan drive type PRN 55 + 17S SC37 G
+10
Axial piston motor - fan drive type A 10 FSM
+100


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 88 (23,2)
ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Starter kW 6,6
/..
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600

Page 3.1.45.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
5600 5600 5600
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty.3 4
Track roller location e-d-e-d-e-d-e e-d-e-d-d-e-d-e
Carrier rollers each side qty. 2
ATTACHMENT
GENERAL DATA
reduced range - II km/h (mph) 0 6,5 (0 4,0) from F/N xxx-6200 reverse 0 7,8 (0 4,8)
reduced range - I km/h (mph) 0 4,0 (0 2,4) from F/N xxx-6200 reverse 0 4,8 (0 3,0)


22950 / 23350 / 23700 / 24100

23750 24450

3
2

weight kg 2600

weight kg 2550
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 752 F/N 324-
22005599
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 9406 TI-E A3
Construction 6 cyl. V - intercooled
+50
+60
Valve clearance -cold intake/exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
SPLITTERBOX
Type 350 B 365
Ratio i 0,83
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2xBPV 200 L-EH
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2x425 (2x112,3)
HY/ZGGS11/45+38 L (F/N -20022006 = PRR 44+32 SC,
Tandem gear pumps - replenishing/coolant circuit type
F/N -20072027 = HY/ZGGS11/45+32L)
max. flow - Qmax total (Q1+Q2) l/min (gal/min) 180 (47,6) (162 (42,8))
Travel motors type 4xBMV 186 HF
Variable flow pump - fan drive A10V28

max. operating pressure (LA) pmax bar 160
stand by pressure (LA) (when machine is cold) bar 30
Axial piston-constant motor (fan - water cooler) type AA10FM28
operation RPM nmax (nmin) 1/min 1300 (350)
Gear motor (fan - hydraulic oil cooler) type SNM2/19 CO 02
Variable flow working hydraulic pump type HPR 160

Control valve block - working hydraulic type M7-3022
Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 210 (55,4)

- +circuit capacity l (gal) 170 (44,8)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 2x12V 170Ah (in series)
Alternator 28V 55A
Starter kW 9
/..
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N 324-20025599

Page 3.1.50.01
Feuille
PR 752 F/N 324-
20025599
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2xFAT 650 / 508
Construction spur- + 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) 4x disk brake
Oil quantity - gear area l (qt) 2x21 (22,2)
Oil quantity - sealed area l (qt) 9,4 (9,9)
TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 215,9 (8,5)
Track chain length links 44
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 560 / 610 / 711
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty.3
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s
ATTACHMENT
Semi-U-Blade
Lift cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 120 / 070 / 1490
Tilt cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 200 / 090 / 0195
Cutting angle cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 220 / 090 / 0145
Ripper 1 tooth / 3 teeth

Ripping angle cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 180 / 100 / 0480
GENERAL DATA
Travel speed - 2 ranges normal range km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
Travel speed - 3 ranges normal range = III km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)

Basic machine height over cab mm 3640

overall length (transport dimension) mm 4885
length with semi-U blade mm 6515
track gauge (+1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 2180
Operating weight with semi-U blade (varies due to pad width) kg 34200 / 34400 / 34800
Ground pressure with semi-U blade (varies due to pad width) kg/cm 0,96 / 0,89 / 0,77
Semi-U blade blade width mm 4200

weight blade complete kg 6350
Ripper add. length ripper lowered mm 2390

1 tooth weight - ripper complete kg 4200
max. penetration mm 1200
max. slope angle 33
3 teeth weight - ripper complete kg 4900
max. slope angle 29
PR 752 F/N 324-
56006199
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 9406 TI-E A3
+60
+60
SPLITTERBOX
Type 350 B 365
Ratio i 0,83
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Tandem gear pumps - replenishing/coolant circuit type HY/ZGGS11/45+38 L
max. flow - Qmax total (Q1+Q2) l/min (gal/min) 180 (47,6)

max. operating pressure (LA) (electronic regulated) pmax bar 160


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Alternator 28V 80A
Starter kW 9
/..
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N 324-56006199

Page 3.1.51.01
Feuille
PR 752 F/N 324-
56006199
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
ATTACHMENT
Semi-U-Blade

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed - 2 ranges normal range km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
Travel speed - 3 ranges normal range = III km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)




max. slope angle 33
max. slope angle 29
PR 752 F/N 324-
6200
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 9406 TI-E A3
+60
+60
SPLITTERBOX
Type 350 B 365
Ratio i 0,83
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Tandem gear pumps - replenishing/coolant circuit type HY/ZGGS11/45+38 L
max. flow - Qmax total (Q1+Q2) l/min (gal/min) 180 (47,6)

max. operating pressure (LA) (electronic regulated) pmax bar 190


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Alternator 28V 80A
Starter kW 9
/..
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N 324-6200

Page 3.1.52.01
Feuille
PR 752 F/N 324-
6200
TRAVEL GEAR
TRACK COMPONENTS
ATTACHMENT
Semi-U-Blade

GENERAL DATA
reduced range - II km/h (mph) 0 6,5 (0 4,0) reverse 0 7,8 (0 4,8)
reduced range - I km/h (mph) 0 4,0 (0 2,4) reverse 0 4,8 (0 3,0)




max. slope angle 33
max. slope angle 29
Customer:.................................................Mach.-Type..............F/N.........-..............Hours...............Date.............
Maintenance by
operating hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT
by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel

first and only maintenance interval OM operation/maintenance manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM service manual
every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
at delivery
every 250
every 500
at 10 - 50
cFor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
d For quality and viscosity guidelines see Service Fluids, SM - section 1.3 Reference Notes
e For adjustment values, see data page entries in SM
DIESEL ENGINE
{ { { { { { Check engine oil level and pressure OM c
{ { { { { { Check coolant level OM c
{ { { Check radiator cap and fan OM SM
{ { { Replace coolant filter, check antifreece / DCA4 percentage in coolant OM SM cd
{ { { { { Check fuel filter water seperator - drain if necessary OM
{ { { { Replace engine oil - at least once a year OM cd
{ { { Replace lube oil filter - at least once a year OM SM
{ { { PR 712B / 722B - Replace fuel finefilter element - stage 2 OM
{ { { Check condition and tension of V-belt OM SM
{ { { Check engine, radiator and oil pan for dirt - clean if necessary OM
{ { { { Check oil, cooling and fuel system for leaks and condition OM SM
{ { { { Check air intake and exhaust system for tightness and leaks OM SM
{ { Check oil pan and engine mounts for condition and tightness OM SM
{ { Check engine RPM - adjust if necessary SM e
{ { Check and adjust valve clearance - with cold engine SM e
{ { Check and service injection pump and potentiometer linkage OM SM
{ { Drain fuel tank condensation and sediments OM
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Check fuel prefilter element - clean if necessary OM
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Replace fuel filter cartridge OM
{ { Grease flywheel teeth SM
{ { Check preheater system (before cold season) SM
{ PR 712B / 722B - Replace fuel prefilter element - stage 1 OM
Replace air filter elements - if necessary or at least once a year OM
Replace oil separator - every 2 years OM SM
Replace coolant / corrosion inhibitor and DCA4 - every 2 years OM SM cd
Check / adjust fuel injectors - if necessary or at least every 3000 operating hours SM e
Check coolant pump (at PR 752 not necessary) - every 2 years / 3000 hrs. SM e
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
{ { { { { { Check oil level in hydraulic tank OM c
{ { { { Clean magnetic rod - daily up to 250 operating hours OM SM
Replace return oil filter element in hydraulic tank, OM
{ { { check all case drain filter inserts for deposits / contamination SM
{ { { Replace pressure filter (element) of the repl. circuit OM
Check attachment and travel hydraulic system for function and leaks,
{ { { { OM SM
check hydraulic hose routing / for chafing
{ { { Drain hydraulic tank condensation and sediments (at least every 6 months) OM
{ { { Check hydraulic oil cooler - clean if necessary + check fan at PR 752 OM
{ { { Check all hydraulic pressures according setting prescription, adjust as necessary SM e
{ { { Check allscrews, nuts connections for tightness OM SM
Replace hydraulic oil (refill via tank filter) - al least every 4 years
{ - Whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used OM cd
request / observe any special guidelines from manufacturer

PR 712 B F/N xxx- 3000
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx- 3000
Maintenance and PR 732 B F/N xxx-3000 3039
Datum Edition Date PR 742 B F/N xxx-3000 3024
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 2008
01 00 Inspection Guidelines Blatt
Page
Feuille 3.2.12.01
Maintenance by
operating hours

every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
at delivery
every 250
every 500
at 10 - 50
cFor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM Durch- Bemer-
d For quality and viscosity guidelines see Service Fluids, SM - section 1.3 fhrungs- kungen
e For adjustment values, see data page entries in SM hinweis
SPLITTERBOX
{ { { { { Check oil level OM c
{ { { Replace gear oil - at least once a years OM cd
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check system function incl. indicators and gauges OM SM
{ { { { Check battery electrolyte level OM c
{ { { Check, clean and grease battery terminals OM SM
{ { { Check wire routing and connections OM SM
{ { Check control system according to adjustment checklist - adjust as necessary SM e
{ { Check battery acid concentration / charge (before cold season) SM e
HEATER / FRESH AIR SYSTEM

{ { { { Check system for function and leaks OM SM
Replace air filter - as necessary OM
TRAVEL GEAR
{ { { { Check oil level - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods OM c
{ { { Check screws and nuts for tightness OM SM
{ { Replace gear oil - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods - at least every 4 years OM cd
TRACK COMPONENTS
Check all bolts and nuts of track components,
{ { { OM SM
in particular at track pads and sprocket segments for tightness
{ { { Check track and carrier rollers, idlers for leaks OM
{ { { { PR 752 - grease outer bearings of equalizer bar - shorten interval as necessary OM e
{ { { Check idler guides / adjust, replace parts as necessary OM SM e
{ PR 752 - check screws at the outher rings of support shafts for tight seating OM SM
{ Adjust chain tension to suit application - as necessary OM SM
Clean track components - as necessary OM
Check track components for wear - as necessary SM e
ATTACHMENTS
{ { { { Check blade adjustment / centered to main frame - after every installation OM
{ { { Check bolts, nuts and pin safeties for tightness OM
Check all cutting edges, corner shanks and ripper teeth for wear,
{ { { { { { OM
check if attachments are suited to application
{ { { Check attachments for damage OM
{ { { Check all attachment bearings for play / wear OM SM e
Grease all bearings including lift cylinder forks according to the lubrication chart
{ { { { { OM d
- shorten interval as necessary
GENERAL
{ { { { Check entire machine for proper maintenance and condition OM SM
PR 752 - Grease door hinges on battery and oil cooler room - as necessary OM
Customer:...............................................Mach.-Type...........F/N.........-.............Hours..............Date............
Maintenance by
operating hours

every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
at delivery
every 250
every 500
every 50
DIESEL ENGINE
{ { { { { { { Check engine oil level and pressure OM c
{ { { { { { { Check coolant level OM c
{ { { { { { Check engine, radiator and oil pan for dirt - clean if necessary OM
{ { { { { { Check fuel filter water seperator - drain if necessary OM
{ { { { { Drain fuel tank condensation and sediments - al least once a week OM
{ { { { Replace engine oil ( = as soon as after 30 operating hours) - at least once a year OM cd
{ { { Replace lube oil filter ( = as soon as after 30 operating hours) - at least once a year OM / SM
{ { { Check radiator cap and fan OM / SM
{ { { Replace coolant filter, check antifreece / DCA4 percentage in coolant OM / SM cd
{ { { Check condition and tension of V-belt OM / SM
{ { { { Check oil, cooling and fuel system for leaks and condition OM / SM
{ { { Check air intake and exhaust system for tightness and leaks OM / SM
{ { Check oil pan and engine mounts for condition and tightness OM / SM
{ { Check and service injection pump and potentiometer linkage OM / SM
{ { PR 712B / 722B - Replace fuel filter(s) (prefilter and fine filter elements) - stage 1 and 2 OM
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Check fuel prefilter element - clean if necessary OM
{ { Check preheater system (before cold season) SM
Replace oil separator - every 2 years OM / SM
Replace coolant / corrosion inhibitor and DCA4 - every 2 years OM / SM cd
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check oil level in hydraulic tank OM c
{ { { { Clean magnetic rod - daily up to 250 operating hours OM / SM
Replace return oil filter element in hydraulic tank,
{ { { OM / SM
check all case drain filter inserts for deposits / contamination
{ { { { OM / SM
check hydraulic hose routing / for chafing
{ { { Drain hydraulic tank condensation and sediments (at least every 6 months) OM
{ { { Check hydraulic oil cooler - clean if necessary + PR 752 - fan for condition OM
{ { { Check all hydraulic pressures according setting prescription, adjust as necessary SM e
{ { { Check allscrews, nuts connections for tightness OM / SM
Replace hydraulic oil (refill via tank filter) - al least every 4 years
{ - Whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used OM cd

PR 712 B F/N xxx-30013083
PR 752 F/N xxx-2009 2059
Page
Feuille 3.2.13.01
Maintenance by
operating hours

every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
at delivery
every 250
every 500
every 50
SPLITTERBOX
{ { { Replace gear oil - at least every 2 years OM cd
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check system function incl. indicators and gauges OM / SM
{ { { Check, clean and grease battery terminals OM / SM
{ { { Check wire routing and connections OM / SM
{ { Check control system according to adjustment checklist - adjust as necessary SM e
{ { Check battery acid concentration / charge (before cold season) SM e

{ { { { Check system for function and leaks OM / SM
Replace air filter - as necessary OM
TRAVEL GEAR
{ { { Check screws and nuts for tightness OM / SM
{ { PR 752 - replace lube oil from cone seal area - at least every 4 years OM cd
TRACK COMPONENTS
{ { { OM / SM
{ { { Check track and carrier rollers, idlers for leaks OM
{ { { Check idler guides / adjust, replace parts as necessary OM / SM e
{ PR 752 - check screws at the outher rings of support shafts for tight seating OM / SM
{ Adjust chain tension to suit application - as necessary OM / SM
ATTACHMENTS
{ { { { { { { OM
{ { { { { OM d
{ { { Check all attachment bearings for play / wear OM / SM e
GENERAL
{ { { { Check entire machine for proper maintenance and condition OM / SM
PR 752 - Grease door hinges on battery and oil cooler room - as necessary
Explain machine literature and/or special instructions / safety guidelines to operating
{ OM
personnel
Customer:............................................Mach.-Type...........F/N(PIN).........-..............Sm.-hours............Date............
Maintenance/Inspection
by Operating Hours

first and only maintenance interval OM Operation Manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM Service Manual
every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
at delivery
every 250
every 500 cfor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
every 50
d for quality and viscosity guidelines see "Service fluids", SM - section 1.3
e for adjustment values, see data page entries in SM Reference Notes
DIESEL ENGINE
{ { { { { { Check engine, radiator and belly pan for dirt - clean if necessary OM
{ { { { { { Check fuel filter water separator / drain if necessary OM
{ { { { { Drain fuel tank condensation and sediments - at least once a week OM
{ { { Replace coolant filter, check antifreeze / DCA4 percentage in coolant OM SM cd
{ { { Check air intake and exhaust system for tightness and leaks OM SM
{ { PR 712B / 722B - Replace fuel pre- and fine filter elements - stage 1 and 2
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Check fuel prefilter strainer / clean if necessary OM
{ { Check flame glow plug system (before start of cold season) SM
Replace coolant with antifreeze and DCA4 - every 2 years OM SM cd
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
{ { { { OM SM
check hydraulic hose routing for chafing
{ { { Drain hydraulic tank condensation and sediments (at least every 6 month) OM
{ { { Check hydraulic oil cooler for dirt / clean if necessary, check fan for condition OM
{ { { Check / adjust all hydraulic pressures according to adjustment checklist SM e
{ { { Check mountings and fittings for tight seating OM SM
Replace hydraulic oil (refill via tank filter) - at least every 4 years
{ - whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used OM cd

PR 712 B F/N xxx-3084 5599
PR 752 F/N xxx-2060 5599
Page
Feuille 3.2.14.01
by Operating Hours

every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
at delivery
every 250
every 500
cfor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
every 50
SPLITTERBOX
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check system functions incl. indicators and gauges OM SM
{ { Check control system according to adjustment checklist / adjust as necessary SM e
{ { Check battery acid concentration / charge (before start of cold season) SM e

Replace fresh air filter - as necessary OM
TRAVEL GEAR
{ { { Check bolts and nuts for tightness OM SM
{ { Replace lube oil from cone seal area - at least every 4 years OM cd
TRACK COMPONENTS
{ { { OM SM
{ { { Check carrier rollers, track rollers and idlers for leaks OM
{ PR 752 - check screws at the outer rings of support shafts for tight seating OM SM
ATTACHMENTS
{ { { { { { { OM
{ { { { { OM d
GENERAL
Explain machine literature, in specially Operation Manual-safety guidelines
{ OM
to the operating personnel
Customer:............................................Mach.-Type...........F/N(PIN).........-..............Sm.-hours............Date............
by Operating Hours

every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
at delivery
every 250
every 500 cfor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
every 50
DIESEL ENGINE
{ { { { { { Check engine, radiator and belly pan for dirt - clean if necessary OM
{ { { { { { Check fuel filter water separator / drain if necessary OM
{ { { { { Drain fuel tank condensation and sediments - at least once a week OM
{ { { Replace coolant filter, check antifreeze / DCA4 percentage in coolant OM SM cd
{ { { Check air intake and exhaust system for tightness and leaks OM SM
{ { { Replace fuel prefilter - filter element OM
{ { Replace fuel fine filter cartridge OM
{ { Check flame glow plug system (before start of cold season) SM
Replace coolant with antifreeze and DCA4 - every 2 years OM SM cd
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
{ { { Replace pressure filter (element) of the replenishing circuit OM
{ { { { check hydraulic hose routing for chafing
OM SM
Drain hydraulic tank condensation and sediments (at least every 6 month)
{ { { - whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used drain once a week
OM
{ { { Check hydraulic oil cooler for dirt / clean if necessary, check fan for condition OM
{ { Check / adjust all hydraulic pressures according to adjustment checklist SM e
{ { { Check mountings and fittings for tight seating OM SM
Replace hydraulic oil (refill via tank filter) - at least every 4 years
{ - whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used OM cd

Mjfcifss! PR 722B F/N xxx-5600
Maintenance and PR 732B F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600

Page 3.2.15.01
Feuille
by Operating Hours

every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
at delivery
every 250
every 500
cfor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
every 50
SPLITTERBOX
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check system functions incl. indicators and gauges OM SM
{ { Check control system according to adjustment checklist / adjust as necessary SM e
{ { Check battery acid concentration / charge (before start of cold season) SM e

Replace fresh air filter - as necessary OM
TRAVEL GEAR
{ { { Check bolts and nuts for tightness OM SM
{ { Replace lube oil from cone seal area / flush cone seal area - at least every 4 years OM cd
TRACK COMPONENTS
{ { { in particular at track pads and sprocket segments for tightness
OM SM
{ { { Check carrier rollers, track rollers and idlers for leaks OM

{ PR 752 - check screws at the outer rings of support shafts for tight seating OM SM
ATTACHMENTS
{ { { { { { { check if attachments are suited to application
OM
{ { { { { - shorten interval as necessary
OM d
GENERAL
Explain machine literature, in specially Operation Manual-safety guidelines
{ to the operating personnel
OM
1. General Guidelines
1.1. Documentation of work to be performed

All maintenance work is noted in the Maintenance and Inspection Guidelines for the subject machine model,
see group 3.2.
A detailed record of completed work can be made by checking off all completed items on a report form and
comparison with this list.
Record the values obtained during adjustment checks on the adjustment check list form for the corresponding
machine model, see group 3.5.
In addition, confirm the completion of the inspection / delivery in the machines inspection notebook, send the
appropriate service check to the applicable LIEBHERR representative. Remove the old sticker and attach the
next inspection sticker, which is also in the notebook, in a clearly visible location in the operators cab of the
machine.
Explain the set-up and contents of the machine literature to the operator. Emphasize the safety guidelines and
regulations and all necessary maintenance work to be carried out between inspections.
1.2. Safety Guidelines

When performing any maintenance, inspection or repair work, observe all appropriate safety guidelines as
outlined in group 1.2.01 and in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. In addition, observe all regional labors
laws and regulations, accident prevention regulations and all applicable local, state and national laws and
regulations.
1.3. Intervals
Never exceed the given maintenance and inspection intervals; they can be shortened, if necessary. For
example: replace the filters and drain the sediment in the fuel tank in case of contamination, clean the radiator
in case of contamination, replace the filters and change the oil during and after repairs, etc.
1.4. Oil samples

Any required oil samples must be taken directly from the component before changing the oil. Before taking
the oil sample, operate the machine to circulate the oil to distribute any existing concentration of particles and to
prevent incorrect test results due to deposits. To determine any residual contamination after the repair is
completed, take another sample shortly after putting the machine back in service.
Use the hand pump and take an oil sample from the center of the oil tank, do not overfill the oil sample
container. Replace the suction hose on the hand pump after taking an oil sample.
Fill out all forms to be submitted with the oil sample correctly and completely. Incorrect information can lead
to unnecessary measures or to the elimination of necessary procedures and cause unnecessary charges.
For further details, refer to the oil sample documentation.
1.5. Oils, filters and miscellaneous

If possible, always drain the oil at operating temperature. For that reason complete all work, which has to be
performed when the machine is cold first, such as adjusting the valves on the Diesel engine.
Change the oil filters after draining the oil and before adding new oil.
Before restarting the machine, bleed the system, as necessary. Turn the starter
for 10 - 15 seconds before starting the Diesel engine.
When possible, cut open the replaced filter cartridges and check them for
abnormal deposits. The type and amount of deposits can give clues about the
condition of the system and / or future problems.
Dispose of used oil, filters and other waste products in an environmentally
safe manner !
Maintenance and Inspection LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 04 Instructions Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.01
Use only original LIEBHERR spare part and supplies for all maintenance, inspection and repair work. If the
operator insists on the installation of other parts, inform the operator that this could cause potential loss of
warranty coverage; make sure to note this request and installation on the inspection report.
For tightening torques, refer to page 1.4.02. For torque instructions for track pad and sprocket segment
screws, refer to page 12.1.00.
2. Maintenance guidelines
2.1. Diesel engine maintenance

On new machines, make sure to observe the first oil and filter change interval, because corrosion inhibitors
have been added to the engine oil at the factory.
2.1.1 Change the lube oil filter

Loosen the filter cartridges with a filter band and unscrew them by hand.
Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual for installation position.
Standing filters can also be removed with a suitable tool on the top of the
cartridges. The filters are designed to retain the oil in the filters!
'Hand-tighten' (30 Nm) the filter cartridges.
2.1.2 Check the radiator cap and fan

Radiator cap - Check the seal and function of the pressure relief valve. Replace the radiator cap, if necessary.
Note: Insufficient pressure in the cooling system increases formation of vapors and can damage the engine.
Check the fan for damage and make sure the distance between the fan and the radiator guard is the same on
all sides. Adjust the guard, if necessary.
2.1.3 Check / replace the coolant / antifreeze mixture / corrosion inhibitor - in cooling systems without coolant filter
Check the required percentage of antifreeze or corrosion inhibitor with an optical
densimeter - see Special Tools, page 2.1.30.01. The test procedure is
independent of the coolant temperature.
A line between light and dark on the right scale of the sight gauge shows the
protection value.
When using antifreeze / corrosion inhibitor, the lowest temperature for which
antifreeze protection is provided will be shown ( minus values above the 0 C
mark, protection should be provided to - 37 C). Refer to the user instructions
given by the manufacturer for further details.
If in certain exceptional cases, the system is filled only with corrosion
inhibitors, use the same scale to read the protection. Each -1C corresponds to
1% by volume of corrosion inhibitor (nominal value = 1%).
Replace the coolant containing antifreeze every 2 years. Replace all special
mixtures once a year. To drain the coolant from radiator and engine block, refer
to instructions given in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
See also group 1.3.01 - Service items, paragraph 1.3 - Coolant.
If required, check the coolant pump before refilling, see paragraph 2.1.11.
2.1.4 Check / replace coolant - antifreeze and DCA4 concentration - in cooling systems with a coolant filter
Check the DCA4 concentration before changing the coolant filter. Check for possible gel formation.
Use the DCA4 test kit CC2602M, see Special Tools, group 2.1 to check the system. The kit contains multi-
language test instructions and maintenance guidelines, which must be observed. Check the expiration date of
the test kit (example: "Use before Nov.1999").
If gel build up is found, drain the coolant and clean the system. Before refilling, check coolant / antifreeze
quality and specification. The antifreeze may not be out of date nor emit silicates.
Note: To prepare the coolant mixture, mix water first with the correct ratio of DCA4. Then add the required
quantity of antifreeze to the water - DCA4 mixture and mix thoroughly.
Replace the coolant with antifreeze and DCA4 every 2 years. Replace special coolant fluids every year. For
details on draining the coolant from radiator and engine block, refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
See also group 1.3.01 - Service items, paragraph 1.3 - Coolant.
If necessary, check the coolant pump before refilling, see 2.1.11.
2.1.5 V-belt - Check condition and tension
Check the belt tension manually, as outlined in the "Operation and

Maintenance Manual".
To check the V-belt tension with the Krikit test unit, (Id. No. 8122560),
refer to the Diesel Engine Manual.
Replace worn or brittle V-belts.
For details on adjusting and changing the belt, refer to the "Operation
and Maintenance Manual".
2.1.6 Check the oil, cooling and fuel systems as well as the intake and exhaust systems
Check the systems for leaks, damage and chafed hoses. Repair leaks immediately, tighten loose connections,
fittings and hose clamps. Replace chafed hoses or lines. Make sure they are routed properly to prevent
chafing and kinks.
Check the radiator mounts, change the radiator mounts, if necessary.
Check the air filter housing and filter elements in the housing to ensure they are seated tightly. If applicable,
replace damaged parts, seals and elements.
2.1.7 Checking the oil pan and engine mounts for tightness
Check the screws on the oil pan and engine mounts, retighten if necessary. For torque values, see group 1.4.
Check engine mounts, change engine mounts, if necessary. For torque values, see page 15.3.
Check other fittings and components, such as fuel injectors, to ensure they are tight.
2.1.8 Check / adjust engine RPM - Service mechanical linkage to injection pump and potentiometer
Check the RPMs when you check the electronic control system. See Adjustment checklist, group 3.5.
If the required high / low idle RPMs are not reached, adjust the stop screws on the engine throttle control in the
cab, adjust the routing / adjustment of the shut off and throttle control cable, check the neutral functions of
hydraulic systems, and - if necessary - check the adjustment of the injection pump - see group 17.4.
The engine RPMs can also be checked with an impulse tachometer (connect to a clear injection line), see
Special Tools, page 2.1.10.
Check the mechanical linkage to the injection pump and potentiometer for damage, check the ball joints for
wear. Replace any damaged or worn parts.
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.02
2.1.9 Check / adjust valve clearance
Check and adjust valve clearance when the engine is cold (ambient temperature).
For valve clearance, firing order and cylinder location, see page 4.3.10.01. For further details and adjustment
instructions, refer to the Diesel Engine Manual.
Install the engine turning fixture, see Special Tools page 2.1.10 (see point 2.1.10) in place of the cover on
the flywheel housing.
2.1.10 Check / grease the flywheel teeth

Remove the cover from the flywheel housing and check the flywheel
teeth. Apply about 1 cm of grease in the visible tooth cavity. Reinstall
the cover.
Note: Whenever possible, use non-metallic based greases.

High metal or graphite content as well as too much grease
combined with metallic friction, can cause problems with
the RPM sensor signal.
2.1.11 Check the flame glow plug system - Replace the oil seperator - Check / test the fuel injectors - Check the
coolant pump
A defective flame glow plug system can impair the starting performance of the Diesel engine. For that
reason, check the system before the start of the cold season.
The diaphragm of the oil separator can leak due to aging or external damage and cause contamination
damage to the engine. Check the service time and replace old or damaged oil separators.
Check / test fuel injectors if there is any decrease in performance, if the engine runs rough, if you hear the
engine knocking, or if the exhaust is black.
If required, remove the cover on the coolant pump and check the axial play of the pump shaft with a dial
indicator. If the axial play 0.1 mm, change the coolant pump.
For further details, refer to the Diesel Engine Manual.
2.2. Inspect the hydraulic system
2.2.1 Clean the magnetic rod in the hydraulic tank

Check and clean the magnetic rod daily on new machines and after repairs until you find only a minute amount
of particles. Check the magnetic rod at regular intervals. Any increase in particles indicate abnormal wear.
2.2.2 Check / replace the return filter elements

Replace the main return filter elements installed in the hydraulic tank.
Check all case drain filters on travel pumps, motors and attachment pump for contamination.
If any deposits are found, determine their origin and cause. Repair or replace components, as necessary.
Replace case drain filters.
2.2.3 Check the working and the travel hydraulic system for function and leaks / check hose routing and check
hoses for chafting, check mountings and fittings for tightness
Actuate all travel and working functions, check for problems.
Check the actuating disc, plunger and universal joint of the working hydraulic joysticks for wear, lubricate
lightly and adjust, as necessary. For details, refer to page 8.5.01.02. Proceed the same way for pilot controls
for added attachments.
To check the accumulator (safety control) for the working hydraulic (except for on RL machines), start the
Diesel engine and raise the front attachment. Shut off the engine (turn ignition key again to position 1) and
leave the safety lever in raised position. Actuate the ' attachment down' function quickly and several times. If
the attachment can be lowered less than 4 times, the accumulator is defective or there is excessive leakage in
the system.
Check hoses and lines for leaks, make sure there are no kinks. Check
for chafing. Replace chafed, sweaty (brittle) and old hoses! See safety
guidelines, page 1.2.01.07.
Do not route control, leak oil and tank lines and hoses together with high
pressure hoses, do not route them over sharp corners, edges or hose
fittings.
Check connections for leaks and replace seal rings, as necessary.
Check piston rods for damage, check piston rod bearings for leaks. Repair, as necessary.
Check mounting screws on hydraulic components (pumps, motors, tank, etc.) as well as flange connections
for tightness. Retighten, if necessary.
2.2.4 Check / adjust all hydraulic pressures

Carry out pressure checks / adjustments according to adjustment checklist for the corresponding machine
model - see group 3.5 - and record the results.
For further details, data and instructions, refer to the quick reference for the adjustment checklist or the
appropriate section in the Service Manual.
2.3. Inspect the electrical system
2.3.1 Check the function of the system including indicators and gauges
Turn on all electrical functions and test all indicators and gauges on the instrument panel, as outlined in the
"Operation and Maintenance Manual".
In case of problems, check fuses and / or cables. Refer to the corresponding schematics in group 9..
2.3.2 Clean / check / grease the battery connections, check the cable routing and connections
Check the battery terminals and cable clamps for corrosion and
tightness. Clean and grease the clamps and terminals at regular
intervals. Check the batteries for external damage and leaks.
Check the battery cable harness for chafing, check connections for
corrosion. If chafed areas have been found, wrap them with electrical
tape, reroute them and shrink fit the cable harness to prevent moisture
infiltration.
2.3.3 Check / adjust the electronic control system

On machines with electronic crawler control / E-box version CEP, use the test box to check and adjust the
system, as outlined in group 10.4..
On machines with electronic crawler control / E-box version RST , use a notebook computer and the LIKOM
Service Set, as outlined in group 10.5.
Perform all checks / adjustments according to the adjustment checklist for the corresponding machine model
- see group 3.5 - and record the results.
For special tools, refer to page 2.1.30.01.
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.03
2.3.4 Check the battery electrolyte level (charge condition)
Use an optical battery charge tester to check the electrolyte level, see Special Tools, page 2.1.30.01.
The tester displays a line between light and dark on the left scale of the window,
which means:
GOOD = battery charged
FAIR = battery half charged
RECHARGE = battery discharged
Check the battery acid before adding water. Perform a separate test for each
battery cell.
If test values are the same for all cells, below 1200, the battery must be re- charged
with an external battery charger. If the test values vary (difference is greater than
0.02), or if they are below 1.100, the battery must be replaced.
Note: Disconnect the negative ( - ) terminal first, then disconnect the
positive terminal ( +) ; connect the positive + terminal first, then
connect the negative terminal ( - ).
For further details on the use of the battery charge tester or on the charging
procedure, refer to the manufacturers instructions.
Caution : Battery acid is highly corrosive! Handle the battery very carefully, always wear safety glasses and
gloves. There is a danger of explosion in case of sparks! Make sure to strictly observe all safety
guidelines!
2.4. Inspect the heater, ventilation and air conditioner
2.4.1 Check the system for function and for leaks

Check all heater and fresh air functions and/or cooling function, if an air conditioner is installed. For further
details, see Operation and Maintenance Manual.
In case of heater problems, check the connections of the input and return lines, check for leaks. See group
17.3.
For maintenance / malfunctions on air conditioners, call an air conditioning technician. For details, see group
17.5 and/or "Operation and Maintenance Manual".
2.5. Inspect the travel gear
2.5.1 Check screws for tightness

Check all mounting screws for tightness, torque as necessary. For tightening torques, see page 1.4.02.01.
Note: If the oil level is too high, the disk brake or travel motor seals may be leaking. On gears with two
(2) life time seals, check the oil level (oil volume) in the seal chamber, open gears if necessary
and check the inner life time seal (seal chamber is filled with hydraulic oil SAE 20, see Operation
and Maintenance Manual).
Remove the gear cover and check hoses and flange connections for leaks.
2.6. Inspect the track components
2.6.1 Check screws and nuts for tightness

This inspection is especially important on new track components. Loose
track pad screws can also be detected by offset nuts..
Replace loose screws and retorque them. For safety reasons , retorque
similar screw connections on the affected part as well.
For torque specifications on track pad and sprocket segment screws,
refer to page 12.1.00.01. For all other screws, use tightening torques
given in section 1.4.
2.6.2 Check / adjust idler guides

For check and adjustment details, refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Incorrectly adjusted idler
guides will lead to idler damage!
If the idler guide can no longer be properly adjusted due to excessive
wear, replace worn parts.
Wear strips for vertical play are attached to the inside of the roller
frame and on the claws of the idler guide by tack welding or with
screws.
If new wear strips are installed and shims are intended to be installed,
replace missing shims under the screw heads / covers for subsequent
adjustments.
If there are no more shims for the lateral play adjustment, replace or
recondition the guide plates and add new shims, if the design calls for
them, for subsequent adjustments.
For details about idler guides for various machine types, refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual or
group 12.4.
2.6.3 PR 752 - Check screws of the support shaft mounting for tightness
Demount wire guard1. Tighten the screws2 of the support shaft
crosswise up to the required torque- see section 1.4.02.
Note: It is possible that the ring doesnt run in smooth. So repeat
this action at least twice with different begins to reach the
required screw torque for a long time.
2.6.4 Adjust the track chain tension to the job application, check the track
components for wear
Chain tension must be adjusted to suit the actual job application, since different ground conditions result in
different material accumulation, but the slack should always be the same. If chains are tightened too much,
track wear is significantly increased.
Stop the machine in forward direction on level ground. The track chain tension is correct when the slack
between the carrier roller and the idler or carrier roller and sprocket is approx. 40 to 60 mm, depending on
track design.
The track guards must be selected according to the working conditions, see page 12.2.00.04, paragraph 3.3.
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.04
For track wear inspection, measuring guidelines, wear data (wear chart) and evaluation of wear patterns
and causes, see group 12.2.
When checking the track components, always visually inspect the elastic bearings on support shafts and
the equalizer bar.
2.7. Inspect the attachment
2.7.1 Check all bearings for play / wear

To check the bearing play at the trunion, apply pressure upward or
downward to one side and check the play with a feeler gauge or similar
tool on the opposite site. A minimum play must be present, as soon as
the maximum wear limit is reached, replace worn parts.
Permissible play = min.0.5 mm max. 4.0 mm
Check the crawler's center bearing on the push frame to ensure it is
correctly mounted and adjusted, see page 13.2.10.01 and/or the
Operation and Maintenance Manual, chapter Blade installation.
To check the radial play on cylindrical pin bushings, move the

attachment vertically to the bolt axis and measure the play with a ruler.
Replace excessively worn parts. Measure the axial play with feeler
gauge or similar tool. If play is excessive, add shims.
Pull or push the pipe layer reverse roller bearing at one point and
check the play on the opposite side with feeler gauge or similar tool.
Replace worn parts.
Permissible radial play = max. 2.0 mm,
Permissible axial play = max. 3.0 mm,
Note: Cylindrical mounted hydraulic cylinders must be able to
move freely in axial direction up to approx. 5 mm. Do
not add shims.
Crawler loaders - Check oil filled bucket pin bearings for leaks,
correct mounting and possible wear. Replace leaking or worn bucket
pin bearings.
Permissible radial play without leakage and/or dry = up to max.
2.0 mm.
When necessary, point out proper attachment selection to match application, i.e.
on crawler dozers: straight corners for precision dozing, HP cutting edge for severe applications, side
cutters, correct ripper tooth configuration, etc.
on crawler loaders: bucket type (rock or standard bucket), proper bucket and ripper tooth configuration,
etc.
2.7.2 Crawler loaders - bucket stops and limit switch adjustment
With the bucket fully tilted in and in its lowest position, there
must be a min. of 5 mm distance between the bucket and the
linkage, and the bucket must touch the stops on both sides
evenly.
With the bucket fully raised (limit switch disabled) and fully
tilted out, the linkage must touch the stop, the back of the
bucket may touch the stops (bucket unloaded).
Replace worn stops as outlined in group 13.2.
Hoist and bucket limit switches must be adjusted to suit
application and to aid the operator. See "Operation and
Maintenance Manual".
2.7.3 Pipe layer - hoist gear - cable winch

For further details on maintenance and inspection as well as important safety recommendations, refer to group
14, the winch manufacturers instructions and the "Operation and Maintenance Manual".
2.7.4 Pipe layer - function free fall device

Caution: Secure machine and working area. The free fall area of the load has to be free. Observe safety
guidelines.
Lift a suitable test load with a weight of appr. 1500 kg with the hoist gear and actuate the free fall device. The
load has to drop down faster than normal lowering.
Note: for attaching loads and actuating the free fall device, observe all guidelines of the machine
reflected operation manuals.
2.8. General inspection procedures

If any maintenance problems have been found, discuss the correct procedures with maintenance personnel.
If possible, check for possible operational errors and advise the machine operator, as necessary.
If additional measures, maintenance or inspections for special attachments are required, make sure to carry
them out and record them on the inspection report.
Determine any spare parts requirements or any expected repairs, discuss with and inform the appropriate
personnel.
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.05
Customer - Name and address: Machine type: PIN: - Sm-hrs.: Date:
Job application/ location:
Checked by:
from company:
A. Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at n-max
Test Test Test points Nominal Test value Remarks
No. value actual value adjusted value
1. Visual tests and maintenance o.k. remarks o.k. remarks fluids, filters, mech. components, etc.
Hydraulic system
2. Operating-
70 C
10
temperature hydraulic tank C C must remain constant during all tests
3. Cold start valve - theoretic checked: changed: - at PR 712 to PR 732 - only if necessary
25 bar
1
replenishing circuit SD (ND) yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
18+ bar
7
4. Servo pressure ND bar -- working hydraulic
+1
5. Stand by pressure 20 bar bar bar PR 712 to 732 (A10V-without stand-by valve)
working hydr.
25+ bar
1
bar bar PR 732 (A10V-with stand-by valve)
HD
+5
30 bar bar bar PR 742 (HPR 130)
6. Pressure limitation
210 bar
5
6.1 Sec. pressure working hydr. bar bar lift cylinder circuit
190 bar
5
6.2 Prim. pressure HD bar bar
5
6.3 Pressure cut off 160 bar bar bar max. working pressure
6.4 bar bar bar pressure settings for optional
6.5 bar bar bar hydraulic functions
6.6 bar bar bar
14+ bar
6
7. Pressure working hydr. bar bar in fine control range/PR 742(HPR) adjust
difference = p HD to LD <13 bar bar bar when spool is fully shifted
8. Accumulator test min. 4x possible actuation after engine is turned off
+4
9. Replenishing SP 16 bar bar PR 712 to PR 732
pressure travel hydr. 3
25 bar bar PR 742
50 bar
5
10. Control pressure ST bar PR 742 only
11. Hydr. neutral pos. shaft right M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
travel hydraulic M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump right
shaft left M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump left
+30/-10
12. Max. pressure M1 right 420 re bar bar check only if necessary
travel forward M1 left bar li bar bar use test flanges!
+30/-10 max. engine RPM is 1400 Upm
Max. pressure M2 right 420 re bar bar
travel reverse M2 left bar li bar bar
B. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/03 or CET 14/05
- mark LED which lights up or note position of analog indicator (space No. = at test box, A = at adapter)
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted -
LED - color: = green = yellow = red indicators =
Test Test Space During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine is not running
1. Identification A/6 Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... record denomination of LED
2. Battery 8 o.k. undervolt. o.k. undervolt. after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
3. Indicator light 9 light at panel on: yes light at panel on: yes light at panel = on instrument panel of machine
electron. fault ind. no no ("reduced speed" light lights together)
4. Signal red. speed. 9 no signal no signal select reduced travel speed range
5. Signal counter rot. 9 signal error signal error press button and deflect joystick in all directions
6. Travel joystick 4 good good = analogic display of sections
defect defect
7. Proportional 11 after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
solenoids

PR 712 F/N xxx-0103 0384
Mjfcifss! PR 722 F/N xxx-0103 0563
PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 2500
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 F/N xxx-2001 2500
01 01 Adjustment Checklist Blatt

Page 3.5.00.01
Feuille
Test Test Space During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine running
8. Alternator 8 overv. o.k. underv. overv. o.k. underv. Diesel engine approx. 1500 RPM / test for 10 sec.
9. RPM sensor A low o.k. high low o.k. high must be green from nmin up to nmax
Diesel engine
+50
10. RPM 2 min: max: min: max: min: 800 Rpm
+80
Diesel engine max: PR 712 / 722 2100 Rpm
...............- Rpm -................. ...............- Rpm -................. +60
PR 732 / 742 1900 Rpm
11. Potentiometer 3 {max.-.....Rpm good {max.-.....Rpm good
+20
should be green at nmax -30 RPM and
nominal RPM {min.+.....Rpm defect {min.+.....Rpm defect
+20
nmin +30 RPM / = indication at part. range
12. Brake 14 light at on light at on
release must be functioning for all remaining tests
panel: off panel: off
Tracks running machine must be raised off the ground
13. RPM sensor 13 right right = no indication /
oil motors left left must be "ok" for further tests
14. Basic adjustment 14 forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
left track
forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
- only if required - reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
at PR 742 pos. 3 reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
before pos. 2 forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
15. Straight run 14 Test Adjust Adjust note position of rotary switch
compare track right
forward 1 yes no forward 1 yes no travel begin forward - tracks start to turn
to track left
forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
at PR 742 pos. 3 forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
before pos. 2 reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks start to turn
reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
Special tests - travel operation throttle lever must be at max. RPM position
16. Current supply (440 )
20
2 mA initial current jump
PR 712 - 1000 mA, PR 722 - 990 mA
50 50
max. mA
16.1 Diesel engine
PR 732 - 980 mA, PR 742 - 960 mA
50 50
in reduced speed range
not running
PR 712 - 1450 mA, PR 722 - 1445 mA
70 70
max. mA
PR 732 - 1410 mA, PR 742 - 1380 mA
70 70
in normal speed range
60
(1180 ) mA reduced value when steering left
(440 )
20
16.2 Diesel engine mA initial current jump
running (590 )
30
mA minimum current at maximum load (RPM drop)
17. Straight run 14 | mA | mA forward with approx. 550 mA
compare track right +2 | mA | mA reverse with approx. 550 mA
to track left
| mA | mA forward with approx. 950 mA
| mA | mA reverse with approx. 950 mA
Remarks:
Adjustment guidelines - quick reference and explanations
Complete the test procedure according to the checklist, even for a partial check. Use pressure gauges appropriate
for the test ranges. To test the track speed / straight run, raise the machine off the ground and support it properly, so
that the chains can turn freely without danger.
Make sure to observe all safety guidelines - see group 1.2.01!
Use only the correct tools (test instruments). The Diesel engine RPMs must be as noted. Perform all required
maintenance work before adjustment.
In case of questions, make sure to use the detailed instructions: for the adjustment of the travel hydraulic, see
section 6.5.00, for the adjustment of the working hydraulic, see section 7.5.10 and for the use of the test box CET
08/03, see section 10.4.00
When putting the machine into service, proceed according to the guidelines given in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Check all indicators and gauges to ensure they are functioning correctly.
Defects must be repaired immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.
A. Tests with standard test instruments

All pressure tests must be performed at max. engine RPM unless noted otherwise.
1. Visual tests and maintenance

Insufficient maintenance and mechanical component defects often point to the cause of the problem. Check oil
levels, filters, coolant level, mechanical components and their mounting, cables and wiring harnesses, etc.
Repair any detected defects immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.
2. Operating temperature
If the operating temperature is reached only for a short time, cover the cooler (air flow) partially for the test /
adjustment. With the oil at operating temperature, before performing additional tests, actuate all hydraulic
functions and monitor the temperature constantly. For additional information about bringing the hydraulic system
to operating temperature, see group 6.5 or 7.5.
3. Cold start valve (travel hydraulic)

Needs to be checked only for troubleshooting (example: in case of temperature problems). Valve should be
closed, with the oil at operating temperature (also valid for by-pass valve on PR 742). Check adjustment, see
group 6.5, p. 3.
4. Servo pressure (working hydraulic)

Not adjustable - is a result of SP pressure. In case of problems, for example Quick drop, see Adjustment -
Working hydraulic, group 7.5.10.
5. Stand-by pressure (working hydraulic)

This pressure is the basis for the proper function of the entire working hydraulic system.
Note: - Only the new A10V100 pumps in PR732 are equipped with the stand-by valve (which is installed
between the regulator and the pump housing). The adjustment on all A10V-pumps is made on the LS
regulator.
- The test value on PR 742 with regulating pump HPR 130 depends significantly on the temperature,
the adjustment must be made via the Qmin stop on the pump.
6. Pressure limitation (working hydraulic)
6.1. Secondary pressure

To check, raise the pressure cut off and primary pressure setting. For the blade down function, block the line.
Note the secondary pressure relief setting for additional attachments separately on the checklist.

PR 712 F/N xxx-0103 0384
Quick Reference PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 2500
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 F/N xxx-2001 2500

Page 3.5.00.02
Feuille
6.2. Primary pressure
To check, raise the pressure cut off setting. Check the pressure via the tilt circuit or additional attachments.
6.3. Pressure cut off

The pressure cut off limits the maximum working pressure, primary and secondary pressure relief valves are
installed for system safety. Check the pressure with the primary pressure via the tilt circuit or additional
attachment circuit.
6.4. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter description/test points)
7. Pressure difference -p HD to LD (working hydraulic)

The p pressure in the fine control range is obtained on the machines with regulating pump A10V = PR 712, PR
722, PR 732 from the setting of the stand-by pressure. On machines with HPR 130 regulating pumps = PR742,
the LS-regulator must be adjusted separately.
The drop of p with the control valve spools fully opened is necessary to obtain the shortest working cycles.
8. Accumulator (working hydraulic)

For safety reasons, it must be possible to actuate a function (blade down) several times (within 3 minutes) after
the Diesel engine is turned off.
9. Replenishing pressure ( travel hydraulic)

If the pressure is too low, find and remedy the problem before continuing machine operation.
10. Control pressure (travel hydraulic PR 742)

The existing pressure value depends on the valve adjustment and the replenishing pressure, see schematic,
group 6.
11. Hydraulic neutral position (travel hydraulic - travel pumps)

Leave the safety lever in the down position. Check first with 0-600 bar pressure gauge, for final check /
adjustment, use a 0- 40 / 0-60 bar pressure gauge.
The normal pressure reading should correspond to the replenishing pressure. The permissible pressure
difference between M1 and M2 may be no more than 1.0 bar.
12. Pressure limitation of maximum system pressure (travel hydraulic)

Not adjustable. Check only if needed. Check O-rings on blind flanges. Determine location of test points M1/M2 ,
depending on the type of travel gear.
All work must be performed clean and carefully. Actuate the pumps carefully and hold the maximum pressure
only for a short time. Bleed the system after tests.
B. Tests with test box CET 08 / 03

Before carrying out tests / adjustments, check the operational readiness and function of the LED on the test box
and its adapter- see 10.4.
LED = light emitting diode
1. Identification
For identification, the indicators on the adapter and the test box have to be combined.
In case of incorrect identification, check the operating condition of test box first - for example: check the rotary
switch position and the cable configuration, then check the machine wire harness connections.
2. Battery
If the battery is always at undervoltage, check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button
first, then continue to check the power supply.
3. Indicator lights - electronic fault indicator- H12
If there is a problem in the system, the time the indicator light lights up can give an initial hint to the problem area.
Along with the electronic monitoring indicator light, the 'reduced speed range' indicator light H11 lights up as well.
If these lights do not light up during the test, check the bulbs, wiring and relays.
4. Signal - preselection "reduced speed range"

If the LED does not light up during the test, check the switch and wiring.
5. Signal - counter rotation

If the LED does not light up during the test, or if it turns off during joystick deflection, check the wiring as well as
the switch and cable in the joystick.
6. Travel joystick
The pointers in the test box must follow the joystick deflection evenly. Erratic movement or lack of movement
indicates an error and should be noted as such on the checklist.
In the four main directions, at full joystick deflection, the corresponding green LED must light up. In diagonal
deflection, most of the time both directional LEDs light up, a jump", however, is within the permitted tolerance
range.
The red error" diode may not light up in any joystick position.
7. Proportional solenoids
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If an error is shown, swap the connectors at the proportional
solenoids and check again to find the problem - cable or solenoid.
8. Alternator
In case of constant low voltage, always check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button,
then continue to check the power supply.
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If the green LED turns off and the red one lights up, check the
alternator or V-belt.
9. RPM sensor - Diesel engine

Readings at the test box adapter are valid.
In case of error indication, remove the sensor and check it visually and/or clean. Check the harness and adjust
required distance to the top of the flywheel tooth. Repeat the test.
10. Diesel engine RPM

Readings at the test box are valid.
If values are too low, check function and routing of shut off cable, even check the neutral functions of the
hydraulic system. Make adjustments on the stop screws of the engine operation in the cab and when necessary
check adjustment of the injection pump - see chapter 17.4.
If engine RPM is changed via a lever, the springs may not be fully compressed in any position.
11. Potentiometer
The pointer in the test box must follow the throttle position evenly. Jerky movement or lack of movement
indicates a defect and should be noted as such on the checklist.
Approach test values of potentiometer adjustment from the medium RPM range of the Diesel engine. Determine
the difference between the high and low idle (step 10) to those engine speeds and record the RPM where the
corresponding LED just lights up (not flicker). If necessary, repeat the test several times. The nominal value
should be within 30 RPM each.

PR 712 F/N xxx-0103 0384
Quick Reference PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 2500
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 F/N xxx-2001 2500

Page 3.5.00.03
Feuille
12. Release the brake
When the LED lights up on the test box, the indicator light H4 on the panel must turn off.
LED does not light up electrical defect
Indicator light does not turn off hydraulic / mechanical defect
Caution: If step A-11 was not carried out at all or carried out incorrectly, the chains may already begin to turn.
13. RPM sensor - hydraulic motors

Test read out usually starts in speed range 3, however, perform the test always in stage 5 (higher signal
number). Before changing from left right", stop the track run, switch over and run again.
No indication Problem due to electrical circuit interruption, possible total sensor failure
Mark appropriate square on check list
Red diode Sensor sends error signal
14. Basic adjustment - left track

The speed of the left track is shown in relation to the stored values in the test box. Carry out the required
adjustment corrections until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range, even after several checks.
Beachte: - The pump control / adjustment depends on the type of travel gear installed.
- If surging" occurs in a speed range, set the corresponding regulating range (= adjustment stage 4,
or stage 2 and 4, or stage 2) to the end of the left (slower) green range.
- If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until indication
is in the red range during the next test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green range.
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning.
15. Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain

The speed of the right chain is shown in relation to the speed of the left chain, measured via the speed sensors
of the travel motors.
If no basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, only minor corrections may be made. But in
all speed ranges the faster chain has to be matched to the slower chain.
If the basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, the right track is matched to the left track.
A normal test run can be carried out in the switch position Test". For adjustments, every test run must be made
in the switch position Adjust". Correct adjustments until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range,
even after several test runs.
Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until the
indication is in the red range during the test run. Then return the adjustment to the required
green range.
- For the simulation of the required engine load, see paragraph 10.4.
16. Current supply (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
This test is only required when troubleshooting. Only the current supply on the right track is measured.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.
Notes: - If the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.
17. Straight run, right chain to left chain (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
Perform this test only if the machine cannot be raised off the ground and properly supported.
During normal travel operation, the current supply to the right drive side and the speed of the right track in
relation to the speed of the left track is shown. Due to external influences, despite a wide tolerance range, large
deviations (fluctuating) exist.
Checked by:
from company:
A Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at 1000 RPM
1. Visual test and maintenance o.k. remarks o.k. remarks fluids, filters, mech. components, etc..
Hydraulic system
2. Operating
must remain constant during all tests
70 C
10
temperature hydraulic tank C C
3. Cold start valve - theoretic checked: changed: - at PR 712 to PR 732B - only if necessary
25 bar
1
replenishing circuit SD (ND) yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
18+ bar
7
+1
5. Stand by pressure 20 bar bar bar PR 712 to 732 (A10V-without stand-by valve)
working hydr
25+ bar
1
bar bar PR 732 (A10V-with stand-by valve)
HD
220 bar
6.1 Prim. pressure 5
working hydr. bar bar
210 bar
5
6.2 Sec. pressure HD bar bar lift cylinder circuit
5
6.6 bar bar bar
14+ bar
6
7. Pressure working hydr bar bar in fine control range (check only if necessary)
+4
9. Replenishing SP 16 bar bar PR 712 to PR 732B
25 bar bar PR 742B
50 bar
5
10. Control pressure ST bar PR 742B up to F/Nxxx-5233 only
11. Hydr. neutral pos. Shaft right M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
Shaft left M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
+30/-10
12. Max. pressure M1 right 420 ri bar bar check only if necessary
travel forward M1 left bar le bar bar use test flanges!
+30/-10
Max. pressure M2 right 420 ri bar bar
travel reverse M2 left bar le bar bar
Test Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
No. No.
4. Signal 9 no signal no signal 2-ranges -normal range 3-ranges - normal = III
travel speed -
range selection no signal no signal - select "red. speed range" - red. speed range II
no signal no signal -- - red. speed range I
defect defect
solenoids

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 5599
Mjfcifss! PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0564 5599
PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 5599

Page 3.5.01.01
Feuille
Test. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine
+50
10. RPM 2 min: max: min: max: min: 800 RPM
+80
Diesel engine max: PR 712 / 722 2100 RPM
...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. +80
PR 732 / 742 1900 RPM
11. Potentiometer 3 {max.-.....RPM good {max.-.....RPM good
+20
nominal RPM {min.+.....RPM defect {min.+.....RPM defect
+20
12. Brake release 14 light at on light at on
must be functioning for all remaining tests
left track
at PR 742 up to reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
F/Nxxx-5233 forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
pos. 3 before pos. 2
compare track right
to track left
at PR 742 up to forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
F/Nxxx-5233 reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks start to turn
pos. 3 before pos. 2
20
2-ranges 3-ranges
max. mA
16.1 Diesel engine PR 712 - 1450+70 mA, PR 712 - 1450+70mA
not running
in normal speed range PR 722 - 1445+70 mA PR 722 - 1445+70 mA
(switch position III) PR 732 - 1410+70 mA, PR 732 - 1410+70 mA
PR 742 - 1380+70 mA PR 742 - 1380+70 mA
max. mA PR 712 - 100050 mA PR 712 - 1240+50 mA
in reduced speed range PR 722 - 99050 mA PR 722 - 1235+50 mA
PR 732 - 98050 mA PR 732 - 1230+50 mA
(switch position II) PR 742 - 96050 mA PR 742 - 1200+50 mA
max. mA -- PR 712 - 910+50 mA
in reduced speed range PR 722 - 900+50 mA
PR 732 - 890+50 mA
(switch position I) PR 742 - 880+50 mA
(1180 )
80
mA reduced value when steering left (normal range)
20
16.2 Diesel engine (440 ) mA initial current jump
running (500+
100
) mA minimum current at maximum load (RPM drop)
compare track right +2 | mA | mA reverse with approx. 550 mA
to track left
| mA | mA forward with approx. 950 mA
If installed:
C. Pedal-tests with tester CET 03/08 (see Service Manual section 10.6/chapter "fine adjustment") - Diesel engine not running
T.No. Test During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
1. Inch/brake pedal adjustments according to adjustments according to observe display - "Inchpedal ext" etc.
guidelines yes no guidelines yes no LED "Voltage" must be always green
Remarks:
section 6.5.00, for the adjustment of the working hydraulic, see section 7.5.10 ,for the use of the test box CET
08/03, see section 10.4.00. and for the use of the pedal control tester, see section 10.6.00.

All pressure tests must be performed at 1000 RPM (without engine load) unless noted otherwise.


closed, with the oil at operating temperature (also valid for by-pass valve on PR 742B). Check adjustment, see
group 6.5, p. 3.


Note: Only the new A10V100 pumps in PR732 and all A10V140 pumps in PR 742B machines, are
equipped with the stand-by valve (which is installed between the regulator and the pump housing).
The adjustment on all A10V-pumps is made on the LS regulator.

To check, raise the pressure cut off setting. Check the pressure via the tilt circuit or additional attachments
without secondary relief.

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 5599
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 5599

Page 3.5.01.02
Feuille
To check, raise the pressure cut off and primary pressure setting. For the blade down function, block the line
or proceed as outlined in group 7.5.

The pressure cut off limits the maximum working pressure. Primary and secondary pressure relief valves are
only installed for system safety. Check the pressure as the primary pressure via the tilt circuit or additional
attachment circuit without secondary relief.
6.4. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter test point / description)

The p pressure in the fine control range is obtained on the machines with regulating pump A10V = PR 712(B),
PR 722(B), PR 732B und PR 742B from the setting of the stand-by pressure.


10. Control pressure (travel hydraulic PR 742(B) to F/N xxx-5233)

The existing pressure value depends on the valve adjustment and the replenishing pressure, see schematic,
group 6.
11.Hydraulic neutral position (travel hydraulic - travel pumps)

12.Pressure limitation of maximum system pressure (travel hydraulic)

1. Identification
2. Battery

4.1. Reduced travel speed range with push button switch S12 on the panel (0 4,6 km/h)
4.2. Reduced travel speed range with rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick
Rocker switch in position I (04 km/h) = diode must be on
Rocker switch in position II (06,5 km/h) = diode must switch off
Rocker switch in position III (011 km/h) = diode must be on
If the test result is not correct, check the switch and the wiring harness.
5. Signal - counter rotation"

6. Travel joystick
range.
Notes: Do not actuate the push button switch counter rotation while testing the travel joystick - this can
cause wrong Error - indications.

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 5599

Page 3.5.01.03
Feuille
8. Alternator

In case of error indication, remove the sensor and check it visually and/or clean. Check the harness and required
distance to the top of the flywheel tooth. Repeat the test.
10.Diesel engine RPM

If values are too low, check function and routing of shut off cable, even check the neutral functions of the
hydraulic system. Make adjustments on the stop screws of the engine operation in the cab and when necessary
check adjustment of the injection pump - see chapter 17.4.
11.Potentiometer
should be within 30+20 RPM each.

When the LED lights up on the test box, the indicator light on the panel must turn off.

No indication Problem due to electrical circuit interruption, possible total sensor failure
Mark appropriate square on check list
14.Basic adjustment - left track

Note: - The pump control / adjustment depends on the type of travel gear installed.
- If surging" occurs in a speed range, set the corresponding regulating range (= adjustment stage 4,
or stage 2 and 4, or stage 2) to the end of the left (slower) green range.
- If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until indication
is in the red range during the next test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green range.
15.Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain
indication is in the red range during the test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green
range.
When selecting the travel speed range via push button switch S12 on the panel = use values of column "2-
ranges", when selecting the travel speed range via rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick = use values
of column "3-ranges".
Notes - If the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.
17.Straight run, right chain to left chain (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
C. Pedal-tests with tester CET 03/08

1. Inch/brake pedal
If there is an Inch / brake pedal installed, always perform the check of the adjustments when the electronic box is
connected = connect all cables of the tester.
Guidelines for the test and further notes see chapter 10.6, section B -1.

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 5599

Page 3.5.01.04
Feuille
Checked by:
from company:
A Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at 1000 RPM or as outlined
Hydraulic system
25 bar
1
replenishing circuit SD yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
+10
3. Pressure limitation 110 bar bar -- PR 712
+10
fan drive 130 bar bar -- PR 722 Diesel engine at nmax,
LA +10
150 bar bar -- PR 732 at least one sensor unplugged.
+10
210 bar bar -- PR 742
4. Operating
70 C
10
18+ bar
7
+1
6. Stand by pressure working hydr 20 bar bar bar PR 712, PR 722 (A10V-without stand-by valve)
25+ bar
HD 1
bar bar PR 732, PR 742 (A10V-with stand-by valve)
220 bar
210 bar
5
5
14+ bar
6
+4
25 bar bar PR 742
+30/-10
+30/-10
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted - with e-box CEP12/08C, CEP12/20 first observe section D
No. No.
travel speed -
defect defect
solenoids

PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
PR 732 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600 6199

Page 3.5.02.01
Feuille
No. No.
Diesel engine
+50
+80
...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. +80
PR 732 / 742 1900 RPM
+20
+20
left track
compare track right
to track left
reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks start to turn
16. Current supply 20
2 (440 ) mA initial current jump
2-ranges 3-ranges
max. mA
16.1 Diesel engine PR 712 - 1450+70 mA, PR 712 - 1450+70mA
not running
in normal speed range PR 722 - 1445+70 mA PR 722 - 1445+70 mA
(switch position III) PR 732 - 1410+70 mA, PR 732 - 1410+70 mA
PR 742 - 1380+70 mA
max. mA PR 712 - 100050 mA PR 712 - 1240+50 mA
in reduced speed range PR 722 - 99050 mA PR 722 - 1235+50 mA
PR 732 - 98050 mA PR 732 - 1230+50 mA
(switch position II)
PR 742 - 1200+50 mA
max. mA -- PR 712 - 910+50 mA
in reduced speed range PR 722 - 900+50 mA
PR 732 - 890+50 mA
(switch position I) PR 742 - 880+50 mA
(1180 )
80
20
16.2 Diesel engine (440 ) mA initial current jump
running (500+
100
If installed:
1. adjustments according to adjustments according to observe display - "Inchpedal ext" etc.
Inch/brake pedal
D. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit (with e-box CEP12/08C, CEP12/20) - following the software instructions
T.No. Test Before checklist step B/C After checklist step B/C Remarks
1. Read memory memory available: memory deleted: Print out memory following the software
yes no yes no instructions and add the adjustment checklist, or
1.1 Record codes record here in saved order.
Remarks:



group 6.5, p. 3.
3. Pressure limitation (fan drive)

When the sensor is unplugged and the Diesel engine is on high idle, the postulated maximum pressure has to be
reached.
The proportional - pressure relief valve is not adjustable and is regulated by the electronic.
When overheating in spite of right pressure and clean radiator, in every case check the fan RPM. This RPM
doesn't depends only on pressure (also on air supply, turning resistance, damages, and suchlike). for RPM see
technical data 3.1, Instructions see chapter 6.5.


Note: Only the A10V100 pumps in PR732 and the A10V140 pumps in PR 742B machines, are equipped
with the stand-by valve (which is installed between the regulator and the pump housing). The
adjustment on all A10V-pumps is made on the LS regulator.

PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600 6199

Page 3.5.02.02
Feuille




The p pressure in the fine control range is obtained on the machines with regulating pump A10V = PR 712 B,
PR 722 B, PR 732 B und PR 742 B from the setting of the stand-by pressure.




Caution: Before carrying out tests/adjustments following section B, check the version of the electronic
box. If there is a CEP 12/08C, CEP 12/20 or higher electronic box installed, observe section D =
evaluate memory.
1. Identification
2. Battery


6. Travel joystick
range.

PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600 6199

Page 3.5.02.03
Feuille
8. Alternator


If values are too low, check the neutral functions of the hydraulic system. Make adjustments on the stop screws
of the engine operation in the cab and when necessary check adjustment of the injection pump - see chapter
17.4.
11.Potentiometer


Test read out usually starts in speed range 3, however, perform the test as possible in stage 5 (higher signal
No indication Problem due to electrical circuit interruption (wiring), possible total sensor failure
Mark appropriate square on adjustment check list

Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until indication is in
the red range during the next test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green range
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning
range.
Notes - If the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.
Notes: This test can still be carried out. Caused by the rarely use, this test isn't on the checklist any more.
Record the result under section "Remarks".

1. Inch/brake pedal
D. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit

Can only be used for electronic box version CEP12/08C, CEP12/20 and higher.
1. Read error memory

Before carrying out tests / adjustments following section B, evaluate the memory, save it on the notebook, print it
out or record the codes in the saved order in the adjustment checklist. Repair existing defects.
After adjustments, check the memory once again, delete the error memory!
Notes: If the program displays "Error" from the beginning, check if the right interface COM1,2,3 or 4 is
chosen, check plugs/wiring, check the power supply 24V from the instrument panel.

PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600 6199

Page 3.5.02.04
Feuille
Checked by:
from company:
A Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at 1000 RPM or as outlined
Hydraulic system
25 bar
1
replenishing circuit SD yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
+10
3. Pressure limitation 110 bar bar -- PR 712
+10
fan drive 130 bar bar -- PR 722 Diesel engine at nmax,
LA +10
150 bar bar -- PR 732 at least one sensor unplugged.
+10
210 bar bar -- PR 742
4. Operating
70 C
10
18+ bar
7
+1
6. Stand by pressure working hydr 20 bar bar bar PR 712, PR 722 (A10V-without stand-by valve)
25+ bar
HD 1
bar bar PR 732, PR 742 (A10V-with stand-by valve)
220 bar
210 bar
5
5
14+ bar
6
+4
25 bar bar PR 742
+30/-10
+30/-10
B. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit - following the software instructions
T.No. Test Before checklist step C/D After checklist step C/D Remarks
Pedal installed yes no
Inch/brake pedal
Remarks to A - B - C:

PR 712 B F/N xxx-6200
PR 732 B F/N xxx-6200
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-6200

Page 3.5.03.01
Feuille
D. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/03 or CET 14/05
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted - after all adjustments are done check and delete E-Box memory - see step B.
No. No.
4. Signal 9 no signal no signal 3-ranges - normal = III
travel speed -
range selection no signal no signal - red. speed range II
no signal no signal - red. speed range I
5. Signal counterrot." 9 signal error signal error press button and deflect joystick in all directions
defect defect
solenoids

Diesel engine
+50
+80
...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. +80
PR 732 / 742 1900 RPM
+20
+20
left track
compare track right
to track left
reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks start to turn
20
max. mA PR 712 - 1450+70mA
16.1 Diesel engine PR 722 - 1445+70 mA
not running
in normal speed range PR 732 - 1410+70 mA
(switch position III) PR 742 - 1380+70 mA
max. f. /r. mA PR 712 - 1240+50 mA
forward: PR 722 - 1235+50 mA
reverse: PR 732 - 1230+50 mA
(switch position II)
PR 742 - 1160+50 mA forward / 1230+50 mA reverse
max. f. /r. mA PR 712 - 910+50 mA
forward: PR 722 - 900+50 mA
reverse: PR 732 - 890+50 mA
(switch position I) PR 742 - 890+50 mA forward / 1000+50 mA reverse
(1180 )
80
(440 )
20
16.2 Diesel engine mA initial current jump
running
Remarks:



group 6.5, p. 3.
3. Pressure limitation (fan drive)

When the sensor is unplugged and the Diesel engine is on high idle, the postulated maximum pressure has to be
reached.
The proportional - pressure relief valve is not adjustable and is regulated by the electronic.
When overheating in spite of right pressure and clean radiator, in every case check the fan RPM. This RPM
doesn't depends only on pressure (also on air supply, turning resistance, damages, and suchlike). for RPM see
technical data 3.1, Instructions see chapter 6.5.


Note: Only the A10V100 pumps in PR732 and the A10V140 pumps in PR 742B machines, are equipped
with the stand-by valve (which is installed between the regulator and the pump housing). The
adjustment on all A10V-pumps is made on the LS regulator.

PR 712 B F/N xxx-6200
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-6200
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-6200

Page 3.5.03.02
Feuille




The p pressure in the fine control range is obtained on the machines with regulating pump A10V = PR 712 B,
PR 722 B, PR 732 B und PR 742 B from the setting of the stand-by pressure.

10. Replenishing pressure (travel hydraulic)



Not adjustable. Check only if needed. Check O-rings on blind flanges. Determine location of test points M1/M2,
B. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit

Before carrying out tests / adjustments following section C/D, evaluate the memory, save it on the notebook, print
it out or record the codes in the saved order in the adjustment checklist. Repair existing defects.
After adjustments according to checklist step C and D, check the memory once again, delete the error
memory!
1. Inch/brake pedal
D. Tests with test box CET 08/03

1. Identification
2. Battery

4. Signal - preselection "reduced speed range" with rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick

6. Travel joystick
range.

PR 712 B F/N xxx-6200
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-6200

Page 3.5.03.03
Feuille
8. Alternator


If values are too low, check also the neutral functions of the hydraulic system. Make adjustments on the stop
screws of the engine operation in the cab and when necessary check adjustment of the injection pump - see
chapter 17.4.
11.Potentiometer



Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until indication
is in the red range during the next test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green range
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning
range.
Notes: - If the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.

PR 712 B F/N xxx-6200
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-6200

Page 3.5.03.04
Feuille
Checked by:
from company:
A. Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at 1000 RPM or as outlined
Hydraulic system
30+
3
2. Stand by pressure fan drive. - LA bar bar A10V - check when machine is cold
3. Operating must remain constant during all tests
70 C
10
temperature Hydraulic tank C C
160
3
4. Pressure limitation LA bar bar fan drive - A10V/Diesel engine at max RPM
5. Cold start valve - travel hydr. theoretic checked: changed: - check only if necessary
replenishing circuit SD 28+2 bar yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
25+ bar
3
Pressure +6
7. working hydr. 15 bar bar bar in fine control range - adjust at HPR-pump
difference = p HD to LS <13 bar bar bar when spool is fully shifted
30+ bar
5
8. Stand by pressure HD bar bar working hydraulic - adjust at HPR-pump
9. Pressure limitation working hydr.
270 bar
HD bar bar
250 bar
5
9.2 Sec. pressure bar bar lift cylinder circuit - piston bottom side = A1
5
250 bar bar bar lift cylinder circuit - piston rod side = B1
200 bar
5
9.3 Pressure cut off bar bar max. working pressure
+7
11. Repl. pressure SP 20 bar bar travel hydraulic
12. Hydr. neutral pos. right M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
left M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
+30/-10
13. Max. pressure M1 rights 420 ri bar bar check only if necessary
travel forward M1 left bar le bar bar use test plates!
+30/-10
B. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/05
Test. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
No. No.
travel speed -
defect defect
solenoids
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx- 20025599

Page 3.5.50.01
Feuille
No. No.
Diesel engine
10. RPM A min: max: min: max: min: 800 RPM
+50
Diesel engine +60

...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. max: 1900 RPM
11. Potentiometer 3 {max.-......RPM good {max.-......RPM good
+20
nominal RPM {min.+......RPM defect {min.+......RPM defect
+20
12. Overspeeding pro- A Function available: yes Function available: yes press button RPM drop at engine
tection / D-engine no no working hydraulic - HD = max.
13. Brake release 14 Light at on Light at on
14. RPM sensor 13 right right = no Indication/
travel gear left left must be ok for further tests
Disconnect servo lines from pump-connection X to travel motor - see instructions
15.1. basic adjustment 14 forward 2 forward 2 Pump regulating range forward
left track
forward 3 forward 3 Pump end of regulation forward
reverse 2 reverse 2 Pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 Pump end of regulation reverse
16.1 Straight run 14 Test" "Adjust Adjust note position of rotary switch
compare track right
forward 1 yes no forward 1 yes no travel begin forward - tracks starts to turn
to track left
forward 2 forward 2 Pump regulating range forward
reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks starts to turn
Servo lines from pump-connection X connected to one travel motor on each side - see instruction
15.2 Basic adjustment 14 forward 4 forward 4 left motor regulating range forward
left track
reverse 4 reverse 4 control test
16.2 Straight run 14 forward 4 forward 4 right motor regulating range forward
right track
Servo lines from pump-connection X connected to all travel motors - see instruction
15.3 basic adjustment 14 forward 4 forward 4 left motor regulating range forward
left track
forward 5 forward 5 left motor - mech. end stop - Qmin
reverse 4 reverse 4 control test - values are resulting from previous
reverse 5 reverse 5 adjustments
compare track right forward 5 forward 5 right motor - mech. end stop - Qmin
to track left reverse 4 reverse 4 control test - values are resulting from previous
17. current supply (440 )
20
max. mA 2-ranges 3-ranges
1350+ mA 1350+ mA (Switch pos. III)
70 70
17.1 Diesel engine in normal speed range
+50
1170+ mA (Switch pos. II)
50
not running max. mA 950 mA
870+ mA
50
max. mA -- (Switch pos. I)
(1180 )
80
mA reduced value when steering left (normal speed)
17.2 Diesel engine 20
2 (440 ) mA initial current jump
running
(500+
100
compare right +2 | mA | mA reverse with approx. 550 mA
to track left | mA | mA forward with approx. 950 mA
If installed:
T.No. Test During test After adjustment /repair Remarks
Inch/brake pedal
Remarks:
Make sure to observe all safety guidelines see group 1.2.01!
Use only the correct tools(test instruments). The Diesel engine RPMs must be as noted. Perform all required
When putting the machine into service, proceed according to the guidelines given in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Check all indicators and gauges to ensure they are functioning correctly.

All pressure tests must be performed at 1000 RPM (without an engine load), unless noted otherwise.

2. Standby pressure - fan drive

The pressure determines the minimum RPM for the fan drive motors. Incorrect adjustments can cause failure of
the hydraulic motors.
Check / adjust with the machine cold. For instructions, refer to group 6.5.
When the operating temperature is reached in one of the systems - hydraulic system, Diesel engine coolant
circuit or charge air system - the fan drive is automatically changed over from stand by function to working
function.
to operating temperature, see group 6.5 or 7.5
4. Pressure limitation - fan drive

The pressure determines the required working (minimum) RPM of the fan drive motors. For details, see group
6.5.

Needs to be checked only for troubleshooting. With the oil at operating temperature, only a minimum amount of
leak oil should emerge from the valve, otherwise, check the adjustment, see group 6.5, p. 3.

working hydraulic, group 7.5.10.
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20025599

Page 3.5.50.02
Feuille
7. Pressure difference - p HD to LD (working hydraulic)
The correct adjustment of the LS regulator (p) is important for machine performance and simplifies the
adjustment of the stand by pressure.

The adjustment is made via the Qmin stop of the pump. Important: The test value depends very much on the
temperature.

Leave the pressure cut off valve adjustment for the secondary pressure check as is.

To check, block pressure lines on lift cylinders - see group 7.5. (Pressure cut off raised from primary pressure
check)
lift circuit - piston bottom side =A1= blade down
lift circuit - piston rod side =B1= blade up
Also check the secondary relief of additional attachments / list on checklist, No. 9.4 / 9.5.

9.4. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter description / test points)

11. Replenishing pressure (travel hydraulic)


adjustment, use a 0-60 bar pressure gauge.

Not adjustable. Check only if needed. Check O-rings on blind flanges. To check, close off HD lines on travel
motors with blind flanges - see special tools, page 2.1.21.01 and screws M12x50-10.9. For location of test points
and details, refer to group 6.5.
B. Tests with test box CET 08/03
1. Identification
switch position and the cable configuration, then check the wire harness connections.
2. Battery
If the battery is always at low voltage, check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button
3. Indicator lights - electronic fault indicator - H12

Along with the electronic monitoring indicator light, the 'reduced travel speed range' indicator light H11 lights up
as well. If these lights do not light up during the test, check the bulbs, wiring and relays.

6. Travel joystick
range.
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20025599

Page 3.5.50.03
Feuille
8. Alternator


If values are too low, check function and routing of throttle control. Make adjustments primary on the control lever
stops on the operators platform (tilt cab).
11.Potentiometer
12.Overspeed safety - Diesel engine

If the Diesel engine speed is not reduced significantly during the test and the pressure on the working hydraulic
test point HD will not overcome primary setting, check the function of the solenoid valve and the pump regulator.
See schematic, group 7.3.

14.RPM sensor - travel gear

No indication problem due to electrical circuit interruption, possible total sensor failure
mark appropriate square on check list
Red diode sensor sends error signal.
15. / 16.Basic adjustment - left track / Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain
A pre-check can be made during an inspection without closing off the control lines, limited to the following
checklist points (right switch on test box to position "TEST"):
16.1 - forward 1 16.3 - forward 4
- forward 2 - forward 5
- reverse 1 - reverse 4
- reverse 2
Note: If the indication is outside the "green center" range for one of these tests, then all tests / adjustment
steps must be made according to the check list (right switch on test box in straight run adjustment
position "ADJUST").
Attention: If one of the stages 3 are selected, the chains are running at full speed.
Test steps for par. 15 "basic adjustment - left track " show the speed of the left chain in relation to the values
stored in the test box. Adjustments are made on the left travel drive side.
Test steps for par. 16 "straight run, right chain compared to left chain " show the speed of the right chain in
relation to the speed of the left chain. Adjustments are made on the right travel drive side.
Basic adjustments and straight run must be made in 3 groups, since the travel motors are hydraulically controlled
by the pumps and there are 2 motors for each side.
Group 15.1 / 16.1= Check / adjustment of pumps. Close of servo lines to motors on pump outlets (motors
remain on Qmax).
Correct adjustment for both groups: analog indicator "green center"
Group 15.2 / 16.2 = Check / adjustment of motor per side. Servo lines to motors on pump outlets are
reconnected, close off servo lines to one motor per side (motors remain on Qmax).
Correct adjustment for group 15.2: Analog indicator exactly over the dividing line between the red
indicator field SLOW and the green indicator field. "Center
green" may not be exceeded.
Correct adjustment for group 16.2: Analog indicator "Green center"
Group 15.3 / 16.3 = Check / adjustment of one motor per side. Servo lines to all motors are reconnected.
Correct adjustment for both groups: analog indicator "green center",
for 15.3, the red indicator field "FAST" may never be reached.
Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change it in the corresponding direction past the required
indication value. Then reset it to the required value - see above.
- Always make adjustments only after the chain stops turning.
- Correct adjustments until the analog indicator remains in the required range, even after several
rechecks.
- If an adjustment must be made in stage 5 / mech. Qmin stop (group 15.3 / 16.3), determine the
dimension of adjustment screw on both travel motors for the side to be adjusted.
Chain too quick on travel motor with larger screw overlap, turn the adjustment screw in
clockwise direction.
Chain too slow on travel motor with smaller screw overlap, turn the adjustment screw in
counterclockwise direction.
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20025599

Page 3.5.50.04
Feuille
17.Current supply (special tests during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
Notes - if the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.
- for the simulation of the required engine load, see paragraph 10.4.
18.Straight run, right chain to left chain (special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
deviations (fluctuating)exist
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning

1. Inch/brake pedal
Checked by:
from company:
Hydraulic system
5
2. Stand by pressure fan drive. - LA 30 bar bar check w. cold machine/Diesel engine to nmax
3. Pressure cut off fuse F9 opened/Diesel engine at max RPM
fan drive - ex factory LA 177+5 bar bar Caution: varied adjustments with special
3.1 spare pump 205
5
bar bar equipments - see page 2
10
temperature Hydraulic tank 70 C C C
3
6. Servo pressure ND 25+ bar bar -- working hydraulic
+6
7. Pressure working hydr. 15 bar bar bar in fine control range - adjust at HPR-pump
5
8. Stand by pressure HD 30+ bar bar bar working hydraulic - adjust at HPR-pump
9.1 Prim. pressure HD 5
270 bar bar bar
5
9.2 Sec. pressure 250 bar bar bar lift cylinder circuit - piston bottom side = A1
5
5
+7
+30/-10
+30/-10
B. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/05
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted - with e-box CEP12/08C, CEP12/20 first observe section D
Test. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
No. No.
travel speed -
defect defect
solenoids
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-5600 6199

Page
Feuille
3.5.51.01
No. No.
Diesel engine
RPM +60
10. A min: max: min: max: min: 750 RPM
Diesel engine +60
...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. max: 1900 RPM
Potentiometer +20
11. 3 {max.-......RPM good {max.-......RPM good should be green at nmax -30 RPM and
+20
left track
compare track right
to track left
left track
right track
left track
17. current supply 2 (440 )
20
mA initial current jump
max. mA 3-ranges
70
17.1 Diesel engine in normal speed range 1350+ mA (Switch pos. III)
50
not running max. mA 1170+ mA (Switch pos. II)
50
max. mA 870+ mA (Switch pos. I)
80
(1180 ) mA reduced value when steering left (normal speed)
17.2 Diesel engine 2 (440 20
) mA initial current jump
running 100
(500+ ) mA minimum current at maximum load (RPM drop)
Inch/brake pedal
D. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit (with e-box CEP12/08C, CEP12/20) - following the software instructions
T.No. Test Before checklist step B/C After checklist step B/C Remarks
Remarks:
Use only the correct tools( test instruments). The Diesel engine RPMs must be as noted. Perform all required



Caution: When the temperature in the systems hydraulic oil, Diesel engine coolant or charge air is raising, the
electronic control raises the pressure of the fan drive/fan RPM. When changing the standby pressure,
the adjustments of the pressure limitation are also changing, according point 3. Both values have to
be in the allowed tolerances.
3. Pressure cut off - fan drive

For tests/adjustments, the power supply for the electronic control has to be interrupted - open fuse F9 (indicator
light H7 is on) - the fan drive works with the maximum values (fail-save system) = adjustment-/test values see
table "pmax" (fan RPM - main radiator front = n1, - oil cooler = n2). For details, see group 6.5.
Machine equipment = standard Machine equipment = "waste kit"
fans - standard fans - reversible
ex factory spare pump ex factory spare pump
pmax 177+5 bar 2055 bar +5
217 bar
+5
255 bar
+5
225 bar
+3
275 bar
+100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1
n1 1380 min 1530 min 1380 min 1520 min 1580 min 1560 min
+100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1
Notes: When changing the adjustments of the pressure limitation, the adjustments of the standby pressure
are also changing, according point 2. Both values have to be in the allowed tolerances.
If the temperature in one of the systems, which have to be cooled - hydraulic system, Diesel engine
coolant circuit and charge air system - is too high, the indicator light H7 is flashing and the system
regulates to maximum pressure. This pressure value is lower by the p of the regulation than the
adjustment value.
When overheating in spite of right pressure and clean radiator, in every case check the fan RPM. This
RPM doesn't depends only on pressure (also on air supply, turning resistance, damages, and
suchlike). Instructions see chapter 6.5.
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600 6199

Page
Feuille
3.5.51.02


7. Pressure difference - p HD to LD ( working hydraulic )


temperature.
9. Pressure limitation ( working hydraulic )


check)

10.Accumulator (working hydraulic)

11.Replenishing pressure (travel hydraulic )


Caution: Before carrying out tests/adjustments following section B, check the version of the electronic
box. If there is a CEP 12/08C, CEP 12/20 or higher electronic box installed, observe section D =
evaluate memory.

1. Identification
2. Battery

4. Signal - preselection "reduced speed range" - rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick

6. Travel joystick
range.
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600 6199

Page
Feuille
3.5.51.03
8. Alternator


11.Potentiometer



15. / 16.Basic adjustment - left track / Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain
- reverse 2
position "ADJUST").
remain on Qmax).
rechecks.
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600 6199

Page
Feuille
3.5.51.04
Select the travel speed range via rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick.
- for the simulation of the required engine load, see paragraph 10.4.

1. Inch/brake pedal
Always perform the check of the adjustments of the Inch/brake pedal when the electronic box is connected =
connect all cables of the tester.
D. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit

Can only be used for electronic box version CEP12/08C, CEP12/20 and higher.

Before carrying out tests / adjustments following section B, evaluate the memory, save it on the notebook, print it
out or record the codes in saved order in the adjustment checklist. Repair existing defects.
After adjustments, check the memory once again, delete the error memory!
Checked by:
from company:
Hydraulic system
5
2. Stand by pressure fan drive. - LA 30 bar bar check w. cold machine/Diesel engine to nmax
3. Pressure cut off fuse F9 opened/Diesel engine at max RPM
5
fan drive LA 205 bar bar Caution: varied adjustments with special
equipments - see page 2
10
temperature Hydraulic tank 70 C C C
3
6. Servo pressure ND 25+ bar bar -- working hydraulic
+6
7. Pressure working hydr. 15 bar bar bar in fine control range - adjust at HPR-pump
5
8. Stand by pressure HD 30+ bar bar bar working hydraulic - adjust at HPR-pump
9.1 Prim. pressure HD 270 bar
5
bar bar
5
9.2 Sec. pressure 250 bar bar bar lift cylinder circuit - piston bottom side = A1
5
5
+7
+30/-10
+30/-10
B. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit - following the software instructions
T.No. Test Before checklist step C/D After checklist step C/D Remarks
Inch/brake pedal
D. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/05
- mark LED which lights up or note position of analog indicator (space = space No. at test box, A = at adapter)
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted - after all adjustments are done check and delete E-Box memory - see step B.
No. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-6200

Page
Feuille
3.5.52.01
No. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
travel speed -
defect defect
solenoids

Diesel engine
RPM +60
10. A min: max: min: max: min: 750 RPM
Diesel engine +60
...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. max: 1900 RPM
Potentiometer +20
11. 3 {max.-......RPM good {max.-......RPM good should be green at nmax -30 RPM and
+20
left track
compare track right
to track left
left track
right track
left track
17. current supply 2 20
(440 ) mA initial current jump
max. mA 3-ranges
70
17.1 Diesel engine in normal speed range 1390+ mA (Switch pos. III)
+50 50
not running max. f. /r. mA forward: 1150 mA forward / 1220+ mA reverse
in reduced speed range reverse: (Switch pos. II)
50 50
max. f. /r. mA forward: 880+ mA forward / 990+ mA reverse
in reduced speed range reverse: (Switch pos. I)
(1340+50) mA reduced value when steering left (normal speed)
17.2 Diesel engine 2 20
(440 ) mA initial current jump
running
Remarks:
Use only the correct tools( test instruments). The Diesel engine RPMs must be as noted. Perform all required



Caution: When the temperature in the systems hydraulic oil, Diesel engine coolant or charge air is raising, the
electronic control raises the pressure of the fan drive/fan RPM. When changing the standby pressure,
the adjustments of the pressure limitation are also changing, according point 3. Both values have to
be in the allowed tolerances.
3. Pressure cut off - fan drive

For tests/adjustments, the power supply for the electronic control has to be interrupted - open fuse (automatic
circuit breaker) F9 (indicator light H7 is on) - the fan drive works with the maximum values (fail-save system) =
adjustment-/test values see table "pmax" (fan RPM - main radiator front = n1, - oil cooler = n2). For details, see group 6.5.
fans - standard fans - reversible fans - standard fans - reversible
pmax 2055 bar +5
255 bar
+5
225 bar
+3
275 bar
+100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1
n1 1530 min 1520 min 1580 min 1560 min
+100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1
n2 2200 min 2180 min 2280 min 2240 min
Notes: When changing the adjustments of the pressure limitation, the adjustments of the standby pressure
are also changing, according point 2. Both values have to be in the allowed tolerances.
If the temperature in one of the systems, which have to be cooled - hydraulic system, Diesel engine
coolant circuit and charge air system - is too high, the indicator light H7 is flashing and the system
regulates to maximum pressure. This pressure value is lower by the p of the regulation than the
adjustment value.
When overheating in spite of right pressure and clean radiator, in every case check the fan RPM. This
RPM doesn't depends only on pressure (also on air supply, turning resistance, damages, and
suchlike). Instructions see chapter 6.5.
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200

Page
Feuille
3.5.52.02


7. Pressure difference - p HD to LD ( working hydraulic )


temperature.
9. Pressure limitation ( working hydraulic )


check)

10.Accumulator (working hydraulic)

11.Replenishing pressure (travel hydraulic )


B. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit

Before carrying out tests / adjustments following section C/D, evaluate the memory, save it on the notebook, print
it out or record the codes in saved order in the adjustment checklist. Repair existing defects.
After adjustments according to checklist step C and D, check the memory once again, delete the error
memory!

1. Inch/brake pedal
Always perform the check of the adjustments of the Inch/brake pedal when the electronic box is connected =
connect all cables of the tester.
D. Tests with test box CET 08/03

1. Identification
2. Battery

4. Signal - preselection "reduced speed range" - rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200

Page
Feuille
3.5.52.03
6. Travel joystick
range.
8. Alternator


11.Potentiometer


15./ 16.Basic adjustment - left track / Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain
- reverse 2
position "ADJUST").
remain on Qmax).
rechecks.
Mjfcifss!
Quick Reference
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200

Page
Feuille
3.5.52.04
Select the travel speed range via rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick.
Sub Group Index
Technical data LH engine 4.1
LH - engine in line 4.1.10
D 904 TB
D 904 T
D 916 T
D 916 TI
LH - engine in line E 4.1.11

D 924 T-E A1
D 926 T-E A2
D 926 TI-E A2
LH - engine V-type 4.1.30

D 9306 TB
D 9306 T
D 9406 TI-E A3
Power, torque LH engine 4.2
PR 712 F/N xxx-01012999 4.2.10

PR 722 F/N xxx-01012999
PR 732 F/N xxx-20012999
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012999
PR 712B F/N xxx-3000 4.2.11

PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
Fan and cylinder configuration LH - Diesel engine 4.3
Remove and install engine fan 4.4
Datum Edition Date
01 02 Engine Blatt
Page 4.0.00.01
Feuille
Technical Data, Wear Limits, Torques D 924 T-E A1 D 926 T-E A2 D 926 TI-E A2*
Type 4 - in line 6 - in line
Cylinder bore mm (inch) 122 (4,803)
Piston stroke mm (inch) 142 (5,590)
Displacement, total l (cu. in) 6,64 (405) 9,96 (607)
Direction of rotation Diesel engine - on flywheel left
Direction of rotation fan - on flywheel right
Fan drive - up to F/N xxx-5599 direct viscous
50 50
Fan RPM rating at appr. 1/min 1850 1630 1560
Fan drive - from F/N xxx-5600 hydr. - regulated see reverse side
Fan RPM rating at see group 3.1
Fuel consumption at rated RPM g/kWh 217 210 205

Lube oil consumption - in relation to fuel consumption appr. % 0,8
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-5-3-6-2-4

Overlap 4-2-1-3 6-2-4-1-5-3
Firing sequence CS 180 120
Injection pump timing for details see engine type - plate
Compression ratio 17,2 : 1

Compression pressure min. / max. bar 20 - 28
Deviation between cylinders max. bar 4
Engine oil pressure min. (warmed-up) - low idle RPM bar 1,5
- high idle RPM bar 3,5
Cooling system - excess pressure bar 0,7 0,8

- minimum pressure at coolant pump outlet (rated RPM) bar 1,1
Thermostats - setting C (F) 79 (174)
- stroke mm (inch) 8 (0,314)
Fuel injection pump type Bosch VE Bosch MW Bosch P 3000

Governor type Bosch RSV
+8
Injectors - injector opening pressure - new bar 225
+8
- operating pressure bar 217
Screw - injector holder tightening torque Nm 23
Fuel supply line nuts tightening torque Nm 20
Valve clearance - inl. / ex. mm 0,25 / 0,30

Valve seat angle - inl. / ex. 30 / 45
Cylinder head screws tightening torque (soft gasket) 30 Nm + 30+30+60+60=180

Cylinder head screws retorque (soft gasket) 90
Cylinder head screws tightening torque (metallic elastomer gasket) 30 Nm - 90 Nm + 70+70+70+70=280
-1,5 -0,06
Cylinder head screws length mm (inch) 161 (6,338 )
Cylinder head screws length - limit max. mm (inch) 162,5 (6,397)
Cam stroke inl. / ex. mm (inch) 8,5 / 9 (0,334 / 0,354)
Turbocharger - axial play max. mm (inch) 0,16 (0,006)

- radial play max. mm (inch) 0,43 (0,016)
Oil drain valve - oil sump tightening torque Nm 110
For additional data or updates, refer to the Diesel Engine Service Manual
For performance data - see machine specific data in groups 3.1 and 4.2
* = at PR 742 installed from F/N xxx-3000 to F/N xxx-5599 and

at RL 42 installed from F/N xxx-3002
Technical Data LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date RL Litronic
01 03 LH-engine (in line) E Blatt

Page
Feuille 4.1.11.01
#
Technical Data, Wear Limits, Torques D 926 TI-E A2 D 926 TI-E A2*
Emission limit values in accordance with 97/68/EG (stage2) and EPA/CARB (Tier 2)
Nominal values (maximum) according to engine type plate power kW 135 180
RPM 1/min 2100 2000
Operating (nominal) values power kW 132 172
RPM 1/min 1800 1800
Type 6 - in line
Displacement, total l (cu. in) 9,96 (607)
Fan drive hydraulic - regulated
Fan RPM rating at appr. 1/min 1680 1475
Fuel consumption at rated RPM g/kWh 210 204


Overlap 6-2-4-1-5-3
Firing sequence KW 120


minimum pressure at coolant pump outlet (rated RPM) bar 1,1
- stroke mm (inch) 8 (0,314)
Fuel injection pump type Bosch P 3000

+8
+8

Cylinder head screws tightening torque 30 Nm - 90 Nm + 70+70+70+70=280

-1,5 -0,06
Cam stroke - inl. / ex. mm (inch) 8,5 / 9 (0,334 / 0,354)

* = at PR 742 installed from F/N xxx-5600

#
= at LR 632 installed from F/N xxx-6200
Technical Data, Wear Limits, Torques D 9306 TB D 9306 T D 9406 TI-E A3*
Type V6
Cylinder bore mm (inch) 130 (5,118) 135 (5,314)
Displacement, total l (cu. in) 12 (732) 12,88 (786)
Direction of rotation fan - on flywheel left right
Fan drive direct hydraulic
Fan RPM rating at appr. 1/min 1530 1300
Fuel consumption at rated RPM g/kWh 234 222 206


Overlap 5-2-4-1-6-3
Firing sequence CS 150-90-150-90-150-90 120
Compression ratio 17 : 1 15,5 : 1 17,2 : 1

Compression pressure min. / max. bar 20 - 28 18 - 26 20 - 28

- minimum pressure at coolant pump outlet (rated RPM) bar 1,5
- stroke mm (inch) 10 - 12,5 (0,393 - 0,492)
Fuel injection pump type Bosch P 3000 Bosch P 7800

+8
+8

Valve seat angle - inl. / ex. 30 / 30 30 / 45

Cylinder head screws retorque 90
-1,5 -0,06

* = at PR 752 installed from F/N xxx-2002 to F/N xxx-5599 and

at RL 52 installed from F/N xxx-2002

PR 732 F/N xxx-2001 2500
Technical Data PR 742 F/N xxx-2001 2500
Datum Edition Date PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
RL 52 F/N 739-2001
01 04 LH - engine (V-type) Blatt

Page
Feuille 4.1.30.01
Technical Data, Wear Limits, Torques D 9406 TI-E A3*
Emission limit values in accordance with 97/68/EG (stage2) and EPA/CARB (Tier 2)
Nominal values (maximum) according to engine type plate power kW 258
RPM 1/min 2100
Operating (nominal) values power kW 243
RPM 1/min 1800
Type V6
Displacement, total l (cu. in) 12,88 (786)
Fan drive hydraulic - regulated
Fan RPM rating at appr. 1/min 1300 from F/N xxx-6200 appr. 1500
Fuel consumption at rated RPM g/kWh 210


Overlap 5-2-4-1-6-3
Firing sequence KW 120

Cooling system - excess pressure bar 0,7

minimum pressure at coolant pump outlet (rated RPM) bar 1,5
- stroke mm (inch) 10 - 12,5 (0,393 - 0,492)
Fuel injection pump type Bosch P 7800

+8
+8


Cylinder head screws retorque 90
-1,5 -0,06

* = at PR 752 installed from F/N xxx-5600

PR 712B F/N xxx-3000 PR 722B F/N xxx-3000
PR 732B F/N xxx-3000 PR 742B F/N xxx-30005599
Power P - kW
Torque Md - Nm

PR 712 B F/N xxx-3000
Power, Torque PR 732 B F/N xxx-3000
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-3000
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
01 02 LH-Engine "E" Blatt

Page
Feuille 4.2.11.01
PR 752 F/N xxx-20025599 PR 752 F/N xxx-5600
Power P - kW
Torque Md - Nm
LH - 4/6 cylinder - In line engine
Fan - push type = serial version Fan - suction type

MUL -viewed in air flow direction EDUL - viewed in air flow direction
"running clockwise" "running anti-clockwise"
= intake valve
= exhaust valve
Firing order 4-cylinder engines: firing 1 3 4 2

overlap 4 2 1 3
Firing order 6-cylinder engines firing 1 5 3 6 2 4

overlap 6 2 4 1 5 3
Valve clearance - adjust when the engine is cold:
Emission optimised "E"-engines intake/exhaust 0,25/0,30 mm

previous types intake/exhaust 0,20/0,25 mm
To adjust the valve clearance, see "Workshop Manual - Engine"
Fan and Cylinder Configuration LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
01 03 LH-Diesel Engine Blatt

Page
Feuille 4.3.10.01
LH - 4/6 cylinder - In line engine / LH - 6/8 Cylinder - V-type engine
Fan - push type = serial version

MUL - viewed in air flow direction
"running clockwise"
with hydraulic fan drive motor
LH - 6/8 Cylinder - V-type engine
Fan - push type = serial version Fan suction type

EDUL - viewed in air flow direction MUL - viewed in air flow direction
"running anti-clockwise" "running clockwise"
= intake valve
= exhaust valve
Firing order 6-cylinder V-type engines: firing 1 6 3 5 2 4

overlap 5 2 4 1 6 3
Firing order 8-cylinder V-type engines: firing 1 8 4 2 7 3 6 5

overlap 7 3 6 5 1 8 4 2
Valve clearance -adjust when engine is cold intake/exhaust 0,25/0,30 mm
To adjust the valve clearance, see "Workshop Manual - Engine"

Sub Group Index
Technical data coupling and splitter box 5.1
Coupling 5.2
PR 712 F/N xxx-0103 5.2.10

PR 722 F/N xxx-0103
PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 5.2.30

PR 742 F/N xxx-2001
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 5.2.50
Splitter box 5.3
PR 712 F/N xxx-0103 5.3.10

PR 722 F/N xxx-0103
PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 5.3.30

PR 742 F/N xxx-2001
PR 752 F/N xxx-20025303 5.3.50
PR 752 F/N xxx-5304 5.3.51
Coupling and
Datum Edition Date
01 01 Splitter box Blatt

Page 5.0.00.01
Feuille
Description PR 712 PR 722 PR 732 PR 742 PR 752
350 B 376
Splitter box type 250 B 266 250 B 265 350 B 375 350 B 365
350 B 374*
Oil quantity (for specification see group 1.3) l 2,5 2,5 3 3 6
shaft I 61 58 50 50 53
No. of teeth
shaft II 49 53 43 43 44
Gear ratio I,II i 0,803 0,914 0,86 0,86 0,83
shaft I 0,40 1,00 0,40 1,00 0,40 1,00 0,40 1,00 0,40 1,00
roller bearing 0,016-0,039 0,016-0,039 0,016-0,039 0,016-0,039 0,016-0,039
Bearing play - axial
min. max. shaft II
0 0 0 0 0
mm ball bearing
inches
shaft II 0,40 1,00#
-- -- -- --
roller bearing 0,016-0,039#
dim. A mm/inch 163 / 6,42 163 / 6,42 218 / 8,58 218 / 8,58 299 / 11,66
Oil level - control
dimensions
dim. B mm/inch 10 / 0,39 10 / 0,39 10 / 0,39 10 / 0,39 10 / 0,39
Note: * = installed at PR 742B F/N xxx-5234 (new travel hydraulic pumps)

#
= installed at PR 752 F/N xxx-5304
F/N xxx-5303 = bearings will be changed from ball to rollers at repair.
Description PR 712 PR 722 PR 732 PR 742 PR 752
Coupling size H - 50 - 1 H - 50 - 1 K - 150 D K - 150 D H - 400 - 1
Rated torque Nm 800 800 2400 2400 4000
Max. torque Nm 2100 2100 6000 6000 10000
Max. allowable. RPM min-1 4000 4000 4000 4000 2500
- 40 to - 40 to - 40 to - 40 to - 40 to
Allowable. temperature range C
+ 150 + 150 + 150 + 150 + 150
set. screw, item 8 Nm 120 120 120 120 200

Tightening
screws, item 9/14 Nm 220 220 79 79 500
torque
screws, item 7 Nm -- -- -- -- 120
Technical Data
Datum Edition Date
01 01 Coupling and Splitter Box Blatt

Page 5.1.00.01
Feuille
1. Construction, function
Main components
Pos. 6 hub
Pos. 10 bushing- axial - with resilient elements
Pos. 13 Elements - radial
The axial bushings are screwed onto the flywheel of the engine at fixed
positions = torque input
The hub is fixed at the input shaft of the splitter box with set screws
and at that way also secured against axial and radial movement =
torque output.
The torque transfer from input to output is done by the plug-in type resilient elements = free of axial forces.
2. Maintenance
The coupling is maintenance free and requires no lubrication. The material is oil and grease resistant.
If a knocking noise is heard in the area of the coupling when shutting off the engine, maybe the cause is given
by worn out resilient elements. Check the coupling as soon as possible and change all worn or damaged parts.
3. Disassembly / assembly
Secure components with suitable lifting devices. Disconnect the splitter box 2 from the flywheel housing. Move it
in axial direction to make it possible to disassemble parts of the coupling.
It is not necessary to disassemble any other parts to change worn out resilient elements.
To disassemble the complete coupling loosen set screws 8 in the hub and screw out socket head screws 9 from
the bushings. Remove all parts.
Assemble in reverse order.

Due to cut outs in the flywheel the bushings 10 are centered. Slide the hub 6 together with the screwed on parts
on the input shaft of the splitter box until the hub contacts the end of the spline. To secure the hub tighten and
torque the set screws 8 correct.
Note:
- The screws 9 and 14 may only be used once (1x) since the adhesive looses its properties after repeated use.
Use only original screws of the quality "Inbus Plus". Prior to the installation, lubricate the friction surface on the
heads of the screws lightly with grease.
- The curing process of the adhesive at 20C ambient temperature, after the screws have been tightened with
the listed torque, is approx. 4 to 5 hours. The machine should therefore not be operated within this time frame.
- Tightening torque's of screws 7, 8, 9 and 14 are listed at data sheet 5.1.00.01.
- After the bushings 10 are bolted, slide on the resilient elements and slide in the hub together with the screwed
on elements 13 to check the correct mounting position. The parts must be easily movable in axial direction.
4. Pre-assemble of a disassembled coupling (see also above notes)

Combine inner and outer hub together, according to the drawing. screw in socket head screws 7 and tighten it
with the correct torque.
Assemble radial elements according to the drawing and fix it with screws 14. Fix the elements with a suitable
tool against twisting (turning) and tighten the screws with the correct torque.
Note: If hub and radial elements are not 100% in line, the coupling will be damaged after a short time.
Slide in resilient elements between the radial elements the check there position. The elements must be easily
movable in axial direction.
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date PR 752 F/N xxx-2002

RL 52 F/N 739-2001
01 01 Coupling Blatt
Page
Feuille 5.2.50.01
1 Diesel engine
2 Splitter box 6 Inner hub
3 Hex head screw with washer 7 Socket head screw M12x20
4 Coupling complete 8 Set screw
9 Socket head screw M20x70
10 Bushing- axial
11 Resilient element
12 Outer hub
13 Radial element
14 Socket head screw M20x50
Notes
Reference dimension for oil level A, B see page 5.1.00.01
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx- 2002 5303
RL 52 F/N xxx- 20015303

Page 5.3.50.01
Feuille
1 housing
2 dipstick
3 tube
4 guide tube
5 oil filler neck

6 fitting - oil filler
7 oil drain valve complete

.1 poppet
.2 seal ring
.3 piston
.4 spring
.5 valve cap
8 seal ring
10 input shaft
11 roller bearing
12 roller bearing
13 shaft seal
14 bearing flange
15 O-ring
16 socket head screw
20 spur gear
21 roller bearing
22 bearing flange
23 O-ring
24 grooved ball bearing
26 stud with hex nut and washer
27 O-ring
30 spur gear
31 roller bearing
32 bearing flange
33 O-ring
34 grooved ball bearing
37 O-ring
40 identification plate
install with Loctite 242 or comparable product
install with Omnivisc 1050 or comparable product
* space between sealing lips filled with appr. ca. 30%

grease
Repositioned - sectional view
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx- 2002 5303
RL 52 F/N xxx- 20015303

Page 5.3.50.02
Feuille
Notes
Reference dimension for oil level A, B see page 5.1.00.01
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx- 5304
RL 52 F/N xxx- 5304

Page 5.3.51.01
Feuille
1 housing
2 dipstick
3 tube
4 guide tube
5 oil filler neck

6 fitting - oil filler
7 oil drain valve complete

.1 poppet
.2 seal ring
.3 piston
.4 spring
.5 valve cap
8 seal ring
10 input shaft
11 roller bearing
12 roller bearing
13 shaft seal
14 bearing flange
15 O-ring
20 spur gear
21 roller bearing
22 bearing flange
23 O-ring
24 roller bearing
27 O-ring
30 spur gear
31 roller bearing
32 bearing flange
33 O-ring
34 roller bearing
37 O-ring
40 identification plate
install with Loctite 242 or comparable product
install with Omnivisc 1050 or comparable product
* space between sealing lips filled with appr. ca. 30%

grease
Repositioned - sectional view
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx- 5304
RL 52 F/N xxx- 5304

Page 5.3.51.02
Feuille
Sub Group Index
Technical data 6.1
Description 6.2
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103 6.2.10
PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
PR 742(B) F/N xxx-2003
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 6.2.50
Function 6.3
PR 712 F/N xxx-01030421 6.3.10
PR 722 F/N xxx-01030606
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-04225599 6.3.11

PR 722(B) F/N xxx-06075599
PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 6.3.12

PR 732 F/N xxx-20032207 6.3.30
PR 732 F/N xxx-22082500 6.3.31
PR 732B F/N xxx-25015599 6.3.32
PR 732B F/N xxx-5600 6.3.33
PR 742(B) F/N xxx-20015233 6.3.40
PR 742B F/N xxx-52345599 6.3.41
PR 742B F/N xxx-5600 6.3.42
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062 6.3.50
PR 752 F/N xxx-20635071 6.3.51
PR 752 F/N xxx-50725599 6.3.52
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600 6.3.53
Hydraulic hose routing 6.4

Installation guidelines travel motor - high pressure hoses 6.4.01
Hydraulic hose routing

PR 712 F/N xxx-01030421 6.4.10
PR 722 F/N xxx-01030606
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032207 6.4.30
PR 742(B) F/N xxx-20015233 6.4.40
Test and adjustment 6.5
Datum Edition Date
01 01 Travel hydraulic Blatt

Page 6.0.00.01
Feuille
PR 712(B) PR 722(B) PR 732(B) PR 742(B) PR 752
Description
01035599 01035599 20035599 20015599 20025599
Gear pump(s) - replenishing 117*

oil flow Qmax l/min 79 83 83 150# 180
pressure relief valve
- replenishing pressure SP bar 16+4 16+4 16+4 253 20+7
pressure relief valve - cold start SD
to protect cooler and bar 251 251 251 -- 28+2
gear pump
one way valve
- oil cooler bypass bar -- -- -- 3 --
Accumulator 15*
- replenishing system bar -- -- -- --# --
Gear pump - pump control circuit

oil flow Qmax l/min -- -- -- 33 --
- control pressure (measured value) bar -- -- -- 505 --
Regulating pump - fan drive

oil flow Qmax l/min -- -- -- -- 58
stand-by pressure bar -- -- -- -- 30+3
working pressure bar -- -- -- -- 1603
flushing flow l/min -- -- -- -- 2-5
Variable pump - travel drive 272*

125 154 209 425
- oil flow Qmax l 282#
hydraulic regulating pressure
- servo control cylinder bar 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8
- replenishing quantity protection bar -- -- -- -- 16+2
pressure relief valves - max. high pressure
- closed circuit left/right bar 420+30/-10 420+30/-10 420+30/-10 420+30/-10 420+30/-10
- travel forward/reverse
10 - 15*
flushing flow l/min 10 - 15 10 - 15 10 - 15 10 - 15
15 - 20#
Variable motor - travel drive

- pressure relief valve - flushing bar 10 10 10 10 10
-- -- -- -- 8 - 15
- at pilot piston bar
flushing flow l/min 10 - 15 10 - 15 10 - 15 10 - 15 10 - 15
Note: * = PR 742(B) F/N xxx- 5233

#
= PR 742B F/N xxx-52345599
Technical data
Datum Edition Date

Page 6.1.00.01
Feuille
PR 712B PR 722B PR 732B PR 742B PR 752
Description
5600 5600 5600 5600 5600
Gear pump(s) - replenishing

oil flow Qmax l/min 79 83 83 117 180
- replenishing pressure SP bar 16+4 16+4 16+4 20+7 20+7
pressure relief valve - cold start SD
to protect cooler and bar 251 251 251 -- 28+2
gear pump
one way valve
- oil cooler bypass bar -- -- -- 3 --
Gear pump - fan drive

oil flow Qmax l/min 39 35 38 33 --
Proportional solenoid valve - electronic regulated
- maximum pressure pmax bar 110+10 130+10 150+10 210+10 --
Regulating pump - fan drive

oil flow Qmax l/min -- -- -- -- 58
stand-by pressure bar -- -- -- -- 30+3
working pressure - standard (not adjustm. value)
F/N xxx- 6199 max. bar -- -- -- -- 160+10
F/N xxx-6200 max. bar 190+10
flushing flow l/min -- -- -- -- 2-5
Variable pump - travel drive

125 154 209 282 425
- oil flow Qmax l
- servo control cylinder bar 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8
- replenishing quantity protection bar -- -- -- -- 16+2
pressure relief valves - max. high pressure
- closed circuit left/right bar 420+30/-10 420+30/-10 420+30/-10 420+30/-10 420+30/-10
- travel forward/reverse
Variable motor - travel drive

- pressure relief valve - flushing bar 10 10 10 10 10
-- -- -- -- 8 - 15
- at pilot piston bar
Pressure limitation brake release

351 351 351 351 351
(towing) bar
1. Description
The travel hydraulic system consists primarily of two independent hydrostatic circuits. A variable flow pump
and variable flow motors for each drive operate in a closed loop circuit and each drive a travel gear / track .
The drives are always connected and also serve as the service brake.
All travel and steering movements of the machine, from straight travel to counterrotation are infinitely variable by
moving the travel lever. Control and regulation of the travel hydraulic system is handled by the electronic control
system. The stepless regulation also makes maximum utilization of the existing Diesel engine power possible,
since the result of force speed can be held at a constant level .
The pressure between travel pumps and motors depends on the travel resistance, the transferred torque on the
angle of the variable flow motors.
The oil cooling system and hydraulic tank are also utilized for the working hydraulics of the machine.
2. Main components of drive train

1- Diesel engine 7- Axial piston fixed displ. motor / engine cooling fan
2- Splitter box 8- Gear motor/ hydraulic oil cooling fan
3- Swash plate type variable flow pump, right & left 9- Hydr. oil cooler
4- Bent axis type variable flow motor 10- Hydraulic tank
2 x right, 2 x left x- Travel gear with parking brake
5- Swash plate type - regulating pump (fan drive) (not shown)
6- Gear pumps - replenishing
Mjfcifss!
Description
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
RL 52 F/N xxx-2001
01 01 Travel Hydraulic Blatt

Page 6.2.50.01
Feuille
2.1. Basic function of main components
2.1.1 Diesel engine - Splitter box - pump configuration

The Diesel engine drives the splitter box
via an elastic coupling at preselected
RPM. The splitter box transfers the input
RPM via two output shafts to the travel
pumps, mounted on the splitter box.
Mounted on the right output shaft are the
right travel pump, the variable flow pump
for the fan drive as well as the
replenishing (tandem) gear pumps.
Mounted on the left output shaft is the left
travel pump as well as the variable flow
working hydraulic pump.
2.1.2 Travel pumps - travel motors (closed loop circuit)

The closed loop circuit consists of a variable flow travel pump which is connected to the variable flow travel
motor with four high pressure hoses.
The travel pumps are regulated via two proportional solenoid valves per pump. They determine the direction (=
travel direction ) and flow (= speed range).
The intake volume of the travel motors (= higher speed) is regulated via pressure lines, also by the pump
proportional solenoid valves.
The change-over from pump to motor regulating range is stepless. The total speed range (= regulating range)
ranges from 0 to 6.8 mph ( 0 to 11 km/h) The maximum speed can be limited to 2.8 mph ( 4.6 km/h ) via a
switch in the electronic control.
This type of regulation with the same Diesel engine output results in::
a) small travel joystick deflection
on travel pumps - small pump angle - small displacement = small flow
on travel motors - large angle = large consumption
slow speed - high torque
b) large travel joystick deflection
on travel pumps - large pump angle = large flow
on travel motors - small angle = small consumption
high speed - reduced torque
c) in every intermediate position of the infinite joystick deflection

a corresponding relation between speed and power, depending on the joystick deflection.
a) b)
The hydraulic pressure created in the closed loop circuit is limited to maximum 420 bar by pressure relief
valves integrated in the travel pumps.
The required oil to shift the hydraulic pumps and motors is taken from the (tandem) gear pumps - replenishing
circuit.
Part of the oil in the closed loop circuit is discharged to the tank via valves in the travel motors. This oil as well
as leak oil losses are replenished with cooled and filtered oil via the replenishing function in the travel pumps.
The travel motors are inserted directly into the travel gears and are accessible from the outside via the rear
main frame cover.
Mjfcifss!
Description
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
RL 52 F/N xxx-2001

Page 6.2.50.02
Feuille
2.1.3 Tandem gear pumps - replenishing function
The gear pumps deliver oil from the hydraulic tank via a valve block, the filter bracket and the pressure filter
to the travel pumps to replenish the closed circuits, for flushing the housing, for the pump control
and to build up regulating pressure for pumps and motors.
to the travel motors to control the motor angle.
to the distributor block with solenoid valves for the oil pressure supply for the servo control of the
working hydraulic and to release the parking brakes.
The resulting pressure in the system is limited by two pressure relief valves, which are installed in the valve
block. Oil not needed in the system flows via these valves and the oil cooler back to tank. The valve block is
mounted on the right hand side of the machine in the main frame.
This valve block also holds the thermostat switch for the fan control.
When the oil is cold and sluggish, part of the oil is displaced directly to the tank, via a pressure relief valve,
which also is installed in the right hand side of the main frame. This prevents increased back pressure and the
oil will heat up quicker to the required operating temperature.
2.1.4 Regulating pump- fan drive/ hydraulic fixed displacement motors

The pump is an axial piston pump with swash plate design and load sensing control. Due to the load sensing
control, the axial piston unit draws just enough oil from the hydraulic tank as is presently required to maintain
the function (load sensing).
When the machine is cold, the load sensing signal from the working circuit is directed via a solenoid valve to
tank. The load sensing control regulates the axial piston unit in such a way, that the system pressure required
to maintain the minimum speed for the fixed hydraulic motors / fan drive is always maintained.
The electric fan drive control monitors the hydraulic oil temperature as well as the temperature for engine
coolant and turbocharger.
As soon as one item reaches the required operating temperature, the oil flow of the load sensing signal to
the tank is blocked by the solenoid valve and the pressurized oil is redirected to the pump. The system
pressure required for maximum RPM of the fixed hydraulic motors / fan drive is maintained, in the normal
working RPM range of the Diesel engine.
This control makes it possible for the oil to heat up quickly, even in cold ambient temperatures, and also
makes it possible to maintain a constant operating temperature, even with changing loads.
2.1.5 Hydraulic tank

The hydraulic tank is mounted on the left rear of the machine, it contains a return oil filter and serves as a
reservoir for the complete hydraulic system of the machine.
2.1.6 Travel gears and disk brakes

The travel gears, bolted to the main frame, transfer the output power of the travel motors to the track chains.
The integrated parking brakes are always vented during travel operation.
1. Neutralfunction Functional schematic, see 6.3.11.00
1.1. Gear pump 15 - Replenishing

As soon as the engine is started, the gear pump 15 draws oil from the hydraulic tank 80 via the shut off valve 81
and supplies it to the oil cooler 16 and to the distributor block 50.
From distributor block 50 to solenoid valve 51 (parking brake) blocked.
check valve 54, accumulator 55 and solenoid valve 53
blocked (servo cut off - working hydraulic)
test point ND blocked.
The pressure relief valve in the distributor block limits the possible back up pressure in front of the oil cooler to
max. 25+3 bar.
After raising the safety lever, the solenoid valve 53 clears the path to the servo control for the working hydraulic.
From oil cooler 16 to pressure relief valve 17 pressure filter 18
F-travel pump 2 (right) internal.
test connection SP.
F-travel pump 2 (left) internal.
pressure switch 19.
In F-travel pump 2 left / right to restrictor 6 ( pump housing tank)
replenishing function relief valve 4 closed loop circuit - M1(2)
replenishing function relief valve 5 closed loop circuit - M2(1)
proportional solenoid valve 10 and 11 blocked.
pilot piston 8 orifice 12 pump control cylinder 9.
Approx. ~1,5 l/min of oil flows through restrictors 6, through the pump housing and through the filter 85 into the
hydraulic tank 80.
The oil not needed in the pressure area of the system flows via the pressure relief valve 17, through the return
filter 82 into the tank.
The paths of pilot pistons 8 to control pistons 9 are severely restricted. All control cylinders are equally actuated
with pressurized oil, keeping the swash plate for pumps 3 in neutral position = 0 pump angle.
1.2. Travel pumps 2 and travel motors 20 - closed loop circuit

With the pumps in neutral, the oil in the closed loop circuit does not circulate. Because the swash plates of the
travel pumps 2 are in the neutral position, the pistons in the barrels do not stroke, meaning there is no flow,
even though the rotary group is turning. However, the closed loop circuit is being pressurized with approx. 16+4
bar by the replenishing circuit (via check valves integrated into the high pressure relief valves 4 and 5 (see
paragraph 1.1).
The 7/2 directional valves 26 (= 7 connections/ 2 positions) in the travel motors 20 are in an end position, its
side is not defined. Approx. 10 l/min oil is discharged from one side of the closed loop circuit, M1 or M2, from
the opposite side the oil flows to the spring side of the control piston 22 and the axial piston unit 21 is held in
neutral position = maximum (displacement) angle.
Replenishing oil flows from M1/M2 to directional valve 26 pressure reducing valve 27 directional
valve 26 pressure relief valve 24 orifice 28 motor housing
(flushing) screen filter 30 support shaft 40 tank 80.
Control pressure moves from M1 /M2 to directional valve 26 pressure reducing valve 27 directional
valve 26 pilot piston 23 control piston 22 - spring side.
The pressure reducing valves 27 are actuated on both sides with equal pressure, and therefore remain in
neutral position = free flow. The piston bottom side of the control piston 22 is open towards the motor housing/
tank via the servo control piston 23 and orifice 29.

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0422 5599
Mjfcifss! PR 722B F/N xxx-0607 5599
Function
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.11.01
2. Operating functions - travel
The various travel functions are controlled by the electronic system via the proportional solenoid valves, which
are installed on the pump covers and the travel motor remote control. The current and therefore the regulating
pressure build-up is in proportion to the lever deflection. See also Description - Travel Hydraulic - section 6.2.10
and Functional Description - Electronic Control - section 10.3.
Note: The pump control depends on the type of travel gear installed - see "Notes" on the parts listing
or sub group 11.
The direction is selected in travel operation on the travel pumps 2, with travel gear type "A" or "C",
for:
Electronic control: Regulating pressure build -up: Oil flow output:
Travel forward on solenoid valve 10 at connection Z on P(top)
Travel reverse on solenoid valve 11 at connection Y on S(bottom)
The direction is selected in travel operation on the travel pumps 2, with travel gear type "P", for:
Travel forward on solenoid valve 11 at connection Y on S(bottom)
Travel reverse on solenoid valve 10 at connection Z on P(top)
The solenoid valves for the travel motors are always energized during travel operation, but they only
regulate from a certain current value.
When turning, the solenoid valve on the side to which the machine is turning receives less current, as a result
the intake volume of the motor is increased or the flow volume from the pump is reduced and the travel speed on
this side is reduced.
The solenoid valve 51 is energized during the complete travel operation. The valve shifts to diagonal path, the
switch 52 is actuated by the oil pressure, flows via support axle 40 to the travel gears 35 and vents (releases)
the disk brakes 36.
Depending on the travel resistance (= rotary resistance of travel motors), high pressure is created in the pump
flow = high pressure side of closed loop circuits. In the return flow from the travel motors, the pressure is SP-
pressure = low pressure side of closed loop circuits.
High pressure side - travel forward = System section - test point M1
High pressure side - travel reverse = System section - test point M2
2.1. Regulation - travel pumps 2 starting from neutral function, as described in section 1.
The valve is opened when the proportional solenoid valves 10/11 are energized, the pressurized oil flows to one
side of the regulating cylinder 7 and builds up a magnetic force in proportion to the hydraulic pressure.
The piston of the regulating cylinder 7 is moved by hydraulic pressure to the opposite regulating spring
assembly, until the forces are balanced again.
The servo control piston 8 is also moved via a mechanical connection. It opens the oil port to the side opposite
of the control direction of the piston 8 of swash plate control cylinder 9 and allows the oil to flow from the
opposite side into the pump housing. The swash plate pump 3 is changed to flow direction against Qmax .
low current small flow volume
high current large flow volume
flow direction, see chart, section 2
As the swash place is moved, the housing of servo control piston 8 is mechanically moved along until the bores
in the housing and the servo control piston are again positively overlapped = neutral position. Both sides of the
swash plate control cylinder 9 are actuated again with pressurized oil and the swash plate is held hydraulically
on the actuated pump angle.
As current increases, it moves further in direction Qmax until the mechanical regulating stop of the travel pump is
reached.
If current is decreased, the swash plate pump 3 is moved in direction Qmin / neutral position, regulation / control
sequence is as described above.
2.2. Regulation - travel motors 20 starting from neutral function, as described in section 1.
Due to current going to the proportional solenoids, the servo control piston 23 is moved against the regulating
spring and return spring to shift position parallel path.
When starting to travel, the 7/2 directional valve 26 is actuated on one side with low pressure, on the other side
with high pressure from the closed loop circuit and is moved depending on the forces against the low pressure
side.
This results in the following oil pressure flow, in addition to the closed loop circuit:
Low pressure sidedirectional valve 26 1.pressure reducing valve 27-spring side.
(SP-pressure) 1.pressure reducing valve 27-piston side/pathdirectional valve 26
2. pressure reducing valve 27 -spring side.
pressure relief valve 24 orifice 28 motor housing
The sum of spring force + SP-pressure on the piston of pressure reducing valves 27 results in a pressure value
of ~40 bar.
High pressure side directional valve 26 blocked.
pressure reducing valve 27 - path/piston side directional
valve 26 pilot piston 23 control piston 22 - piston bottom
side.
When the pressure on the piston bottom side of the pressure reducing valve 27 reaches a pressure of ~40 bar,
the piston is moved against the spring + SP-pressure and the path is restricted, so that the pressure cannot
continue to increase (control pressure on piston 22 40 bar).
The spring side of the control piston 22 is relieved via the servo control piston 23 and orifice 29 to the motor
housing / tank, the axial piston unit 21 is moved to a smaller angle = in direction Qmin.
Due to this change in direction Qmin, the return spring pushes the servo control piston 23 increasingly against
the force of the proportional solenoid. When the spring force is the same as the magnetic force, the servo
control piston 23 is held in center position, the ports to the control piston 22 are closed and the axial piston unit
is held on the selected angle.
As current is increased, it continues to move in direction Qmin. The maximum possible current is limited by the
electronic control.
As current is decreased, the axial piston unit 21 is moved again in direction Qmax = neutral position, the control
pressure is moved the same way as in neutral function via the servo control piston 23- diagonal path to the
spring side of the control piston 22 and the piston bottom side is relieved. Intermediate positions for equal force
of solenoid to spring are held as described.
2.3. Closed loop circuits starting from neutral function, as described in section 1.1
The swash plate pump flow 3 is moved via a line connection and through the support axle 40 to a connection
side of travel motor 20/ axial piston unit 21, it actuates its piston and sets the unit in rotation. Due to the output
rotation, the oil is transported to the opposite connector side and flows via a second line connection through the
support axle back to the suction side of the travel pump 2- swash plate pump 3.
The expelled oil in the travel motor 20 - see previous description - is taken in again into the travel pump 2, also
on the low pressure side = suction side via the replenishing function of the pressure relief valve 4 or 5 - see
neutral function, section 1.1.
On the high pressure side = delivery side, the replenishing function is held closed by high pressure and the
maximum pressure of the pressure relief valve is limited to 420+30/-10 bar.
If the pressure increases above this value, the pressure relief valve opens and lets the oil flow off to the
replenishing - low pressure side.
The second closed loop circuit works the same way.
The pressures in the closed loop circuits can also be measured on test points M1 and M2 (support axles 40 -
test connections are installed inside, can also be connected to outer flanges) with suitable pressure gauges.
See special tools, section 2.1.21.
Observe safety guidelines - see section 1.2.

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0422 5599
Function
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.11.02

From distributor block 45 to solenoid valve Y13 (parking brake) blocked.
check valve 51, accumulator 55 and solenoid valve Y4
test point SD blocked.
max. 25+3 bar.
After raising the safety lever, the solenoid valve Y4 clears the path to the servo control for the working hydraulic.
test connection SP.
pressure switch B6.
In F-travel pump 2/3 left / right to restrictor 11 ( pump housing tank)
replenishing function relief valve 5 closed loop circuit - M1
proportional solenoid valve Y9/Y10 or Y11/Y12 blocked.
hydraulic tank 80.
1.2. Travel pumps 2/3 and travel motors 20 - closed loop circuit
travel pumps 2/3 are in the neutral position, the pistons in the barrels do not stroke, meaning there is no flow,
paragraph 1.1).

Function
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.12.01
1.3. Gear pump 16 - fan drive
With the Diesel engine running, the gear pump 16 draws oil from the hydraulic tank 80, via shut off valve 81 and
supplies it via the filter 72 to the fixed displacement motor 70 and solenoid valve Y64. The motor 70 / fan begins
to turn and the pressure regulating valve of the proportional solenoid valve Y64 opens when the regulated
pressure level is reached = flow is divided. The oil flows together with the replenishing oil via the filter 82 to the
tank 80.
Test point LA (pressure build up in the fan drive) connected to outlet P of pump 16 .
Regulation: With the starter switch S1 in operating position, the electronic fan control A18 is energized, among
other items. A18 regulates the electrical power of the proportional solenoid valve Y64 depending on the signal
values of temperature sensors B38 to 39 and limits the pressure build up in the hydraulic fan drive = the fan
speed.
S1 K4 F6 A18 B38 - coolant temperature

B39 - hydraulic oil temperature
Y64 - proportional solenoid valve - fan drive
When the machine is cold, Y64 is energized with the maximum value and regulates the possible pressure build
up in the hydraulic fan drive - pump 16 motor 70 - to the minimum value (fan turns at minimum speed or is
stationary).
At increasing temperatures, the current from Y64 is reduced proportionally and as a result, the hydraulic
pressure value is increased proportionally = the fan speed increases.
When one of the temperatures reaches the operating temperature, Y64 is fully shifted without current by A18.
Without current, also in case of a system failure, Y64 regulates to the set maximum pressure = maximum fan
speed (fail-save system) - pmax = 110+10 bar (PR 712), 130+10 bar (PR 722)
For wiring see section 9 - Electrical System.

The direction is selected in travel operation on the travel pumps 2/3 for:
Travel forward on solenoid valve Y9/Y11 at connection Y on S(bottom)
Travel reverse on solenoid valve Y10/Y12 at connection Z on P(top)
The solenoid valve Y13 is energized during the complete travel operation. The valve shifts to diagonal path,
the pressurized oil flows via outlet B to test center 65-BB to
distributor block 75, actuates pressure switch B5 and pressure relief valve 76.
support shafts 40 travel gear 35 and vents (releases) the disk brakes 36.
2.4. Regulation - travel pumps 2/3 starting from neutral function, as described in section 1.
The valve is opened when the proportional solenoid valves Y9/Y10 or Y11/Y12 are energized, the pressurized
oil flows to one side of the regulating cylinder 7 and builds up a magnetic force in proportion to the hydraulic
pressure.
reached.
side.
of ~40 bar.
side.

Function
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.12.02
electronic control.
support axle back to the suction side of the travel pump 2/3- swash plate pump 4.
The expelled oil in the travel motor 20 - see previous description - is taken in again into the travel pump 2/3,
also on the low pressure side = suction side via the replenishing function of the pressure relief valve 5 or 6 - see
The pressures in the closed loop circuits can also be measured on test points M1 and M2 located on the test
center 65 with suitable pressure gauges. See special tools, section 2.1.21.
3. Special function - brake actuating when towing

If any traveling function of the machine fails, the break function (operating brake) of the hydrostatic travel drive
and the mechanic parking brake can be released manually/hydraulically.
Observe all guidelines of the operation manual and all safety guidelines.
3.1. Brake release

Connect hose from connection "BB" to connection "BS" and close "BB"(all connections on the test center 65).
- connect M1RM2R and M1LM2L on the test center 65 with hoses (delivered with the machine-tools)
= hydrostatic drive - brake function is not in function anymore.
- set accumulator 77 by multiple actuating of the hand pump for tilting operators cab (see section 17.2.10)
under sufficient pressure.
- bring starter switch, emergency OFF switch and safety lever in operating position = solenoid valve Y63 is
currented/switched and the brakes 36 are released via path PB by the stored pressurized oil. When
necessary, the brakes can be released directly by the hand pump, when the solenoid valve is switched.
The pressure relief valve 76 prevents the brake of too high pressure. The releasing of the brake is indicated on
the instrument panel via pressure switch B5.
While towing, the displaced oil by the variable motors circulates in the closed loop circuit via connection
M1M2.
3.2. Emergency braking when towing

Interrupt currenting to solenoid valve Y63 by
- pressing the emergency OFF switch, or
- lower the safety lever, or
- turn starter switch to 0 position.
The solenoid valve Y63 returns to neutral position, the pressure to the parking brake gets via path BT to tank
and the brakes closes.
The size of the accumulator 77 allows a recent releasing (twice is possible) of the parking brake.
Notes

Parts list
Datum Edition Date

Page 6.3.12.00
Feuille
1 splitter box
70 axial piston fixed displacement motor
2 travel pump left (fan - combinated cooler)
3 travel pump right 72 strainer
4 swash plate pump
5 pressure relief valve - HP forward / M1 75 distributor block
- with replenishing valve 76 pressure relief valve - parking brake
6 pressure relief valve - HP reverse / M2 77 accumulator - safety device towing
- with replenishing valve
7 servo control piston 80 hydraulic tank
8 pilot piston 81 shut off valve
9 pump control cylinder 82 return filter
10 orifice 83 bypass valve
11 restrictor 85 strainer
15 gear pump - replenishing / coolant circuit 90 to regulating pump 100 - working hydraulic
16 gear pump - fan drive 91 to control valve block - working hydraulic
92 to pilot (servo) control valve - working hydraulic
17 oil cooler 93 return line - working hydraulic
18 pressure relief valve - repl. oil pressure SP 95 to /from hand pump - cab tilt
19 filter - replenishing
100 regulating pump - working hydraulic
20 travel motor complete left /right
21 axial piston unit
22 control piston
23 pilot piston B5 pressure switch - parking brake (15 bar)
24 pressure relief valve - flushing B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8 bar)
25 valve unit B18 pressure switch - filter monitoring (2,5 bar)
26 directional valve B39 temperature sensor - fan drive
27 pressure reducing valve (40 bar)
28 orifice Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off
29 orifice
Y7 proportional solenoid valve - travel motor left
35 travel gear complete left /right Y8 proportional solenoid valve - travel motor right
36 ring piston - parking brake
Y9 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump left -
40 support shaft complete left /right travel forward
41 strainer Y10 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump left -
travel reverse
45 valve block / pressure relief valve - cold start
Y11 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump right -
51 check valve travel forward
55 accumulator - working hydraulic travel reverse
60 test center - test points Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake

SP = repl. oil pressure
ND = control pressure - working hydraulic Y63 solenoid valve - safety device towing
65 test center - test points / connections Y64 proportional solenoid valve -

M1L = high pressure travel forward - left side pressure relief - fan drive
M2L = high pressure travel reverse - left side
M1R = high pressure travel forward - right side
M2R = high pressure travel reverse - right side test points in the machine
hose connection SD = back-up pressure - cold start (pump 15)
BB = parking brake - operating position
BS = parking brake - towing position
M = test point - bleeding
t
liebherr F/N xxx - 5600

F/N xxx - 5600
Datum Edition Date
02 02 Blatt
Page 00
Feuille
Notes
Note: Pump control and position of test points M1, M2 depends on the type of travel gear installed > see sub
group 11
Pos. for FAT > Type AorC for FAT > Type P
10 > Control / travel forward > Control / travel reverse
11 > Control / travel reverse > Control / travel forward
M1 > upper test point > lower test point
M2 > lower test point >upper test point
Parts List PR 732 F/N xxx >2208 2500

Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.3.31.00
1 Splitterbox 53 Solenoid valve > Safety control
working hydraulic
2 Travel pump, complete > right / left 54 Check valve
3 Swash plate pump 55 Accumulator
4 Pressure relief valve >
HP with replenishing valve 60 Test center
HP with replenishing valve 80 Hydraulic tank
6 Restrictor 81 Shut off valve
7 Servo control piston 82 Return filter
8 Servo piston 83 Bypass valve
9 Pump control piston 85 Filter
10 Proportional solenoid valve
(travel > primary regulation) 90 Suction line > working pump
11 Proportional solenoid valve 91 to control valve block WH
(travel > primary regulation) 92 to servo control WH
12 Orifice 93 Leak oil line
(from regulating pump to hydraulic tank)
94 Return lines WH
15 Gear pump > Replenishing pressure 95 to / from hand pump
16 Oil cooler
17 Pressure relief valve > 100 Regulating pump / working hydraulic
Replenishing pressure
18 Pressure filter > Replenishing pressure
19 Oil pressure switch > Replenishing pressure>
Indicator light
20 Travel motor, complete > right / left

21 Axial piston unit
22 Control piston Test points
23 Servo piston with proportional
solenoid (secondary regulation) SP Replenishing pressure
24 Pressure relief valve > flushing circuit ND Cold start pressure / control pressure working
hydraulic
25 Valve unit M1 High pressure > travel forward
26 Directional valve M2 High pressure > travel reverse
27 Pressure reducing valves (integrated) 40 bar
28 Orifice
29 Orifice WH = working hydraulic
30 Filter
35 Travel gear, complete > right / left

36 Ring piston > disk brake
40 Support axle > right / left
50 Distributor block with pressure relief valve >

cold start
51 Solenoid valve > disk brake

52 Oil pressure switch > brake indicator light

From distributor block 50 to solenoid valve 51 (parking brake) blocked.
check valve 53, accumulator 54 and solenoid valve 55
max. 25+3 bar.
After raising the safety lever, the solenoid valve 55 clears the path to the servo control for the working hydraulic
and test point ND.
test connection SP.
pressure switch 19.
In F-travel pump 2 left / right to restrictor 6 ( pump housing tank)
proportional solenoid valve 10 and 11 blocked.
hydraulic tank 80.
paragraph 1.1).
Mjfcifss!
Function PR 732B F/N xxx-2501 5599
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.32.01
The direction is selected in travel operation on the travel pumps 2 for:
Travel forward on solenoid valve 11 at connection Y on S(bottom)
Travel reverse on solenoid valve 10 at connection Z on P(top)
The solenoid valve 51 is energized during the complete travel operation. The valve shifts to diagonal path, the
switch 52 is actuated by the oil pressure, flows via support axle 40 to the travel gears 35 and vents (releases)
the disk brakes 36.
The valve is opened when the proportional solenoid valves 10/11 are energized, the pressurized oil flows to one
side of the regulating cylinder 7 and builds up a magnetic force in proportion to the hydraulic pressure.
reached.
side.
of ~40 bar.
side.
electronic control.
support axle back to the suction side of the travel pump 2- swash plate pump 3.
The pressures in the closed loop circuits can also be measured on test points M1 and M2 (support axles 40 -
test connections are installed inside, can also be connected to outer flanges) with suitable pressure gauges.
See special tools, section 2.1.21.
Mjfcifss!
Function PR 732B F/N xxx-2501 5599
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.32.02
Notes
Parts List PR 732 B F/N xxx> 25015599

Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.3.32.00
1 Splitterbox 53 Check valve
54 Accumulator
2 Travel pump, complete > right / left 55 Solenoid valve > Safety control
3 Swash plate pump working hydraulic
HP> reverse with replenishing valve 60 Test center
HP > forward with replenishing valve 80 Hydraulic tank
6 Restrictor 81 Shut off valve
7 Servo control piston 82 Return filter > tank
8 Servo piston 83 Bypass valve > tank
9 Pump control piston 85 Filter > tank
10 Proportional solenoid valve 86 Oil pressure switch > return filter monitor
(travel reverse > primary regulation)
11 Proportional solenoid valve 90 Suction line > working pump
(travel forward > primary regulation) 91 to control valve WH
12 Orifice 92 to servo control WH
93 Leak oil line
15 Gear pump > Replenishing pressure (from WH pump to hydraulic tank)
16 Oil cooler 94 Return lines WH
17 Pressure relief valve > 95 to / from hand pump
Replenishing pressure
18 Pressure filter > Replenishing pressure 100 Pump / working hydraulic
19 Oil pressure switch > Replenishing pressure>
Indicator light
20 Travel motor, complete > right / left

21 Axial piston unit
22 Control piston
23 Servo piston with proportional
solenoid (secondary regulation) Test points
24 Pressure relief valve > flushing circuit
SP Replenishing pressure
25 Valve unit ND Cold start pressure / control pressure working
26 Directional valve hydraulic
27 Pressure reducing valves (integrated) 40 bar M1 High pressure > travel forward
28 Orifice M2 High pressure > travel reverse
29 Orifice
30 Filter
WH = working hydraulic
35 Travel gear, complete > right / left
36 Ring piston > disk brake
40 Support axle > right / left
50 Distributor block with pressure relief valve >

cold start
51 Solenoid valve > disk brake

52 Oil pressure switch > brake indicator light

From distributor block 45 to check valve 52 solenoid valve Y13 (parking brake) blocked.
check valve 51, accumulator 55 and solenoid valve Y4
test point SD blocked.
max. 25+3 bar.
After raising the safety lever, the solenoid valve Y4 clears the path to the servo control for the working hydraulic.
test connection SP.
pressure switch B6.
In F-travel pump 2/3 left / right to restrictor 11 ( pump housing tank)
proportional solenoid valve Y9/Y10 or Y11/Y12 blocked.
hydraulic tank 80.
travel pumps 2/3 are in the neutral position, the pistons in the barrels do not stroke, meaning there is no flow,
paragraph 1.1).
Mjfcifss!
Function PR 732B F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.33.01
pressure level is reached = flow is divided. The oil flows together with the replenishing oil via the filter 82 to the
tank 80.
values of temperature sensors B38 to 39 and limits the pressure build up in the hydraulic fan drive = the fan
speed.

stationary).
speed (fail-save system) - pmax = 150+10 bar

The direction is selected in travel operation on the travel pumps 2/3 for:
Travel forward on solenoid valve Y9/Y11 at connection Y on S(bottom)
Travel reverse on solenoid valve Y10/Y12 at connection Z on P(top)
2.4. Regulation - travel pumps 2/3 starting from neutral function, as described in section 1.
oil flows to one side of the regulating cylinder 7 and builds up a magnetic force in proportion to the hydraulic
pressure.
reached.
side.
of ~40 bar.
side.
Mjfcifss!
Function PR 732B F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.33.02
electronic control.
support axle back to the suction side of the travel pump 2/3- swash plate pump 4.
The expelled oil in the travel motor 20 - see previous description - is taken in again into the travel pump 2/3,
also on the low pressure side = suction side via the replenishing function of the pressure relief valve 5 or 6 - see

3.1. Brake release

M1M2.

The solenoid valve Y63 returns to neutral position, the pressure to the parking brake gets via path BT to tank
and the brakes closes.
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list PR 732B F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date

Page 6.3.33.00
Feuille
1 splitter box
2 travel pump left (fan - combinated cooler)
3 travel pump right 72 strainer
4 swash plate pump
5 pressure relief valve - HP forward / M1 75 distributor block
- with replenishing valve 76 pressure relief valve - parking brake
6 pressure relief valve - HP reverse / M2 77 accumulator - safety device towing
7 servo control piston 80 hydraulic tank
8 pilot piston 81 shut off valve
9 pump control cylinder 82 return filter
10 orifice 83 bypass valve
11 restrictor 85 strainer
15 gear pump - replenishing / coolant circuit 90 to regulating pump 100 - working hydraulic
16 gear pump - fan drive 91 to control valve block - working hydraulic
17 oil cooler 93 return line - working hydraulic
18 pressure relief valve - repl. oil pressure SP 95 to /from hand pump - cab tilt
19 filter - replenishing
20 travel motor complete left /right
22 control piston
23 pilot piston B5 pressure switch - parking brake (15 bar)
24 pressure relief valve - flushing B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8 bar)
25 valve unit B18 pressure switch - filter monitoring (2,5 bar)
26 directional valve B39 temperature sensor - fan drive
27 pressure reducing valve (40 bar)
28 orifice Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off
29 orifice
Y7 proportional solenoid valve - travel motor left
35 travel gear complete left /right Y8 proportional solenoid valve - travel motor right
40 support shaft complete left /right travel forward
41 strainer Y10 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump left -
travel reverse
52 check valve Y12 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump right -
55 accumulator - working hydraulic travel reverse
60 test center - test points Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake

ND = control pressure - working hydraulic Y63 solenoid valve - safety device towing
65 test center - test points / connections Y64 proportional solenoid valve -

M1L = high pressure travel forward - left side pressure relief -fan drive - max. 150 bar
M1R = high pressure travel forward - right side test points in the machine
M2R = high pressure travel reverse - right side SD = back-up pressure - cold start (pump 15)
hose connection
t
liebherr
F/N xxx - 5600
Datum Edition Date
02 02 Blatt
Page 00
Feuille
Notes
Note: Pump control and position of test points M1, M2 depends on the type of travel gear installed > see sub
group 11
Pos. for FAT > Type AorC for FAT > Type P
10 > Control / travel forward > Control / travel reverse
11 > Control / travel reverse > Control / travel forward
M1 > upper test point > lower test point
M2 > lower test point >upper test point
Parts List
Datum Edition Date PR 742(B) F/N xxx- 20015233

Page
Feuille
6.3.40.00
1 Splitter box
40 Support shaft, complete > L/R
2 Travel pump, complete > L/R 41 Flange
3 Travel pump > rotary group 42 Flange
HP with replenishing valve 43 Filter
HP with replenishing valve 45 Travel gear, complete > L/R
6 Pump control piston 46 Piston > Travel brake
7 Orifice
8 Spool valve > pump control 51 Solenoid valve > Travel brake
9 Servo control piston 52 Pressure switch > Brake indicator
10 Proportional solenoid valve > conn. z. >
(travel > primary regulation) 53 Check valve
11 Proportional solenoid valve > conn. y > 54 Accumulator W.H.
(travel > primary regulation) 55 Solenoid valve > servo cut off > W.H.
12 Check valve > Replenishing
13 Orifice 60 Test center
15 Gear pump > Replenishing / Cooling circuit 80 Hydraulic tank

16 Gear pump > Pump control / Replenishing 81 Shut off valve > tank
82 Hydraulic oil filter
18 Oil cooler 83 Check valve
19 Check valve > Bypass (3 bar) 85 Filter screen
20 Travel motor, complete > L/R 90 Suction line > W.H.

21 Travel motor, rotary group 91 to Control valve 130 > W.H.
22 Motor control piston 92 to Pilot (servo) control valve 115 > W.H.
23 Motor regulator valve w. proportional solenoid 93 from Variable pump to Hydraulic tank
(secondary regulation) 94 Return lines W.H.
24 Motor relief valve > flushing 95 to / from hand pump
25 Motor control valve > complete
26 Directional valve 100 Variable pump > W.H.
27 Pressure reducing valve > 40 bar (integrated)
28 Orifice Test points
29 Orifice
SP Replenishing pump pressure
30 Valve block ND Servo pressure > W.H.
31 Replenishing pressure relief valve
32 Control pressure relief valve M1 Travel pressure > forward > L/R
M2 Travel pressure > reverse > L/R
35 Filter block
36 Filter assembly > Replenishing ST Control pressure
37 Filter assembly > Control
38 Accumulator
39 Pressure switch > Replenishing oil
Note: L = Left
R = Right
T.R. = Travel hydraulic
W.H. = Working hydraulic
Repl. = Replenishing
Notes
Note: travel pump - for sectional drawing see group 8.1.41
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date
PR 742B F/N xxx-5234 5599

Page 6.3.41.00
Feuille
1 splitter box
80 hydraulic tank
2 travel pump left 81 shut off valve
3 travel pump right 82 return filter
4 swash plate pump 83 bypass valve
5 pressure relief valve - HP forward / M1 85 strainer
6 pressure relief valve - HP reverse / M2 90 to regulating pump 100 - working hydraulic
- with replenishing valve 91 to control valve block - working hydraulic
7 servo control piston 92 to pilot (servo) control valve - working hydraulic
8 pilot piston 93 return line - working hydraulic
9 pump control cylinder 95 to /from hand pump - cab tilt
15 gear pump - replenishing / coolant circuit 100 regulating pump - working hydraulic
16 gear pump - replenishing / coolant circuit
18 oil cooler
19 bypass valve (3 bar) B5 pressure switch - parking brake (15 bar)
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8 bar)
20 travel motor complete left /right B18 pressure switch - filter monitoring (2,5 bar)
22 control piston Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off
23 pilot piston
24 pressure relief valve - flushing Y7 proportional solenoid valve - travel motor left
25 valve unit Y8 proportional solenoid valve - travel motor right
26 directional valve
27 pressure reducing valve (40 bar) Y9 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump left -
28 orifice travel forward
29 orifice Y10 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump left -
travel reverse
30 valve block
31 pressure relief valves - repl. oil pressure SP Y11 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump right -
travel forward
35 filter block Y12 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump right -
36 filter - replenishing travel reverse
40 support shaft complete left /right Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake
41 strainer
45 travel gear complete left /right

51 orifice
52 check valve
55 accumulator - working hydraulic
60 test center - test points

ND = control pressure - working hydraulic

M1L = high pressure travel forward - left side
M1R = high pressure travel forward - right side
M2R = high pressure travel reverse - right side
liebherr
Datum Edition Date F/N xxx - 5234 5599
07 01 Blatt
Page 00
Feuille
Functional schematic, see 6.3.42.00
1. Neutralfunction

With the Diesel engine running, the gear pump 15 draws oil from the hydraulic tank 80, via shut off valve 81 to
the valve block 30-P2 pressure relief valves 31.
In the distributor block 30 the temperature sensor B39 determines the oil temperature and sends the value to
the electronic box of the fan drive.
From distributor block 30 to -F F-filter block 35/filter 36
-SP check valve 52 accumulator 55 (blocked)
solenoid valve Y4 (servo cut off WH) blocked.
solenoid valve Y13 (parking brake) blocked.
After raising the safety lever, the solenoid valve Y4 clears the path to outlet B servo control for the working
hydraulic and test point ND.
The oil not needed in the pressure area of the system flows via the pressure relief valve 31/ valve block 30-T
hydraulic oil cooler 18 return filter 82 back to the hydraulic tank 80.
Even with the oil at operating temperature, a back pressure of approx. 5 bar is created in the flow via the oil
cooler, lines and filter, which is applied on the spring side of the pressure relief valves 31 (pressure adjustment
20+2 bar). This results in an operating pressure of approx. 25+2 bar in the system in front of the PR valves = test
point SP (and M on valve block 30).
If the oil is cold, part of the oil is directed parallel to the oil cooler, via check valve 19 (p 3 bar) to the filter
tank. The system pressure increases proportionally if the oil is cold, depending on the viscosity.
Splitting of the oil flow- filter block35/filter 36

-FR F-travel pump2 right and test point SP.
-FL F-travel pump2 left and pressure switch B6.
-B, -PM, -X blocked.
In travel pump 2 right/left from F to
replenishing function relief valve 6 replenishing - closed loop circuit - M2
replenishing function relief valve 5 replenishing - closed loop circuit - M1
pilot piston 8 control cylinder 9.
proportional solenoid valves Y9/Y10 or Y11/Y12 blocked.
Leak oil in the travel pumps 2 flushes, cools and lubricates the parts of the rotary group and flows via housing
connections L and T strainer 85 into the tank 80.
1.2. Travel pumps 2 and travel motors 20 - closed loop circuit

paragraph 1.1).
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.42.01

pressure level is reached = flow is divided. The oil flows together with the replenishing oil via the oil cooler 18
filter 82 to the tank 80.
values of temperature sensors B38 to 40and limits the pressure build up in the hydraulic fan drive = the fan
speed.

B40 - turbo charge air temperature
stationary).
speed (fail-save system) - pmax = 210+10 bar

The various travel functions are controlled by the electronic system via the proportional solenoid valves Y7 to
Y12, which are installed on the pump covers and the travel motor remote control. The current and therefore the
regulating pressure build-up is in proportion to the lever deflection. See also Description - Travel Hydraulic -
section 6.2 and Functional Description - Electronic Control - section 10.3., Sectional drawing of the pump/ oil flow
outlets - section 8.1.41.
The direction is selected in travel operation on the travel pumps 2 for:
Travel forward on solenoid valve Y9/Y11 at connection Z on P(left)
Travel reverse on solenoid valve Y10/Y12 at connection Y on S(right)
The proportional solenoid valves for the travel motors are always energized during travel operation, but
they only regulate from a certain current value.
oil from the "replenishing" section of the system flows to one side of the servo control cylinders 7 and builds up
a hydraulic regulating pressure in proportion to the magnetic force.
The piston of the servo control cylinder 7 is moved by regulating pressure against the opposite regulating spring
Via a mechanical connection, the piston 8 is moved into the opposite direction. The piston opens the oil flow to
the swash plate - control cylinder 9, where the pressure build up occurred and allows the oil to flow into the
pump housing from the opposite side of the swash plate - control cylinder 9. The swash plate pump 4 is
changed to flow direction against Qmax .
With the shifting of the swash plate, the pilot piston 8 in the housing is returned to the neutral position (positive
overlap) via a mechanical connection. Both sides of the swash plate control cylinder 9 are actuated again with
pressurized oil and the swash plate is held hydraulically on the actuated pump angle.
As current increases, it moves further in direction of Qmax until the mechanical regulating stop of the travel pump
is reached.
If current is decreased, the swash plate of pump 4 is moved in direction Qmin / neutral position, regulation /
control sequence is as described above.
2.2. Regulation - travel motors 20 starting from neutral position, as described in section 1.
Due to current going to the proportional solenoids Y7 or Y8, the servo control piston 23 is moved against the
regulating spring and return spring to shift position parallel path.
side.
The sum of spring force+SP-pressure on the piston of pressure reducing valves 27 results in a pressure value
of ~40 bar.

valve 26
pilot piston 23 control piston 22 - piston bottom side.
the piston is moved against the spring+SP-pressure and the path is restricted, so that the pressure cannot
Due to this change in Qmin direction, the return springs push the pilot pistons 23 more and more against the
force of the proportional solenoid. When the spring force is the same as the solenoid force, the pilot pistons 23
are held in center position, the ports to the control piston 22 are closed and the axial piston unit is held on the
selected angle / intake volume.
As current is increased, the pressure continues to increase towards Qmin. The maximum possible current/
regulation is limited by the electronic control.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 6.3.42.02
As current is decreased, the axial piston units 21 are moved again in direction of Qmax =neutral position, the
control pressure is directed the same way as in neutral function: via the pilot piston 23- diagonal path to the
spring side of the control piston 22 and the piston bottom side is vented. Intermediate positions are held as
described before in case of equal force between solenoid and spring.
side of travel motor 20/ axial piston unit 21, it actuates its piston and sets the unit in rotation.
Due to the output rotation, the oil is transported to the opposite connector side and flows via a second line
connection through the support axle back to the suction side of the travel pump 2 - swash plate pump 4.
If the pressure increases above this value, the pressure relief valve opens and directs the oil flow to the
replenishing side / low pressure side.

3.1. Brake release

M1M2.

The solenoid valve returns to neutral position, the pressure to the parking brake gets via path BT to tank and
the brakes closes.
Notes
Note: travel pump - for sectional drawing see group 8.1.41
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date

Page 6.3.42.00
Feuille
1 splitter box
2 travel pump right /left (fan - combinated cooler)
4 swash plate pump 72 strainer
5 pressure relief valve - HP forward / M1
- with replenishing valve 75 distributor block
6 pressure relief valve - HP reverse / M2 76 pressure relief valve - parking brake
- with replenishing valve 77 accumulator - safety device towing
7 servo control piston
8 pilot piston 80 hydraulic tank
9 pump control cylinder 81 shut off valve
82 return filter
15 gear pump - replenishing / coolant circuit 83 bypass valve
16 gear pump - fan drive 85 strainer
18 oil cooler 90 to regulating pump 100 - working hydraulic

19 bypass valve (3 bar) 91 to control valve block - working hydraulic
20 travel motor complete left /right 93 return line - working hydraulic
21 axial piston unit 95 to /from hand pump - cab tilt
22 control piston
23 pilot piston 100 regulating pump - working hydraulic
24 pressure relief valve - flushing
25 valve unit
26 directional valve
27 pressure reducing valve (40 bar) B5 pressure switch - parking brake (17 bar)
28 orifice 2,5 mm B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8 bar)
29 orifice B18 pressure switch - filter monitoring (2,5 bar)
B39 temperature sensor - fan drive
30 valve block
31 pressure relief valve - repl. oil pressure SP Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off
35 filter block Y7 proportional solenoid valve - travel motor left

36 filter - replenishing Y8 proportional solenoid valve - travel motor right
40 support shaft complete left /right Y9 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump left -
41 strainer travel forward
45 travel gear complete left /right travel reverse
55 accumulator - working hydraulic Y12 proportional solenoid valve - travel pump right -
travel reverse
SP = repl. oil pressure Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake
ND = control pressure - working hydraulic
LA = system pressure - fan drive Y43 solenoid valve - safety device towing
65 test center - test points /hose connection Y45 proportional solenoid valve -
M1L = high pressure travel forward - left side pressure relief -fan drive - max. 210 bar
M1R = high pressure travel forward - right side test points in the machine
M2R = high pressure travel reverse - right side M = test point at pos. 30 (SP)
hose connection:
t
liebherr
Datum Edition Date F/N xxx - 5600
02 02 Blatt
Page 00
Feuille
1. Neutral function Functional schematic, see 6.3.50.00
1.1. Tandem gear pumps 15 - Replenishing function

and supplies it to the distributor block 16/P1+P2.
From the distributor block 16/ K P-valve block 19
F F-filter bracket 18
Oil not needed in the system flows via the pressure relief valve 17 hydraulic oil cooler 66 return filter 83 to
hydraulic tank 80.
When the oil is at operating temperature, a certain resistance (appr. 5 bar) is created in the return oil flow by the
oil cooler, lines and filter, which is applied on the spring side of the pressure relief valves 17 (adjusted to 20+2
bar). This results in an operating pressure of appr. 25+2 bar in the section in front of the pressure relief valves =
test point SP (and SD).
When the oil is cold, part of the oil is directed via the pressure relief valve in block 19 directly to tank and the
system pressure is thereby limited to max. 28+2 bar (cold start pressure) = test point SD.
Distribution of the oil flow - filter bracket18 /B check valve 52 distributor block50
solenoid valveY13 (parking brake) blocked.
accumulator 55 and solenoid valve Y4 blocked.
(servo cut off WH)
/FR F-travel pump2 right and pressure switch B6.
/FL F-travel pump2 left and test connection SP.
/PM P-travel motor20 right pilot piston23 spring side
control piston22.
/PM P - travel motor20 leftpilot piston23spring side
control piston22.
The solenoid valve Y4 is actuated, after raising off the safety lever, and permits passage to outlet GP servo
control working hydraulic.
In travel pump 2 right / left to check valve 6 replenishing - closed loop circuit - M1
(oil flow) channel pressure relief valve 4 (blocked).
orifice11 pressure relief valve12 pump housing screen filter 85
tank.
channel pressure relief valve 5 (blocked).
check valve 7 replenishing - closed loop circuit - M2.
The passages of pilot pistons 9 to control cylinders 10 are severely restricted. All control cylinders are equally
pressurized with oil, keeping the swash plates of pumps 3 in neutral position =0 pump angle.
The pressure relief valves 12 are opened by the system pressure. The orifices 11 limit the oil flow Q to ~ 8l/min.
The oil flow flushes, cools and lubricates the drive sections of the travel pumps 2. If the system pressure drops
below 16 bar, due to a problem, the pressure relief valves 12 close. The flushing circuit is interrupted and the
entire oil flow is directed to the closed loop circuit and the control. The pump housing remains filled with oil via
the tank lines.
The control lines for the travel pumps and motors are vented to the pump housing/ tank via the proportional
solenoid valves Y9 to Y12.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 2062

Page
Feuille
6.3.50.01
1.2. Travel pumps 3 and travel motors 20 - closed loop circuits
travel pumps 3 are in the neutral position, no piston stroke is created and therefore no oil flow, despite the
rotation of the axial piston unit and pistons. However, the closed loop circuit is filled with pressurized oil of
approx. 23+2 bar through the replenishing circuit (via check valves 6 and 7 (see paragraph 1.1)).
In every travel motor 20, the pressurized oil from the closed loop circuit is directed on both sides to the
directional valve 24 and blocked. The axial piston unit 21 is held by the spring and the pressurized oil on the
springside of the control piston 22 (see paragraph 1.1) at maximum angle = Q max = neutral position. The
piston bottom side of the control piston 22 is vented via the pilot piston 23 to the motor housing / tank.
1.3. Regulating pump 30 - fan drive

When the Diesel engine is not running, the axial piston unit 31 of the pump 30 is at maximum angle = Qmax.
As soon as the Diesel engine is running, the pump 30 starts deliver oil, the system pressure increases and the
fan motors start to turn.
If the starter switch S1 is in operating position and if the safety lever is raised (switch S2), the thermo switches
for the fan drive control are energized.
S1 F6 B28 - Coolant temperature - Diesel engine (closes at 90C opens at 85C)
S1 F10 B29 - Hydraulic oil temperature (closes at 65C opens at 60C)
S1 F15 B30 - Turbo charge air temperature - Diesel engine (closes at 55C opens at 50C).
If one of these media reaches the corresponding temperature, the contact of the thermo switch closes and
energizes the solenoid valve Y52.
For more information see group 9 - Electrical System.
When the engine is cold, the solenoid valve Y52 is not energized and remains in neutral position and relieves
the servo oil connection X of pump 30 to tank. The Load Sensing regulator 35 is displaced against its spring
with a system pressure of 25+1 bar and pressurized oil is directed via the pressure cut off valve 34 to the control
cylinder 32. Due to the given surface ratio, the control cylinder 32 moves the axial piston unit 31 against the
return cylinder 33 to min. angle=Qmin. The angle/oil flow is regulated by the LS-regulator 35 and the return force
of cylinder 33 in such a way, that a constant stand-by pressure of 30+1 bar (LA) is created in the system. This
pressure determines the minimum RPM of the motors / fan - see page 3.1.50.01.
When the machine is at operating temperature, the solenoid valve Y52 is energized and actuated via at least
one thermo switch B28/B29/B30. The connection to tank is blocked, the servo oil connection X is pressurized
with system pressure, which keeps the LS-regulator in neutral position. The control cylinder 32 is without
pressure, the return cylinder 33 moves the axial piston unit 31 to max. angle = Qmax the system pressure
exceeds the stand-by pressure. If the system pressure exceeds the spring value of the pressure cut off valve
34, the valve is shifted against the spring and pressurized oil flows to the control cylinder 32. Due to the given
surface ratio, the control cylinder 32 moves the axial piston unit 31 against the return cylinder 33 to a smaller
angle. The angle / oil flow is regulated by the pressure cut off valve 34 and the return force of the cylinder 33 in
such a way, that at normal Diesel engine RPM range a constant operating pressure of 1603 bar (LA) is retained
in the system. This pressure determines the maximum RPM of the motors / fan - see page 3.1.50.01.
The displaced amount of oil which flows off via restrictor 36 when the pump is regulated is pressure dependent
and is used to mute the signal and to flush the housing.
The system pressure is measured on test point LA, just before the restrictor 53.
The check valves 39 and 41 are necessary to supply the oil for coasting of the fan / motors after the engine is
shut down.
Oil flow - working circuit:
Hydraulic tank80 axial piston unit31 axial piston - fixed displacement motor38 gear motor40
oil cooler66 return filter83 tank80.
Check valves 39 and 41 are kept closed by pressurized oil.
Servo oil flow - when machine is cold:
Axial piston unit31 restrictor53 LP-valve block50 P-solenoid valve Y52-A valve block50-T
tank80.
(pump 30 - internal) return cylinder33.
pressure cut off valve34 Load Sensing regulator35 pressure cut off valve34
control cylinder32.
( restrictor36 housing L screen filter85 tank80.)
Servo oil flow - when machine is at operating temperature:
Axial piston unit31 restrictor53 LP-valve block50 P-solenoid valve Y52 (blocked).
regulating pump30 spring side LS-regulator35.
(pump30 internal) return cylinder33.
pressure cut off valve34 Load Sensing regulator35 (blocked).
pressure cut off valve34 control cylinder32.

The various travel functions are regulated by the electronic control via the proportional solenoid valves Y9 to
Y12, which are installed on the travel pump covers. The lever deflection is in relation to the current flow of the
solenoid valves and therefore the regulating pressure build-up. See also description - Travel Hydraulic - section
6.2. and Functional description - Electronic Control - section 10.3.
The travel direction during travel operation is selected on the travel pumps 2 as follows:
electronic control: regulating pressure built up: oil flow output:
Travel forward on solenoid valves Y9 / Y11 at connection Y on S (bottom)
Travel reverse on solenoid valves Y10 / Y12 at connection Z on P (top)
The travel speed depends on the joystick deflection = current =regulating pressure and can be infinitely
regulated.
Pump control: flow volume zero Qmax =regulating pressure appr. 2 to 8 bar
Motor control: intake volume Qmax Qmin =regulating pressure appr. 8 to 15 bar
The regulation begin for the travel motors is approx. 0.3 bar before the end of regulation of the pumps, which
means there is a slight overlap of pump / motor control in the regulating range of 8 bar.
The regulating pressure for the travel motors is supplied from the travel pumps via a two way check valve 13 -
connection X.
When turning, the solenoid valve on the side into which the machine is turning receives less current, as a result
the intake volume of the motor is increased or the flow volume from the pump is reduced, which in turn reduces
the travel speed on this side.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 2062

Page
Feuille
6.3.50.02
The solenoid valve Y13 is energized during every travel operation. The valve shifts to diagonal path, the
pressurized oil flows via distributor block 50 to the pressure switch B5 and via outlet B to the travel gears 45 and
vents (releases) the disk brakes 46.
Depending on the travel resistance (=rotary resistance of travel motors), hydraulic pressure is created in the
pump flow = high pressure side of closed loop circuits. In the return flow from the travel motors, the replenishing
pressure ( SP- pressure) is present = low pressure side of closed loop circuits.
High pressure side - travel forward = system - test point M1
High pressure side - travel reverse = system - test point M2
2.1. Regulation - travel pumps 2 starting from neutral position, as described in section 1.
The pilot piston 9 is also moved via a mechanical connection. It opens the oil port to the side opposite of the
control direction of the piston 9 of swash plate control cylinder 10 and allows the oil to flow from the opposite
side into the pump housing. The swash plate pump 3 is shifted in the direction towards Qmax .
For flow direction and volume, refer to par. 2.
As the swash plate is moved, the housing of servo control piston 8 is mechanically moved along until the bores
in the housing and the servo control piston are again posetively overlapped =neutral position. Both sides of the
at the actuated pump angle.
is reached.
Regulating pressure flow:
Travel pump2 left - proportional solenoid valve Y9 or Y10 servo control cylinder8
two way check valve13-X X-travel motors20 left pilot piston23.
Travel pump2 right - proportional solenoid valve Y11 or Y12 servo control cylinder8
two way check valve13-X X-travel motors20 right pilot piston23.
If the regulating pressure increases by energizing of one of the proportional solenoid valves Y9/Y10 or Y11/Y12
on the travel pump 2 and exceeds the regulating begin of the travel motors 20, the pilot pistons 23 will be
shifted against the regulating and return spring to "parallel passage" position .
The spring side of the control piston 22 is relieved to the housing / tank, the pressurized oil from the
"replenishing" section of the system is directed to the piston bottom side of the control piston 22 and the axial
piston units 21 are moved to a smaller angle = in direction of Qmin.
force of the regulating pressure. When the spring force is the same as the pressure force, the pilot pistons 23
regulation is limited by the electronic control. The axial piston units 21 do not reach the mechanical Qmin. stop =
smallest angle.
described before in case of equal force between regulating pressure to spring.
Pump flow from swash plate pump3 pump outlet - distributor block
travel motor20-front/axial piston unit21
travel motor20-rear/axial piston unit21
distributor block-pump inlet swash plate pump3
The resulting high pressure in the travel motor intake actuates the piston of the axial piston unit 21 and starts to
turn the unit. With this turning movement, the oil is directed to the opposite (low pressure) side .
When the machine starts to travel, the directional valves 24 in the travel motors are actuated on one side with
low pressure, on the opposite side with high pressure from the closed loop circuit, and they are moved towards
the low pressure side and the port is opened.
Pressurized oil (SP pressure)- low pressure sidedirectional valve 24restrictor 25pressure relief valve 26
(opens) motor housing U (flushing)screen filter 28 tank 80.
Oil flow - restrictor 25 - each travel motor appr. 10 l/min = discharge
If the pressure on the low pressure side drops below 10 bar, due to a problem, the pressure relief valves 26 will
close. The discharge is stopped and cavitation in the closed loop circuit is prevented.
The discharged oil from the travel motors 20 flows to the travel pump 2 via the check valve (7 or 6) on the low
pressure side = suction side; see neutral function, section 1.1.
On the high pressure side = delivery side, the check valve (6 or 7) is held in the closed position by high
pressure and the maximum pressure is limited to 420+30/-10 bar by the pressure relief valve (4 or 5) .
The pressures in the closed loop circuits can be measured on test points M1 and M2 (each on the distributor
block - pump outlet) with suitable pressure gauges. See special tools, section 2.1.21.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 2062

Page
Feuille
6.3.50.03
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062

Page 6.3.50.00
Feuille
1 splitter box 52 check valve
53 restrictor
2 travel pump cpl. - right / left
3 swash plate pump 55 accumulator WH.
4 pressure relief valve - HP forward - M1
5 pressure relief valve - HP reverse - M2 60 test center - test points
6 check valve - replenishing M1 SP repl. oil pressure
7 check valve - replenishing M2 LA fan drive - system pressure
9 pilot piston 65 water cooler
10 pump control cylinder 66 hydraulic oil cooler
11 orifice
12 pressure relief valve - repl. circuit 80 hydraulic tank
13 two way check valve block 81 shut off valve
82 shut off valve
15 tandem gear pumps - replenishing 83 return filter
16 valve block 84 bypass valve
17 pressure relief valves - repl. oil pressure SP 85 strainer
18 filter assembly / filter - replenishing 100 regulating pump working hydraulic
20 travel motor cpl. - 2x left / 2x right B5 pressure switch - brake indicator light
21 axial piston unit B6 pressure switch - replenishing pressure indicator
22 control piston light
23 pilot piston B22 pressure switch - return filter monitor
24 directional valve - flushing B29 thermo switch - fan drive
25 orifice
26 pressure relief valve - flushing Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off WH.
Y9 proportional solenoid valve - le. travel forward
28 strainer Y10 proportional solenoid valve - le. travel reverse
Y11 proportional solenoid valve - ri. travel forward
30 regulating pump cpl. - fan drive Y12 proportional solenoid valve - ri. travel reverse
32 control cylinder (Qmin) Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake
33 return cylinder (Qmax) Y45 solenoid valve - special attachment - WH.
34 pressure cut off valve Y52 solenoid valve - fan drive
35 load sensing regulator Y53 solenoid valve - Diesel engine -
36 restrictor RPM safety - WH.

(fan - water cooler)
39 check valve test points in the machine
M1 high pressure travel forward
40 gear motor (fan - hydraulic oil cooler) M2 high pressure travel reverse
41 check valve
SD back-up pressure - cold start (pumps 15)
45 travel gear cpl. left / right
50 distributor block unnamed line outlets on the hydraulic tank

51 orifice - suction line working hydraulic pump
GP to pilot (servo) control valve - P / WH. - return line working hydraulic
UP to regulating pump - X / WH. - connection to hand pump - cab tilt
2062
01 00

hydraulic tank 80.
(servo cut off WH)
control piston22.
control piston22.
tank.
the tank lines.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-2063 5071

Page
Feuille
6.3.51.01

In operating position of the starter switch S1, the solenoid valve Y25 gets currented via thermo switch of the fan
control (closed in neutral position).
S1 K4 F10 B25 - Turbo charge air temperature Diesel engine (closes at 55C opens at 50C)
B24 - Hydraulic oil temperature (closes at 65C opens at 60C)
B23 - Coolant temperature - Diesel engine (closes at 90C opens at 85C)
Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive control.
If one of these media reaches the corresponding temperature, the contact of the thermo switch opens and the
currenting of the solenoid valve Y25 is interrupted.
When the engine is cold, the solenoid valve Y52 is energized and remains in actuated position and relieves
When the machine is at operating temperature, the currenting of the solenoid valve Y25 is interrupted by at
least one thermo switch B23/B24/B25, the solenoid valve is in neutral position. The connection to tank is
blocked, the servo oil connection X is pressurized with system pressure, which keeps the LS-regulator in neutral
position. The control cylinder 32 is without pressure, the return cylinder 33 moves the axial piston unit 31 to
max. angle = Qmax the system pressure exceeds the stand-by pressure. If the system pressure exceeds the
spring value of the pressure cut off valve 34, the valve is shifted against the spring and pressurized oil flows to
the control cylinder 32. Due to the given surface ratio, the control cylinder 32 moves the axial piston unit 31
against the return cylinder 33 to a smaller angle. The angle / oil flow is regulated by the pressure cut off valve
34 and the return force of the cylinder 33 in such a way, that at normal Diesel engine RPM range a constant
operating pressure of 1603 bar (LA) is retained in the system. This pressure determines the maximum RPM of
the motors / fan - see page 3.1.50.01.
shut down.
tank80.
control cylinder32.

regulated.
connection X.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-2063 5071

Page
Feuille
6.3.51.02
in the housing and the servo control piston are again positively overlapped =neutral position. Both sides of the
is reached.
smallest angle.
turn the unit. With this turning movement, the oil is directed to the opposite (low pressure) side.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-2063 5071

Page
Feuille
6.3.51.03
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20635071

Page 6.3.51.00
Feuille
53 restrictor
5 pressure relief valve - HP reverse - M2 60 test center - test points
6 check valve - replenishing M1 SP repl. oil pressure
9 pilot piston 65 water cooler
10 pump control cylinder 66 hydraulic oil cooler
11 orifice
12 pressure relief valve - repl. circuit 80 hydraulic tank
13 two way check valve block 81 shut off valve
82 shut off valve
15 tandem gear pumps - replenishing 83 return filter
16 valve block 84 bypass valve
17 pressure relief valves - repl. oil pressure SP 85 strainer
18 filter assembly / filter - replenishing 100 regulating pump working hydraulic
20 travel motor cpl. - 2x left / 2x right B5 pressure switch - brake indicator light
21 axial piston unit B6 pressure switch - replenishing pressure indicator
22 control piston light
23 pilot piston B18 pressure switch - return filter monitor
24 directional valve - flushing B24 thermo switch - fan drive
25 orifice B26 temperature sending unit - indicator light -
26 pressure relief valve - flushing hydraulic oil overheating
28 strainer Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off WH.

30 regulating pump cpl. - fan drive Y10 proportional solenoid valve - le. travel reverse
31 axial piston unit Y11 proportional solenoid valve - ri. travel forward
32 control cylinder (Qmin) Y12 proportional solenoid valve - ri. travel reverse
33 return cylinder (Qmax)
34 pressure cut off valve Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake
35 load sensing regulator Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive
36 restrictor Y28 solenoid valve - Diesel engine -
RPM safety - WH.
38 axial piston fixed displacement motor Y29 solenoid valve - special attachment - WH.
(fan - water cooler)
39 check valve
test points in the machine
40 gear motor (fan - hydraulic oil cooler) M1 high pressure travel forward
41 check valve M2 high pressure travel reverse
45 travel gear cpl. left / right SD back-up pressure - cold start (pumps 15)
50 distributor block
51 orifice unnamed line outlets on the hydraulic tank
GP to pilot (servo) control valve - P / WH. - suction line working hydraulic pump
UP to regulating pump - X / WH. - return line working hydraulic
- connection to hand pump - cab tilt
liebherr
Fahrhydraulik
Datum Edition Date
Travel Hydraulic PR 752 F/N xxx- 2063 5071
01 01 Hydraulique de translation
Blatt
Page 6.3.51. 00
Feuille

hydraulic tank 80.
(servo cut off WH)
control piston22.
control piston22.
tank.
the tank lines.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5072 5599

Page
Feuille
6.3.52.01

In operating position of the starter switch S1, the solenoid valve Y25 gets currented via thermo switch of the fan
control (closed in neutral position).
S1 K4 F10 B25 - Turbo charge air temperature Diesel engine (closes at 55C opens at 50C)
B24 - Hydraulic oil temperature (closes at 65C opens at 60C)
B23 - Coolant temperature - Diesel engine (closes at 90C opens at 85C)
Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive control.
If one of these media reaches the corresponding temperature, the contact of the thermo switch opens and the
currenting of the solenoid valve Y25 is interrupted.
When the engine is cold, the solenoid valve Y52 is energized and remains in actuated position and relieves
When the machine is at operating temperature, the currenting of the solenoid valve Y25 is interrupted by at
least one thermo switch B23/B24/B25, the solenoid valve is in neutral position. The connection to tank is
blocked, the servo oil connection X is pressurized with system pressure, which keeps the LS-regulator in neutral
position. The control cylinder 32 is without pressure, the return cylinder 33 moves the axial piston unit 31 to
max. angle = Qmax the system pressure exceeds the stand-by pressure. If the system pressure exceeds the
spring value of the pressure cut off valve 34, the valve is shifted against the spring and pressurized oil flows to
the control cylinder 32. Due to the given surface ratio, the control cylinder 32 moves the axial piston unit 31
against the return cylinder 33 to a smaller angle. The angle / oil flow is regulated by the pressure cut off valve
34 and the return force of the cylinder 33 in such a way, that at normal Diesel engine RPM range a constant
operating pressure of 1603 bar (LA) is retained in the system. This pressure determines the maximum RPM of
the motors / fan - see page 3.1.50.01.
shut down.
tank80.
control cylinder32.

regulated.
connection X.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5072 5599

Page
Feuille
6.3.52.02
is reached.
smallest angle.

Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5072 5599

Page
Feuille
6.3.52.03
3.1. Brake release
M1M2.

the brakes closes.
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-50725599

Page 6.3.52.00
Feuille
53 restrictor
5 pressure relief valve - HP reverse - M2 57 accumulator - safety device towing
6 check valve - replenishing M1 58 pressure relief valve - parking brake
7 check valve - replenishing M2
8 servo control piston 60 test center - test points
9 pilot piston SP repl. oil pressure
10 pump control cylinder LA fan drive - system pressure
11 orifice M1R high pressure - travel forward - right
12 pressure relief valve - repl. circuit M2R high pressure - travel reverse - right
13 two way check valve block M1L high pressure - travel forward - left
M2L high pressure - travel reverse - left
15 tandem gear pumps - replenishing hose connection
16 valve block BB parking brake - operating position
17 pressure relief valves - repl. oil pressure SP BS parking brake - towing position
18 filter assembly / filter - replenishing 65 water cooler

66 hydraulic oil cooler
80 hydraulic tank
20 travel motor cpl. - 2x left / 2x right 81 shut off valve
21 axial piston unit 82 shut off valve
22 control piston 83 return filter
23 pilot piston 84 bypass valve
24 directional valve - flushing 85 strainer
25 orifice
26 pressure relief valve - flushing 96 to /from hand pump - cab tilt
97 from safety device towing to hydraulic tank
28 strainer
100 regulating pump working hydraulic
30 regulating pump cpl. - fan drive
31 axial piston unit B5 pressure switch - brake indicator light
32 control cylinder (Qmin) B6 pressure switch - replenishing pressure indicator
33 return cylinder (Qmax) light
34 pressure cut off valve B18 pressure switch - return filter monitor
35 load sensing regulator B24 thermo switch - fan drive
36 restrictor B26 temperature sending unit - indicator light -
hydraulic oil overheating
(fan - water cooler) Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off WH.
39 check valve Y9 proportional solenoid valve - le. travel forward
Y10 proportional solenoid valve - le. travel reverse
40 gear motor (fan - hydraulic oil cooler) Y11 proportional solenoid valve - ri. travel forward
41 check valve Y12 proportional solenoid valve - ri. travel reverse
45 travel gear cpl. left / right Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake
46 ring piston - parking brake Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive
Y28 solenoid valve - Diesel engine -
50 distributor block RPM safety - WH.
51 orifice Y29 solenoid valve - special attachment - WH.
GP to pilot (servo) control valve - P / WH. Y43 solenoid valve - safety device towing
UP to regulating pump - X / WH.

SD back-up pressure - cold start (pumps 15)
unnamed line outlets on the hydraulic tank

- suction line working hydraulic pump
- return line working hydraulic
liebherr
Fahrhydraulik
Datum Edition Date
Travel Hydraulic PR 752 F/N xxx- 5072 5599
Blatt
Page 6.3.52. 00
Feuille

hydraulic tank 80.
When the oil is cold, part of the oil is directed via the pressure relief valve in block 19 directly to the hydraulic
tank - connector flange of the suction line of the gear pumps 15 - and the system pressure is thereby limited to
max. 28+2 bar (cold start pressure) = test point SD.
(servo cut off WH)
control piston22.
control piston22.
orifice11 pressure relief valve12 pump housing screen filter 85 tank.
the tank lines.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600

Page
Feuille
6.3.53.01
spring side of the control piston 22 (see paragraph 1.1) at maximum angle = Qmax = neutral position. The piston
bottom side of the control piston 22 is vented via the pilot piston 23 to the motor housing / tank.

Electronic regulation:
With the starter switch S1 in operating position, the electronic fan control A11 is supplied with current. Circuit
board A11 regulates the current to the proportional valve Y45, depending on the signal values of the
temperature sensors B38 to 40 and limits thereby the pressure built up in the hydraulic fan drive = the fan
speed.

B40 - turbo charge air temperature
When the machine is cold, Y45 is supplied with maximum current from A11 and regulates the possible pressure
build up in the hydraulic fan drive - pump 30 motors 38/40 - to the adjusted operating pressure (305 bar)
(fans turn at minimum speed).
With increasing operating temperature (hydraulic oil, Diesel engine coolant, charge air), the current to Y45 is
proportionally reduced and as a result, the pressure in the fan drive ( fan speed ) is increased accordingly.
When one of the temperatures reaches the operating temperature, Y45 ,supplied with minimum current from
A11, is fully shifted and regulates the fan drive to normal operating pressure (approx. 160 bar) .
If there is no current, for example in case of failure of fuse F9 or in case of a broken wire, Y45 regulates the
pressure in the fan drive to the adjusted spring value of the pressure cut off valve mechanically / hydraulically
(maximum fan speed / fail-save system) - p = 177+5 bar - see section 6.5, Check and Adjustment.
For wiring, see sub group 9 - Electrical System, min/max fan speeds in normal operation, see page 3.1.51.01.
Pump regulation:
The pressure created in the system by the flow from pump 30 is applied against the spring on the load sensing
regulator 35.
On the proportional pressure cut off valve Y45, the magnetic force created by the winding (regulated by
electronic box A11) and the pressure which is available via the restrictor bore 37 acts against the spring of the
valve. If the sum of these forces exceeds the spring force, the valve Y45 opens and allows the pressurized oil to
flow off into the housing / to the tank. The pressure remaining between the restrictor bore 37 and the pressure
cut off valve Y45 ( = regulating pressure) supports the spring force on the LS regulator 35.
If the force of the system pressure on the LS regulator 35 surpasses the sum of spring value and regulating
pressure, the regulator is moved in direction of the spring and pressurized oil is directed to the control cylinder
32. Due to the given surface areas, the control cylinder 32 moves the piston unit 31 against the return force of
cylinder 33 to a reduced angle = in the direction of Qmin. Via the LS regulator 35 and the force of cylinder 33 the
pump angle / pump flow is adjusted based on the regulating forces to create a matching pressure. This
pressure determines the speed (RPM) of the fan motor / drive.
If the system pressure or the magnetic force, as determined by the electronic box A11, drops, the axial piston
unit 31 is moved in reverse order in direction Qmax .
Test point LA (pressure build up in fan drive) is connected to the output side P of pump 30.
Oil flow - servo pressure (pump30 - internal):
Axial piston unit 31 return cylinder33.
restrictor 37 load sensing regulator35
proportional solenoid valve - pressure relief Y45
load sensing regluator35 control cylinder32.

regulated.
connection X.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600

Page
Feuille
6.3.53.02
is reached.
smallest angle.

3.1. Brake release

M1M2.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600

Page
Feuille
6.3.53.03
the brakes closes.
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600

Page 6.3.53.00
Feuille
1 splitter box
57 accumulator - safety device towing
2 travel pump cpl. - right / left 58 pressure relief valve - parking brake
3 swash plate pump
4 pressure relief valve - HP forward - M1 60 test center - test points /hose connection
5 pressure relief valve - HP reverse - M2 SP repl. oil pressure
7 check valve - replenishing M2 M1R high pressure - travel forward - right
8 servo control piston M2R high pressure - travel reverse - right
9 pilot piston M1L high pressure - travel forward - left
10 pump control cylinder M2L high pressure - travel reverse - left
11 orifice hose connection:
12 pressure relief valve - repl. circuit BB parking brake - operating position
13 two way check valve block BS parking brake - towing position
15 tandem gear pumps - replenishing
16 valve block 65 water cooler
17 pressure relief valves - repl. oil pressure SP 66 hydraulic oil cooler
18 filter assembly / filter - replenishing 80 hydraulic tank

81 shut off valve
19 valve block / pressure relief valve - cold start 82 shut off valve
83 return filter
20 travel motor cpl. - 2x left / 2x right 84 bypass valve
21 axial piston unit 85 strainer
22 control piston
23 pilot piston 96 to /from hand pump - cab tilt
24 directional valve - flushing 97 from safety device towing to hydraulic tank
25 orifice
26 pressure relief valve - flushing 100 regulating pump working hydraulic
28 strainer B5 pressure switch - brake indicator light

B6 pressure switch - replenishing pressure indicator
30 regulating pump cpl. - fan drive light
31 axial piston unit B18 pressure switch - return filter monitor
32 control cylinder (Qmin) B26 temperature sending unit - indicator light -
33 return cylinder (Qmax) hydraulic oil overheating
35 load sensing regulator B39 temperatur sensor - fan drive
36 restrictor
37 restrictor Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off WH.
38 axial piston fixed displacement motor Y10 proportional solenoid valve - le. travel reverse
(fan - water cooler) Y11 proportional solenoid valve - ri. travel forward
39 check valve Y12 proportional solenoid valve - ri. travel reverse
40 gear motor (fan - hydraulic oil cooler) Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake
41 check valve Y28 solenoid valve - Diesel engine -
RPM safety - WH.
45 travel gear cpl. left / right Y29 solenoid valve - special attachment - WH.
46 ring piston - parking brake Y43 solenoid valve - safety device towing
50 distributor block Y45 proportional solenoid valve - pressure relief

GP to pilot (servo) control valve - P / WH. fan drive
UP to regulating pump - X / WH.
52 check valve SD back-up pressure - cold start (pumps 15)
55 accumulator WH.
unnamed line outlets on the hydraulic tank
- suction line working hydraulic pump
- return line working hydraulic
liebherr
Fahrhydraulik
Datum Edition Date
Travel Hydraulic PR 752 F/N xxx- 5600
Blatt
Page 6.3.53. 00
Feuille
Important information
The following adjustment instructions are intended for step by step machine adjustment; generally, only sections of
the adjustments/instructions are required. However, it must be ensured that the required preconditions are met.
Use only glycerin-filled pressure gauges with a reading accuracy of 1% or even more accurate test devices. The
range of the pressure gauge should be approx. 30%, max. 100% above the test value to be adjusted.
Use only the test box with adapter - see Special Tools, page 2.1.30.01. - to check the electronic system and the
straight-run of the machine. For instructions, see group 10.4.00.
When adjusting the straight run, just as in actual application, the track tension must be the same on the left and right
track - see Operation Manual.
Caution: To check / adjust the straight-run, park the machine on firm and level ground, raise it and securely
support the machine to allow the chains to turn freely.
Secure the danger zone.
Observe all safety guidelines as outlined in group 1.2.01.
If the operators cab is raised, the test box may only be used outside the machine and its danger zone. It
is not permitted for persons to be on or near the crawler during these tests.
When putting the machine into service, proceed according to the instructions given in the Operation Manual.
Check the right origin of the indicator lights.
Perform all tests and adjustments with Diesel-RPM, as indicated in the adjustment checklist and with the
machine at operating temperature. (for exceptions see remarks)
Any problems or defects detected during tests must be fixed immediately or as soon as possible, depending on
the severity and type of problem.
For tests / adjustments, use the corresponding Adjustment Checklist, page 3.5.xx.xx.
The sequence of checks corresponds to system requirements, the following instructions have been matched to
those requirements as much as possible. The nominal adjustment values are noted on the checklist.
A. Tests with standard measuring devices - adjustments

Perform scheduled maintenance and inspection work before checking the system visually. For intermediate tests
/ adjustments, observe the following points.
1.1 Service items and filters

Check the coolant and oil level in the Diesel engine, splitter box and hydraulic tank. Add oil as necessary.
Check the air filter for contamination, damage, correct installation and correct type.
Add fuel as necessary, drain water and sediments from tank and separator. If there is any reduction of power,
clean the screen filter and replace the pre / fine filters.
If component failure is suspected, open / check the hydraulic oil filter for the affected part.
In case of temperature problems, check the hydraulic oil cooler and fan for contamination / damage.
1.2 Mechanical components

Diesel engine - check engine shut off, RPM adjustment and potentiometer linkage for mounting, function and
wear.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.01
Travel joystick - check rubber boots / covers for damage and correct installation.
Wire harnesses - check for damage, chafing and defective plug connections.
Leakage - check system functions and for leaks, check hose routing.
Mounting tightness - check all items, such as potentiometer, sensors, consoles, etc. for tightness and
condition.
2. Location of fixed hydraulic pressure test points
2.1 Machines up to F/N xxx-5599

PR 712742 - Battery compartment Test center - test points PR 752 - engine compartment, right
SP - Replenishing system pressure- TH

ND - Servo pressure (repl.) - WH
LD (LS) - Load sensing pressure - WH
HD - High pressure (attachment) - WH
LA - Operating pressure / fan drive - TH
(only PR 752)
(Test points listed below in PR 752 starting with 5072)

M1L High pressure travel forward, left - TH
M1R High pressure travel forward, right - TH
M2L High pressure travel reverse, left - TH
M2R High pressure travel reverse, right - TH
BB Operating pos. of hose to brake - TH
BS Towing position of hose to brake - TH
Test point SD - on valve block in main frame - right (tilt operators cab) Test point ST - only PR 742
up to F/N xxx-5233
PR 712 u.722 PR 732 PR 752 filter block in main frame -
right (tilt operators cab)
Test points M1 / M2
PR 712742 up to F/N xxx-5233 PR 752 F/N xxx-20015071 PR 752 F/N xxx-5072
on inside of support shaft variable pumps on top/below engine compartment right
(tilt operators cab) (tilt operators cab) (see point Test center)
Additional installation possibilities on blind

flanges (see page 2.1.21) and support shaft
flanges available.

engine compartment right
2.2 Machines from F/N xxx-5600
2.2.1 Test points on the test centers

PR 712742 - Battery compartment PR 712732 engine compartment left PR 742 - engine compartment right
PR 752 - engine compartment right

LA - Operating pressure / fan drive - TH
SP - Replenishing system pressure - TH
ND - Servo pressure - WH
HD - High pressure - WH

M2L High pressure travel reverse, left - TH
M2R High pressure travel reverse, right - TH
with test point "M" (not marked)
2.2.2 Test point SD - oil pressure at cold start - on valve block in main frame - right (tilt operators cab)
PR 712, PR722 PR 732 PR 742,PR 752
SD
3. Cold start valve - replenishing / cooling circuit

To protect components, the back pressure in front of the oil cooler when the oil is cold must be limited. When the
hydraulic oil is at operating temperature no by-pass to the oil cooler may occur.
Normally, this test must be made only for troubleshooting, i.e. if replenishing pressure is too low, the operating
temperature is too high in spite of a clean oil cooler, or if excessive pressure values are suspected..
Do not block the existing oil circuit (replenishing), not even for tests! Otherwise the pumps/motors could be
damaged by lack of oil.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.02
3.1 Inspection PR 712 to PR 732 and PR 752
Perform a function check in the corresponding temperature range. Maximum pressure = cold oil = below
+20C, shut off function = oil at operating temperature = above +60C.
If valve adjustment is changed in one temperature range, then - for safety reasons - the function in the
other temperature range must be rechecked.
Valve installation position for PR 712 to PR 732 and PR 752

The distributor block with valve is mounted on the right hand side of the main frame, below the cab. For valve
design / function, see group 8.7.
PR 712, PR 722 PR 732 PR 752
3.1.1 Checking when oil is cold - Pmax - PR 712 to PR 732

Check on test point SD with a 0-40 bar pressure gauge. On older machines, test point ND is connected
instead of SD and has to be checked.
Check / monitor the oil temperature in the hydraulic tank with a remote thermometer.
Start the Diesel engine, slowly increase the engine speed and watch the pressure gauge. Pressure should
remain constant shortly before reaching high idle = maximum pressure, value to appr. 30 bar admissible.
Correct the valve adjustment, as necessary. Remove the protective cap, loosen the locknut, turn the
adjustment screw counterclockwise to lower the pressure adjustment, or clockwise to raise the pressure.
Tighten the lock nut, reinstall the cap, recheck the pressure setting. Check the shut off function with the oil at
operating temperature
Note: Oil temperature increases rapidly when the engine is running and makes it impossible to perform
subsequent checks for a long period of time. For that reason, turn the engine off after every
pressure check and before readjustment. At PR 752, there is normally no test required - the oil
cooler is not in this part of the system.
3.1.2 Checking with the oil at operating temperature - PR 712 to PR 732 and PR 752
Hold the temperature in the hydraulic tank constant above 60C (140 F). Check/monitor the oil temperature in
the hydraulic tank with a thermometer.
Unscrew the tank line of the valve unit and close off the line.
Start the Diesel engine, slowly increase the engine speed to maximum RPM, while monitoring the oil flow from
the open tank connection on the valve unit. Only a slight amount of leak oil may emerge.
If the leakage is high, correct the valve adjustment:

- Remove the cap, loosen the locknut.
- Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise until the pressure on SD drops significantly.
- Turn the adjustment screw in clockwise direction until the pressure on SD no longer increases.
- Continue to turn the adjustment screw by turn in clockwise direction.
- Tighten the lock nut, reinstall the cap.
- Check the maximum pressure when the oil is cold. (except PR 752).
If the shut off function is not reached, check the valve for damage / replace valve.
3.2 Checking the PR 742
Increased backup pressure is released via a check valve, see PR 742 up to F/N xxx-5233
schematics, group 6.3 and valve description in group 8.7. The
distributor block with valve is installed up to F/N xxx-5233 on the right
hand side of the main frame, below the variable pump and starting with
F/N xxx-5234 underneath the battery box.
3.2.1 Check opening function

Disconnect the valve from the line connection on the block side and
push the valve piston several times against the spring with a tool
(pretension is approx. 3 bar) to check valve movement. Reinstall the
valve, if the piston did not move freely, clean or replace the valve.
3.2.2 Check closing function PR 742B from F/N xxx-5234

Check the oil temperature in the hydraulic tank with a thermometer.
Disconnect the return line to the tank from the valve and plug the line.
Start the Diesel engine and raise the engine speed slowly to
maximum engine RPM while checking the oil flow from the open end
of the valve. Only a slight amount of leak oil may emerge.
If oil leakage is high, clean / replace the valve.
4. Stand by pressure - fan drive - only PR 752

Check the pressure on test point LA (test panel on right side of engine up to F/N xxx-5599
compartment) with a 0-40 bar pressure gauge. Carry out the test before
the machine reaches operating temperature in any range, see description
of function on page 6.3.5x.
Connect the pressure gauge and check the pressure. This pressure
determines the required minimum RPM for the fan motors, see page
3.1.5x.
If the pressure does not correspond to the nominal value, correct the
adjustment on the LS regulator of the pump (fan drive pump is mounted to
the right travel pump, see schematics, group 6.3).
PR 752 up to F/N xxx-5599 - remove the cap on the LS regulator and
install the cap after the adjustment
Remove the cap on the LS regulator, loosen the locknut and turn the
adjustment screw until the nominal value is reached. To increase pressure, from F/N xxx-5600
turn the screw clockwise, to reduce pressure, turn the screw counter-
clockwise.
After adjustment, tighten the locknut, install the cap and recheck the
pressure. Check the fan speed, if necessary - use a photo tach with a
reflector strip.
Note: At machines PR 752 F/N xxx-5600 with electronic regulating,
the stand by pressure is changing with the maximum pressure -
check always both pressures and if necessary correct the
adjustments.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.03
5. Pressure limitation - fan drive - PR 712B to PR 742B - from F/N xxx-5600 and PR 752
Check the pressure on test point LA (see group 2. - test center) with a 0-250 bar pressure gauge (PR 752 - with
"waste handling arrangement" and reversible fans 0-500 bar).Diesel engine RPM to nmax. - see description 6.3.
The available pressure dictates the maximum RPM of the motors/fans.
Note: Any time the system overheats, despite the correct system pressure and a clean cooler / radiator, the
fan RPM must be checked. The fan RPM is not only dictated by the pressure, but by pump flow, air
supply, turning resistance, component failure) by other conditions as well.
For pressure values see adjustment checklist page 3.5.xx, fan RPM see technical data in group 3.1.
5.1 PR 712B to PR 742B - from F/N xxx-5600

Remove the plug from one of the temperature sensors. Connect a pressure gauge. Read the pressure and
compare it with the nominal pressure. If the nominal pressure is not correct, determine the reason.
Troubleshooting:
If there is a temperature problem due to insufficient pressure on LA, unplug the proportional pressure relief
valve:
If the pressure does not increase to the nominal value, check the strainer and the gear pump, replace the
proportional pressure relief valve, if necessary.
If the pressure increases to the nominal value, check wiring and sensors. If there is no defect, replace the
electronic box.
If the pressure (RPM) is already obtained when the machine is cold, without unplugging a sensor or the valve,
check the wiring (power supply to E-Box and E-Box to valve) and the sensors (resistance). If there is no other
defect, replace the electronic box.
For test values for temperature sensors see point 5.4.
Proportional pressure relief valves with screen filter (= long fitting) - installed in the main frame:
PR 732 - engine compartment right, middle
PR 712, PR 722 - cross traverse rear

PR 742 - engine compartment right
Temperature sensors:
- Diesel engine coolant - Hydraulic oil - Hydraulic oil

front of Diesel engine PR 712, PR 722 - SP pump outlet PR 732 - SP pump outlet
- Hydraulic oil - Diesel engine charge air

PR 742 - SP valve block PR 742 - air intake pipe
5.2 PR 752 up to F/N xxx-5599
Test when machine is at operating temperature!
Test on test point LA (test panel on right side of engine compartment) with
a 0-250 bar pressure gauge. The machine must be at operating
temperature, Diesel engine RPM to nmax - see description 6.3.
Connect the pressure gauge and check the pressure. This pressure
determines the required maximum speed of the fan motors, see page
3.1.5x.
pressure adjustment on the pressure cut-off valve for the pump (mounted
to the right travel pump, see schematics group 6.3).
5.3 PR 752 from F/N xxx-5600

Test when machine is cold!
To check / adjust, interrupt the power supply to the electronic control - open fuse (automatic circuit
breaker)F9 - the fan drive runs at maximum values = adjustment / test values (fail save system). Connect a
pressure gauge, read the pressure and compare it with the nominal value.
adjustment on the proportional pressure cut-off valve for the pump (mounted
to the right travel pump, see schematics group 6.3.5x.).
Remove the cap on the pressure cut-off valve, loosen the locknut and turn
the adjustment screw until the nominal value is reached. To increase
pressure, turn clockwise, to decrease, turn counterclockwise.
After adjustment, tighten the locknut, install the cap and recheck the
pressure setting. If necessary, check the fan speed - see data page,
paragraph 3.1 - using a photo tach with reflector strip.
Note: The maximum pressure also changes with the standby pressure -
counter check and possible correction of adjustments is necessary.
To check the standby pressure when the machine is warm, 3 "Blind
sensors" are required, otherwise the test can only be made when
the machine is cold.
Procedure: Disconnect all 3 temperature sensor and connect 3
spare sensor on the wire harness. Make sure the 3 sensors do not
touch anything hot, reset the fuse F9 and proceed with the test.
Adjustment values:: (the stand by pressure is generally)
Stand by pressure:: 305 bar fan RPM - main radiator front = >350 RPM, - oil cooler = 550
+200
RPM
Pressure cut off = pmax bar fan RPM - main radiator front = n1, - oil cooler = n2
F/N xxx-6199 F/N xxx-6200 F/N xxx-6199 F/N xxx-6200
+5 5
pmax 177 bar 205 bar +5
217 bar
+5
255 bar +5
225 bar
+3
275 bar
+100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1
+100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1 +100 -1
Note regarding function of indicator light H7 on the instrument panel:

The indicator light lights up - during the starting procedure
in case of temperature sensor failure
in case of line interruption (for example broken wire, loose plug)
in case of insufficient power supply to the electronic box
The indicator light blinks - if the temperature of the liquids is too high
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.04
Temperature sensors:
- Diesel engine coolant - Hydraulic oil - Diesel engine charge air

- front of Diesel engine - SP valve block - air intake pipe
5.4 Test values for temperature sensors - resistance in Ohm:

Sensor for Sensor for charge air Sensor for coolant and hydraulic oil
coolant and hydraulic oil Id.No. 5802 148 ID.No. 7414 002 and
ID.No. 6290 186 and PR 712 PR 742 charge air Id.No. 7414 003
ID.No. 10 043 264 PR 752
PR 712 PR 742 Temp. C Ohm
0 900 Temp. C Ohm
Temp. C Ohm 10 950 0 1640
50 1300 20 1000 10 1778
60 1350 30 1050 20 1924
70 1420 40 1100 30 2078
80 1480 50 1150 40 2239
90 1560 60 1200 50 2408
100 1620 70 1250 60 2584
110 1680 80 1310 70 2767
90 1360 80 2959
90 3157
Check the oil temperature in the hydraulic tank with remote mounted
thermometer, see special tools, group 2.1.20.
With an external thermometer, test the temperature on several points of
the tank surface and determine the average value.
The pressure values in a hydraulic system may change due to oil
viscosity. Viscosity, however, always changes depending on oil
temperature.
For that reason, always maintain a constant operating temperature,
and monitor the temperature during the entire inspection and adjustment
procedure.
If necessary, the warm up procedure must be repeated or the oil cooler
must be partially covered during inspection and adjustment procedures.
The operating temperature can be reached in various ways:
a. Move the machine into appropriate work application.
b. Actuate the ripper or blade tilt" function all the way and slowly extend and retract the lift cylinders in fine
control range, pressure at HD should be at 105 bar. The oil is warmed up via the restrictions of the spool
valves.
c. "Lower" the ripper and blade lift cylinder function all the way. The oil is heated via the lift cylinder piston
check valves. Warm up the oil" in intervals of approx. 5 minutes, with a 1 minute break between intervals.
The travel drive should also be actuated to full speed at the same time, continuously, provided the machine
is raised off the ground and is properly supported.
Caution: Do not actuate the blade quick drop function.
d. Fully actuate the "lift" and "blade tilt" function. The oil is heated by flowing via the check valves in the lift
cylinder pistons. Warm up the oil" in intervals of approx. 5 minutes, with a 1 minute break between
intervals.
e. Set the adjustment value of the pressure cut-off valve on the working hydraulic pump to max. 5 bar above
the adjustment value (nominal value) of the primary pressure relief valve and actuate the ripper or blade
tilt" function all the way. Fully actuate in intervals of approx. 1 minute, return to neutral position for approx.
20 seconds, otherwise the relief valve can be damaged due to overheating.
f. On PR 752 machines, actuate the function Engine overspeed safety" with the test box, see group 10.4.
Actuate in intervals of approx. 1 minute, with a 20 second break between intervals, otherwise the relief valve
can be damaged due to overheating.
For procedures b, c, d, e and f, the travel drive (track chain) must be also actuated repeatedly during and after
the warm-up procedure to ensure that the entire hydraulic system warms up evenly. For this procedure, the
machine must be raised off the ground or driven.
7. Replenishing pressure
Check the pressure on test point SP (test panel in battery box or, on the PR 752, on the right side of the engine
compartment), using a 0-40 bar pressure gauge.
While testing, vary the Diesel engine RPM slowly between appr. 1000 RPM and high idle RPM and observe the
replenishing pressure. It should change only slightly.
If the nominal value is not reached, or if the pressure drops sharply when engine speed is reduced, find /
eliminate the problem before continuing to operate the machine. Failure to do so can result in complete
failure of travel pumps / motors.
The pressure relief valves are preset by the manufacturer. For design/function of valves, see group 8.7.
Pressure loss can be caused, for example, by a defective relief valve, see also par. 3, by gear pump wear or by
excessive leakage in the variable flow pumps or motors.
On older PR 712, PR 722 and PR 732 models, the pressure limitation was handled by a relief valve in the travel
pumps. See function / schematics in group 6.3 or variable flow pump, group 8.1.
On all other models, the relief valve (PR 742B F/N xxx-5234 and PR 752 = 2pcs.) is mounted in a distributor
block on the inside of the main frame, on the right hand side next to the variable pumps.
PR 712, PR 722, PR 732 PR 742 up to F/N xxx-5233 PR 742B from F/N xxx-5234
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.05
PR 752
8. Control pressure - only PR 742 up to F/N xxx-5233

Check the pressure with a 0-100 bar pressure gauge on test point ST
(on the filter bracket in the main frame, on the right hand side)
The existing pressure results from the SP pressure acting on the
spring side of the valve and from the spring setting, which is preset
by the manufacturer, see schematic, group 6.3.
The valve is mounted into the valve block, just as the relief valve for
SP pressure, on the right side of the main frame, below the variable
pump.
For valve design / function, see group 8.7.
9. Hydraulic neutral position of the variable pumps

Check on test points M1 and M2. Safety lever and joystick must remain in the park position during this test.
After starting the Diesel engine, the variable pumps are held hydraulically in the neutral position, which means
they may not produce any oil flow. To check the hydraulic neutral position, check the pressure build-up in the
closed circuits = test points M1 and M2 on the right and left support shaft, at PR 742B F/N xxx-5234 at the test
center, on PR 752 directly on the travel pumps - see schematics in group 6.3.
The pressure value (approximately SP pressure) on M1 and M2 must be the same on both sides. Tolerance max
1 bar.
9.1 Pre-check and basic adjustment

After repairs to pumps and when in doubt, recheck the neutral position with a 0-600 bar pressure gauge.
On PR 712, PR 722, PR 732 and PR 752 machine, also check the position of the mark () on the eccentric pin
on the pump cover, which must point towards the proportional solenoids. If necessary, turn the eccentric pin to
the correct position, with the Diesel engine shut off.
Connect the pressure gauges to test point M1 and M2 on the right and then on the left hydrostatic drive, turn
over the Diesel engine with the starter or start briefly and check the increase in pressure.
Caution: Chains may already be turning.
Adjust the neutral position - see point 9.3 - as necessary, until all four test points show approximately the same
pressure.
9.2 Test
Connect a 0-40 (0-60) bar pressure gauge one after the other to test points M1 and M2 on both support shafts.
Start the Diesel engine, check the pressure values and compare for each side M1 with M2.
Adjust the neutral position, if necessary, until nominal values are obtained.
9.3 Adjustment procedure
Connect one 0-40 (0-60) bar pressure gauge each to test points M1 and M2 of the pump to be adjusted.
Change the adjustment to slightly decrease the higher pressure and to increase the lower pressure on the
opposite side. Check also the reference dimension at PR 742B F/N xxx-5234, see Point 9.3.2.2.
Caution: Chains may already be turning.
Adjust until the same pressure is shown on both sides, tighten lock nut and recheck with one pressure gauge.
9.3.1 Additional instructions for PR 712, PR 722, PR 732, PR 752

Hold the eccentric pin1 with an Allen wrench, loosen the locknut 2.
Watch the pressure gauge and turn the eccentric pin carefully until the
required adjustment is completed and the neutral position of the pump is
reached.
Hold the eccentric pin and tighten the locknut.
Check the pressures again.
9.3.2 Additional instructions for PR 742
9.3.2.1. up to F/N xxx-5233

Remove the plug 65 and loosen the clamp screw 67.
Watch the pressure gauge and turn the valve sleeve stop 66 with a
suitable screwdriver until the required adjustment is completed and
the neutral position of the pump is reached.
Tighten the clamp screw. Recheck the pressures and reinstall the
plug.
9.3.2.2. from F/N xxx-5234

Check distance A from valve housing C front face to the control
housing (clean areas from varnish coat before measuring)
Nominal value = 14,75 mm.
If adjustment is not correct, loosen locknut B with special tool - see
page 2.1.20.01 - and turn valve housing C with a socket wrench until
the reference dimension is reached. Hold the valve housing and
tighten the locknut.
Check pressures at M1/M2. If a further adjustment necessary,
loosen locknut again, watch the pressure gauge and turn the valve
housing until the required adjustment is completed and the neutral
position of the pump is reached.
Hold the valve housing and tighten the locknut.
Recheck the pressures.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.06
10.Pressure limitation - maximum operating pressure of the closed circuits
Check pressures on test points M1 and M2 with a 0-600 bar pressure gauge.
This test is only needed when troubleshooting, for example in case of undesired steering movements under load,
insufficient power or excessive loss of replenishing pressure.
A precheck of the existing high pressure should be performed in every application where the problem occurs.
Check the high and low pressure on both circuits at the same time as a comparison.
At machines without test center - before starting the test, match the components to the test points. They
depend on the type of travel gear (see also group 6.3 and 11.3):
For PR 712 to PR 742 from the start of production and with travel gear Type C
- travel forward - M1 - located on top
- travel backward - M2 - located below
For PR712 to PR742 after change in series / with travel gear Type P/D
and PR 752 , from start of series production - travel forward - M1 - located below
- travel backward - M2 - located on top
The position of the high pressure hoses to the pumps and travel motors corresponds to the location of the test
points.
For this test, close off the high pressure lines. See par. 10.1 resp. 10.2 Test preparation.
Install pressure gauges on the left and right on test point M1 to check travel forward" or M2 to check travel
reverse".
Start the Diesel engine and run at approx. 1400 RPM. Slowly deflect the travel joystick to travel forward" or
travel reverse" until the pressure reading on the pressure gauge remains constant.
Leave the travel joystick in this position for a short period and reduce the engine speed gradually to approx. 1000
RPM. The pressure reading on the gauge should remain constant or decrease slightly.
Caution: For safety reasons, carry out this test at the lowest possible oil flow = slightest possible joystick
deflection. Hold the highest pressure for no longer than 5 to 10 seconds.
If the nominal value was not reached on one or several points, find and eliminate the cause. Possible causes are
loose or damaged relief valves, damaged cylinder barrels or control plates, defective servo piston seal (pressure
increases when RPM decreases) or general wear.
If nominal values were reached during this test, but they were not reached during the prechecks in working
application, then the problem is located in the travel motor. For example, it could be caused by a damaged
cylinder barrel or control plate, a defective directional valve for the flushing function. Find and eliminate the
cause.
After completing the test, reinstall all components with new seals. For tightening torques, see page 1.4.02.
Bleed the hydraulic circuits. Test run the travel circuit.
10.1 Test preparation - block HP lines - PR 712 to PR 742

Remove gear cover on both sides, clean the support shaft area as
necessary.
Disconnect the wire harnesses, loosen and unscrew grommets on
support shaft flanges. Remove silicon from mounting grooves and
remove harness from flange passage.
Remove flange mounting screws, lift the flange from the support shafts.
Close the ports on the flanges with plastic plugs. Install special test
flanges - see special tools page 2.1.21.01 - on the support shafts and
tighten with corresponding screws. Reconnect the wiring harnesses.
Important: Water or dirt in oil ports and cable connections can cause pump and motor damage or electrical
malfunctions.
Do not damage the wiring harnesses.
Check the special flanges and their O-rings before installation. Install test fittings or blind plugs.
After the test, remove the flanges and pressure gauges. Replace the seals on the support shaft flange.
Reinstall the flange. Insert the wiring harnesses properly, install the grommets, cover the mounting groove with
silicon.
10.2 Test preparation - block HP lines - PR 752
Prepare blind plates B (4 or 8 pieces required) - see special tools page 2.1.21.01 - and hex head screws M12 x
50 - 10.9, ID No. 4600 724 (16 or 32 pieces required) for installation.
The blind plates are installed with the SAE flanges of the HP lines to the
travel motors. The mounting area is accessible via the rear cover plate,
the bottom maintenance cover and, if necessary, by tilting the cab.
Caution: Do not block the oil flow at the pump outlets with the
blind plates, because there is no O-ring seal at the pump side.
There is danger of serious injury due to hot oil blowing out.
To install, loosen the SAE flange screws and push in the blind plates.
Replace the original screws individually with the longer screws mentioned
above and tighten.
Caution: Check the blind plates before installation for damage. Do not damage or push out the seal rings
during installation.
Protect the lines and ports from water or contamination, this could damage the pumps and motors.
To remove the plates, replace one by one the screws on the SAE flanges again with the original screws and
tighten them just to the point where the seal ring touches. Pull out the plate and torque the screws in sequence.
For torque values, see page 1.4.02.
Notes:
For this test, all 8 HP line connections should be closed off. This makes it possible to check all four areas of the
system in one test procedure.
If this is not possible, close off at least all 4 line connections for one drive direction. To check the other direction,
change over the blind plates to the other connections.
It is not permitted to check both travel directions with the plates installed in the same position. The pressure
which occurs on both sides of the travel motors could damage the motors. In addition, there is no O-ring seal on
the motor. This could cause serious injury due to oil blowing out.
For safety reasons, it is not permitted to block only one travel drive (the track chain on the opposite side could
start to turn).
Notes for troubleshooting:
Even for troubleshooting, it is not permitted to disconnect just one travel motor of one travel drive from the high
pressure circuit. If only one motor is driven per side, it may be damaged due to overload.
If a high pressure oil loss is discovered in the area of the motors, a comparison of the pressure in each housing
can show in which of the two motors the problem occurred. The comparison test must be made at the same
time when the high pressure loss occurs.
B. Track chain run - test with test box CET 08/03 H - adjustments
1. Preparations
Before performing any of the tests, all the points outlined in section A as well as the tests and preparations
outlined in test box use", group 10.4 and other adjustment guidelines in test sections A and B must have been
performed up to/ including track chain run - RPM sensor".
2. Type of test / adjustment

The extent and procedure for testing and adjustment can be selected based on the problem. The actual
adjustment procedure for the individual components is independent of the problems and is always performed in
the same manner.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.07
2.1 Checking straight run - minor corrections
In this test, the check the speed of the right travel drive is
compared to the speed of the left travel drive.
For test instructions, see test box use" group 10.4, paragraph
Checking straight run of tracks.
Test steps according to paragraph in adjustment guidelines
Straight run - right track to left track".
If minor corrections/adjustments are made without checking the
"basic adjustment / left track", always match the faster track to the
slower one.
On PR 752 machines, the hydraulic motor control must be
disconnected when testing the end of pump regulation. See par. B-
2.3
2.2 Check / adjustment of speed and straight run = base adjustment

Step 1 = Speed
- The speed of the left track in relation to the nominal values in
the test box is measured / adjusted.
- For test instructions, see test box use" group 10.4, paragraph
Base adjustment - left track speed.
- Test steps according to the checklist in paragraph Basic
adjustment - left track
Step 2 = Straight run

- The speed of right track in relation to the speed of left track is
measured / adjusted = matching to nominal speed.
- For test instructions, see test box use" group 10.4, paragraph
Checking track straight run.
- Test steps according to the checklist in paragraph Straight run
- right track to left track.
Notes:
- Speed stages 1 and 5 as well as stage 4 in reverse are only used to double check the adjustment since
they are results from adjusting stages 2, 3 and 4 forward. Exception: stage 5 forward on model PR 752
- see par. B-5.
- If stop screws are installed in the spring housings of the pump covers they must be used for
the adjustment. Additional eccentric pins in the pump cover have been added by the manufacturer as
safety stops and may not be adjusted.
If the spring housing is changed (regulating range adjustment), the end stop must also be readjusted.
If only eccentric pins and spring housings without stop screws are installed, the regulating range and
end stop can be adjusted independent of one another.
- For travel pumps, type HPV 130 = PR 742 up to F/N xxx-5233, the regulating range must be
readjusted after the end stop is adjusted. For that reason, check / adjust speed stage 3 before speed
stage 2.
- Pump control / adjustment of travel pumps depends on the type of travel gear installed. See previous
point A-10 Maximum working pressure" and the following illustrations in par. 4.
- For adjustments on the pumps, the operators cab must be raised, and for travel motor adjustments on
machine models PR 712 to PR 742, the gear cover must be removed. For travel motor adjustments on
model PR 752, remove rear cover plate. Observe all safety recommendations.
2.2.1 Additional preparations for machine models PR 752
The travel motors (2 per side) on the PR 752 are controlled hydraulically from the pump remote control and
start regulating shortly before the end of pump regulation. For function / schematics, see group 6.3.
Because of this overlap, the servo control of hydraulic motors must be disconnected when testing / adjusting
the end of pump regulation.
Because internal leakage can cause a build-up in pressure and, as a result, change the motor adjustment,
servo lines must be connected to tank" and may not be closed off.
Test / adjustment of pumps - travel speed and straight run:

Remove the servo line to the hydraulic motors on pump port X and
connect to free housing port J. Close off connection X with the plug
Perform tests / adjustments as outlined in checklist section
disconnected servo lines".
Reinstall parts after adjustment.
Test / adjustment of hydraulic motors - travel speed and straight run:

The four displacement motors must be tested / adjusted individually
during the basic adjustment.
Therefore it is a need, to have on each side only one variable motor
connected to the servo line before you start with the next
tests/adjustments.
In travel direction forward the two motors in front are on the end of the
servo line. Remove the plug from connection Y at the remote controls
of this motors and install fittings as listed below (drawing shows left
hand front motor, seen from the rear side of the machine = cover at the
main frame).
Disconnect the servo lines "motor to motor" from the rear motors -
connection X and connect the lines with the fittings at connection Y on
the front motors. Close fittings at the rear motors with stopper and
union nut.
Required parts:
1 2 x IdNo. 4900 038 Stopper
2 2 x IdNo. 4774 001 Union nut
3 2 x IdNo. 7403 569 Elbow fitting
4 2 x IdNo. 7404 259 Reducer fitting
5 2 x IdNo. 7410 458 Fitting
At the front motors connection X is now open to "tank", the rear motors
are still connected to the servo lines.
Carry out tests/adjustments referring to the checklist step "servo lines connected to one motor on each
side", If necessary, adjust the rear motors.
Note: The base adjustment (speed) for the left motor must be set to the line between the red and
green field on the SLOW" side of the straight run indicator on the test box, the straight run of the
right motor is as usual adjusted to the center of the green section. See test box use", group 10.4.
Reinstall the servo lines and close off connections Y.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.08
Carry out tests/adjustments referring to the checklist step "servo lines connected to all travel motors". If
necessary, adjust the front motors.
Note: The additional Qmin - limit screw (minimum angle) has been preset by the manufacturer to a nominal
value and may not be readjusted. The Qmin - screw serves as a safety stop and is normally not
reached since the maximum speed limitation is regulated via the electronic control.
When replacing / readjusting a variable motor, note point 5 - adjustment of variable motors -
mechanical Qmin -stop - PR752.
3. Adjustments
For simplified illustration of parts as well as component related sequence of test/adjustment steps, see par. 4.
For more precise design details, see sectional views in group 8.1 and 8.
Note:
- If the test result for an existing adjustment is shown in red area on the test box,
change the adjustment first past the green range until it is in the other red area.
Then reset the adjustment to the required green area. Exception: PR 752 - stage
4 and 5.
- Adjustments to reach the green area may only be made when the chain is at a standstill.
- Recheck the adjustments to ensure the indicated value several times within a certain time frame -
approx. 20 seconds. Between the test runs, actuate the travel in different speeds / directions.
3.1 Adjustments on variable pumps type BPV and "HPV 135"

- PR 712, PR 722, PR 732, PR 742B F/N xxx-5234, PR 752
See also Notes under par. 2.2.
3.1.1 Regulating range (begin of regulation) = test box test forward stage 2" / reverse stage 2"
Begin of regulation and flow in the regulating range depend on the regulating spring adjustment and for that
reason, they cannot be adjusted separately.
Loosen the nut, turn the spring housing - clockwise to slow down the track speed
- counterclockwise to increase the track speed.
Tighten the nut, perform a test run. Repeat the procedure until the required adjustment is obtained.
If installed, loosen the lock nut and turn the adjustment screw - end of pump regulation by the same amount as
the spring housing, but in the opposite direction. Tighten the lock nut. Proceed to the next test position for the
required fine adjustment.
3.1.2 End stop (maximum pump angle) = test box test forward stage 3" / reverse stage 3"
Version adjustment pin in spring housing
Loosen the lock nut, turn adjustment screw - clockwise to slow down the track speed
- counterclockwise to increase the track speed
Version eccentric pin in pump cover

Remove the plug, loosen the lock nut on the eccentric pin. For special tools, see sub group 2.1.20.
Note: The necessary turning direction for the adjustment cannot be determined beforehand. It must be
determined after the first adjustment via a test run.
Move the eccentric pin slightly in one direction and lock it in this position with the lock nut. Perform a test run.
Repeat the procedure in the necessary turning direction until the required adjustment is obtained.
3.2 Adjustments on variable pumps type HPV 130 - PR 742 up to F/N xxx-5233
See also Notes under par. 2.2.
3.2.1 End stop (maximum pump angle) = test box test forward stage 3" / reverse stage 3"
Loosen the lock nut, turn the spring housing - clockwise to slow down the track speed
Tighten the nut, perform a test run. Repeat the process until the required adjustment is obtained.
Loosen the lock nut on adjustment screw, turn the screw the same amount as the spring housing but in the
opposite direction. Tighten the nut. For the required fine adjustment, proceed to the next step = regulating
range pumps.
3.2.2 Regulating range (begin of regulation) = test box test forward stage 2" / reverse stage 2"
Begin of regulation and the flow in the regulating range depend on the regulating spring adjustment and for
that reason, are not adjusted separately.
Loosen the lock nut, turn the adjustment screw - clockwise to slow down the track speed
3.3 Adjustment of variable motors regulating range (begin of regulation) = test box test forward stage 4"
See also Notes" in par. 2.2 as well as par. 2.2.1 Preparations for machine models PR 752.
Begin of regulation and the flow consumption in the regulating range depend on the regulating spring
adjustment and for that reason, are not adjusted separately.
The adjustment procedure is the same for all variable motor models "BMV".
Loosen the lock nut, turn the adjustment screw - counterclockwise to slow down the track speed
- clockwise to increase the track speed
Note: The Qmax limit screw (maximum motor angle) on the variable motors has been adjusted to a nominal
value by the manufacturer and may not be readjusted. The Qmax screw determines oil consumption
and torque transfer in the low speed range.
4. Sequence and location of adjustments

The sequence of adjustments is given in steps 1 to 5 (6) and is valid for both base adjustment left track" = speed
and straight run adjustment" =matching right track to left track. The sections are set up according to the type of
travel gear installed (see group 11) and the type of end stops of the pumps.
See also Notes" in par. 2.2 as well as par. 2.2.1 Preparations" for machine models PR 752.
Parts are illustrated in simplified form; for more details refer to sectional views in group 8.1 and 8.2.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.09
4.1 PR 712, PR 722, PR 732 - travel gear type C (A)
Pump type BPV
adjustment screw in spring housing eccentric pins in pump cover
Key to 4.1
c = test box - forward stage 2 = regulating range pump e = test box - reverse stage 2 = regulating range pump
d = test box - forward stage 3 = end of pump regulation f = test box - reverse stage 3 = end of pump regulat.
g = test box - forward stage 4 = regulating range motor
4.2 PR 712, PR 722, PR 732, PR 742B F/N xxx-5234, PR 752

- travel gear type P / type D and similar
Pump type BPV
adjustment screw in spring housing eccentric pins in pump cover
PR 752
d PR 742
f
c 3
Key to 4.2
c = test box - forward stage 2 = regulating range pump g = test box - forward stage 4 = regulating range motor
d = test box - forward stage 3 = end of pump regulation (PR 752 - one hydraulic motor right/left)
e = test box - reverse stage 2 = regulating range pump h = test box - forward stage 4 = regulating range motor
f = test box - reverse stage 3 = end of pump regulation (PR 752 - second hydraulic motor right/left)
4.3 PR 742 up to F/N xxx-5233 - pump type HPV 130
Travel gear
type C (A) type P / type D
Key to 4.3
c = test box - forward stage 3 = end of pump regulation e = test box - reverse stage 3 = end of pump regulat.
d = test box - forward stage 2 = regulating range pump f = test box - reverse stage 2 = regulating range pu.
g = test box - forward stage 4 = regulating range motor
5. Adjustment of variable motors - mechanical Qmin -stop - PR 752
Note: When replacing a variable motor, the adjustment of the Qmin stop
screw (=protrusion) on the new motor must be compared to the
adjustment on the old, original motor. If necessary, change the
adjustment on the new motor before installation.
The protrusion should be about the same for all 4 motors.
Servo lines to variable motors are connected normally.
Check adjustments according to the adjustment checklist with the test box in speed stage 5 - forward.
Note: The correct basic adjustment (speed) for the left motors and the straight run for the right motors is
shown on the test box in the " green" area, as usual.
Adjustment procedure:
If an adjustment must be made, determine the protrusion of the adjustment screw on both variable motors for the
side to be adjusted.
Chain too fast on the variable motor with the larger screw protrusion: loosen the lock nut, turn the,
adjustment screw in clockwise direction.
Chain too slow on the variable motor with the smaller screw protrusion: loosen the lock nut, turn the,
adjustment screw in counterclockwise direction.
Note: Turn the adjustment screw only slightly. Do not change the adjustment past the green range on
the straight run indicator into the red "FAST" area.
Tighten the lock nut, run through a test run. Repeat the procedure until the required adjustment is reached.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille
6.5.00.10
6. Actuate the parking brake - bleed system and check pressure setting - PR 712PR752 F/N xxx-5600
Perform only if necessary - but always after repairs on the system. For schematic, see group 6.3.
6.1 Operating system - bleed pressure line to brake

PR 712PR742 - Loosen the fitting on the brake line on the left and right support shaft flange.
PR 752 - Loosen the hose connection to the brake on the right rear and the left front. If possible, place a
container underneath to catch the oil. .
Connect the test box and prepare to check the "solenoid valve - brake" - see group 10.4, point 3.6. Start the
machine as outlined in group 10.4 , press the switch "BRAKE RELEASE" on the test box until oil free of air
bubbles emerges on the fittings.
Turn the machine off. Remove the test box. Tighten the fittings and clean the machine (oil).
6.2 Actuate the brake to bleed the system for towing

Connect a test hose on test point "M" at test console / hose connection "BS" and place hose into a suitable
container. Test console, see point 2.
Bring starter switch S1, safety lever and the emergency shut off switch into operating position - solenoid valve /
towing shifts. Do not start the engine!
Move the hand pump of the cab tilt device to "Lift". Actuate the pump until oil free of air bubbles emerges on
connection "BS" / test hose. Note: After changing a hose, it may be necessary to actuate the hand pump 30
times.
Bring the starter switch S1 and the safety lever to neutral position.
6.3 Check the system for towing and the pressure setting
As outlined in the operating manual, the hose from "BB" to "BS" and close off "BB" . Install a 0-60 bar pressure
gauge on test connection "M" at "BS".
Bring the starter switch S1 and safety lever into operating position - solenoid valve -( towing) is actuated.
Watch the pressure gauge and actuate the hand pump for the cab tilt device in position "Lift" until the pressure
relief valve opens and the pressure remains constant. Nominal value 35+3 bar. Under no circumstances may
it exceed 40 bar - danger of damage to the brake piston seal.
If the pressure relief valve does not open in the required range, correct the adjustment.
Move the safety lever to the down position or press the emergency shut off switch. The solenoid valve (towing)
moves to the neutral position, the indicator light - brake release H4, which was turned off before, lights up again
on the instrument panel.
Bring the safety lever and the emergency shut off switch again into the operating position. The solenoid valve is
actuated, the brake is released by the accumulated pressure in the accumulator. The indicator light - brake
release H4 must turn off.
If the indicator light H4 does not turn off, the whole process and system check must be repeated. If necessary,
check the charge pressure in the accumulator.
Move the starter switch S1 to 0 and the safety lever to the down position. Move the lever on the hand pump for
the cab tilt to the "down" position. Remove the pressure gauge, reposition the hose from "BS" to "BB" and close
off "BS" with plug and nut. Clean the area, as necessary.
Pressure relief valve: on PR 712PR742 on PR 752
(tilt cab) in main frame - right in main frame - left
Sub Group Index
Technical data 7.1
Description 7.2
Function 7.3
PR 712 F/N xxx-01030384 7.3.10

PR 722 F/N xxx-01030563
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032500
PR 712 F/N xxx-03850500 7.3.11

PR 722 F/N xxx-05641000
PR 712B F/N xxx-0501 7.3.12

PR 732B F/N xxx-25012627
PR 732B F/N xxx-2628 7.3.30

PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500 7.3.40
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062 7.3.50
PR 752 F/N xxx-20636199 7.3.51
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200 7.3.52
Hydraulic hose routing 7.4

Hydraulic hose routing
PR 712 F/N xxx-01030384 7.4.10
PR 722 F/N xxx-01030563
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032500 7.4.30
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500 7.4.40
Test and adjustment 7.5
Datum Edition Date
01 03 Working hydraulic Blatt

Page 7.0.00.01
Feuille
Description PR 712(B) PR 722(B) PR 732(B) PR 742(B) PR 752
Servo control pressure ND bar 18+7 18+7 18+7 253 25+7
Regulating pump F/N xxx-fromto 0103 0103 20032627 20012500 2002

type A10V045 A10V071 A10V100 HPR 130 HPR 160
oil flow l/min 112 156 209 272 336
stand-by pressure bar 20+1 20+1 20 +1
30 +5
30+5
+6
pressure different p HD-LS bar 14 15+6
pressure cut-off bar 1605 1605 1605 1605 2005
flushing flow l/min 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5
Regulating pump F/N xxx-fromto 2628 2500
type A10V100 A10V140
oil flow l/min 209 292
stand-by pressure bar 25+1 25+1
pressure cut-off bar 1605 1605
flushing flow l/min 2-5 2-5
Control valve F/N xxx-fromto 01030384 01030563 20032500 20012500 --

type M5-1072/20 M5-1073/20 M5-1082/20 M5-1085/25
spool - regulating range bar 5,2 - 15 5,2 - 15 5,2 - 15 5,3 - 15
spool - stroke mm 11 11 11 14
primary pressure max. bar 1905 1905 1905 1905
secondary pressure max. bar 2105 2105 2105 2105
Control valve F/N xxx-fromto 03853084 05643175 25013206 25013095 20022077
type 00 M7-3001/22 M7-3001/22 M7-3004/22 M7-3004/22 M7-3022/22
spool - regulating range bar 5 - 14 5 - 14 5 - 14 5 - 14 4,5 - 22
spool - stroke - lift short cap A - mm 9 9 9 9
11
long cap B - mm 11 11 11 11
spool - stroke - tilt short cap A - mm 11 11 11 11
11
long cap B - mm 9 9 9 9
primary pressure max. bar 2205 2205 2205 2205 2705
5 5 5 5
secondary pressure max. bar 210 210 210 210 2505
Control valve F/N xxx-fromto 3085 3176 3207 30966199 20786199
type 10 M7-3001/22 M7-3001/22 M7-3004/22 M7-3004/22 M7-3022/22
Control valve F/N xxx-fromto 6200 6200
type 10 M6-1149/22 M6-1149/22
spool - regulating range bar 5 - 14 5 - 14 5 - 14 5 - 14 4,5 - 22
spool - stroke - lift cap A - mm 9 9 9 9
11
cap B - mm 11 11 11 11
spool - stroke - tilt cap A - mm 11 11 11 11
11
cap B - mm 9 9 9 9
primary pressure max. bar 2205 2205 2205 2205 2705
secondary pressure max. bar 2105 2105 2105 210 5
2505
Accumulator - nitrogen pressure bar 12 12 12 12 12
Note: Certain equipments, such as winches and special attachments may require different pressure values.
Technical data
Datum Edition Date

Page 7.1.00.01
Feuille
Cycle times (in seconds):
Raise / lower from level ground to maximum height
Description PR 712 (B) PR 722(B) PR 732 (B) PR 742 (B) PR 752
F/N xxx-fromto 103384 103563 20032500 20012500

Straight- raise sec. 3,8 2,6 3,0 3,0 --
blade lower sec. 5,2 3,6 3,9 3,7 --
quick drop sec. 2,0 1,7 1,5 1,9 --
tilt sec. 0,8 0,8 1,0 1,7 --
6-way raise sec. 2,8 2,2 3,4 -- --
blade lower sec. 3,8 3,0 3,8 -- --
quick drop sec. 1,2 1,3 1,8 -- --
tilt sec. 0,9 1,0 1,3 -- --
angle function sec. 2,6 2,7 3,2 -- --
F/N xxx-fromto 385 564 2501 2501 2002

Straight- raise sec. 3,3 3,2 2,8 3,3
blade lower sec. 2,7 2,2 2,1 3,0
(PR 752 -
Semi-U quick drop sec. 1,7 1,4 1,4 1,4
blade)
tilt sec. 0,7 1,0 1,6 1,6
6-way raise sec. 1,9 -- --
blade lower sec. 1,2 -- --
quick drop sec. 1,0 -- --
tilt sec. 0,9 -- --
angle function sec. 2,5 -- --
Permissible leakage limits

Measure on lift cylinder piston rods
Bring machine to operating temperature
Raise attachments to maximum lifting height
Description PR 712 (B) PR 722(B) PR 732 (B) PR 742 (B) PR 752
Blade attachment mm / 10 min 25 25 20 18 15

Ripper 1-tooth mm / 10 min -- -- 15 10 8
3-tooth mm / 10 min 15 15 12 10 8
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list PR 732B F/N xxx-2628
Datum Edition Date

Page 7.3.30.00
Feuille
53 check valve 130 control valve block cpl.
54 accumulator 131 pressure relief valve - primary safety
140 spool - lift / lower
141 check valve
60 test center - test points 142 pressure relief valve - secondary safety
ND servo pressure - working hydraulic lift cylinder bottom side
LD load sensing pressure 145 spool - tilt
HP high pressure - working hydraulic 146 check valve
148 two way check valve
155 end plate
80 hydraulic tank 162 check valve
81 shut off valve
82 return filter
83 bypass valve 170 lift cylinder
85 strainer 171 check valves - piston
172 block
92 from TH. - gear pump - replenishing
(TH. - see chapter 6.3) 173 block
95 to / from hand pump
96 to TH. - gear pump - replenishing 175 tilt cylinder
97 from TH. - return line
100 regulating pump cpl.

101 axial piston unit B11 pressure switch - quick drop
102 control cylinder (Qmin) (= B22 at PR 742B starting with F /N xxx-5600)
103 return cylinder (Qmax) B22 pressure switch - return filter monitor
105 pressure cut off valve (= B18 at PR 742B starting with F /N xxx-5600)
106 pilot piston
107 restrictor Y3 solenoid valve - float position (bottom side)
109 load sensing regulator Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off
110 pilot piston Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off)
111 case drain filter Y25 solenoid valve - float position (rod side)
112 stand-by valve
113 valve piston
114 restrictor
115 pilot (servo) control valve

116 regulating piston - lower
117 regulating piston - lift
118 regulating piston - tilt left
119 regulating piston - tilt right
220
01 03
1. Neutral function Functional schematic see 7.3.50.00
1.1. Servo control

Pressurized oil flows from travel hydraulic replenishing" (see group 6.3
filter base 18/B) check valve 52 P-distributor block 50 accumulator 55.
solenoid valveY4.
After raising the safety lever (solenoid valve Y4 energized)
from solenoid valve Y4/distributor block 50-GP to P-servo control valve115
regulating piston 116 to119 blocked.
test point ND.
The servo lines from servo control valve (joystick) 115 - outlets 1 to 4 - are relieved via regulating pistons 116 to
119 and line connection T to the tank.
1.2. Working circuit - Attachment pump 100

In rest position, axial piston unit 101 of attachment pump 100 is at maximum pump angle.
When the Diesel engine is started, the pump starts to deliver, LS regulator 109 is pushed immediately against
the spring and axial piston unit 101 is set to the smallest pump angle = Qmin (flow) by the variable control
cylinder 102.
The system maintains stand-by pressure of 30 +5 bar.
Oil flow:
Tank 80 shut off valve 81 attachment pump 100/axial piston unit 101
internal return cylinder 103.
intermediate plate 105
pressure cut off valve107.
LS-regulator 109 107 105 variable control cylinder 102.
housing X UP-distributor block 50
P-solenoid valve Y53-A blocked.
external P-control block 130 relief valve 131 blocked.
outlet MP test point HD..
spool 135 blocked.
spool 140 blocked.
end plate 155 blocked.
Piston ratio cylinder 102 to 103 = approx. 2:1.
Regulator connection X /test point LS (LS signal) is relieved via two way check valve 145 spool 135/140
end plate 155 to the tank.
1.3. Working circuit end user - secondary relief

Lines to and from the end user - lift and tilt cylinders - are closed off. If necessary, these hydraulic system
components are protected from pressure overloads due to external influences by secondary relief valves.
Lift cylinder 170 - blocked by spool 135. Passage for pressure oil on solenoid valves Y3 and Y25 blocked. The
piston 161 of the quick drop unit 160 is kept in neutral position (no passage). Secondary relief on piston bottom
side (2505 bar) provided by pressure/suction valve 137, on piston rod side by pressure/suction valve 139. The
oil suction for piston movement is assured by the pressure/suction valve on the opposite side.
Tilt cylinder 175 - blocked by spool 140.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062
01 01 Working Hydraulic Blatt

Page 7.3.50.01
Feuille
2. Operational function of certain components remain identical based on neutral function according to par. 1.
2.1. Attachment pump 100

If a working function is actuated, the LS regulator 109 is actuated on one side with pressure in front of control
piston (HD) and on the opposite side from the user side pressure (LS - connection X2) and the spring. The
pressure ratio on the piston determines its position and thereby the pressure actuation of the control cylinder
102.
The different forces of the control cylinders 102 and 103 that result from the pressure actuation and surface
move the axial piston unit 101 constantly to the pump angle corresponding to the oil flow requirements
(determined by valve spool opening) = on demand control.
The pressure at test point HD is 15 +6 bar above the pressure on test point LS (HD-LS = p on the valve spool).
At maximum pump flow = max. opening of a spool the p is (HD-LS) 13 bar.

The pressure cut-off valve 107 is always actuated by the stand-by pressure on pump side. If the (load) pressure
increases above the adjusted spring value = 2005 bar, then the piston is displaced toward the spring. The
pressure oil supply from the LS regulator is closed off and the oil from the system is directed directly via
valve107 to the control cylinder 102. The axial piston unit 101 is displaced toward Qmin until only the amount
of oil which is required to maintain maximum operating pressure = pressure cut-off is supplied. HD=LS = p 0
bar
The oil, bleeded at every setting from the pump control into the housing, along with the existing leakage oil, is
used to flush the housing and flows via connection L filter 85 to the tank.
2.2. Servo control valve 115

The corresponding working function can be hydraulically controlled by deflecting the lever on the pilot control
unit.
The pressure build up in the control system and thus the working speed increases with the deflection angle of
the lever.
Maximum pilot control pressure = 25+3 bar,
regulated control pressure build up via regulating pistons 116 to 119 = approx. 6.5 bar max.
Tilt and lift cylinder functions can be actuated simultaneously by deflecting the lever diagonally.
2.3. Control valve block 130

Regulating range of spools 135 and 140 = approx. 4,5 - 22 bar
2.3.1 Spools 135 and 140, load check valves 136 and 141, two way check valve 145
When the spool is opened, load pressure on the user side is directed to the two way check valve 145. The
higher pressure flows via the two way check valve to the LS regulator of pump 100 (which causes pump
displacement toward Qmax).
The path Puser is closed off by the check valve136/141 until the pressure induced by the end user is built up
on the pump side (prevents load from sinking).
The control spool travel and the opening for the input/outlet for the consumer (working speed) depends on
servo pressure.
2.3.2 Pressure relief valve 131 - primary relief

The valve protects the pump and the system from damage due to problems or incorrect adjustments of the
pressure cut-off valve 107. Adjustment value 270 5 bar.
2.3.3 Solenoid valve-float function Y3/Y25
The available pressure oil flows via an orifice in the stage piston to the spring side of the piston and is blocked
there by unenergized solenoids. Pressure and spring forces keep the valve closed.
Tank pressure is applied constantly to the ring surface of the stage pistons and can lift them in case of low
pressure in the control block channel A1 - A1 (Y3) or B1 - B1 (Y25) for suction.
2.3.4 Solenoid valve Y6 - Quick drop

The oil returning from the end users via tank channel MT1 is slightly pressurized before the piston of the valve
opens to the tank connection T. Oil reaching the spring chamber via the orifice in the piston flows through the
open passage of the solenoid valve to connection T.
2.4. Quick drop unit 160 complete

Oil in channel B - B1 - B1 flows around piston 161 and cannot act against the spring. The channel to connection
P-solenoid valve Y50 is blocked on connection A.
The pressurized hydraulic oil in channel A - A1 - A1 acts on the piston 161 and flows via a restrictor hole in the
piston to its spring chamber. At the same time, the oil flow via the orifice 162 T-solenoid valve Y50-B also to
the spring chamber. The piston is pressurized on both sides with the same pressure and is kept in neutral
position by the higher force on the spring side (large surface x pressure) = passage A1 B1 remains blocked.
2.5. Lift cylinder 170 / check valves 171

When actuated with pressure, the pressure side check valves 171 open. However, the oil flow is blocked by the
second check valves, which act in the opposite direction.
When the pistons in the lift cylinders reach an end position, the previously blocked check valves are
mechanically opened = the valve poppets contact the cylinder bottom/piston rod side, the cylinder pistons are
moved further until the piston bottoms out, see group 8.8. The pressurized oil flows via the check valves to the
opposite side, the system pressure does not increase further.
2.6. Solenoid valve - Diesel engine RPM safety Y53

If the Diesel engine overspeeds due to external influences, the electronic crawler control energizes the solenoid
valve. The pressurized oil from the pump control cylinder 102 is directed via passage PB, valve block 50-T to
the tank.
The control cylinder 102 has no force, the return cylinder 103 shifts the axial piston unit 101, independent of the
demand, to maximum flow.
After the corresponding pressure build up, the increased flow is relieved to tank, via the primary pressure relief
valve 131. The resulting higher power requirement acts as a brake force and prevents further increase of Diesel
engine speed.
2.7. Oil pressure switch - return filter monitor B22

If the return filter element is not replaced in time, the back up pressure in the oil return line increases due to
filter contamination. Just before the opening of the filter bypass valve 84, the electrical contact on the switch is
closed (switching point 2.5 bar) and the indicator light on instrument panel lights up.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062

Page 7.3.50.02
Feuille
3. Operating function - Working movement - starting from neutral position according to par. 1 and identical
operating functions according to par. 2.
3.1. Blade up
3.1.1 Servo control

Control pressure build up from regulating piston 117 to housing outlet 1 b1-control valve block 130
spool 135 - displacement toward a1.
3.1.2 Working circuit

Pressurized oil moves from spool 135 to control valve block-outlet-B1 A-quick drop unit 160-A1/A1
B1-lift cylinder 170.
pressure relief valve 139.
solenoid valve Y25.
The piston/piston rod in the lift cylinders is pushed in and the blade is raised.
Oil returns from lift cylinder/piston bottom side to B1/B1-quick drop unit 160-B A1-control block 130
spool 135 tank line/connection T return filter 82 tank 80.
3.2. Blade down
3.2.1 Servo control

Control pressure build up from regulating piston 116 to housing outlet 3
pressure switch B22.
a1-control valve block 130 spool 135 -displacement toward b1.

Pressurized oil moves from spool 135 to control block-outlet A1 B-quick drop unit 160-B1/B1
A1-lift cylinder170.
relief valve 137.
one-way valve 138.
solenoid valve Y3.
The pistons/piston rods move outward on the lift cylinders, the blade is lowered. It moves downward to the
ground level through its own weight load pressure build up in oil return, force from ground level on load
pressure build up in oil supply.
Oil returns from lift cylinders / piston rod side to A1/A1-quick drop unit 160-A
B1-control block 130 spool 135 tank connection MT1 solenoid valve Y6
block connection T return filter83 tank 80.
3.3. Blade quick drop
3.3.1 Servo control

Oil pressure builds up from regulating piston 116 as for blade down", point 3.2.1 but above 24 bar
switch B22 / electr. contact closed solenoid valve Y6 and Y50 energized actuated.

Oil supply from spool 135 as for blade down", point 3.2.2, however, in quick drop unit 160 channel B1 - B1
is connected with the spring chamber of piston 161 via P B-solenoid valve Y50.
Pump 100 / spool 135 supply maximum flow to lift cylinder 170/piston bottom side.
Oil return from lift cylinder/piston rod side to A1/A1-quick drop unit 160
orifice 162 T-solenoid valve Y50-A blocked.
piston161 channel B1 - B1 A1-lift cylinder 170/piston bottom side.
160-outlet A B1-control block 130 spool 135 tank connection MT1
solenoid valve Y6 blocked
one way valve 138 oil supply A1-lift cylinder 170/piston bottom side.
Blade drops to ground level position at maximum speed.
3.4. Blade tilt - left
3.4.1 Servo control

Oil pressure builds up from regulating piston 118 to housing outlet 2 WT-distributor block 50
T- solenoid valve Y45-B distributor block 50-WB a2-control block 130
spool140 -displacement toward b2.

Oil pressure flows from spool 140 to control block-outlet A2 support shaft right 180-B
block 173-B tilt cylinder 175.
The piston and piston rod are pressed outward in the tilt cylinder, the left blade corner tilts down.
Oil returns from tilt cylinder/piston rod side to A-block 173 A-support shaft right 180
B2-control block 130 spool140 tank connection MT1 solenoid valveY6
block connection T return filter 83 tank 80.
By moving the blade, the piston/piston rod is pulled out on the left lift cylinder and pushed in on the right lift
cylinder - and therefore in the hydraulic circuit of lift cylinder, an oil flow is mechanically created (spool 140
remains closed).
Oil flow at intermediate position of lift cylinder pistons:

Right lift cylinder/piston bottom side B1-quick drop unit 160-B1
left lift cylinder/piston bottom side.
Left lift cylinder/piston rod side A1-quick drop unit 160-A1
right lift cylinder/piston rod side..
Oil flow at raised" end position:

Right lift cylinder piston - blocked in bottom side end position, check valves are opened mechanically on
one side.
Left lift cylinder piston/movement toward piston rod side B1-pressure build up
A1-quick drop unit 160-A1 B1-right lift cylinder/piston rod side check valves 171
piston bottom side-A1 B1-quick drop unit 160-B1
A1-left lift cylinder/piston bottom side.
The missing oil volume (piston rod) is drawn in through the tank line via piston/solenoid valve Y3, one-way
valve 138 or the suction function of pressure relief valve 137.
Oil flow at lowered" end position

Left lift cylinder piston - blocked in rod side end position, check valves opened mechanically on one side.
Right lift cylinder piston/movement toward piston bottom side A1-pressure build up
B1-quick drop unit 160-B1 A1-left lift cylinder/piston bottom side check valves 171
piston rod side-B1 A1-quick drop unit 160-A1
B1-right lift cylinder/piston rod side.
Excess oil (piston rod) is relieved via the pressure relief valve 137 to the tank.
The resulting pressure on the piston rod side, which occurs at immediately tilting in the opposite direction, is
limited by the pressure/suction valve 139.
Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062

Page 7.3.50.03
Feuille
3.5. Blade tilt - right
3.5.1 Servo Control

Pressure build up from regulating piston 119 to housing outlet 4 WP-distributor block 50
P-solenoid valve Y45-A distributor block 50-WA b2-control block 130
spool 140 -displacement towards a2.

Pressurized oil moves from spool 140 to control block-outlet B2 support shaft right 180-A
block 173-A tilt cylinder 175.
The piston and piston rod are pressed inward in tilt cylinder, the right blade corner tilts down.
Oil returns from tilt cylinder/piston bottom side to B-block 173 B-support shaft right 180
A2-control block 130 spool 140 tank line/connection T
return filter 83 tank 80.
By moving the blade, the piston/piston rod is pulled out on the right lift cylinder and pushed in on the left lift
cylinder - and therefore in the hydraulic circuit of the lift cylinder, an oil flow is created mechanically (spool 140
remains closed).

Left lift cylinder/piston bottom side B1-quick drop unit 160-B1
right lift cylinder/piston bottom side..
Right lift cylinder/piston rod side A1-quick drop unit 160-A1
left lift cylinder/piston rod side..
Oil flow at raised end position:

Left lift cylinder piston - blocked in bottom side end position, check valves opened mechanically on one
side.
Right lift cylinder piston/movement towards piston rod side B1-pressure build up
A1-quick drop unit 160-A1 B1-left lift cylinder/piston rod side check valves 171
A1-right lift cylinder/piston bottom side.
The missing oil volume (piston rod) is drawn in from the tank line via solenoid valve Y3, one-way valve
138 or the suction function of pressure relief valve 137.
Oil flow at lowered end position:

Right lift cylinder piston - blocked in rod side end position, check valves opened mechanically on one side.
Left lift cylinder piston/movement toward piston bottom side A1-pressure build up
B1-quick drop unit 160-B1 A1-right lift cylinder/piston bottom side end stroke valve 171
B1-left lift cylinder/piston rod side.
Excess oil (piston rod) is relieved via pressure relief valve 137 to the tank.
3.6. Blade float function

For blade float function, the solenoid valves Y3 and Y25 are energized electrically to open port" position, the
spring chamber of the piston is relieved to the tank.
If the blade is raised or lowered due to ground conditions, the pressurized oil in the lift cylinder circuit lifts the
piston and oil flows out into the tank channel.
The oil required on the opposite side of the lift cylinder pistons is drawn from the tank channel via the second
solenoid valve (piston bottom side also via the one-way valve 138 and the relief valve 137).
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062

Page 7.3.50.00
Feuille
50 distributor block 160 quick drop unit cpl.
51 orifice 161 piston / built-in valve
P from filter assembly - replenishing / TH. 162 orifice
B from parking brake / TH. 163 intermediate plate
LP to fan drive / TH.
170 lift cylinder
52 check valve 171 check valves - piston
55 accumulator 173 block
60 test center - test points 175 tilt cylinder

ND servo pressure - working hydraulic
LS load sensing pressure 180 support shaft right
HP high pressure - working hydraulic
B5 pressure switch / TH.
80 hydraulic tank B11 pressure switch - quick drop
81 shut off valve B22 pressure switch - return filter monitor
82 shut off valve
83 return filter Y3 solenoid valve - float position (bottom side)
84 bypass valve Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off
85 strainer Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off)
Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake - travel hydraulic
100 regulating pump cpl. Y25 solenoid valve - float position (rod side)
101 axial piston unit Y45 solenoid valve - special attachment
102 control cylinder (Qmin) Y50 solenoid valve - quick drop
103 return cylinder (Qmax) Y52 solenoid valve - fan drive - travel hydraulic
105 intermediate plate Y53 solenoid valve - Diesel engine - RPM safety
107 pressure cut off valve
109 load sensing regulator

116 regulating piston - lower unnamed line outlets on the hydraulic tank
117 regulating piston - lift - suction line for fan drive und replenishing
118 regulating piston - tilt left - return line travel hydraulic
119 regulating piston - tilt right - connection to hand pump - cab tilt
130 control valve block cpl.

131 pressure relief valve - primary safety parts list remarks TH. see group 6, page
6.3.50.00
136 check valve
pressure relief valve - secondary safety
137
lift cylinder bottom side
138 check valve
139
lift cylinder rod side
140 spool - tilt

141 check valve
155 end plate

2062
01 01
1.1. Servo control

solenoid valveY4.
test point ND.

cylinder 102.
The system maintains stand-by pressure of 30+5 bar.
Oil flow:
spool 135 blocked.
spool 140 blocked.

Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20636199

Page 7.3.51.01
Feuille

102.
The pressure at test point HD is 15+6 bar above the pressure on test point LS (HD-LS = p on the valve spool).

bar

unit..
the lever.

servo pressure.

pressure cut-off valve 107. Adjustment value 2705 bar.


piston to its spring chamber. At the same time, the oil flow via the orifice 162 T-solenoid valve Y23-B also to
the spring chamber. The piston is pressurized on both sides with the same pressure and is kept in neutral
position by the higher force on the spring side (large surface x pressure) = passage A1 B1 remains blocked.


the tank.
engine speed.

Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20636199

Page 7.3.51.02
Feuille
3.1. Blade up
3.1.1 Servo control


solenoid valve Y5.
3.2. Blade down
3.2.1 Servo control


relief valve 137.
one-way valve 138.
solenoid valve Y3.
3.3.1 Servo control


orifice 162 T-solenoid valve Y23-A blocked.
3.4.1 Servo control


remains closed).


one side.

Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20636199

Page 7.3.51.03
Feuille
3.5.1 Servo control


remains closed).


side.


Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20636199

Page 7.3.51.00
Feuille
P from filter assembly - replenishing / TH. 162 orifice
B from parking brake / TH. 163 intermediate plate
LP to fan drive / TH.
170 lift cylinder
52 check valve 171 check valves - piston
55 accumulator 173 block
60 test center - test points 175 tilt cylinder

ND servo pressure - working hydraulic
LS load sensing pressure 180 support shaft right
B5 pressure switch / TH.
80 hydraulic tank B18 pressure switch - return filter monitor
81 shut off valve B22 pressure switch - quick drop
82 shut off valve B26 temperature sending unit - indicator light -
83 return filter hydraulic oil overheating
84 bypass valve
85 strainer Y3 solenoid valve - float position (bottom side)
Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off
100 regulating pump cpl. Y5 solenoid valve - float position (rod side)
101 axial piston unit Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake - travel hydraulic
102 control cylinder (Qmin) Y23 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off)
103 return cylinder (Qmax) Y24 solenoid valve - quick drop
105 intermediate plate Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive - travel hydraulic
107 pressure cut off valve Y28 solenoid valve - Diesel engine - RPM safety
109 load sensing regulator Y29 solenoid valve - special attachment

116 regulating piston - lower
117 regulating piston - lift unnamed line outlets on the hydraulic tank
118 regulating piston - tilt left - suction line for fan drive and replenishing
119 regulating piston - tilt right - return line travel hydraulic
130 control valve block cpl.
131 pressure relief valve - primary safety
parts list remarks TH. see group 6, page
135 spool - lift / lower 6.3.5x.00
136 check valve
137
138 check valve
139
140 spool - tilt

141 check valve
155 end plate

liebherr
Arbeitshydraulik
Datum Edition Date
Working Hydraulic PR 752 F/N xxx- 2063 6199
01 03 Hydraulique de travail
Blatt
Page 7.3.51. 00
Feuille
1.1. Servo control

solenoid valveY4.
test point ND.

cylinder 102.
The system maintains stand-by pressure of 30+5 bar.
Oil flow:
spool 135 blocked.
spool 140 blocked.

Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200

Page 7.3.52.01
Feuille

102.
The pressure at test point HD is 15+6 bar above the pressure on test point LS (HD-LS = p on the valve spool).

bar

unit..
the lever.

servo pressure.

pressure cut-off valve 107. Adjustment value 2705 bar.


piston to its spring chamber. At the same time, the oil flow via a channel from A-A1-A1 to T-solenoid valve
Y23-B also to the spring chamber. The piston is pressurized on both sides with the same pressure and is kept
in neutral position by the higher force on the spring side (large surface x pressure) = passage A1 B1
remains blocked.


the tank.
engine speed.

Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200

Page 7.3.52.02
Feuille
3.1. Blade up
3.1.1 Servo control


solenoid valve Y5.
3.2. Blade down
3.2.1 Servo control


relief valve 137.
one-way valve 138.
solenoid valve Y3.
3.3.1 Servo control


T-solenoid valve Y23-A blocked.
3.4.1 Servo control


remains closed).


one side.

Mjfcifss!
Function
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200

Page 7.3.52.03
Feuille
3.5.1 Servo control


remains closed).


side.


Notes
Mjfcifss!
Parts list
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200

Page
Feuille
7.3.52.00
P from filter assembly - replenishing / TH. 163 intermediate plate
B from parking brake / TH.
170 lift cylinder
171 check valves - piston
52 check valve
173 block
55 accumulator
175 tilt cylinder
ND servo pressure - working hydraulic 180 support shaft right
LS load sensing pressure
B18 pressure switch - return filter monitor
80 hydraulic tank B22 pressure switch - quick drop
81 shut off valve B26 temperature sending unit - indicator light -
82 shut off valve hydraulic oil overheating
83 return filter
84 bypass valve Y3 solenoid valve - float position (bottom side)
85 strainer Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off
Y5 solenoid valve - float position (rod side)
100 regulating pump cpl. Y13 solenoid valve - parking brake - travel hydraulic
101 axial piston unit Y23 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off)
102 control cylinder (Qmin) Y24 solenoid valve - quick drop
103 return cylinder (Qmax) Y28 solenoid valve - Diesel engine - RPM safety
105 intermediate plate Y29 solenoid valve - special attachment
115 pilot (servo) control valve unnamed line outlets on the hydraulic tank
116 regulating piston - lower - suction line for fan drive and replenishing
117 regulating piston - lift - return line travel hydraulic
118 regulating piston - tilt left - connection to hand pump - cab tilt
119 regulating piston - tilt right
130 control valve block cpl. parts list remarks TH. see group 6, page
131 pressure relief valve - primary safety 6.3.5x.00

136 check valve
137
138 check valve
139
140 spool - tilt

141 check valve
155 end plate

liebherr
Arbeitshydraulik
Datum Edition Date
Working Hydraulic PR 752 F/N xxx- 6200
01 04 Hydraulique de travail
Blatt
Page 7.3.52. 00
Feuille
Important information
For pressure tests, use only glycerin filled pressure gauges with a reading accuracy of 1 % or higher. The
pressure gauge scale value should be approx. 30%, max. 100% above the test value to be checked.
Caution: To check, adjust or repair a machine, observe all safety regulations and park the machine on solid,
level ground, raise and support the machine and the attachment properly.
Never move the machine with the cab in the raised position.
Secure the danger zone.
Observe all safety guidelines, as noted in group 1.2.01.
When putting a machine into service, proceed according to the guidelines issued in the Operation Manual, check
the correct function of the indicator lights and gauges.
Carry out all checks and adjustments with the engine running at the engine speed as noted in the
Adjustment Checklist and with the machine at operating temperature.
If any defects are found during the inspection, they should be corrected immediately or as soon as possible.
For inspection and adjustments, use the corresponding Adjustment check list, page 3.5.xx.xx.
The check list sequence corresponds to system requirements, and the following procedure is tuned to this
sequence. Refer to the check list for nominal adjustment values. Observe the following instructions
accurately.
Test and adjustment
1. Visual inspections and maintenance

Before the system inspection, carry out all necessary maintenance and inspections. For checks / adjustments in
between, observe the following points.
1.1. Service fluids and filters

Check the coolant level as well as the oil level in the Diesel engine, splitter box and hydraulic tank, add fluids,
as necessary.
Check the air filter for contamination, damage, correct installation and correct type.
Add fuel if necessary. Drain water and sediments, corresponding to the machine design, from the tank and
water separator. In case of reduced performance, clean the filter screen, replace the pre- and fine filter.
In case of suspected component problems/wear, open/check the hydraulic oil filter on the affected
component.
In case of temperature problems, check the hydraulic oil cooler and fan for contamination / damage.
1.2. Mechanical components

Check the Diesel engine shut off, throttle control and potentiometer linkage for installation position, function
and wear.
Check the working hydraulic joystick, adjustment and wear of the control plate and dust covers.
Check wire harnesses for damage, chafing and defective plug connections.
Check the systems for leaks and function as well as hose routing.
Check the mounting tightness of components, such as cylinders mounts, brackets, etc., check for condition
and tightness.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page 7.5.10.01
Feuille
Check the oil temperature in the hydraulic tank with remote mounted
thermometer, see special tools, group 2.1.20.
With an external thermometer, test the temperature on several points of
the tank surface and determine the average value.
The pressure values in a hydraulic system may change due to oil
viscosity. Viscosity, however, always changes depending on oil
temperature.
For that reason, always maintain a constant operating temperature,
and monitor the temperature during the entire inspection and adjustment
procedure.
If necessary, the warm up procedure must be repeated or the oil cooler
must be partially covered during inspection and adjustment procedures.
Various procedures can be selected to obtain the operating temperature:

a) Operate the machine to bring it to operating temperature.
b) Fully actuate ripper or tilt blade and at the same time, slowly extend and retract the lift cylinder in fine
control range, with the HP pressure at approx. 105 bar. Oil is warmed up via the spool valve edge.
c) Bottom out ripper and blade lift cylinder. Oil is warmed up via the lift cylinder check valves. Heat up for
approx. 5 minutes, then wait for 1 minute.
If supported properly, the travel drive can be fully actuated at the same time.
Note: Do not actuate the "quick drop" function.

d) Fully actuate lift cylinder blade up and tilt function. Oil is warmed up via the lift cylinder check valves.
Heat up for approx. 5 minutes, then wait for 1 minute.
e) Raise the adjustment of the pressure cut off valve on the attachment pump to maximum 5 bar above the
adjustment value (nominal value) of the primary pressure relief valve and fully actuate the ripper or tilt
function. Fully actuate for approx. 1 minute, then hold for 20 seconds in neutral position, or the pressure
relief valve will be damaged due to localized overheating.
f) On PR 752, actuate the function RPM safety - Diesel engine with the test box - see group 10.4. Fully
actuate for approx. 1 minute, then hold for 20 seconds in neutral position, or the pressure relief valve will be
damaged due to localized overheating.
For procedures b, c, d, e and f, actuate the travel drive (chain run) during and at the end of the warm up
procedure, to ensure that the complete hydraulic system warms up evenly. To do so, raise or drive the machine.
3. Pressure check - fixed test points

PR 712742 - Battery compartment Test center - test points PR 752 - engine compartment, right
SP - Replenishing system pressure - TH

ND - Servo pressure - WH
HD - High pressure - WH
LA - Operating pressure fan drive - TH
(only at PR 752 and PR 712PR 742 from 5600)
(additional on test center only at PR 752 from 5072)

4. Check servo pressure
Check on test point ND with 0-40 (0-60) bar pressure gauge.
The pressure results from the SP pressure of the travel hydraulic and the flow restriction between components
and the test points (see schematic, section 6.3).
If the required pressure is not reached, check the components before (at oil flow direction) the test point
connection.
If the required pressure is reached and problems occur due to low servo pressure, check the components after
the test point connection.
Check components for flow problems (excessive restriction results in drop of pressure), as well as for leakage to
tank connection (internal leaks).
5. Stand by pressure
Check on test point HD with 0-40 bar or 0-100 bar pressure gauge.
The initial check should always be made with a 0-100 bar (or higher) pressure gauge.
To check, make sure no working function is actuated.
5.1. Adjustment of regulating pump - type A10V

If the pressure does not correspond to the nominal value, remove
the cap on the LS regulator, loosen the lock nut and turn the
adjustment screw until the nominal value is reached. To increase
pressure, turn in clockwise direction, to decrease pressure, turn
counterclockwise.
This adjustment also influences the p value (HD-LS) of LS
regulation.
After adjustment, tighten the lock nut, install the cap and recheck the
pressure setting.
5.2. Adjustment of regulating pump - type HPR"

If the pressure does not correspond to the nominal value, loosen the
lock nut on the adjustment screw for Qmin flow limitation.
If the pressure is too high, turn the screw approx. 360
counterclockwise. Remove the pressure gauge and actuate a WH-
function for a short period. Connect the pressure gauge and recheck
the stand-by pressure. Repeat as necessary until the pressure has
dropped below 30 bar.
To increase pressure to the nominal value, slowly turn the screw in
clockwise direction while constantly monitoring the pressure gauge
reading.
After adjustment, tighten the lock nut and recheck the pressure
adjustment.
Note: Stand-by pressure is easier to adjust when the pressure
difference - p HD to LD (LS function) has first been set as outlined in paragraph 7.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page 7.5.10.02
Feuille
Check on test point HD with 0-400 or 0-600 bar pressure gauge.
For control valve type - see data page 7.1, for control valve design - see section 8.6, other valves design/
function - section 8.7, pump design - section 8.3.
Control valve block - type M5
For all pressure checks/adjustments, except maximum working pressure, the adjustment of the pressure cut off
valve on the pump regulator must be raised step by step until it is ensured that the primary pressure relief valve
opens before the permissible secondary pressure. Then set the pressure cut off valve above the secondary
setting and raise the primary relief valve adjustment until the secondary relief valve to be checked, opens or
until its nominal value (including tolerance) has been exceeded by maximum 5 bar. If necessary, adjust the
checked pressure relief valve to nominal value.
Control valve block - type M7 and M6
Always adjust the primary relief valve first, then check/adjust the secondary relief valves.
For all pressure checks/adjustments, except maximum working pressure, the adjustment of the pressure cut off
valve on the pump regulator must be raised step by step until it is ensured that the valve to be checked opens or
the nominal value (including tolerance) of the primary relief valve has been exceeded by maximum 5 bar. If
necessary, adjust the checked pressure relief valve to nominal value.
After the tests, readjust the valves with raised values back to nominal value.
Valve adjustment procedure:
- Remove the lead seal. Loosen the lock nut on the adjustment screw.
- Turn the adjustment screw in clockwise direction = to increase pressure
- Turn the adjustment screw in counterclockwise direction = to decrease pressure
- Tighten the lock nut, attach new lead seal.
To check/adjust corresponding functions, bottom out function, but do not actuate suddenly.
Position of Pressure cut off valves
Regulating pumps - type A10V Regulating pumps - type HPR
Position of Pressure relief valves

Control valve block - type M5 Control valve block - type M7 and "M6"
1 Pressure relief valve - primary relief

2 Pressure relief valve - secondary relief / lift cylinder piston bottom side
3 Pressure relief valve - secondary relief / lift cylinder piston rod side = PR752 only
6.1. Test procedure on machines with control valve block - type M5 - see data page 7.1.00.01
6.1.1 Check/adjust secondary pressure, primary pressure and pressure cut off (inspection procedure)
On both lift cylinders, loosen the screws on the SAE flange from connection B
(line connections to piston bottom side) and install test plates. For required
size, see special tools, page 2.1.21.01.
Actuate the blade down function, check the pressure gauge reading. Raise
pressure setting of cut off valve and primary pressure relief valve as
described in paragraph 6.
Adjust secondary pressure relief valve to nominal value primary pressure
relief valve to nominal value pressure cut off valve to nominal value.
Remove the test plates, replace the seal rings, if necessary, tighten flanges.
If additional circuits with secondary relief valves are installed, actuate/set the
corresponding functions / pressure relief valves before resetting the primary
pressure relief valve.
6.1.2 Check/adjust only primary pressure and pressure cut off (for repairs, if necessary)
Actuate the tilt blade or ripper function, monitor the pressure gauge, raise the setting of the pressure cut off
valve as described in paragraph 6.
Adjust primary pressure relief valve to nominal value, if necessary adjust pressure cut off valve to nominal
value.
6.1.3 Check/adjust only pressure cut off (for repairs, if necessary)

Actuate the tilt blade or ripper function, monitor the pressure gauge, adjust the pressure cut off valve to
nominal value.
6.2. Test procedure on machines with control valve block - type M7 and M6 - see data page 7.1.00.01
6.2.1 Check/adjust primary pressure (inspection procedure)

Actuate the tilt blade function or additional attachments without secondary relief, monitor the pressure gauge.
Raise the setting of the pressure cut off valve as described in paragraph 6.
Adjust primary pressure relief valve to nominal value, if necessary leave the pressure cut off valve
adjustment for secondary pressure check.
6.2.2 Check/adjust secondary pressure and pressure cut off (inspection procedure)
Adjustment of pressure cut off valve still raised from primary pressure check procedure.
PR 712 to PR 742 (do not use for machine type PR 752)
Lightly actuate the blade down function until the lift cylinder pistons bottom out, then continue to deflect the
joystick lever past the pressure point to quick drop function and watch the pressure gauge.
Set the secondary pressure relief valve to nominal value, if necessary set the pressure cut off valve to
nominal value.
PR 752
On both lift cylinders, loosen the screws on the SAE flange - connection A
and B and install test plates. For size, see special tools, page 2.1.21.01.
Actuate the blade down function and check the pressure setting of the
secondary pressure relief valve, set to nominal value, if necessary.
Actuate the blade up function and check the setting of the secondary
pressure relief valve on the pressure gauge, set to nominal value if
necessary set the pressure cut off valve to nominal value.
If additional circuits with secondary valves are installed, actuate/set the
corresponding functions/pressure relief valves before resetting the pressure
cut off valve.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page 7.5.10.03
Feuille
6.2.3 Check/adjust only pressure cut off (for repairs, if necessary)
Actuate a function as in paragraph 6.2.1, monitor the pressure gauge, if necessary, set the pressure cut off
valve to nominal value.
7. Pressure difference - p "HD" to "LD(LS)" ("high" pressure to "load" pressure/load sensing)

Check at test point HD and LD (LS) with a 0-100 bar and/or 0-250 bar pressure gauge.
The initial test should always be performed with a 0-250 bar (or higher) pressure gauge, to determine the more
exact value, use a 0-100 bar pressure gauge.
Place the blade in horizontal position and raise it all the way. Deflect the joystick about half way in blade up"
direction (=fine control range) and hold it in this position. Read the pressure values of test points HD and LD
(LS) and compare.
The pressure difference HD to LD(LS)=p must decrease with corresponding lever movement from the upper
tolerance limit down to 15 bar.
When spools are fully opened (= almost full lever deflection), p must decrease abruptly below 13 bar. If this
range is not reached, then the pump is not regulating at maximum flow.
This test should be performed with all working movements. Determine the pressure during the working
movement on test point HD and LD (LS) at the same time. If the p 13 bar range is not reached, then the pump
is not regulating at maximum flow.
Possible causes for this problem are, for example: LS-regulator is stuck, axial piston unit of the pump or spool is
not moved sufficiently, extreme pump wear, etc.
7.1. Adjustment of regulating pump - type A10V

The regulating function pressure difference is part of the stand by pressure adjustment and cannot be
adjusted separately. If there are problems, check the regulator function, for example: easy movement of the
piston.
7.2. Adjustment of regulating pump - type HPR

If the pressure difference in the fine control range does not match the
nominal value, release the lock nut from the adjustment screw on the
LS regulator. Turn the screw to approx. 90, depending on the
deviation, and check the pressure difference again. Repeat the
procedure until the nominal value is reached.
Turn in clockwise direction to increase p /
to raise HD pressure
Turn in counterclockwise direction to decrease p /
to decrease HD pressure
After the adjustment, tighten the lock nut and recheck.
If p is not 13 bar, with spool fully open, see paragraph 7.
8. Check accumulator (emergency function)

Let the Diesel engine run at high speed for a few minutes, raise the blade, turn the Diesel engine off. Leave the
safety lever and the starter switch in operating position or return it to position 1.
Actuate the blade down function a short distance several times - the blade must go down step by step (at least
4 times), or actuate the blade until the blade has dropped to the ground.
If this requirement is not performed, check system and accumulator, renew defect parts.
9. Check quick drop function
Normally, the quick drop function must only be checked in case of problems and therefore, it is not listed on the
adjustment check list.
If the function is actuated before the joystick reaches the pressure point, then the actuating point of the pressure
switch is set too lowcheck/adjust function (replace switch).
If the function does not actuate despite a fully deflected joystick, then the actuating point of pressure switch is set
too high, the current supply from the switch to the solenoid valve is interrupted, or the solenoid valve is defective
check electrical system / solenoid valve, check/adjust pressure switch function.
For hydraulic functions, see group 7.3, for valve design, group 8.7, electrical system, group 9.
9.1. Check/adjust function of pressure switch

Disconnect the oil pressure switch on connection 3 of the pilot control
valve (joystick) and install a test fitting for a pressure gauge. Connect
a 0-40 bar pressure gauge.
Move the control lever towards blade down" to the pressure point.
Watch the pressure gauge reading and continue to move the joystick
past the pressure point. When the pressure point is passed, the
pressure must star to increase.
If the pressure does not increase or the readings are outside the norm
values, check the pilot control / servo pressure, correct problem.
On the switch, remove the color seal on the adjustment screw, remove
the pressure gauge connection, install the switch and connect it with
the currented wire.
Check the power supply with a test lamp or voltage meter to determine
the actuating point on the second electrical contact of the switch. Actuating point = voltage increase 0 24V.
Deflect the joystick in blade down" direction, to the actuating point. The switch should not actuate, if necessary,
raise the actuating point.
Continue to deflect the joystick past the pressure point. The switch must actuate, otherwise lower the actuating
point.
Turn the adjustment screw on the switch in clockwise direction to raise the actuating point, turn it in
counterclockwise direction to lower the actuating point.
If the required actuating point cannot be reached, replace the switch.
Test and Adjustment
Datum Edition Date

Page 7.5.10.04
Feuille
Sub Group Index
Variable pump travel hydraulic 8.1
Intermediate flange 8.1.01
PR 712 F/N xxx-0103
PR 722 F/N xxx-0103
PR 732 F/N xxx-2003
Variable pump 8.1.10

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Variable pump
PR 742(B) F/N xxx-20015233 8.1.40
Variable pump
PR 742B F/N xxx-5234 8.1.41
Variable pump
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 8.1.50
Variable motor travel hydraulic 8.2

Variable motor 8.2.10
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0103
Variable motor 8.2.30

PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
PR 742(B) F/N xxx-2003
Variable motor
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 8.2.50
Variable flow pump working hydraulic 8.3

Variable flow pump A10V 8.3.10
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 (fan drive)
Variable flow pump HPR 8.3.40

PR 742B F/N xxx-20012500
PR 752 F/N xxx-2001
Constant pumps and motors 8.4

Gear pump travel hydraulic 8.4.01
Axial piston - constant motor fan drive 8.4.02

PR 732 F/N xxx-5600
PR 742 F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date
01 04 Hydraulic components Blatt

Page
Feuille
8.0.00.01
Pilot control valve working hydraulic 8.5
Pilot control valve 2-way 8.5.03

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
PR 742(B) F/N xxx-20016199

PR 752 F/N xxx-2001
Control valve block 8.6
PR 712 F/N xxx-01030384 8.6.10

PR 722 F/N xxx-01030563
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032500
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-03853084 8.6.11

PR 722(B) F/N xxx-05643175
PR 732B F/N xxx-25013206
PR 742B F/N xxx-25013095
PR 712B F/N xxx-3085 8.6.12

PR 752 F/N xxx-20022077 8.6.50
PR 752 F/N xxx-2078 8.6.51
Valves 8.7
Overview 8.7.00
Pressure valves 8.7.01
Directional valves 8.7.02
Shut off valves 8.7.03
Other valves 8.7.04
Hydraulic cylinder 8.8

Intermediate flange variable pump BPV - regulating pump A10V
1 variable pump
1.1 drive shaft
1.2 tapered roller bearing

2.1 drive shaft
3 intermediate flange
4 centering flange
5 connector sleeve
6 hex head screw
7 O-ring
8 washer
9 hex head nut
11 stud
12 washer
13 hex head nut
14 O-ring
15 O-ring
16 O-ring
Intermediate flange variable pump BPV - constant pump
1.1st version: PR 712 F/Nxxx-0103 , PR 722 F/N xxx-0103 , PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 xxxx,
RL 22 F/N xxx-1001
1 variable pump
1.1 drive shaft
2 gear pump - replenishing

2.1 input shaft
4 connector sleeve
5 spring
6 stud
7 washer
8 hex head nut
9 O-ring
10 O-ring
12 washer

PR 712 F/N xxx-0103
Mjfcifss! PR 722 F/N xxx-0103
Variable pumps PR 732 F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date
RL (4)22 F/N xxx-1001
Intermediate flange Blatt
01 04 Travel hydraulic Page
Feuille 8.1.01.01
Intermediate flange Variable pump BPV - constant pump
2.2nd version: PR 732 F/N xxx-xxxx 7149
1 variable pump
1.1 drive shaft

2.1 input shaft
4 O-ring
5 O-ring
6 stud
7 washer
8 hex head nut
9 connector sleeve
10 lock ring
11 washer
12 spring
13 washer
3.3rd version: PR 732B F/N xxx-7150
1 variable pump
1.1 drive shaft

2.1 input shaft
4 O-ring
5 O-ring
6 stud
7 washer
8 hex head nut
9 connector sleeve
10 lock ring
11 sleeve
12 spring
13 washer
Notes

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
Mjfcifss! PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.10.01
1 housing
1.1 main housing for pumps with external SP-pressure limitation:
1.2 cover with electro-hydr. remote control
1.2.1 cover with remote control 44/1 intake restrictor 1,0 mm
setscrew - end stop 47 O-ring
1.2.2 cover with remote control
eccentric pin - end stop 51 comp. pressure relief valve - high pressure with
1.3 cover - mech. zero position replenishing function
52 plug
2 control plate mounting 53 O-ring
3 flange 54 valve housing
4 O-ring 55 O-ring
56 valve block
5 swash plate
6 needle bearing - segment 59 cylinder pin
7 retainer - guide
8 flange bolt 60 spring cup
9 control cylinder 61 spring
10 washer 62 spring cup
11 control piston 63 roll pin
12 seal 64 bracket
13 retainer plate 65 eccentric pin
14 spacer 66 self sealing lock nut
15 spacers 67 roll pin
16 socket head screws 68 thrust washer
69 roll pin
18 pilot valve, complete 70 hex head screw
71 socket head screws
20 ball end pin
21 ball pin 72 eccentric pin - hydr. zero position
22 spring 73 O-ring
23 spacer pin 74 hex nut
24 O-ring 75 O-ring
76 lever
25 drive shaft 77 piston - cylinder
26 race 78 spring cup
27 cover 79 O-ring
28 socket head screws 80 spring housing
29 radial shaft seal 81 nut
30 tapered roller bearing 82 setscrew - end stop
31 spacers 83 self sealing lock nut
32 pin 84 regulating spring
85 regulating spring
33 cylinder barrel
34 piston with glide shoe 86 spring housing
35 return plate 87 spring cup
36 control plate 88 pressure relief valve
37 support ring 90 proportional solenoid
38 spring 91 O-ring
39 washer (retainer)
40 shim 92 end stop
41 lock ring 93 plug
42 tapered roller bearing 94 hex nut
95 eccentric pin
for pumps with internal SP-pressure limitation: 96 lock ring
44 pressure relief valve - replenishing 100 socket head screws

45 plug 101 plug with O-ring
46 adjustment shims
47 O-ring
48 spring
49 valve housing
50 piston
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.10.02
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.10.03
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.10.04
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742(B) F/N xxx-2001 5233
RL 42B F/N 683-2001
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.40.01
1 housing
1.1 main housing 70 spring cup
1.2 bearing housing 71 spring
1.3 regulator housing with remote control 72 pin
73 pilot piston
2 control plate mounting
74 valve sleeve
3 O-ring
75 spring
4 socket head screw
76 plug
5 drive shaft
80 plug
6 race
81 ball / socket
7 snap ring
82 lever
8 radial shaft seal
83 pin with lock plate
9 snap ring
84 guide pin
10 tapered roller bearing
11 spacer 85 proportional solenoid
12 shims 86 regulation valve
13 tapered roller bearing 87 O-ring
88 plug
15 swash plate
89 plug
16 needle bearing- segment
17 cyl. pin - bearing shell lock 90 O-ring
18 bracket - bearing guide 91 grooved nut
19 stud 92 spring
20 pin 93 spring cup
21 plug - pin lock 94 threaded pin
22 return plate 95 collar nut
23 piston with glide shoe 96 spring housing
24 cylinder barrel complete 97 threaded pin with nut
25 return ball 98 spring cup
26 shims 99 piston - cylinder
27 pin
101 O-ring
28 support ring
102 plug
29 spring
103 dowel pin
30 support ring
104 plug
31 snap ring
106 segment
32 control plate
107 hex head screw with washer
33 pin
110 valve block outlet
36 pin
112 replenishing valve
37 dowel pin
113 plug
38 dowel pin
114 stud
39 O-ring
115 O-ring
40 O-ring
116 O-ring
117 nozzle
45 cover - control cylinder 118 O-ring
46 socket head screw 119 plug
47 plug
120 pressure relief valve - HP
48 nozzle
121 valve housing
49 O-ring
122 threaded pin - pressure adjustment
50 O-ring
123 collar nut
51 O-ring
124 O-ring
55 control cylinder 125 O-ring
56 cylinder bushing
135 plug
57 piston
136 O-ring
58 piston seal ring
59 piston rod with ball socket 138 plug
60 spring cup
140 pressure line
61 ball pin 141 tank line
62 hex head nut 142 to cylinder
63 spring
64 spring F pressure connection - supply side
65 plug I connection - tank return side
66 valve sleeve stop X pressure connection - control pressure
68 spring
69 snap ring
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742(B) F/N xxx-2001 5233
RL 42B F/N 683-2001
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.40.02
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742(B) F/N xxx-2001 5233
RL 42B F/N 683-2001
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.40.03
Notes
Notes: 1) Following parts are just for its designated installation position - do not interchange them:
2 pcs. pos. 42 - spacer
2 pcs. pos. 46 - tube guide and
2 pcs. pos. 48 - shim
2) Following parts are suited to the given tolerances of the parts:

pos. 17 - shim
pos. 21 - shim
pos. 29 - shim
pos. 72 - spring cap
pos. 87 - shim (with pos. 88 - snap ring)
3) Remark when exchanging: heat the race pos. 11 to maximum 150C and install with Loctite 648 or
equivalent.
install radial shaft seal pos. 12 with Loctite 648 or equivalent and fill
space between sealing lips with appr. 50% grease.
4) The hydraulic zero-position of the pump is given by the position of the valve housing pos. 80.
Preadjustment (as necessary): Distance between front area valve housing pos. 80 to housing pos. 60
= 14,75 mm
5) Tightening torque for pressure relief valve Pos. 50 = 170 Nm
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.41.01
1 housing
2 snap ring 60 housing with bushings - pump control
3 O-ring 61 O-ring
4 plug 62 O-ring
5 control plate mounting 64 sleeve
6 plug 65 plug
7 O-ring 66 plug
8 socket head screw 68 plug
9 plug (M14x1,5 mm) with O-ring
70 piston
10 drive shaft 71 end stop screw
11 race 72 spring cup*
12 radial shaft seal 73 spring
13 tapered roller bearing 74 spring cup
14 support ring 75 spring housing
15 spring 76 O-ring
16 washer (retainer) 77 nut
17 shim 78 setscrew - end stop
18 snap ring 79 self sealing lock nut
19 support ring
20 tapered roller bearing 80 valve housing
21 shim 81 O-ring
82 nut
25 swash plate 83 spring
26 bearing race 84 pilot piston
27 pin
28 retainer plate 85 support
29 shim 86 lever
30 sleeve 87 shim
31 socket head screw 88 snap ring
32 piston with glide shoe 89 socket head screw
33 return plate 90 sleeve
34 cylinder barrel complete
91 pressure regulating valve - cartridge
35 control plate (ccw)
36 pin 95 proportional solenoid
96 O-ring
40 control piston
41 seal ring 98 plug
42 spacer* 99 O-ring
43 washer
44 spring
45 spring cup
46 tube guide*
47 O-ring with support ring
48 shim* F connection to filter (control pressure/replenishing)
L connection - housing to tank
50 pressure relief valve complete with replenishing MP test point - to P/S
function P(S) connection - high pressure line
51 O-ring S(P) connection - high pressure line
52 valve support T connection / housing (bleeding)
53 spring U connection / housing
54 guiding plate (fixed onto pos. 57) Y servo control - flow in direction S(P)
55 snap ring (Y) test point servo pressure at Y
56 valve piston (one way valve) Z servo control - flow in direction P(S)
57 valve piston (pressure relief valve) (Z) test point servo pressure at Z
58 spring
59 O-ring
* = observe remarks on the front page accurately

Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.41.02
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.41.03
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
RL 52 F/N 739-2001
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.50.01
1 housing
2 cover 50 cover with cylinder pins -
3 socket head screw electro-hydr. remote control
4 radial shaft seal 51 piston - servo control
52 spring cup
5 drive shaft 53 regulating spring
6 race 54 regulating spring
7 tapered roller bearing 55 spring housing
8 shim 56 O-ring
57 nut
9 pin with O-ring 58 setscrew - end stop
59 self sealing lock nut
10 swash plate 60 lever
11 needle bearing - segment 61 eccentric pin w. O-ring and counter nut (hydr. zero)
12 retainer - bearing guide 62 pressure regulating valve - cartridge
13 bolt with washer and cotter 63 proportional solenoid
(bolt fixed with roll pin ) 64 O-ring
14 flange bolt 65 shuttle valve block
15 control piston 66 valve seat
16 seal ring 67 ball
17 retainer plate 68 hollow screw with O-ring
18 spacer
19 shims 70 pilot valve complete (housing, spring, piston)
72 flange
22 spacer 74 O-ring
23 ball end pin 75 check valve housing - replenishing

24 ball pin 76 piston
25 spring 77 spring
26 spacer pin 78 spring retainer
27 O-ring with steel ring 79 retainer ring
28 O-ring
80 pressure relief valve housing
30 cylinder barrel - complete 81 O-ring
31 piston with glide shoe 82 spring retainer
32 return plate 83 shims
33 control plate (ccw) 84 spring
34 support ring 85 valve socket
35 spring 86 valve body
36 washer (retainer) 87 orifice 2,2 mm
37 shim
38 lock ring 90 pressure relief valve housing - high pressure
92 shims
40 control plate mounting 93 spring retainer
41 O-ring 94 spring
42 plug 95 spring
43 plug 96 spring retainer
97 ring
44 cover with cylinder pins - mech. zero position 98 O-ring
45 bar 99 valve cartridge with poppet and closing ball
46 eccentric pin with self sealing lock nut
47 spring cup with spring guide 101 hex head screw
48 spring 102 hex head screw
49 spring cup with roll pins
105 coupling sleeve
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
RL 52 F/N 739-2001
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.50.02
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
RL 52 F/N 739-2001
Variable pump Blatt
Feuille
8.1.50.03
Notes

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
Datum Edition Date

LR 622 F/N 392-2030
RL(4)22 F/N xxx-1001
Variable motor Blatt
Feuille
8.2.10.01
1 housing complete
1.1 main housing
1.2 housing - control plate mounting 50 proportional solenoid
1.3 housing - remote control 51 adjustment screw with nut
1.4 cover 52 spring with washer
53 O-ring
2 drive shaft bearing unit 54 bushing
2.1 drive shaft
2.2 flange 55 plug
2.3 socket head screw
2.4 spacer 60 pressure relief valve (10 bar)
2.5 O-ring 61 valve housing
2.6 radial shaft seal ring 62 O-ring
2.7 nut 63 plug
2.8 tapered roller bearing 64 shim
2.9 bushing 65 spring
2.10 socket head screw with washer 66 ball
2.11 tapered roller bearing 67 orifice
4 retainer plate 70 2/7 - directional valve with pressure reducing

5 socket head screw valves - valve version I and II
71 valve housing
6 piston with rod / retainer ring 72 plug - version I
73 spring
7 cylinder bushing 74 piston (pressure reducing valve)
8 cylinder barrel 75 plug
9 center pin 76 O-ring - version II
10 lock ring 77 lock ring - version II
11 spring 78 spring cup - version II
12 retainer with spacers
13 lock ring 80 HD - channel
81 HD - channel
15 control plate 82 channel - control pressure
16 bushing 83 channel - piston bottom side
84 channel - spring chamber
20 sensor (RPM) 85 channel - flushing
21 O-ring 86 channel - tank
25 control piston 87 set screw - plug

26 pin
27 threaded pin
28 spring
29 spring cup
30 pilot piston
31 spring cup
32 lock ring
33 spring
34 spring cup with washer
35 O-ring
36 cylinder pin
37 cylinder pin

39 O-ring
40 set screw
42 O-ring
45 O-ring
46 O-ring
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
Datum Edition Date

LR 622 F/N 392-2030
RL(4)22 F/N xxx-1001
Feuille
8.2.10.02
Valve Version II
Valve Version I

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
Datum Edition Date

LR 622 F/N 392-2030
RL(4)22 F/N xxx-1001
Feuille
8.2.10.03
Notes

PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date

LR 632 F/N 393-2002
RL 42B F/N 683-3002
Feuille
8.2.30.01
1 housing complete
1.1 main housing 30 pilot piston
1.2 housing - control plate mounting 31 spring cup
1.3 housing - remote control 32 lock ring
1.4 cover 33 spring
34 spring cup with washer
2 drive shaft bearing BMV 186 - PR 732(B)/LR 632
2.1 drive shaft 35 O-ring
2.2 flange
2.3 socket head screw 36 cylinder pin
2.4 spacer 37 cylinder pin
2.5 O-ring
2.6 radial shaft seal ring 38 socket head screw
2.7 nut 39 O-ring
2.8 tapered roller bearing 40 set screw
2.9 bushing 41 self sealing lock nut
2.10 socket head screw with washer 42 O-ring
45 O-ring
3 drive shaft bearing BMV 260 - PR 742(B)/RL 42B
3.1 drive shaft 50 proportional solenoid
3.2 flange 51 adjustment screw with nut
3.3 socket head screw 52 spring with washer
3.4 spacers 53 O-ring
3.5 spacer 54 bushing
3.6 O-ring
3.7 radial shaft seal ring 55 plug
3.8 race
3.9 straight roller bearing 60 pressure relief valve (10 bar)
3.10 ring 61 valve housing
3.11 spacer 62 O-ring
3.12 bushing 63 plug
3.13 comb. axial - radial straight roller bearing 64 shim
3.14 socket head screw with seal ring 65 spring
3.15 ball cup - center pin 66 ball
67 orifice
4 retainer plate
5 socket head screw 70 2/7 - directional valve w. pressure reducing valves
71 valve housing
6 piston with rod / retainer ring 72 lock ring
6.1 piston with rod and ball cup 73 spring cup
74 spring
7 cylinder bushing 75 piston (pressure reducing valve)
8 cylinder barrel 76 plug
9 center pin 77 O-ring
10 lock ring
11 spring
12 retainer with spacers 80 HD - channel
13 lock ring 81 HD - channel
82 channel - control pressure
15 control plate 83 channel - piston bottom side
16 bushing 84 channel - spring chamber
85 channel - flushing
20 sensor (RPM) 86 channel - tank
21 O-ring
22 spacers (only PR 742, RL 42B) 87 set screw - plug
25 control piston
26 pin
27 threaded pin
28 spring
29 spring cup
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date

LR 632 F/N 393-2002
RL 42B F/N 683-3002
Feuille
8.2.30.02
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2007
RL 52 F/N 739-2001
Feuille
8.2.50.01
1 housing - drive unit
2 drive shaft 71 plug
3 retainer plate 72 protecting cap
4 socket head screw 73 socket head screw
5 nut
7 ring 80 cover
8 spacer 81 O-ring
10 set and counter screw 83 plug
11 snap ring 84 socket head screw
85 pressure relief valve - flushing
15 flange 86 O-ring
16 radial shaft seal 87 orifice
17 socket head screw with seal ring
18 O-ring 90 way valve
19 spacer 91 valve housing
92 valve piston
20 cylinder barrel 93 ring
21 cylinder bushing 94 spring
22 piston with connecting rod 95 plug
23 retainer ring 96 O-ring
25 center pin
26 snap ring
27 spring
28 shims
29 ring 104 connection to housing/tank
105 connection to spring housing
31 set screw setting in direction Qmax
32 self sealing lock nut 106 connection to piston bottom side
33 plug - connection L setting in direction Qmin
36 set pin
37 set pin
M high pressure connection M1/M2
P connection - pressure oil for setting
40 control plate mounting (from replenishing circuit)
41 control plate U connection for return flow to tank
42 bushing X connection - servo pressure
43 piston (from prop. solenoid/valve at pump)
44 pin Y connection - open to housing
45 set screw
50 remote control complete

51 spring
52 spring cup
53 spring
54 spring cup
55 set screw
57 plug
58 O-ring
59 pilot piston
60 bushing
61 ring
62 snap ring
63 cover
64 screw
65 plug with seal ring
67 O-ring
68 O-ring
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2007
RL 52 F/N 739-2001
Feuille
8.2.50.02
Notes
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Variable flow pump A10V Blatt
01 02 Working hydraulic / fan drive Page
Feuille
8.3.10.01
1 housing complete in addition from model 100 on
2 main housing 90 stand by valve
3 connector plate 91 piston
4 O-ring 92 spring
5 O-ring 93 coupling with seal ring
6 socket head screw 94 restrictor
95 plug
10 drive shaft
96 plug
11 snap ring
97 plug
12 radial shaft seal
98 O-ring
14 shim regulator complete - model 140
15 tapered roller bearing 100 housing - load sensing regulator
16 spacer 101 adjustment screw
18 coupling - leak oil return 102 lock nut
103 coupling
20 swash plate 104 O-ring
21 bearing race 105 support ring
25 cylinder barrel 106 O-ring
26 piston with glide shoe 107 snap ring
27 retainer plate 108 thrust washer
28 return ball 109 snap ring
29 pressure pin 110 spring
30 support ring 111 spring
31 spring 112 spring retainer
32 support ring 113 pilot piston
33 snap ring 114 plug
115 O-ring
35 control plate 116 orifice
36 set pin 117 plug-in orifice with O-ring
41 guide piston 120 housing - pressure cut off valve
42 ball socket with glide shoe 121 adjustment screw
45 return piston 122 lock nut
46 return spring 123 coupling
47 piston guide 124 O-ring
48 ball socket with glide shoe 125 support ring
126 O-ring
regulator - up to model 100 127 snap ring
50 housing with LS-regulator and pressure cut off 128 thrust washer
51 socket head screw 129 snap ring
52 plug 130 spring
53 O-ring 131 spring
132 spring retainer
133 pilot piston
56 cap nut with seal ring
134 plug
57 hex nut with seal ring
135 O-ring
58 adjustment screw
136 orifice
59 spring housing
137 plug-in orifice with O-ring
60 thrust washer
138 O-ring
61 O-ring
62 spring 140 housing - stand by valve
63 spring retainer 141 piston
64 pilot piston 142 spring
65 plug 143 plug
144 coupling
70 load sensing- regulator
145 seal ring
71 cap nut with seal ring
146 plug
72 hex nut with seal ring
147 restrictor
73 adjustment screw
148 O-ring
74 spring housing
149 plug
75 thrust washer
76 O-ring 150 intermediate plate only at RL 42B/RL 52 installed
77 spring 151 plug / coupling
78 spring 152 O-ring
79 spring retainer
155 stud
80 pilot piston
156 socket cap nut
81 plug
P pressure channel from pump outlet
85 plug
PST pressure channel to pump control
86 restrictor
T/T1 tank line
87 plug
X/X1 supply line - load pressure
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Feuille
8.3.10.02
Regulator - up to model 100 with stand by valve
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Feuille
8.3.10.03
Regulator - model 140 with intermediate plate
Proportional - pressure relief regulator
(Fan Drive PR 752 F/N xxx-5600)
1 Solenoid coil - proportional solenoid Y45 25 spring housing

2 nut 26 O-ring
3 Solenoid anchor 27 setscrew
4 O-ring 28 O-ring with support ring
5 poppet 29 hex nut
30 washer
7 piston guide 31 spring
8 O-ring 32 spring
9 O-ring with support ring 33 spring cup
10 piston
35 plug
11 spring cup 36 seal
12 spring
13 spring cup 38 O-ring
39 socket head screws
15 housing
16 piston 40 orifice
17 plug 41 O-ring
18 hex nut
19 cover P pressure channel from pump outlet
PST pressure channel to pump control
20 pilot piston T tank line
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Feuille
8.3.10.04
Notes
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742B F/N xxx-2001 2500
PR 752 F/N xxx-2001
Variable flow pump HPR Blatt
01 01 Working hydraulic Page
Feuille
8.3.40.01
1 housing
1.1 main housing
1.2 control plate mounting 50 piston, complete - hydr. return control to Qmax
51 bushing
2 drive shaft 52 adjustment screw / Qmin / stand- by pressure)
3 race 53 self sealing lock nut
4 shaft seal
5 snap ring 55 plug
6 tapered roller bearing 56 plug
8 shims valve block with load sensing regulator and
60
9 spacer ring pressure cut off valve
10 bearing race 62 plug
10.1 swash plate (sliding) bearing 63 O-ring
11 swash plate 64 spring washers
12 piston with glide shoe 65 valve sleeve
13 return ball 66 pilot piston
14 retainer plate 67 spring
15 pressure pin 68 spring
16 support ring 69 O-ring
17 spring 70 spring housing
18 support ring 71 spring washer
19 snap ring 72 adjustment screw
20 cylinder barrel 73 self sealing lock nut
25 control plate 75 pressure cut off valve

26 dowel pin 76 spring housing
77 O-ring
28 cover 78 plug with seal ring
29 allen head screw 79 support piston
80 pilot piston
30 rod with ball socket - mechanical Qmax return 81 spring washer
31 snap ring 82 spring
32 spring retainer 83 spring washer
33 spring 84 adjustment screw
34 spring 85 self sealing lock nut
35 dowel pin
36 press fit pin 87 allen head screw
37 dowel pin 88 O-ring
38 allen head screw
90 intermediate plate
40 two piece retainer plate 91 plug
41 shim 92 allen head screw
42 allen head screw 93 O-ring
45 piston, complete - hydr. Qmin control

46 bushing LS pressure connection - LS(load sensing)
47 self sealing lock nut L connection - tank return
48 adjustment screw M test connection - LS signal
X test connection - control pressure
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742B F/N xxx-2001 2500
PR 752 F/N xxx-2001
Feuille
8.3.40.02
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 742B F/N xxx-2001 2500
PR 752 F/N xxx-2001
Feuille
8.3.40.03
1 Input flange 9 Form gasket
2 Pump housing 10 Support gasket
3 End cover 11 Spacer
4 Input shaft / gear 12 Dowel pin
5 Driven gear 13 Hex head screw
6 Bushing 14 Snap ring
7 Bushing 15 Shaft seal
8 O-ring 16 Roll pin
Symbolic drawer LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Gear pump Blatt
Feuille 8.4.01.01
1 housing
2 radial shaft seal ring 30 connector plate
3 snap ring 31 cylinder pin
4 cylinder pin 32 O-ring
5 fixed swash plate 33 socket head screw
10 drive shaft 35 plug

11 adjusting spring 36 valve sleeve
12 tapered roller bearing 37 valve poppet with seal
13 tapered roller bearing 38 spring
14 shim 39 valve poppet guide
20 cylinder barrel
21 piston with glide shoe A connection return line
22 return plate B connection pressure line
23 return ball L connection leak oil line
24 pin
25 support ring
26 spring (anticlockwise revolving)
27 lock ring
28 divider plate
Mjfcifss! LR 632(B) F/N xxx-5600

Axial piston - constant motor PR 732 F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 F/N xxx-5600
Fan drive Blatt

Feuille 8.4.02.01
Design
The servo control valve, located on the right hand side in the cab is used to control the working hydraulic - basic
functions.
The joystick, movable in all directions, due to a ball bearing, controls simultaneously up to two of the four
pressure relief valves which are integrated in the housing via an actuating disk.
On the upper end of the joystick handle is a micro switch, which can actuate an additional function electrically.
The mechanical parts on the outside of the housing are protected from contamination, dirt and dust by a dust
cover, however, they should still be maintained and checked regularly.
Function
1. Neutral position
The return springs 42 keep the actuating disk 15 and lever 11 in neutral position via
plunger 35.
The pressurized oil in connection P is blocked by regulating pistons 45. The control lines
P-St. 1 to 4 are relieved via bores in regulating piston and connection T to the tank.
2. Operating positions
2.1. Lever - partially deflected - Regulating range
The actuating disk 15 pushes plunger 35 against return spring 42. At the same time,
regulating piston 45 is moved over spring 46. The connection control line P-St to T-tank
is closed and line P to P-St is opened.
The resulting pressure in line P-St. on the front of regulating piston 45 moves it against
spring 46 until spring force and hydraulic force = pressure are equalized. The connecting
bore is restricted to a point where only leak oil is lost and the P-St. pressure remains
constant.
Therefore, the resulting pressure in the control line depends on the lever deflection.
Design, Function LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Pilot Control Valve 4-way Blatt
01 04 Working Hydraulic Page
Feuille 8.5.01.01
If the lever deflection is reduced, the return spring 42 pushes plunger 35 in direction of
neutral position. Due to the hydraulic force in P-St., the regulating piston 25 follows the
movement of the plunger. P is closed off, T is opened and pressurized oil from P-St flows
off.
Due to the pressure reduction in P-St, the spring force returns regulating piston 45 to its
pressure holding position.
2.2. Lever - fully deflected
Actuating disk 15 is at stop, plunger 35 is pushed down all the way.
The resulting pressure in P-St pushes regulating piston 45 against regulating spring until it
hits plunger 35. The connection P to P-St remains open.
In P-St, the same pressure builds up as in P = maximum control pressure.
2.3. Added function for control line 3 (Diagram C in overall view)
Screw 51 of plunger 50 is designed like a plate. At sufficient movement of plunger via the actuating plate 15, the
screw 51 pushes against spring 54 and creates a pressure point, which can be easily felt on the lever.
This pressure point signals the operator that he has reached a certain pressure value in the control line, which
actuates an oil pressure switch in the system.
2.4. Added function - micro switch
Independent from the lever deflection, an additional function (for example: solenoid valve) can be selected
electrically via the micro switch 4 on the joystick handle.
A. Adjustment
1. Zero position
Loosen dust cover and push towards handle.
Check for easy movement, clean all parts,
loosen nut 12 and connector 13.
Caution: Do not stretch or pull electrical cable!
Hold lever 11 in center position and turn actuating disk 15 until it touches all four plungers without any play.
However, the plungers may not be pushed .
Hold actuating disk 12 with connector piece 10 .
Watch out for electrical cable!
Turn lever 11 to correct position and hold in place with nut 12. Lightly lubricate all parts, reinstall dust cover as
shown in overall view.
2. Dead travel on lever
Check zero position, adjust if necessary, see paragraph 1. Tilt up cab and
secure. Install 0-25 bar pressure gauge with L-fitting and mini test connection
step-by-step into control lines 1 to 4.
Slowly move lever 11 into required direction until a pressure of ca. 6,5 bar is
shown on pressure gauge. Hold lever and determine distance.
Should be: A lever distance of max. 15 mm equals a plunger stroke of 0,8 - 1
mm to actuation point.
If this distance is higher, remove operational parts and pull plunger with guide
from housing. See section on Repairs in these guidelines.
Insert required number of shims, Id. No. 4980 679 (6,012,00,2 mm) or Id. No.
4980 680 (6,012,00,3 mm) into spring cup 27 (see arrow).
Example: A 0,4 mm thick shim reduces dead travel by ca. 8 mm .
Reinstall plunger, guide and handle as shown in repair guidelines. Adjust zero position, recheck dead travel. If
dead travel matches the desired distance (0-15 mm), remove pressure gauge and reinstall control line to joystick.
B. Removal and installation

Tilt up cab, secure. Remove hoses from pilot control valve, close off and unplug electrical cable.
Unscrew pilot control valve and take from cab.
Install in reverse order. Make sure hoses are installed properly - if necessary, see hose routing, section 7.4.
Do not overtighten screws - observe torques - see section 2.
C. Repairs - Servo control valve removed

Observe absolute cleanliness, protect all parts from damage. Diverse small parts and fittings are not listed
separately.
Adjustment Repair LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Pilot Control Valve 4-way Blatt
01 04 Working Hydraulic Page
Feuille 8.5.01.02
1. To dismantle pilot control valves
Remove protective cover 1 and handle 5 from lever 11. Unsolder electrical
cable from soldering points on micro switch 4. Remove dust cover 17, pull
cable through bottom .
Loosen hex nut 12, unscrew lever 11, connector 13, actuating disk 15 and
linkage 20. Remove cover 18 and sleeve 52.
Pull plunger 35 with plunger guide 37 as well as plunger 50 with added

installation 54, 53, 51 and plunger guide 55 from housing.
Caution: Watch out for shims under the plunger in the spring cup 40
(for dead travel adjustment)
Remove screw 51 from plunger 50. Remove spring cup 53 and spring 54.
Push all four plungers from plunger guides, remove seal rings 38 and O-rings
39.
Pull resulting piston 45 separately with spring cup 40, lock washer 41, and
springs 46, 42 from housing.
Check regulating piston and reinstall. If necessary, release lock washer and
remove parts. Regulating pistons are not available separately.
2. Assembly:
Before assembly, clean all parts. Replace seals as well as damaged or worn
parts. Install parts in reverse order.
Insert plunger 50 with guide 55 and added installation in housing bore 3 .
Torque linkage 20 with 20 Nm .
Adjust zero position and dead travel of joystick - see Adjustment.
Lightly grease parts, install cable clamp tension relief on electrical cable.
Solder cable on micro switch 4 :

gray-1
red- 2
yellow - 3
blue - not used (insolate)
1 Lever
2 Ball grip 23 O-ring
3 Adapter sleeve 24 O-ring
4 Shaft 25 O-ring
5 Roll pin
6 Radial shaft seal ring 30 Plunger
7 Bushing 31 Plunger guide
8 Bushing 32 Seal ring
9 Cam 33 O-ring
10 Roll pin 34 Spool
11 Roll pin 35 Spring retainer
36 Lock washer
15 Cover 37 Return spring
16 Socket head screw with washer 38 Regulating spring
39 Shim
20 Housing - upper
21 O-ring 40 Housing - lower
22 Socket head screw
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
Pilot control valve - 2-way Blatt
Feuille 8.5.03.01
Pedal operated
1 Pedal right
2 Pedal left 20 Housing - upper
3 Adjustment screw 21 O-ring
4 Shaft 22 Socket head screw
5 Bushing 23 O-ring
6 Bushing 24 O-ring
7 Roll pin 25 O-ring
8 Plunger
9 Seal ring 30 Plunger
10 Seal ring 31 Plunger guide
11 Bushing 32 Seal ring
33 O-ring
15 Cover 34 Spool
16 Hex head screw 35 Spring retainer
17 Hex. nut 36 Lock washer
18 Socket head screw with washer 37 Return spring
38 Regulating spring
39 Shim
40 Housing - lower
Notes
Note: position numbers have changed against the general description in 8.5.01.
* = shims drop out by newer pilot control valves / repair kits - adjustment given by high of the plunger flange.

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date
PR 742(B) F/N xxx-2001 6199

Feuille
8.5.10.01
1 cap
2 ball
3 actuating lever
4 micro switch S10 (float position)
5 handle shells
6 socket head screw
7 oval head screw
11 lever
12 hex nut
13 connector
14 wire harness
15 actuating disk
17 dust cover
18 cover
20 universal joint - blind hole on the top

21 joint - upper
22 connector
23 pin
24 pin
25 joint - lower
30 housing
35 plunger
36 protecting cap
37 plunger guide
38 seal ring
39 O - ring
40 spring cup
41 locking washer and shims*
42 return spring
45 regulating piston
46 regulation spring
47 shims
50 plunger at connection 3 - lowering

51 screw
52 case
53 spring cup
54 spring
55 plunger guide
X inverted plan view

installation: install with connection P/T in direction
to backside of machine
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0103
PR 732(B) F/N xxx-2003
Datum Edition Date
PR 742(B) F/N xxx-2001 6199

Feuille
8.5.10.02
Notes
Note: PR 742B F/Nxxx-25016199 - pilot control valve is only installed with additional set - hydr. pitch angle
adjustment.
PR 752 - micro switch pos. 6 is only installed on basic machine with additional set - hydr. pitch angle
adjustment
Description of the electrical components:
micro switch pos.4 = S 10 at PR 742B F/N xxx-25015599

PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062
S6 at PR 742B F/N xxx-5600

PR 752 F/N xxx-2063
micro switch pos.6 = S 48 at PR 742B F/N xxx-25015599

PR 752 F/N xxx-20022062
S 32 at PR 742B F/N xxx-5600

PR 752 F/N xxx-2063
* = shims drop out by newer pilot control valves / repair kits - adjustment given by high of the plunger flange.
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
Feuille
8.5.40.01
1 handle shells
2 cap
3 button
4 micro switch - float position
5 button
6 micro switch - pitch angle adjustment
7 spring
8 rocker type switch - at crawler dozers not installed
9 sealing screw
11 lever
12 hex nut
13 connector
14 wire harness
15 Actuating disk
16 coupling nut
17 dust cover
18 cover
20 universal joint - blind hole on the top

21 joint - upper
22 connector
23 pin
24 pin
25 joint - lower
30 housing
35 plunger
36 protecting cap
37 plunger guide
38 seal ring
39 O - ring
40 spring cup
41 locking washer and shims*
42 return spring
45 regulating piston
46 regulation spring
47 shims
50 plunger at connection 3 - lowering

51 screw
52 case
53 spring cup
54 spring
55 plunger guide
X inverted plan view

installation: install with connections P/T in direction
to backside of machine.
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2002
Feuille
8.5.40.02
Notes
Tightening torques for control valve block parts:
(according to manufacturer list - dated 11 /97)
pos. MA description
3 70+5 Nm allen head screw

4 160 Nm plug
5 5 Nm plug
30 9 Nm bleeder screw
31 10 Nm allen head screw
35 100 Nm plug
37 240 Nm plug
40 10 Nm plug
41 5 Nm plug (installed with Loctite)
55 100 Nm pressure relief valve
65 150 Nm built-in valve - quick drop
70 100 Nm check valve
75 100 Nm built-in valve - float position
90 5 Nm two way check valve
optional section

125 100 Nm plug
131 10 Nm plug

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 3084
PR 732B F/N xxx-2501 3206
Datum Edition Date
PR 742B F/N xxx-2501 3095
01 01 Control valve block Blatt

Page 8.6.11.01
Feuille
standard control valve block
1 housing
2 end plate
3 allen head screw with washer 80 built-in valve - float position (Y25)
4 plug at PR 712 / PR 722 inlet restricted
5 plug 81 O-ring
82 O-ring with retainer ring
10 spool - lift /lower
11 spring retainer 85 check valve
12 spring 85.1 spring
13 spring 85.2 valve poppet
14 spring retainer with retainer ring 86 O-ring
15 cover
16 O-ring 90 two way check valve
17 cover
18 O-ring
20 spool - tilt
21 spring retainer
22 spring
23 spring optional section
24 spring retainer with retainer ring
25 cover 2 end plate
26 O-ring 101 housing - optional section
27 cover
28 O-ring 110 spool - optional functions
111 spring retainer
30 bleeder screw 112 spring
31 allen head screw 113 spring
35 plug 115 cover
116 O-ring
37 plug (MT1) 117 cover
38 plug (MT1) 118 O-ring
40 plug (two way check valve) 119 bleeder screw
41 plug (LS - channel)
120 check valve
45 O-ring 120.1 spring
46 O-ring 120.2 valve poppet
47 O-ring 121 O-ring
48 O-ring
49 O-ring 125 plug / pressure relief valve
50 O-ring (installation depends on attachment type)
126 O-ring
55 pressure relief valve - primary safety 127 O-ring with retainer ring
56 O-ring
57 O-ring with retainer ring 130 two way check valve
131 plug
60 pressure relief valve - secondary safety
61 O-ring
62 O-ring with retainer ring 145 O-ring
146 O-ring
65 built-in valve - quick drop (Y6) 147 O-ring
150 O-ring
70 check valve
71 O-ring
75 built-in valve - float position (Y3)

76 O-ring LS connection - test point LD
77 O-ring with retainer ring MP connection - test point HP
P connection - oil supply / pump
T connection - oil return flow / tank
PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 3084
PR 732B F/N xxx-2501 3206
Datum Edition Date
PR 742B F/N xxx-2501 3095

Page 8.6.11.02
Feuille
optional section

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 3084
PR 732B F/N xxx-2501 3206
Datum Edition Date
PR 742B F/N xxx-2501 3095

Page 8.6.11.03
Feuille
Notes
(according to manufacturer list - dated 11/97)
Pos. MA Description
3 70+5 Nm hex head screw

4 160 Nm plug
5 5 Nm plug
32 20 Nm plug
37 240 Nm plug
40 10 Nm plug
65 150 Nm two way insert valve - quick drop
70 100 Nm one way valve
75 100 Nm two way insert valve - blade release
80 100 Nm two way insert valve - blade release
optional section

125 100 Nm plug
131 10 Nm plug

Datum Edition Date

Page 8.6.12.01
Feuille
1 housing
2 end plate
3 hex head screw with washer 80 two way insert valve - blade release (Y25)
4 plug at PR 712 / PR 722 inlet restricted
5 plug 81 O-ring
10 spool - up/down
11 spring retainer 85 check valve
12 spring 85.1 spring
13 cover 85.2 valve poppet
14 O-ring 86 O-ring
15 adjustment screw
16 lock nut 90 two way check valve
17 O-ring
18 hut nut 95 pressure relief valve - secondary relief
96 O-ring
20 spool - tilt 97 O-ring with retainer ring
21 spring retainer
22 spring
23 cover optional section
24 O-ring
25 adjustment screw 2 end plate
26 lock nut 101 housing - optional section
27 O-ring
28 hut nut 110 spool - optional functions
111 spring retainer
31 allen head screw 113 cover
32 plug 114 O-ring
35 plug 115 adjustment screw
116 lock nut
38 plug (MT1) 118 hut nut
40 plug (two way check valve) 119 bleeder screw
41 plug (LS - channel)
120 check valve
45 O-ring 120.1 spring
48 O-ring
126 O-ring
55 pressure relief valve - primary relief 127 O-ring with retainer ring
56 O-ring
57 O-ring with retainer ring 130 two way check valve
131 plug
60 pressure relief valve - secondary relief 132 plug
61 O-ring
146 O-ring
65 two way insert valve - quick drop (Y6) 147 O-ring
150 O-ring
70 one way valve
71 O-ring
75 two way insert valve - blade release (Y3)

76 O-ring LS connection port - test point LD
MP connection port - test point HD
P connection port - oil supply / pump
T connection port - oil return flow / tank
Datum Edition Date

Page 8.6.12.02
Feuille
optional section

Datum Edition Date

Page 8.6.12.03
Feuille
Notes
pos. MA description

4 160 Nm plug
5 5 Nm plug
37 240 Nm plug
40 10 Nm plug
optional section

125 100 Nm plug
131 10 Nm plug
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-20022077

Page 8.6.50.01
Feuille
1 housing
2 end plate
4 plug 81 O-ring
5 plug 82 O-ring with retainer ring
10 spool - lift /lower 85 check valve

11 spring retainer 85.1 spring
13 spring 86 O-ring
15 cover 90 two way check valve
16 O-ring
17 cover 95 pressure relief valve - secondary safety
18 O-ring 96 O-ring
20 spool - tilt
21 spring retainer
23 spring
24 spring retainer with retainer ring 2 end plate
25 cover 101 housing - optional section
26 O-ring
27 cover 110 spool - optional functions
28 O-ring 111 spring retainer
112 spring
31 allen head screw 114 spring retainer with retainer ring
115 cover
116 O-ring
117 cover
38 plug (MT1) 119 bleeder screw
40 plug (two way check valve)
41 plug (LS - channel) 120 check valve
120.1 spring
47 O-ring
57 O-ring with retainer ring 131 plug

147 O-ring
70 check valve
71 O-ring
75 built-in valve - float position (Y3) LS connection - test point LD

76 O-ring MP connection - test point HP
77 O-ring with retainer ring P connection - oil supply / pump
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-20022077

Page 8.6.50.02
Feuille
optional section
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-20022077

Page 8.6.50.03
Feuille
Notes
pos. MA description

4 160 Nm plug
5 5 Nm plug
32 20 Nm plug
37 240 Nm plug
40 10 Nm plug
optional section

125 100 Nm plug
131 10 Nm plug
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2078

Page 8.6.51.01
Feuille
1 housing
2 end plate
4 plug 81 O-ring
5 plug 82 O-ring with retainer ring
10 spool - lift /lower 85 check valve

11 spring retainer 85.1 spring
13 cover 86 O-ring
14 O-ring
15 adjustment screw 90 two way check valve
16 lock nut
17 O-ring 95 pressure relief valve - secondary safety
18 hut nut 96 O-ring
20 spool - tilt
21 spring retainer
23 cover
24 O-ring 2 end plate
25 adjustment screw 101 housing - optional section
26 lock nut
27 O-ring 110 spool - optional functions
28 hut nut 111 spring retainer
112 spring
30 bleeder screw 113 cover
31 allen head screw 114 O-ring
32 plug 115 adjustment screw
116 lock nut
117 O-ring
37 plug (MT1) 118 hut nut
38 plug (MT1) 119 bleeder screw
40 plug (two way check valve)
41 plug (LS - channel) 120 check valve
120.1 spring
47 O-ring
57 O-ring with retainer ring 131 plug
132 plug
147 O-ring
70 check valve
71 O-ring
75 built-in valve - float position (Y3) LS connection - test point LD

76 O-ring MP connection - test point HP
77 O-ring with retainer ring P connection - oil supply / pump
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2078

Page 8.6.51.02
Feuille
optional section
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

PR 752 F/N xxx-2078

Page 8.6.51.03
Feuille
Sub Group Index
Current flow diagram 9.1
PR 712 F/N xxx-01030218 9.1.10
PR 722 F/N xxx-01030269
PR 712 F/N xxx-02190271 9.1.11
PR 722 F/N xxx-02700392
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032091
PR 712 F/N xxx-02720416 9.1.12
PR 722 F/N xxx-03930598
PR 732 F/N xxx-20922204
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012064
PR 712 F/N xxx-04170500 9.1.13
PR 722 F/N xxx-05991000
PR 732 F/N xxx-22052500
PR 742 F/N xxx-20652500
PR 712B F/N xxx-05012999 9.1.14
PR 722B F/N xxx-10012999
PR 732B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 742B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 712B F/N xxx-30013083 9.1.15
PR 722B F/N xxx-30013170
PR 712B F/N xxx-30845599 9.1.16
PR 722B F/N xxx-31715599
PR 732B F/N xxx-30013135 9.1.30
PR 742B F/N xxx-30013088
PR 732B F/N xxx-31365599 9.1.31
PR 742B F/N xxx-30895599
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022026 9.1.50
PR 752 F/N xxx-20272062 9.1.51
PR 752 F/N xxx-20635071 9.1.52
PR 752 F/N xxx-50725599 9.1.53
Electrical schematic and wiring 9.2

PR 712 F/N xxx-01030218 9.2.10
PR 722 F/N xxx-01030269
PR 712 F/N xxx-02190271 9.2.11
PR 722 F/N xxx-02700392
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032091
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500 (9.2.11.01)
Datum Edition Date
01 03 Electrical System Blatt

Page 9.0.00.01
Feuille
PR 712 F/N xxx-02720416 9.2.12
PR 722 F/N xxx-03930598
PR 732 F/N xxx-20922204
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012064
PR 712 F/N xxx-04170500 9.2.13
PR 722 F/N xxx-05991000
PR 732 F/N xxx-22052500
PR 742 F/N xxx-20652500
PR 712B F/N xxx-05012999 9.2.14
PR 722B F/N xxx-10012999
PR 732B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 742B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 712B F/N xxx-30013083 9.2.15
PR 722B F/N xxx-30013170
PR 712B F/N xxx-30845599 9.2.16
PR 722B F/N xxx-31715599
PR 712B F/N xxx-56005921 9.2.17
PR 722B F/N xxx-56005921
PR 712B F/N xxx-59226199 9.2.18
PR 722B F/N xxx-59226199
PR 712B F/N xxx-6200 9.2.19
PR 732B F/N xxx-30013135 9.2.30
PR 742B F/N xxx-30013088
PR 732B F/N xxx-31365599 9.2.31
PR 742B F/N xxx-30895599
PR 732B F/N xxx-56005883 9.2.32
PR 732B F/N xxx-5884 9.2.33
PR 742B F/N xxx-56006199 9.2.40
PR 742B F/N xxx-6200 9.2.41
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022026 9.2.50
PR 752 F/N xxx-20272062 9.2.51
PR 752 F/N xxx-20635071 9.2.52
PR 752 F/N xxx-50725599 9.2.53
PR 752 F/N xxx-56005615 9.2.54
PR 752 F/N xxx-56166199 9.2.55
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200 9.2.56
Instrument panel 9.3

PR 712 F/N xxx-01030218 9.3.10
PR 722 F/N xxx-01030269
PR 712 F/N xxx-02190271 9.3.11
PR 722 F/N xxx-02700392
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032091
PR 712 F/N xxx-02720416 9.3.12
PR 722 F/N xxx-03930598
PR 732 F/N xxx-20922204
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012064
PR 712 F/N xxx-04170500 9.3.13
PR 722 F/N xxx-05991000
PR 732 F/N xxx-22052500
PR 742 F/N xxx-20652500
PR 712B F/N xxx-05012999 9.3.14
PR 722B F/N xxx-10012999
PR 732B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 742B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 712B F/N xxx-30013083 9.3.15
PR 722B F/N xxx-30013170
PR 732B F/N xxx-30013035
PR 742B F/N xxx-30013088
PR 712B F/N xxx-30845599 9.3.16
PR 722B F/N xxx-31715599
PR 732B F/N xxx-31365599
PR 742B F/N xxx-30895599
PR 712B F/N xxx-56005921 9.3.17
PR 722B F/N xxx-56005921
PR 732B F/N xxx-56005883
PR 712B F/N xxx-59226199 9.3.18
PR 722B F/N xxx-59226199
PR 712B F/N xxx-6200 9.3.19
PR 742B F/N xxx-56006199 9.3.40
PR 742B F/N xxx-6200 9.3.41
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022026 9.3.50
PR 752 F/N xxx-20272062 9.3.51
PR 752 F/N xxx-20635071 9.3.52
PR 752 F/N xxx-50725599 9.3.53
PR 752 F/N xxx-56006199 9.3.54
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200 9.3.55
Location of electrical components 9.4

PR 712B F/N xxx-0501 9.4.10
Datum Edition Date

Page 9.0.00.02
Feuille
Note:
The indication on the wires at the end of the page designate the component/step of the continuation,
Example: KL.30 = power supply line
Continuations from page 00 /1 step 8 to X4 = panel plug are shown page 00 /4
Connections from page 00 /1, step 8 to A1 are shown in detail on the electric schematic / electronic control in
group.10.2..
c= with air conditioner or auxiliary heater open cable from F11

d= with float position - ripper open cable
Wiring on components (part of the component): always with colors, without number
Color codes: bl = blue gr = gray

bl-ws = blue-white rt = red
br = brown rt-ws = red-white
br-ge = brown-yellow sw = black
ge = yellow
gn = green
Numbers shown in wires on schematic = cross section of wire

wires without numbers = 1mm
Automatic circuit breaker - fuse listing F1 - F30
pos. Ampere application - standard - option step

F1 35A automatic circuit breaker - power supply 1
F2 3A glow plug system 3
F3 5A charge indicator, dome light back up alarm, radio 1,8,14,18
F4 8A electronic supply, servo cut off, starter cut off 4
F5 10A electrical outlet 24V 5
F6 5A instruments, indicator lights, horn monitoring - engine oil level, refueling pump 5,6,15,16
F7 8A light front 13
F8 25A power supply roof panel 4
F9 8A free 3
F10 5A quick drop winch release 8,11,15
F11 10A heater air conditioner, operators seat with air 10,12,17,18
suspension
F12 blower air conditioner, beacon light 9
F13 additional lights, refueling pump fuel preheater 13,16
F14 back up light 12
F15 2A float position 4,15
F16 8A free
F20 auxiliary heater (is located floating in the cable) 11
F25 8A windshield wiper and washer system front 23
F26 8A windshield wiper and washer system rear 23
F27 8A working light front left, rear right, instrument lights 19
F28 8A working light front right, rear left 19
F29 2A warning light cab warning light canopy 21
F30 5A beacon light 20
pos. description /step pos. description /step

A1 electronic box - connection /8 see group 10.2. B7 horn /6
A2 (option) radio /25 B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm / back up
A3 (option) controller auxiliary heater /11 light (1,5 bar) /12 /14
A6 (option) refueling pump /16 B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm / back up
A7 (option) operators seat with air suspension /17 light (1,5 bar) /12 /14
B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /14
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 B11 pressure switch - quick drop (17 bar) /8
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /5 B17 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (500 mWs = 50 mbar vacuum) /5 B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2,5 bar) /5
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12 bar) /5 B24 (option) electronic thermostat air conditioner /10
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8 bar) /5

PR 712 B F/N xxx-0501 2999
Parts list - Current flow diagram PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 2999

Page
Feuille 9.1.14.00
E3 working light rear right /19 S1 starter switch w. preheat position /2
E4 working light front left /19 S2 neutral starting switch /4
E5 working light rear left /19 S3 emergency off switch /4
E6 working light front right /19 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /23
E7 dome light /18 S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system rear /23
E8 (option) back up light rear left /12 S6 (option) push button switch - working light front /13
E9 (option) back up light rear right /12 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /19
E10 (option) heater for auxiliary heater /11 S8 push button switch - horn /6
E13 (option) high/low beam light front right /13 S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /10
E14 (option) high/low beam light front left /13 S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
E15 heater /10 S11 push button switch - float position /8
E16 (option) evaporator /10 S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
E17 (option) condenser /9 S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /23
Fx F1 - F30 see front page for listing S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /23
S20 (option) push button switch - winch release /18
G1 alternator /1 S21 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
G2 batteries /1 S22 (option) push button switch - float position - ripper /8
S25 (option) clock - auxiliary heater /11
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 S27 (option) rocker switch - low beam - high beam light /13
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3 S28 (option) push button switch refueling pump - on /16
H3 indicator light - air filter /5 S29 (option) push button switch refueling pump - off /16
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 S44 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 S47 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection
H8 indicator light - float position /8 (at travel joystick) /7
H10 (option) indicator light - engine oil level /15
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /7 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7
H13 (option) beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /20 V1 diode 1A (K1) /1
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /21 V3 diode 1A (K2) /4
H18 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /16 V4 diode 1A (H5) /5
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5 V9 (option) sensor - engine oil level /15
V13 (option) diode 1A (V9) /15
K1 battery main switch /1 V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /10
K2 relay - starter cut off /2 V18 (option) diode 1A (K37) /16
K3 relay - power guard /2
K4 relay 35A - power supply /4 X1 electrical outlet 24V /5
K5 relay - reduced travel speed range indicator light /7 X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole
K6 relay - electronic fault indicator /7 X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole
K7 step relay - float position /8 X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
K9 (option) relay - refueling pump /16 identification) /5 /15
K10 relay - warning light /24 X8 coupling - cab - heater
K11 (option) relay - condenser /9 X10
K12 (option) relay - solenoid clutch - air conditioner /9 (option) plug - auxiliary heater
K13 (option) relay - compressor operators seat with air suspension X15
/17 X37-1 plug roof panel - power supply
K17 (option) relay - flame glow plug - auxiliary heater /11 X37-2 plug roof panel - power supply
K18 (option) relay - auxiliary heater /10 X38 plug to M3 /23
K35 (option) relay - back up light /12 X39 plug to M2 /23
K37 (option) relay - refueling pump - shut off /16 X40 plug to M4 /23
K38 relay 35A - working light /19 X41 plug to M5 /23
K39 relay - power guard /4 X42 plug to E3, E4, E5, E6 /21
K42 (option) relay - high/low beam light front (low beam light) /13 X43 (option) plug - air conditioner /9
K43 (option) relay - high/low beam light front (high beam light) /13 X46 plug to M7,M13 /23
K48 (option) relay - back up light /12 X47 plug to U1, A2 /21
K53 time relay - glow plug system /3
K78 (option) relay 35A - parallel K4 /19 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3
Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
M1 starter /2 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
M2 windshield wiper front /23 Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
M3 windshield wiper left door /23 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
M4 windshield wiper right door /23 Y15 (option) solenoid valve - winch release /18
M5 windshield wiper rear /23 Y16 (option) solenoid valve - float position - ripper /8
M6 fresh air fan - heater /10 Y17 (option) fuel pump auxiliary heater /11
M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /23 Y25 solenoid valve - float position /8
M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /16 Y26 (option) solenoid valve - float position - ripper /8
M10 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser middle /9
M11 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser left /right /9
M12 (option) - compressor operators seat with air suspension /17
M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /23
P1 hour meter /5
P2 fuel gauge /5
P3 coolant temperature gauge /5
P4 engine oil pressure gauge /5
R1 flame glow plug /3

R2 fuel level sending unit /5
R3 resistor - blower motor - heater /10
R9 (option) potentiometer auxiliary heater /11
R11 (option) potentiometer air conditioner /10
1 2 3 Flammstartanlage 4 Sicherheitseinrichtung 5 6 Elektronikberwachung, Reduz. Fahrgeschw.
7 (bei Fahrgeber)oder (permanent) 8 Magnetventile: Schildfreigabe, Sicherheitsschaltung Arbeitshydraulik , Schnellsenken,
Heckaufreisserfreigabe
Stromversorgung Startanlage Steckdose, Anzeigeninstrumente, Warnlampen Hupe Solenoid Valves:Float Position, Quick drop, Servo cut off,
Electronic System Guard, Red.Travel Speed
(at Joystick)or(permanent) Float Position Ripper
Power supply Start equipment Flame glow plug Safety installation Plug socket, Gauge - Indicator, Warning lamps Horn Electrovanne: Lame flottante, Descente rapide,
Contrle electronique, Petite vitesse
Alimentation Dmarrage Prchauffage Installation de scurit Prise, Instruments de mesure, Voyants de controle Klaxon (avec Joystick)ou(permanent) Levier de scurit, Lame flottante Scarificateur
30 Kl.30
58 58 58 58
Kl.58
8A
5A
30 30 F4
F3 P,0,1,
D+
4
P 0 12 3
58 15 54 19 17 50a +24V
S1
Kl.15
86 30 86 30
A1-A
X2 A1-J
65 X2 70
85 87 85 + + + F10 F3
87a
87
K4 K39 + 5A 5A
S21
S S1 31
S12
S S1 31
S47 S S1 31
31 S1 S
X2 X2 S11
6 69
2.5 2.5
10A
8A
H1 F5 F6 X2
14
25A
2A
H2 F8 F15
S1
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
D+
S10
D+ D+
30 86
X2 X2
5 38 X4-C,E
K2
87 85 2.5 X4-A,B
87a
2.5
X2
X4-I
X2 X2 X2 V3
29 25 37 13
X4-D
1 X2 X2
2.5
17 62
3 2
35A +
D+ + + + S1
2
F1 o
p
Q t
H5 H23 V4
6
+
70
-
H3 H4 H11 H12 1 4 5
P1 P2
- G
P3
- G
P4
- G
S8 S K7
12V
+
X5 5
- 30 86 49 49a 1 +
G2 20s -
V1 X1
50
X2 X2
p
K3 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2

6
17
87a
+ 85 28 40
87
27 39 51 63 4 16 52 41 S S1 31 31
2 3
S2 S22 B11
16A
31
K53
12V
F2
-
B+ D+
G2 30 50 G G W G W 30 85 30 85
G
X2 M p p p p X2 X2
3
U
53 X2 X2 X2 Q t
o p 500 8 8 2,5 3
58
50
26 1 64 31 31 31 31 31 31 B7 86 86
87a
87a
R2 B2
87
87
31
M1 31
B3 B4 B5 B6 B22 K5 K6
G1
88 86(85) X2 X2
2.5
18 30
Y1 S3
88a
K1 R1 Y25 Y3 H8 Y26 Y16 Y4 Y6
X2
2.5
A1-D
50
50
54
A1-d
24V/A1
31 Kl.31
PR 712 B F/N xxx - 05013000

PR 722 B F/N xxx - 10013000
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm2 ----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt
Stromlaufplan PR 732 B F/N xxx - 25013000
PR 742 B F/N xxx - 25013000
All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 Options wired, not equipped Current Flow Diagramm
Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2 Options non equipes
01 01 Schmas lectriques 9.1.14.00/1
9 Klimaanlage
10 Heizung, Geblse
11 Standheizung
12 Rckfahrscheinwerfer
13
Scheinwerfer vorne H3, Biluxscheinwerfer vorne H4
Air conditioner Heating, Fresh air fan Auxilary heater Back up lights Headlights front H3,high/low beam lights front H4
Chauffage, Ventilation Chauffage additionel autonome Phares de recul Phares avant H3, Ampoule Phare H4
Climatisation
Kl.30 Kl.30
Kl.58 Kl.58
5A
D+ D+
+24V +24V
Kl.15 Kl.15
10A
F11
10A
8A
F12 F14
S25 1 2 3
X10
X2
12 gn rt
R9
30 86 6 5 4 3 1 2 9 E10 1 7 2 8 10 9 11 12
S S1 31 X14 X15 X2
71
K18
85
87a
87
+
S16 p
X2 X2 X2
21 50 20 31
30 86 86 30 B9
2.5
2.5
4
X8
1,5
p
85 85 1
87a
87a
K11
87
87
K12 +
B8
31
2.5
7 X2
47
X2 X8 0 12 3
1 2 3 4
+
35 6 S9
1.5
X13
X4 X4 1 2.5
S6 S S1 31
K J
87a
1,5
87
30 86 30 86
85
1,5
1.5
1.5
K48
25A
X43 X43 F20 +
5 4
1 X43 C K17 86 30
87 85 87 85
7 K35
p
6
R11
1.5
S S1 31
18bar
3 X4
B S27
B17 1,5 G 1
M M M X43
6 X2 2
35A
X12 9 5 1 4 2 8 11 3 6 10 12 X11 3
30 86 86 30
1 2 4
23 F1 K42 K43
M11 M10 X4
85 85
87a
87a
H +
87
87
E17 M
6
X2
12V
33 X8 t t A3 E9 E8
R3 - Y17
8
7 F7 8A F13 8A
X8 G2
4 3 9 10 1 8 7 6 5
5 +
1.5
X2 X2 X2
1.5
rt-ws bl-ws X2
gn
rt br-ge
X13 X13 X13
12V
49 61 43 44
t
M 2 2 2
-
B24
6
M6
E16 E15 88 86(85)
56a 56b 56a 56b
E13 E14
2
88a
X8 K1
Y14 3
Kl.31 Kl.31
PR 712 B F/N xxx - 05013000

PR 722 B F/N xxx - 10013000
Stromlaufplan . PR 732 B F/N xxx - 25013000
All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 PR 742 B F/N xxx - 25013000
Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2
Options wired, not equipped Current Flow Diagramm
Options non equipes
14 Back Up Alarm 15 16 Betankungspumpe
17 Luftgefederter Sitz
lstandskontrolle Driverseat w.air suspension
Back up alarm Engine oil level Refueling pump
Sige conducteur avec
Alarme marche arrire Voyant niveau dhuile Pompe de remplissage suspension air
Kl.30 Kl.30
Kl.58 Kl.58
20A
F13
Kl.15 Kl.58
+24V +24V
10A
F6 F6
5A
5A
F11
8A
F6
+ +
S S1 S1 S
2.5
S28 S29
X2
24
86 30 86 30
85 87 87
87a
85
87a
5A
F3 K9 A7
K37 M
2.5
M12
X2
42
X2
X2 X2 X2 22
10 11 8
K13
31
B9 H10
X2 X2
34 31
X2 X2
p 59 57 M
31 H18
M8
B8
A6 A7
V13
(C) S +(A) )A(+ S (C)
Q Q
B10 V9 (B) (B)

V17
X5 5
Kl.31 Kl.31
PR 712 B F/N xxx - 05013000

PR 722 B F/N xxx - 10013000
PR 742 B F/N xxx - 25013000
Current Flow Diagramm
18 19 20 21 22 23
Kabinenleuchte Arbeitsscheinwerfer Rundumleuchte Wisch-Waschanlage:Hinten, Vorne, Links, Rechts
Warnleuchte Kabine
Dome light Working lights Beacon light Windshield wiper and washer System front, rear, left, right
Warning light cab Radio
Eclairage cabine Phares de travail Girophare Voyant dalarme cabine Cirquit essuie lave - glce avant, arrire, gauche, droit
F8(4)
+24
F3(8)
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5
X47
1,5
1,5
5
1,5
1
S44 - +
1 24V
S7 U1 F26 F25
8A
8A
12V
86 30
K38
85 87
1,5
E7 M
+ L
F27
8A
H13 F29
2A
F28 3A
8A
X4 A2 - R
D
P4/5
2 10
2 10
2 10
2 10
0,1
X37-2
0,1
0,1
0,1
7 7 7 7
1 5 5 5 5
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
X42 X42 S5 S4 S17 S18

2 3
X47
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
86 30 X46 X46
2
1
E4 E3 E6 E5 X41 X38
K10 85 X39 1 X40 1
87a
1 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3
87
53a
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
31b
31b
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M M M M
X37-1
2,5
3 M13 M5 31 M7 M2 31
M3 31
M4 31
X42
1
X4 X46 X46
3
I H17 3
2,5
X5-5(5)
KL.31
PR 712 B F/N xxx - 05013000

PR 722 B F/N xxx - 10013000
PR 742 B F/N xxx - 25013000
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm2
All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2
----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt
Options wired, not equipped
01 01 Schmas lectriques
Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2 Options non equipes 9.1.14.00/4
Note:
The indication on the wires at the end of the page designate the component/step of the continuation
Example: Y4 /8 = wire solenoid valve Y4 in step 8 = servo cut off
Continuations from page 00 /1 step 8 to X4 = panel plug are shown on page 00 /4
Connections from page 00 /1, step 8 and step 1 to X32-A1(*) are shown in detail on the electric schematic /
electronic control in group.10.2..
c= with float position - ripper open cable
d= with air conditioner or auxiliary heater open cable from F11
e= connect cable at K4 /87 (step 4)

ge = yellow
gn = green


F6 5A instruments, indicator lights, horn monitoring - engine oil level 5,6,15,16
F9 8A free 3
F10 5A quick drop winch release 5,8,11,15
suspension
F12 blower air conditioner 9
F13 refueling pump, additional lights, fuel preheater 13,20
F30 8A beacon light, warning flash light 23,27

A1 electronic box - connection /8 see group 10.2. B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm / back up
A2 (option) radio /25 light (1,5 bar) /12 /14
A3 (option) controller auxiliary heater /11 B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm / back up
A6 (option) refueling pump /16 light (1,5 bar) /12 /14
A7 (option) operators seat with air suspension /17 B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /14
B11 pressure switch - quick drop (17 bar) /8
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 B17 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /5 B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2,5 bar) /5
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (500 mWs = 50 mbar vacuum) /5 B24 (option) electronic thermostat air conditioner /10
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12 bar) /5
B7 horn /6

PR 712 B F/N xxx-3001 3083
Parts list - Current flow diagram
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.1.15.00
E1 (option) light front left /13 R9 (option) potentiometer - auxiliary heater /11
E2 (option) light front right /13 R10 (option) fuel heater /20
E3 working light rear right /22 R11 (option) - potentiometer - air conditioner /9
E4 working light front left /22
E5 working light rear left /22 S1 starter switch w. preheat position /2
E6 working light front right /22 S2 neutral starting switch /4
E7 dome light /21 S3 emergency off switch /4
E8 (option) back up light rear left /12 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /26
E9 (option) back up light rear right /12 S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system rear /26
E10 (option) heater for auxiliary heater /11 S6 (option) push button switch - working light front /13
E13 (option) high/low beam light front right /13 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /22
E14 (option) high/low beam light front left /13 S8 push button switch - horn /6
E15 heater /9 S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /10
E16 (option) evaporator /10 S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
E17 (option) condenser /9 S11 push button switch - float position /8
S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
Fx F1 - F30 see front page for listing S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
G1 alternator /1 S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /26
G2 batteries /1 S20 (option) push button switch - winch release /18
S21 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 S22 (option) push button switch - float position - ripper /8
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3 S25 (option) clock - auxiliary heater /11
H3 indicator light - air filter /5 S27 (option) rocker switch - low beam - high beam light /13
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 S28 (option) push button switch refueling pump - on /16
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 S29 (option) push button switch refueling pump - off /16
H8 indicator light - float position /8 S44 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
H10 (option) indicator light - engine oil level /15 S45 (option) rocker switch - warning flash light /27
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /7 S47 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7 (at travel joystick) /7
H13 (option) beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /23
H14 (option) indicator light - winch release /18 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /V9 /24
H18 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /16 V1 diode 1A (K1) /1
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5 V3 diode 1A (K2) /4
H30 (option) warning flash light /27 V4 diode 1A (H5) /5
V9 (option) sensor - engine oil level /15
K1 battery main switch /1 V13 (option) diode 1A (V9) /15
K2 relay - starter cut off /2 V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /10
K3 relay - power guard /2 V18 (option) diode 1A (K37) /16
K4 relay 35A - power supply /4
K5 relay - reduced travel speed range indicator light /7 X1 electrical outlet 24V /5
K6 relay - electronic fault indicator /7 X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole
K7 step relay - float position /8 X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole
K9 (option) relay - refueling pump /16 X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
K10 relay - warning light /24 identification) /5 /15
K11 (option) relay - condenser /9 X8 coupling - cab - heater
K12 (option) relay - solenoid clutch - air conditioner /9 X10
K17 (option) relay - flame glow plug - auxiliary heater /11 (option) plug - auxiliary heater
K18 (option) relay - auxiliary heater /10 X15
K35 (option) relay - back up light /12 X37-1 plug roof panel - power supply
K37 (option) relay - refueling pump - shut off /16 X37-2 plug roof panel - power supply
K39 relay - power guard /4 X39 plug to M2 /26
K40 (option) relay - light front /13 X40 plug to M4 /26
K41 (option) relay - fuel heater /20 X41 plug to M5 /26
K42 (option) relay - high/low beam light front (low beam light) /13 X42 plug to E3, E4, E5, E6 /21
K43 (option) relay - high/low beam light front (high beam light) /13 X43 (option) plug - air conditioner /9
K48 (option) relay - back up light /12 X46 plug to M7,M13 /26
K53 time relay - glow plug system /3 X47 plug to U1, A2 /21
K78 (option) relay 35A - parallel K4 /19 X65 (option) plug - operators seat with air suspension /17
M1 starter /2 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3

M2 windshield wiper front /26 Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /3
M3 windshield wiper left door /26 Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
M4 windshield wiper right door /26 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
M3 windshield wiper left door /26 Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
M4 windshield wiper right door /26 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
M5 windshield wiper rear /26 Y15 (option) solenoid valve - winch release /18
M6 fresh air fan - heater /10 Y16 (option) solenoid valve - float position - ripper /8
M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /26 Y17 (option) fuel pump auxiliary heater /11
M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /16 Y25 solenoid valve - float position /8
M10 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser middle /9 Y26 (option) solenoid valve - float position - ripper /8
M12 (option) - compressor operators seat with air suspension /17
M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /26
P1 hour meter /5
P2 fuel gauge /5

R3 resistor - blower motor - heater /10
7 (bei Fahrgeber)oder (permanent) 8 Magnetventile: Schildfreigabe, Sicherheitsschaltung Arbeitshydraulik , Schnellsenken,
Stromversorgung Startanlage Steckdose, Anzeigeninstrumente, Warnlampen Hupe Solenoid Valves:Float Position, Quick drop, Servo cut off,
Electronic System Guard, Red.Travel Speed
Power supply Start equipment Flame glow plug Safety installation Plug socket, Gauge - Indicator, Warning lamps Horn Electrovanne: Lame flottante, Descente rapide,
30 30 /9
58 58 58 58
S1-58 /9
8A
5A
30 30 F4
F3 P,0,1,
D+/9
4
P 0 12 3
58 15 54 19 17 50a +24V /9
S1
S1-15 /9
86 30 86 30
X32 A1-A(*)
X2 X32 A1-J(*)
65 X2 70
85 87 85 + + + F10 F3
87a
87
K4 K39 + 5A 5A
S21
S S1 31
S12
S S1 31
S47 S S1 31
31 S1 S
X2 X2 S11
6 69
2.5 2.5
10A
8A
5A
H1 F5 F6 F10 X2
14
25A
2A
H2 F8 F15
S1
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
D+
S10
D+ D+
30 86
X2 X2
5 38 X4-C,E /21
K2
87 85 2.5 X4-A,B /21
87a
2.5
X2
X4-I /21
X2 X2 X2 V3
29 25 37 13
X4-D /21
1 X2 X2
2.5
17 62
3 2
35A +
D+ + + + S1
2
F1 o
p
Q t
H5 H23 V4
6
+
70
-
H3 H4 H11 H12 1 4 5
P1 P2
- G
P3
- G
P4
- G
S8 S K7
12V
+
X5 5
- 30 86 49 49a 1 +
G2 20s -
V1 X1
50
X2 X2
p
K3 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2

6
17
87a
+ 85 28 40
87
27 39 51 63 4 16 52 41 S S1 31 31
2 3
S2 S22 B11
16A
31
K53
12V
F2
-
B+ D+
G2 30 50 G G W G W 30 85 30 85
G
X2 M p p p p X2 X2
3
U
53 X2 X2 X2 X2 Q t
o p 500 8 8 2,5 3
58
50
55 26 1 64 31 31 31 31 31 31 B7 86 86
87a
87a
R2 B2
87
87
31
M1 31
B3 B4 B5 B6 B22 K5 K6
G1
88 86(85) X2 X2
2.5
18 30
Y2 Y1 S3
88a
K1 R1 Y25 Y3 H8 Y26 Y16 Y4 Y6
X32 A1-B(*) X2
2.5
X32 A1-D(*)
50
50
54
X32 A1-d(*)
X32 A1-24V(*)
31 31/9
PR 712 B F/N xxx - 30013083

PR 722 B F/N xxx - 30013170
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm 2
Stromlaufplan
All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm
2
9 Klimaanlage
10 Heizung, Geblse
11 Standheizung
13
Chauffage, Ventilation Chauffage additionel autonome Phares de recul Phares avant H3, Ampoule Phare H4
Climatisation
30/8 30/14
S1-58/8 S1-58/14
5A
D+/8 D+/14
K4(+24V)/8 +24V/14
S1-15/8 S1-15/14
10A
F11
10A
F14
8A
F12
S25 1 2 3
X10
X2
12 gn rt
R9
30 86 6 5 4 3 1 2 9 E10 1 7 2 8 10 9 11 12
X14 X2
S S1 31
K18
X15 71
85
1.5
1.5
87a
87
+
S16 p
X2 X2 X2
21 50 20 31
30 86 86 30 B9
2.5
2.5
4
X8
1,5
p
85 85 1 +
87a
87a
K11
87
87
K12 +
B8
31
2.5
S S1 31
7 X2 S6
47
X2 X8 0 12 3
1 2 3 4
+
35 6 S9
1.5
X13
X4 X4 1 2.5
S6 S S1 31
K J
87a
1,5
87
30 86 30 86
85
1,5
1.5
1.5
K48
25A
X43 X43 F20 +
5 4
1 X43 C K17 86 30
87 85 87 85
7 K35
p
R11 30 86
1.5
S S1 31
18bar
3 X4
B S27
B17 1,5 G 6 K40
87a
85
87
M M M X43
6 X2 X12 9 5 1 4 2 8 11 3 6 10 12 X11 3
30 86 86 30
1 2 4
23
M11 M10 K42 K43
X4
85 85
87a
87a
H
87
87
E17 M
8 6
X2 Y17 A3 F7 8A
33 X8 t t E9 E8
R3
5 7 F7 8A F13 8A
8
4 3 9 10 1 7 6 5
1.5
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
1.5
rt br-ge rt-ws bl-ws X2
gn
X13 X13 X13 49 61 49 61 43 44

t
1,5
M 2 2 2
B24
6
M6
E16 E15
56a 56b 56a 56b
E1 E2 E13 E14
2
X8
Y14 3
31/8 31/14
PR 712 B F/N xxx - 30013083

PR 722 B F/N xxx - 30013170
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm
2
Stromlaufplan .

Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm
2
Options non equipes
14 15 16 Betankungspumpe
17Luftgefederter Sitz 18 19 20
Back Up Alarm lstandskontrolle Windenfreischaltung Relais zus. zu K4 Kraftstoffwasserabscheider heizbar
Refueling pump Driverseat w.air suspension
Back up alarm Engine oil level Sige conducteur avec Winch Freespool Relais add. to K4 Fuel water seperator heated
Voyant niveau dhuile Pompe de remplissage Relais supl. K4 Nettoyer - carburant chauffe
Alarme marche arrire suspension air Dbrayage du treuil
30/13 30/21
58/13 58/21
20A
16A
F13 F13
15/13 15/21
K4+24V/13 K4+24V/21
10A
10A
F6 F6
5A
5A
F11 F11
8A
F6
2,5
+ +
2.5
S S1 S1 S
2.5
S28 S29
86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30
85 87 87 K78 85 87 K41 85
87a
87
87a
85
87a
5A
F3 K9
K37
2.5
2,5
X2
42
+
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
10 11 8 22 56 9

S S1 31
S20
2,5
p
M
31
B9 H10 M12
A7
br
bl
15C
X2 X2 X65 R10
p 59 57 M
H14
ge/gn
31 M8
B8 H14
A6
V13
X2
(C) S +(A) 48
)A(+ S (C)
2,5
Q Q
B10 V9 (B) (B)

V17
X5 5
Y15
31/13 31/21
PR 712 B F/N xxx - 30013083

PR 722 B F/N xxx - 30013170
Stromlaufplan
.

2
Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2 Options non equipes 01 01 Schmas lectriques 9.1.15.00/3
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Kabinenleuchte Arbeitsscheinwerfer Rundumleuchte Wisch-Waschanlage:Hinten, Vorne, Links, Rechts Warnblitzleuchte
Warnleuchte Kabine
Dome light Working lights Beacon light Windshield wiper and washer System front, rear, left, right Warning flash light
Eclaireage cabine Phares de travail Girophare Voyant dalarme cabine Cirquit essuie lave - glce avant, arrire, gauche, droit Lumire
+24V
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5
X47
1,5
1,5
5
1,5
1
S44 - +
1 24V
S7 F26 F25
8A
8A
12V
U1
86 30
X4 C,E/8
(F3/8) K38
85 87
12V
1,5
X4 A,B/8
(F8 +24V/4) E7 M
+ L
X4 I/8 per+
F27
8A
H13 F29
8A
2A
(X5-5/5) F28 3A
X4 A2 -
R
D
X4 D/8
2 10
2 10
2 10
2 10
0,1
F30
5A
X37-2
0,1
0,1
0,1
(P4/5) 1
7 7 7 7
5 5 5 5
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
X42 X42 S5 S4 S17 S18

2 3 1
X47
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
5
86 30 X46 X46 S45
2
1
E4 E3 E6 E5 X41 X38
K10 85 X39 1 X40 1
87a
1 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3
87
53a
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
31b
31b
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M M M M
H30
X37-1
2,5
3 M13 M5 31 M7 M2 31
M3 31
M4 31
X42
1
X4 X46 X46
3
I H17 3
2,5
31/20 31
PR 712 B F/N xxx - 30013083

PR 722 B F/N xxx - 30013170
Stromlaufplan .

2
2
Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm Options non equipes
Note:

ge = yellow
gn = green


F9 8A free 3
suspension
F12 10A blower air conditioner 9
F13 8A,16A,20A additional lights, fuel preheater, refueling pump 13,20
F14 8A back up light 12
F20 25A auxiliary heater (is located floating in the cable) 11

B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 B17 (option) push button switch - air conditioner (18 bar) /9
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /5 B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2,5 bar) /5
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12 bar) /5 B34 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area left /7
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8 bar) /5 B35 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area right /7
B7 horn /6

PR 712 B F/N xxx -3084 5599
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx -3171 5599
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.1.16.00
E1 (option) light front left /13 R2 fuel level sending unit /2
E2 (option) light front right /13 R3 resistor - blower motor - heater /10
E3 working light rear right /22 R9 (option) potentiometer - auxiliary heater /11
E4 working light front left /22 R10 (option) fuel heater /20
E5 working light rear left /22 R11 (option) - potentiometer - air conditioner /9
E6 working light front right /22
E7 dome light /21 S1 starter switch w. preheat position /2
E8 (option) back up light rear left /12 S2 neutral starting switch /4
E9 (option) back up light rear right /12 S3 emergency off switch /4
E10 (option) heater for auxiliary heater /11 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /26
E13 (option) high/low beam light front right /13 S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system rear /26
E14 (option) high/low beam light front left /13 S6 (option) push button switch - working light front /13
E15 heater /9 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /22
E16 (option) evaporator /10 S8 push button switch - horn /6
E17 (option) condenser /9 S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /10
S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
Fx F1 - F30 see front page for listing S11 push button switch - float position /8
S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
G1 alternator /1 S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
G2 batteries /1 S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /26
S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /26
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 S20 (option) push button switch - winch release /18
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3 S21 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
H3 indicator light - air filter /5 S22 (option) push button switch - float position - ripper /8
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 S25 (option) clock - auxiliary heater /11
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 S27 (option) rocker switch - low beam - high beam light /13
H8 indicator light - float position /8 S28 (option) push button switch refueling pump - on /16
H10 (option) indicator light - engine oil level /15 S29 (option) push button switch refueling pump - off /16
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /7 S44 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7 S45 (option) rocker switch - warning flash light /27
H13 (option) beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /23 S47 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection
H14 (option) indicator light - winch release /18 (at travel joystick) /7
H18 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /16 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5
H30 (option) warning flash light /27 V1 diode 1A (K1) /1
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area left /7 V3 diode 1A (K2) /4
H39 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area right /7 V4 diode 1A (H5) /5
K35 (option) relay - back up light /12 X32 plug to A1
K38 relay 35A - working light /22 X37-2 plug roof panel - power supply
K42 (option) relay - high/low beam light front (low beam light) /13 X41 plug to M5 /26
K43 (option) relay - high/low beam light front (high beam light) /13 X42 plug to E3, E4, E5, E6 /21
K48 (option) relay - back up light /12 X43 (option) plug - air conditioner /9
K53 time relay - glow plug system /3 X46 plug to M7,M13 /26
K78 (option) relay 35A - parallel K4 /19 X47 plug to U1, A2 /21
X65 (option) plug - operators seat with air suspension /17
M1 starter /2
M2 windshield wiper front /26 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3
M3 windshield wiper left door /26 Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /3
M4 windshield wiper right door /26 Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
M5 windshield wiper rear /26 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
M6 fresh air fan - heater /10 Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /26 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /16 Y15 (option) solenoid valve - winch release /18
M11 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser left /right /9 Y17 (option) fuel pump auxiliary heater /11
M12 (option) - compressor operators seat with air suspension /17 Y25 solenoid valve - float position /8
M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /26 Y26 (option) solenoid valve - float position - ripper /8
P1 hour meter /5
P2 fuel gauge /5

1 2 3 Flammstartanlage 4 Sicherheitseinrichtung 5 6
Elektronikberwachung,Reduz. Fahrgeschw.
7 Electronic
lstandsberwachung Doppellifetime 8 Magnetventile: Schildfreigabe, Sicherheitsschaltung Arbeitshydraulik , Schnellsenken,
Stromversorgung Startanlage Steckdose, Anzeigeninstrumente, Warnlampen Hupe System Guard,Red.Travel Speed Solenoid Valves: Float Position, Quick drop, Servo cut off,
Oillevel monitoring duo-cone seal area Float Position Ripper
Power supply Start equipment Flame glow plug Safety installation Plug socket, Gauge - Indicator, Warning lamps Horn Contrle electronique,Petite vitesse,Contrle Electrovanne: Lame flottante, Descente rapide,
Alimentation Dmarrage Prchauffage Installation de scurit Prise, Instruments de mesure, Voyants de controle Klaxon niveau dhuile double joint life-time area Levier de scurit, Lame flottante Scarificateur
30 S1-30 /9
58 58 58 58
S1-58 /9
8A
5A
30 30 F4
F3 P,0,1,
D+/9
4
P 0 12 3
58 15 54 19 17 50a K4 (+24V) /9
S1
S1-15 /9
86 30 1 3
X32 A1-A(*)
X2 X32 A1-J(*)
65 X2 70
85 87 2 4 5
+ + + F10 F3
K4 K39 + 5A 5A
S21
S S1 31
S12
S S1 31
S47 S S1 31
31 S1 S
X2 X2 S11
6 69
2.5 2.5
10A
8A
5A
H1 F5 F6 F10 X2
14
25A
2A
H2 F8 F15
S1
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
D+
S10
D+ D+
30 86
X2 X2
5 38 X4-C,E /21
K2
X4-A,B /21
87a
85 2.5
2.5 87
X2
X4-I /21
X2 X2 X2 V3
29 25 37 13
X4-D /21
1 X2 X2
2.5
17 62
15 30
35A +
D+ + + + S1
2
F1 o
p
Q t
H5 H23 V4
6
70 H3 H4 H11 H12 H36 H39
87a
87
+ - 31
P1 P2
- G
P3
- G
P4
- G
S8 S K7
12V
+
X5 5
- 49 49a 1 +
1
G2 3
20s - X2 X2 X2
V1 X1
50
47 67 68
K3 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 p
5 4 2 28 17
+ 27 39 51 63 4 16 52 40 41 S S1 31
2 3 31
31 S2 S22 B11
K53
12V
F2
16A
- C A C A
B+ D+
G2 30 50 G G W G W 2 3 2
3
G t o 96
+
+
S
X2 M
0,5
p p p p
S
X2 X2
3
U
53 X2 X2 X2 X2 Q p 500 12 8 2,5 Q - Q - 3
58
50
55 26 1 64 31 31 31 31 31 31 B7 5 4 1 5 4 1
31
M1 31 R2 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B22 K5 B34 B35
G1 K6 B B
88 86(85) X2 X2
2.5
18 30
Y2 Y1 S3
88a
K1 R1 Y25 Y3 H8 Y26 Y16 Y4 Y6
X32 A1-B(*) X2
2.5
X32 A1-D(*)
50
50
54
X32 A1-d(*)
X32 A1-24V(*)
31 31/9
PR 712B F/N xxx - 30845599

PR 722B F/N xxx - 31715599
Stromlaufplan
9 Klimaanlage
10 Heizung, Geblse
11 Standheizung
13
Climatisation Chauffage, Ventilation Chauffage additionel autonome Phares de recul Phares avant H3, Ampoule Phare H4
30/8 S1-30/14
S1-58/8 S1-58/14
F3
5A
D+/8 D+/14
K4(+24V)/8 K4 (+24V)/14
S1-15/8 S1-15/14
10A
F11
10A
8A
F12 F14
S25 1 2 3
X10
X2
12 gn rt
R9
30 86 6 5 4 3 1 2 9 E10 1 7 2 8 10 9 11 12
X14 X2
S S1 31
K18
X15 71
85
1.5
1.5
87a
87
+
S16 p
X2 X2 X2 1,5
21 50 20 31
30 86 86 30 B9
2.5
2.5
4
X8
1,5
p
85 85 1 +
87a
87a
1,5
K11
87
87
K12 +
B8
31
2.5
S S1 31
7 X2 S6
47
X2 X8 0 12 3
1 2 3 4
+
35 6 S9
1.5
X13
X4 X4 1 2.5
S6 S S1 31
K J
87a
1,5
87
30 86 30 86
85
1,5
1.5
1.5
K48
25A
X43 X43 F20 +
5 4
1 X43 C K17 86 30
87 85 87 85
7 K35
p
30 86
R11
1.5
S S1 31
18bar
3 X4
B S27
B17 1,5 G 6 K40
87a
85
87
M M M X43
6 X2 X12 9 5 1 4 2 8 11 3 6 10 12 X11 3
30 86 86 30
1 2 4
23
M11 M10 K42 K43
X4
85 85
87a
87a
H
87
87
E17 M
8 6
X2 Y17 A3 F7 8A
33 X8 t t E9 E8
R3
5 7 F7 8A F13 8A
4 3 9 10 1 8 7 6 5
1.5
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
1.5
rt br-ge rt-ws bl-ws X2
gn
X13 X13 X13 49 61 49 61 43 44

t
1,5
M 2 2 2
B24
6
M6
E16 E15
56a 56b 56a 56b
E1 E2 E13 E14
2
X8
Y14 3
31/8 31/14
PR 712B F/N xxx - 30845599

Stromlaufplan .
PR 722B F/N xxx - 31715599
Options non equipes
14 15 16 17Luftgefederter Sitz 18 19 20
Back Up Alarm lstandskontrolle
Betankungspumpe Windenfreischaltung Relais zus. zu K4 Kraftstoffwasserabscheider heizbar
Driverseat w.air suspension
Back up alarm Engine oil level Refueling pump Winch Freespool Relais add. to K4 Fuel water seperator heated
Sige conducteur avec
Alarme marche arrire Voyant niveau dhuile Pompe de remplissage suspension air Dbrayage du treuil Relais supl. K4 Nettoyer - carburant chauffe
S1-30/13 S1-30/21
S1-58/13 S1-58/21
20A
16A
F13 F13
S1-15/13 S1-15/21
K4(+24V)/13 K4+24V/21
10A
10A
F6 F6
5A
5A
F6 8A F11 F11
2,5
+ +
2.5
S S1 S1 S
2.5
S28 S29
86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30
85 87 87 K78 85 87 K41 85
87a
87
87a
85
87a
5A
F3 K9
K37
2.5
2,5
X2
42
+
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
10 11 8 22 56 9

S S1 31
S20
2,5
p
1,5 M
31
B9 H10 M12
A7
br
bl
15C
X2 X2 X65 R10
p 59 57 M
1,5
ge/gn
B8
31 M8 H18 H14
A6
V13
X2
(C) S +(A) 48
)A(+ S (C)
2,5
Q Q
B10 V9 (B) (B)

V17
X5 5
Y15
31/13 31/21
PR 712B F/N xxx - 30845599

Stromlaufplan
.
PR 722B F/N xxx - 31715599
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Warnleuchte Kabine Warnblitzleuchte
Warning light cab Radio Warning flash light
Eclaireage cabine Phares de travail Girophare Cirquit essuie lave - glce avant, arrire, gauche, droit
Voyant dalarme cabine Lumire
+24V
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5
X47
1,5
1,5
5
1,5
1
S44 - +
1 24V
S7 F26 F25
8A
8A
12V
U1
86 30
X4 C,E/8
(F3/8) K38
85 87
12V
1,5
X4 A,B/8
(F8 +24V/4) E7 M
+ L
X4 I/8 per+
F27
8A
H13 F29
8A
F28 2A 3A
(X5-5/5)
X4 A2 -
R
D
X4 D/8
2 10
2 10
2 10
2 10
0,1
F30
5A
X37-2
0,1
0,1
0,1
(P4/5) 1
7 7 7 7
5 5 5 5
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
X42 X42 S5 S4 S17 S18

2 3 1
X47
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
5
1 3 X46 X46 S45
2
1
E4 E3 E6 E5 X41 X38
2 4 5 1 2 3
X39 1 1 2 3
X40 1
K10 53a 2 3 2 3
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
31b
31b
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M M M M
H30
X37-1
2,5
3 M13 M5 31 M7 M2 31
M3 31
M4 31
X42
1
X4 X46 X46
3
I H17 3
2,5
31/20 31
PR 712B F/N xxx - 30845599

Stromlaufplan .
PR 722B F/N xxx - 31715599

Note:

ge = yellow
gn = green


F9 8A free 3
suspension
F13 refueling pump, additional lights, fuel preheater 13,20
F31 35A automatic circuit breaker - glow plug system 3

B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 B17 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure (0.5 bar) /5 B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2,5 bar) /5
B7 horn /6
Mjfcifss!
Parts list - Current flow diagram PR 732 B F/N xxx-30013135
Datum Edition Date PR 742 B F/N xxx-30013088

Page
Feuille 9.1.30.00
E1 (option) light front left /13 R3 resistor - blower motor - heater /10
E2 (option) light front right /13 R9 (option) potentiometer - auxiliary heater /11
E3 working light rear right /22 R10 (option) fuel heater /20
E4 working light front left /22 R11 (option) - potentiometer - air conditioner /9
E5 working light rear left /22
E6 working light front right /22 S1 starter switch w. preheat position /2
E7 dome light /21 S2 neutral starting switch /4
E8 (option) back up light rear left /12 S3 emergency off switch /4
E9 (option) back up light rear right /12 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /26
E10 (option) heater for auxiliary heater /11 S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system rear /26
E13 (option) high/low beam light front right /13 S6 (option) push button switch - working light front /13
E14 (option) high/low beam light front left /13 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /22
E15 heater /9 S8 push button switch - horn /6
E16 (option) evaporator /10 S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /10
E17 (option) condenser /9 S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
S11 push button switch - float position /8
Fx F1 - F30 see front page for listing S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
G1 alternator /1 S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /26
G2 batteries /1 S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /26
S20 (option) push button switch - winch release /18
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 S21 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3 S22 (option) push button switch - float position - ripper /8
H3 indicator light - air filter /5 S25 (option) clock - auxiliary heater /11
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 S27 (option) rocker switch - low beam - high beam light /13
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 S28 (option) push button switch refueling pump - on /16
H8 indicator light - float position /8 S29 (option) push button switch refueling pump - off /16
H10 (option) indicator light - engine oil level /15 S44 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /7 S45 (option) rocker switch - warning flash light /27
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7 S47 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection
H13 (option) beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /23 (at travel joystick) /7
H14 (option) indicator light - winch release /18
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /V9 /24 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20
H18 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /16
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5 V1 diode 1A (K1) /1
V4 diode 1A (H5) /5
K1 battery main switch /1 V9 (option) sensor - engine oil level /15
K2 relay - starter cut off /2 V13 (option) diode 1A (V9) /15
K3 relay - power guard /2 V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /10
K4 relay 35A - power supply /4 V18 (option) diode 1A (K37) /16
K5 relay - reduced travel speed range indicator light /7
K6 relay - electronic fault indicator /7 X1 electrical outlet 24V /5
K7 step relay - float position /8 X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole
K9 (option) relay - refueling pump /16 X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole
K10 relay - warning light /24 X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
K11 (option) relay - condenser /9 identification) /5 /15
K12 (option) relay - solenoid clutch - air conditioner /9 X8 coupling - cab - heater
K17 (option) relay - flame glow plug - auxiliary heater /11 X10
K18 (option) relay - auxiliary heater /10 (option) plug - auxiliary heater
K35 (option) relay - back up light /12 X15
K38 relay 35A - working light /22 X37-2 plug roof panel - power supply
K42 (option) relay - high/low beam light front (low beam light) /13 X41 plug to M5 /26
K43 (option) relay - high/low beam light front (high beam light) /13 X42 plug to E3, E4, E5, E6 /21
K48 (option) relay - back up light /12 X43 (option) plug - air conditioner /9
K53 time relay - glow plug system /3 X46 plug to M7,M13 /26
K71 relay - glow plug system /4 X47 plug to U1, A2 /21
K78 (option) relay 35A - parallel K4 /19 X65 (option) plug - operators seat with air suspension /17
M1 starter /2 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3

M2 windshield wiper front /26 Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /3
M3 windshield wiper left door /26 Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
M4 windshield wiper right door /26 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
M3 windshield wiper left door /26 Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
M4 windshield wiper right door /26 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
M5 windshield wiper rear /26 Y15 (option) solenoid valve - winch release /18
M6 fresh air fan - heater /10 Y16 (option) solenoid valve - float position - ripper /8
M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /26 Y17 (option) fuel pump auxiliary heater /11
M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /16 Y25 solenoid valve - float position /8
M11 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser left /right /9 Y34 (option) solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /3
M12 (option) - compressor operators seat with air suspension /17 Y47 (option) solenoid valve - ultra quick drop left /8
M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /26 Y48 (option) solenoid valve - ultra quick drop right /8
P1 hour meter /5
P2 fuel gauge /5

Magnetventile: Schildfreigabe, Sicherheitsschaltung Arbeitshydraulik , Schnellsenken,
7 (bei Fahrgeber)oder (permanent) 8 zus.Schnellsenkventil, Heckaufreisserfreigabe
Stromversorgung Startanlage Steckdose, Anzeigeninstrumente, Warnlampen Hupe Electronic System Guard, Red.Travel Speed Solenoid Valves:Float Position, Quick Drop, add. Quick drop, Servo cut off,
Power supply Start equipment Flame glow plug Safety installation Plug socket, Gauge - Indicator, Warning lamps Horn Electrovanne: Lame flottante, Descente rapide, Descente rapide additional,
30 30
58 58 58 58
S1-58
F4
8A
5A
30 30
F3 P,0,1,
D+
P 0 123
4
58 15 54 19 17 50a +24V
S1
S1-15
A1-A
86 30 86 30
X2 A1-J
65 X2 70
85 87 85
+ + + S47 F10 F3
87a
87
K4 K39 + 5A 5A
S11
S S1 31 S S1 31 S S1 31
S21 S12 31 S1 S
X2 X2
6 69
2.5 2.5
10A
8A
F5 F6 X2
2A
14
25A
2A
H1 H2 F2 F8 F15
S1
2.5
2.5
2.5
S
S10
D+ D+ D+
30 86
X2 X2 X2
1 5 38 X4-C,E
K2
87 85 2.5 X4-A,B
87a
2.5
X4-I
X2 X2 X2 X2 V3
29 25 37 13
X4-D
1 X2 X2
49 49a
2.5
17 62
20s 3 2
35A S1 +
D+ + + +
2
F1 o
6
10 Q t p p
2 31
+
70 H3 H4 H5 H23 H11 H12 1
17
K53 - - G
P3
- G
P4
- G
S8 S K7
4 5
31
P1 P2 B11
12V
35A V4
+
1 5 X5
- F31 1 +
G2 30 86 30 86
-
50
V1 X1 X2
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
6
+ K3 2 3 27 39 51 63 4 16 52 28 40 41 S S1 31
S2 S22
87a
Y6
87
85
12V
87 85
K71
-
B+ D+
G2 30 50 G G W G W 30 85 30 85
G
X2 M p p p p B7 X2 X2
3 X2 X2 o Y48
10
53 Q t p 500 8 8 58
50
U 26 2.5 3
64 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 86 86
87a
87a
R2 B2
87
87
G1
31
M1 31
B3 B4 B5 B6 B22 K5 K6
88 86(85) X2 X2
18 30 Y47
Y34 Y1 S3
88a
K1 R1 Y25 Y3 H8 Y26 Y16 Y4
X2
50
50
54 A1-D
A1-d
A1-24V
31 31

Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm2 ----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt PR 742 B F/N xxx - 30013088
2
Options wired, not equipped Current Flow Diagram
2
Options non equipes 01 03 Schmas lectriques 9.1.30.00/1
9 Klimaanlage
10Heizung, Geblse 11 Standheizung
12 Rckfahrscheinwerfer 13Scheinwerfer vorne H3, Biluxscheinwerfer vorne H4
Chauffage additionel autonome Phares de recul Phares avant H3, Ampoule Phare H4
Climatisation Chauffage, Ventilation
30 30
S1-58/2 S1-58/2
F3
5A
D+ D+
+24V +24V
S1-15/2 S1-15/2
10A
F11
10A
F14
8A
F12
S25 1 2 3
X10
E10
X2
12 gn rt
R9 6 5 4 3 1 2 9 1 7 2 8 10 9 11 12
30 86
X15 X2
S S1 31 X14
K18
85
71
1.5
87a
1.5
87
+
S16 p
X2 X2 X2
21 50 20 31
30 86 86 30 B9
2.5
2.5
4
1,5
X8 p
85 85 1 +
87a
87a
K11
87
87
K12 + 31
2.5 B8
7 X2 S6
S S1 31
47
X2 X8 0 12 3
1 2 3 4
+
35 6 S9
1.5
X13
X4 X4 1
2.5
S6
S S1 31
K J
87a
1,5
87
30 86 30 86
85
1.5
1.5
1,5
25A
X43 X43 F20 +
5 4
1 X43 C 86 30
87 85 87 85
7 K17 K35 K48
p
R11 30 86
1.5
18bar S S1 31
3 X4
B S27
B17 1,5 G 6
85
87a
K40
87
M M M X43
6 X2 X12
30 86 86 30
23 9 5 1 4 2 8 11 3 6 10 12 X11 1 2 3 4
M11 M10 K42 K43
X4
85 85
87a
87a
H
E17
87
87
M
X2 8 6
A3 F7 8A
33 X8 t t E9 E8
R3 Y17
5 7
F7 8A F13 8A
4 3 9 10 1 8 7 6 5
1.5
1.5
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
rt br-ge rt-ws bl-ws
X13 X13 X13
gn
49 61 49 61 43 44
t
1,5
M 2 2 2
B24
M6 6
E16 E15
56a 56b 56a 56b
2 .
E1 E2 E13 E14
X8
Y14 3
31 31

All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 Options wired, not equipped Current Flow Diagram
Voyant niveau dhuile Pompe de remplissage Relais supl. K4 Nettoyer - carburant chauffe
Alarme marche arrire suspension air Dbrayage du treuil
30 30
58 58
20A
16A
F13 F13
15 15
+24V +24V
10A
10A
F6 F6
5A
5A
F11 F11
8A
F6
2,5
+ +
2.5
S S1 S1 S
2.5
S28 S29
86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30
85 87 87 K78 85 87 K41 85
87a
87
87a
85
87a
5A
F3 K9
K37
2.5
2,5
X2
42
+
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
10 11 22 56 9

8 S S1 31
S20
2,5
p
M
31
B9 H10 M12
A7
br
bl
15C
X2 X2 X65 R10
p 59 57 M
H14
ge/gn
31 M8
B8 H14
A6
V13
X2
(C) S +(A) 48
)A(+ S (C)
2,5
Q Q
B10 V9 (B) (B)

V17
X5 5
Y15
31 31
Stromlaufplan
.
PR 732 B F/N xxx - 30013135
2
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Kabinenleuchte Arbeitsscheinwerfer Rundumleuchte Wisch-Waschanlage:Hinten, Vorne, Links, Rechts Warnblitzleuchte
Warnleuchte Kabine
Dome light Working lights Beacon light Windshield wiper and washer System front, rear, left, right Warning flash light
Eclaireage cabine Phares de travail Girophare Voyant dalarme cabine Cirquit essuie lave - glce avant, arrire, gauche, droit Lumire
F8(4) +24V
+24V
F3(8)
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5
X47
1,5
1,5
5
1,5
1
S44 - +
1 24V
S7 F26 F25
8A
8A
12V
U1
86 30
K38
85 87
12V
1,5
E7 M
per+ + L
F27
8A
H13 F29
8A
2A
F28 3A
X4 A2 -
R
D
P4(5)
2 10
2 10
2 10
2 10
0,1
F30
5A
X37-2
0,1
0,1
0,1
7 7 7 7
1 5 5 5 5
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
X42 X42 S5 S4 S17 S18

2 3 1
X47
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
5
86 30 X46 X46 S45
2
1
E4 E3 E6 E5 X41 X38
K10 85 X39 1 X40 1
87a
1 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3
87
53a
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
31b
31b
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M M M M
H30
X37-1
2,5
3 M13 M5 31 M7 M2 31
M3 31
M4 31
X42
1
X4 X46 X46
3 3
I
H17
2,5
X5-5(5)
31 31

2
Note:
d= with air conditioner or auxiliary heater open wire from F11
e= connect wire at K4 /87 (step 4)

ge = yellow
gn = green


F9 8A free 3
F11 10A heater air conditioner, operator's seat with air 10,12,17,18
suspension
F13 refueling pump, fuel preheater 16,20
F31 35A automatic circuit breaker - glow plug system 3

A1 electronic box - connection /8 see group 10.2. B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm / back up light (1,5
A2 (option) radio /25 bar) /12 /14
A3 (option) controller auxiliary heater /11 B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm / back up light (1,5
A6 (option) refueling pump /16 bar) /12 /14
A7 (option) operator's seat with air suspension /17 B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /14
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 B17 (option) push button switch - air conditioner (18 bar) /9
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure (0.5 bar) /5 B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2,5 bar) /5
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12 bar) /5 B34 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area left /7
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8 bar) /5 B35 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area right /7
B7 horn /6
Mjfcifss!
Parts list -Current flow diagram PR 732 B F/N xxx-3136 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-3089 5599

Page 9.1.31.00
Feuille
E1 (option) light front left /13 R3 resistor - blower motor - heater /10
E2 (option) light front right /13 R9 (option) potentiometer - auxiliary heater /11
E3 working light rear right /22 R10 (option) fuel heater /20
E4 working light front left /22 R11 (option) - potentiometer - air conditioner /9
E5 working light rear left /22
E6 working light front right /22 S1 starter switch w. preheat position /2
E7 dome light /21 S2 neutral starting switch /4
E8 (option) back up light rear left /12 S3 emergency off switch /4
E9 (option) back up light rear right /12 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /26
E10 (option) heater for auxiliary heater /11 S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system rear /26
E15 heater /9 S6 (option) push button switch - working light front /13
E16 (option) evaporator air conditioner /10 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /22
E17 (option) condenser air conditioner /9 S8 push button switch - horn /6
S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /10
Fx F1 - F31 see front page for listing S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
S11 push button switch - float position /8
G1 alternator /1 S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
G2 batteries /1 S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /26
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3 S20 (option) push button switch - winch release /18
H3 indicator light - air filter /5 S21 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 S22 (option) push button switch - float position - ripper /8
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 S25 (option) clock - auxiliary heater /11
H8 indicator light - float position /8 S28 (option) push button switch refueling pump - on /16
H10 (option) indicator light - engine oil level /15 S29 (option) push button switch refueling pump - off /16
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /7 S44 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7 S45 (option) rocker switch - warning flash light /27
H13 (option) beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /23 S47 (option) push button switch - travel speed range selection
H14 (option) indicator light - winch release /18 (at travel joystick) /7
H18 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /16 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area left /7 V3 diode 1A (K2) /4
H39 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area right /7 V4 diode 1A (H5) /5
K35 (option) relay - back up light /12 X37-1 plug roof panel - power supply
K48 (option) relay - back up light /12 X42 plug to E3, E4, E5, E6 /21
K53 time relay - glow plug system /3 X43 (option) plug - air conditioner /9
K71 relay - glow plug system /4 X46 plug to M7,M13 /26
K78 (option) relay 35A - parallel K4 /19 X47 plug to U1, A2 /21
X65 (option) plug - operator's seat with air suspension /17
M1 starter /2
M2 windshield wiper front /26 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3
M3 windshield wiper left door /26 Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /3
M4 windshield wiper right door /26 Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
M3 windshield wiper left door /26 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
M4 windshield wiper right door /26 Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
M5 windshield wiper rear /26 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
M6 fresh air fan - heater /10 Y15 (option) solenoid valve - winch release /18
M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /26 Y16 (option) solenoid valve - float position - ripper /8
M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /16 Y17 (option) fuel pump auxiliary heater /11
M10 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser middle /9 Y25 solenoid valve - float position /8
M11 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser left /right /9 Y26 (option) solenoid valve - float position - ripper /8
M12 (option) - compressor operator's seat with air suspension /17 Y34 (option) solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /3
M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /26 Y47 (option) solenoid valve - ultra quick drop left /8
Y48 (option) solenoid valve - ultra quick drop right /8
P1 hour meter /5
P2 fuel gauge /5

1 2 3 Flammstartanlage 4 Sicherheitseinrichtung 5 6
Elektronikberwachung,Reduz. Fahrgeschw.
7 Electronic
lstandsberwachung Doppellifetime 8 Magnetventile: Schildfreigabe, Sicherheitsschaltung Arbeitshydraulik , Schnellsenken,
Stromversorgung Startanlage Steckdose, Anzeigeninstrumente, Warnlampen Hupe System Guard,Red.Travel Speed Solenoid Valves: Float Position, Quick drop, Servo cut off,
Oillevel monitoring duo-cone seal area Float Position Ripper
Power supply Start equipment Flame glow plug Safety installation Plug socket, Gauge - Indicator, Warning lamps Horn Contrle electronique,Petite vitesse,Contrle Electrovanne: Lame flottante, Descente rapide,
Alimentation Dmarrage Prchauffage Installation de scurit Prise, Instruments de mesure, Voyants de controle Klaxon niveau dhuile double joint life-time area Levier de scurit, Lame flottante Scarificateur
30 S1-30 /9
58 58 58 58
S1-58 /9
8A
5A
30 30 F4
F3 P,0,1,
D+/9
4
P 0 12 3
58 15 54 19 17 50a K4 (+24V) /9
S1
S1-15 /9
86 30 1 3
X32 A1-A(*)
X2 X32 A1-J(*)
65 X2 70
85 87 2 4 5 + + + F10 F3
K4 K39 + 5A 5A
S21
S S1 31
S12
S S1 31
S47 S S1 31
31 S1 S
X2 X2 S11
6 69
2.5 2.5
10A
8A
H1 F5 F6 X2
14
25A
2A
2A
H2 F2 F8 F15
S1
2.5
2.5
2.5
D+
S10
D+ D+
30 86
X2 X2
5 38 X4-C,E /21
K2 X2
87 85
1
2.5 X4-A,B /21
87a
2.5
X4-I /21
X2 X2 X2 X2 V3
29 25 37 13
X4-D /21
1
49 49a X2 X2
2.5
20s 17 62
15 30
35A +
D+ + + + S1
2
F1 10 o
p
K53 31
Q t
H5 H23 V4
6
2 p
+
70 H3 H4 H11 H12 H36 H39 31 17
87a
- - G - G - G K7
87
P1 P2 P3 P4 S8 S B11
31
35A
12V
+
1
X5 5
- F31 1 +
G2 3 1
- X2 X2 X2
V1 30 86
X1
50
47 67 68
K3 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2

6
+ 5 4 2
2 3 27 39 51 63 4 16 52 28 40 41 S S1 31 Y6
S2 S22
12V
87 85
K71
- C A C A
B+ D+
G2 30 50 G G W G W 3 2 3 2
G
+
+
S
X2 M p p p p
S
X2 X2 Y48
3
U
53 X2 X2 Q t
o p 500 12 8 2,5 Q - Q - 3
58
50
26 64 31 31 31 31 31 31 B7 5 4 1 5 4 1
31
M1 31 R2 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B22 K5 K6 B34 B35
G1 B B
88 86(85) X2 X2
10
18 30 Y47
Y34 Y1 S3
88a
K1 R1 Y25 Y3 H8 Y26 Y16 Y4
X32 A1-B(*) X2
X32 A1-D(*)
50
50
54
X32 A1-d(*)
X32 A1-24V(*)
31 31/9

PR 742 B F/N xxx - 30895599
9 Klimaanlage
10 Heizung, Geblse
11 Standheizung
13 Scheinwerfer vorne H3
Air conditioner Heating, Fresh air fan Auxilary heater Back up lights Headlights front H3
Climatisation Chauffage, Ventilation Chauffage additionel autonome Phares de recul Phares avant H3
30/8 S1-30/14
S1-58/8 S1-58/14
F3
5A
D+/8 D+/14
K4(+24V)/8 K4 (+24V)/14
S1-15/8 S1-15/14
10A
F11
10A
8A
F12 F14
S25 1 2 3
X10
X2
12 gn rt
R9
30 86 6 5 4 3 1 2 9 E10 1 7 2 8 10 9 11 12
X14 X2
S S1 31
K18
X15 71
85
1.5
1.5
87a
87
+
S16 p
X2 X2 X2 1,5
21 50 20 31
30 86 86 30 B9
2.5
2.5
4
X8
1,5
p
85 85 1 +
87a
87a
1,5
K11
87
87
K12 +
B8
31
2.5
7 X2 S6
S S1 31
47
X2 X8 0 12 3
1 2 3 4
35 6 S9
1.5
X13
X4 X4 1 2.5
K J
87a
1,5
87
30 86 30 86
85
1,5
K48
25A
X43 X43 F20
5 4
1 X43 C K17 86 30
87 85 87 85
7 K35
p
30 86
R11
1.5
18bar
B
B17
3 X4 K40
1,5 G 6
87a
85
87
M M M X43
6 X2 X12 9 5 1 4 2 8 11 3 6 10 12 X11 3
1 2 4
23
M11 M10 X4
H
E17 M
8 6
X2 Y17 A3 F7 8A
33 X8 t t E9 E8
5 7
R3
4 3 9 10 1 8 7 6 5
1.5
1.5
rt br-ge rt-ws bl-ws X2 X2
gn
X13 X13 X13 49 61

t
1,5
M 2 2 2
B24
6
M6
E16 E15
E1 E2
2
X8
Y14 3
31/8 31/14

Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm2 ----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt .
PR 742 B F/N xxx - 30895599
Alarme marche arrire Voyant niveau dhuile Pompe de remplissage Relais supl. K4
suspension air Dbrayage du treuil Nettoyer - carburant chauffe
S1-30/13 S1-30/21
S1-58/13 S1-58/21
20A
16A
F13 F13
S1-15/13 S1-15/21
K4(+24V)/13 K4+24V/21
10A
10A
F6 F6
5A
5A
F6 8A F11 F11
2,5
+ +
2.5
S S1 S1 S
2.5
S28 S29
86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30
85 87 87 K78 85 87 K41 85
87a
87
87a
85
87a
5A
F3 K9
K37
2.5
2,5
X2
42
+
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
10 11 8 22 56 9

S S1 31
S20
2,5
p
1,5 M
31
B9 H10 M12
A7
br
bl
15C
X2 X2 X65 R10
p 59 57 M
1,5
ge/gn
B8
31 M8 H18 H14
A6
V13
X2
(C) S +(A) 48
)A(+ S (C)
2,5
Q Q
B10 V9 (B) (B)

V17
X5 5
Y15
31/13 31/21

PR 742 B F/N xxx - 30895599
.

01 02
Options non equipes
Schmas lectriques 9.1.31.00/3
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Warnleuchte Kabine Warnblitzleuchte
Warning light cab Radio Warning flash light
Eclaireage cabine Phares de travail Girophare Voyant dalarme cabine Cirquit essuie lave - glce avant, arrire, gauche, droit
Lumire
+24V
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5
X47
1,5
1,5
5
1,5
1
S44 - +
1 24V
S7 F26 F25
8A
8A
12V
U1
86 30
X4 C,E/8
(F3/8) K38
85 87
12V
1,5
X4 A,B/8
(F8 +24V/4) E7 M
+ L
X4 I/8 per+
F27
8A
H13 F29
8A
F28 2A 3A
(X5-5/5)
X4 -
D A2 R
X4 D/8
2 10
2 10
2 10
2 10
0,1
F30
5A
X37-2
0,1
0,1
0,1
(P4/5) 1
7 7 7 7
5 5 5 5
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
X42 X42 S5 S4 S17 S18

2 3 1
X47
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
5
1 3 X46 X46 S45
2
1
E4 E3 E6 E5 X41 X38
2 4 5 1 2 3
X39 1 2 3 1 2 3
X40 1 2 3
K10
53a
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
31b
31b
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M M M M
H30
X37-1
2,5
3 M13 M5 31 M7 M2 31
M3 31
M4 31
X42
1
X4 X46 X46
3
I H17 3
2,5
31/20 31

PR 742 B F/N xxx - 30895599
Current Flow Diagram
01 02 Schmas lectriques
Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2 Options non equipes 9.1.31.00/4
Note:
ge = yellow gn = green
pos.Ampere application - standard - option step

F1 45A power supply 1
F3 5A charge indicator, dome light back up alarm, radio 1,7,13
F4 8A electronic supply, servo cut off, starter cut 4
off
F6 5A instruments, indicator lights, horn, monitoring - engine oil level 5,6,10
fan drive B28, oil level sensor - travel gear -
cone seal area
F9 20A shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) 3
F10 5A quick drop, fan drive B29 pin puller 5,8,11,15
F11 10A heater air conditioner, operators seat with air 9,12
suspension
F13 refueling pump 10
F15 3A float position, fan drive B30 4,15
F25 8A windshield wiper and washer system doors 21
F26 8A windshield wiper and washer system front, 21
rear
F27 10A working light front left, rear right, 2. working 17
light left instrument lights
F28 10A working light front right, rear left, 2. working 17
light right
F30 8A beacon light, warning flash light 18
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx- 20022026

Page 9.1.50.00
Feuille
A1 electronic box - connection /7 see group 10.2. M5 windshield wiper rear /21
A2 (option) radio /2 M6 fresh air fan - heater /9
A6 (option) refueling pump /10 M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /21
A7 (option) operators seat with air suspension /12 M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /10
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 M11 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser left /right /9
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /5 M12 (option) - compressor operators seat with air suspension /12
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (500 mWs = 50 mbar vacuum) /5 M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /21
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /5 P1 hour meter /5
B7 horn /6 P2 fuel gauge /5
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm (1,5bar /13 P3 coolant temperature gauge /5
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm (1,5bar) /13 P4 engine oil pressure gauge /5
B11 pressure switch - quick drop (24 bar) /8 R1 flame glow plug /3
B17 (option) pressure switch - air conditioner /9 R2 fuel level sending unit /2
B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2,5bar) /5 R3 resistor - blower motor - heater /9
B24 (option) electronic thermostat air conditioner /9 R11 (option) - potentiometer - air conditioner /9
B27 temperature sending unit - hydraulic oil (96C) /5 R12 flame glow plug /3
B28 temperature switch - fan drive (coolant temperature) /5
B29 temperature switch - fan drive (hydraulic oil temperature) /5 S1 starter switch w. preheat position /2
B30 temperature switch - fan drive (boost air temperature) /5 S2 neutral starting switch /4
B32 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area /5 S3 emergency off switch /4
mounted from machine PR752 F /N xxx-2007 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /21
S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system rear /21
E1 (option) light front left /14 S6 (option) push button switch - working light front /14
E2 (option) light front right /B14 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /17
E3 working light rear right /17 S8 push button switch - horn /6
E4 working light front left /17 S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /9
E5 working light rear left /17 S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
E6 working light front right /17 S11 push button switch - float position /8
E7 dome light /16 S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
E11 heater /9 S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
E18 2. working light front left /17 S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /21
E19 2. working light front right /17 S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /21
S28 (option) push button switch refueling pump - on /10
Fx F1 - F32 see front page for listing S29 (option) push button switch refueling pump - off /10
S44 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
G1 alternator /1 S48 (option) push button switch hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
G2 batteries /1 S52 push button switch - pin puller /11
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20

H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3
H3 indicator light - air filter /5 V1 diode 1A (K1) /1
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 V2 diode 1A (K2) /4
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 V3 diode 1A (H5) /5
H8 indicator light - float position /8 V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /10
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /7 V18 (option) diode 1A (K37) /9
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7 V34 (option) diode 1A (H35) /5
H13 beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /18
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /B27 /19 X1 electrical outlet 24V /5
H18 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /10 X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5 X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole
H35 indicator light - hydraulic oil overheating /5 X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10) /5
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area /5 X8 coupling - cab - heater
mounted from machine PR752 F /N xxx-2007 X37-1 plug
X37-2 plug
K1 battery main switch /1 X38 plug to M3 /21
K2 relay - starter cut off /2 X39 plug to M2 /21
K4 relay - power supply /4 X41 plug to M5 /21
K5 relay - reduced travel speed range indicator light /7 X42 plug to E3, E4, E5, E6, E18, E19 /17
K6 relay - electronic fault indicator /7 X46 plug to M7,M13 /21
K7 step relay - float position /8 X47 plug to U1, A2 /20
K9 (option) relay - refueling pump /10 X57 plug to Y51
K10 relay - warning light /19
K11 (option) relay - condenser /9 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3
K12 (option) relay - solenoid clutch - air conditioner /9 Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
K37 (option) relay - refueling pump - shut off /10 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
K38 relay - working light /17 Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
K39 relay - power guard /4 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
K53 time relay - glow plug system /3 Y34 solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /2
K70 (option) relay - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15 Y25 2. solenoid valve - float position /8
K71 relay - glow plug system /3 Y45 (option) solenoid valve - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
K73 relay - shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) (Y49) /3 Y46 (option) solenoid valve - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
K74 (option) relay - light front /14 Y49 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /3
K75 2. relay - working light /17 1 = pull, 2 = hold
Y50 solenoid valve - quick drop on the quick drop block /8
M1 starter /2 Y51 (option) solenoid valve - pin puller /11
M2 windshield wiper front /21 Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive /5
M3 windshield wiper left door /21
M4 windshield wiper right door /21
1 2 Startanlage 3 Flammstartanlage 4 5 6 7 Kabinenanschl.-X4,
Elektronikberwachung,Reduz. Fahrgeschw.,
Boxanschl.-A1
Stromversorgung Sicherheitseinrichtung Steckdose, Anzeigeinstrumente, Warnlampen Lftersteuerung lstandsberwachung Hupe Electronic System Guard,Low Speed Select,
Power Supply Start equipment Flame glow plug Safety Installation Plug Socket, Gauge - Indicator, Warning Lamps Fan Device Oillevel Monitor Horn Cabine conn.-X4, E-Box conn.-A1
Alimentation Dmarrage Prchauffage Installation de scurit Prise, Instruments de mesure, Voyants de contrle Commande Ventilateur Monitorage Niveau D`Huile Klaxon Contrle electronique,Petite vitesse,
Conn. Cabine-X4, Conn.-E-Box-A1
30
30/8
58 58 58 58
58/8
8A
5A
30 30
2,5 F4
Y4/8
F3 P,0,1,
S11/+/8
D+/8
2.5
P 0 123
58 15 54 19 17 50a +24V/8
S1
15/8
86
X32 A1-A(*)
86 30 30
X2
65
+ F3
85 87
87a
87
87a
85 5A
3A
F10
5A
5A
F6 F6
5A
K4 K39 F15
S S1 31
S12
X2
X2 X2 X2 6
2.5 2.5 48 15 44 X32 A1-J(*)
10A
5A
F5 F6
25A
20A
F2
3A
F9 F15
3A
F8
H1 H2
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
> 50 > 60 > 85

< 55 < 65 < 90
t t t
D+ D+ D+
30
B30 B29 B28
85 86 30
X4-C,E/16
K2
87
87 86 85
87a
87a
2X1,5 X4-A,B/16
K73
2.5
X4-I/16
X2 X2 X2 X2 V3
29 25 37 13 X4-D/16
1 X2 X2 X2 X2
1 43 62
2.5
17
S1
45A
2
P1 D+ P2 + P3 + P4 +
F1
2.5
2.5 rt o
6
Q t p
2 S
+
70
- - G - G - G
H3 H4 H23 H35 H5 V4 H36 S8 H11 H12
45A
12V
+
X2 1 5
F32 V34 X5
- 26 1
G2 - X2
2.5 rt
30 86 39
X1
50
V1 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
6
+ 49 49a 88 86 27 51 63 4 52 46 16 28 40 69 71 41
2 3
K3 20s S2
12V
87a
85
87
- 31 85
G2 K53 K71 88a
G G W GW G W 30 85 30 85
B+ D+ 30 50 96 96
G X2 0,5 + A
p p p p
3 53 M X2 Q t
o p 500 17 2,5 t
o
8 Q
S C
50
U 64 31 31 - B
B7
31 31 31 31 31 31 86
87a
87a
87
86
87
G1
31 M1 31 R2 B2 B3 B4 B5 B22 B27 B6 B32 K5 K6
2.5
88 86(85)
1 2 X2 X2
18 30
6
Y34 Y1 S3 Y52
88a Y49
K1 R12 R1
A1 - B(*)
X2
X32 A1-D(*)
50
50
54
X32 A1-d(*)
2.5
+24V X32 A1-C(*)

31 31/8
2
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm ----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt
2
Options wired, not equipped Stromlaufplan .

Current Flow Diagramm PR 752 F/N xxx - 20022026
8 Magnetventile: Schildfreigabe, Sicherheitsschaltung Arbeitshydraulik,
9 10 11
Schnellsenken Klimaanlage,Heizung,Geblse Betankungspumpe Bolzenzieher
Solenoid Valves: Float Position, Quick Drop, Servo cut off Air conditioner, Heating, Fresh air fan Refueling pump Pin Puller/Ripper
Electrovanne: Lame flottante, Descente rapide, Levier de scurit Climatisation, Chauffage, Ventilation Pompe de remplissage Axe dent ripper
30/7 30/12
58/7 58/12
20A
S2-3/4 F13
S2-3/4
D+/7 D+/12
K4(+24V)/4 K4(+24V)/12
15/7 15/12
10A
5A
5A
5A
F11 F6 F6 F10
10A
F12
F10
S11 + 5A
+ + S
31 S1 S
S52
S1
S S1 S1 S
S28 S29
2.5
S S1 31
X2 X2 X2 86 30 86 30
14
+ 21 50
S16 V18
X56 87 87
87a
85
87a
85
K11 30 86 K12 86 30 K9
2 4 K37
S1 X8
1.5
1
87a
87a
87 85
87
85
2.5
+
S10 S2 X2
38 7
0 12 3
X56 X4 X4 X2 X8
1 K J 35 6 S9 1 2 3 4
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
5 10 11 8 47
3 2
+ 1 C
X43
p 7 R11
18bar X57
K7 1 4 5 X4 B A
1.5
3
B17 G
X43 X43 X43 X2

5 4 6 23
p
24bar X4
H M
B11 31
1.5
X2 H18
33
M8 Y51
A6
8 6
t t
X2 X8
5 7 R3
3
4 3 9 10 1 8 7 6 5 X57
1.5
2.5
B
)A(+ S (C)
gn

t
M Q
E17 B24
Y25 Y3 H8 Y6 Y50 M6 (B)
Y4 M M M V17
E16 E15 2
M11 M10 X8
Y14 3
31/7 31/12
Stromlaufplan .
2 ----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt

Options wired, not equipped Current Flow Diagramm PR 752 F/N xxx - 20022026

12 13 14 15
Luftgefederter Sitz Back Up Alarm Scheinwerfer vorne Schnittwinkelverstellung
Driver seat with air suspension Back up alarm Headlights Front Blade pitch Adjustment
Sige conducteur avec suspension air Alarme marche arrire Phares de route Rglage de angle de coupe
30/11 30
58/11 58
D+/11 D+
K4(+24V)/11 +24V
15/11 15
10A
5A
5A
F11 F3 F10
+
30 86
1,5
S6 S S1 31
K70
87a
87
85
2,5
X2
42
X2
22
30 86 X2 X2 X2
72 67 68
K74
87a
87
85
2
2,5
X8
3
8A
F7
p S48
1,5
1,5
31
M B9
A7
M12 X2 X2
p 49 61
B8 31
1,5
1,5
4
X8
1
E1 E2
Y45 Y46
1,5
1,5
B10
31/11 31
Stromlaufplan
.

2
16 Fahrerstandbeleuchtung
17 Arbeitsscheinwerfer 18
Rundumleuchte
19 20 Radio 21 Wisch-Waschanlage:Hinten, Vorne, Links, Rechts
Working lights Warnleuchte Kabine
Dome light Beacon light Warning light cab Radio Windshield wiper and washer system: rear, front, left, right
Eclairage cabine Phares de travail Girophare Voyant dalarme cabine Radio Circuit essuie - glace arrire, avant gauche, droit
+24V
1,5
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5 X47
5
-
1,5
1,5
S44 1 24V
1 12V
S7
U1
1,5
1,5
86 30 86 30
8A
8A
F26 F25
K38 K75 H13 M
85 87 85 87
+ L
X4-C,E/7 E7 3A
(F3/7)
- R
A2
10A
10A
X4-A,B/7 F29
2A
F27 F28
(F8/4+24V)
X4-I/7 X4
21 0
0,12 1 0
21 0
0,1 0
21
(X5-5/5) D 7 7 7 7
0,1
0,1
X4-D/7 5 5 5 5
(P4/5) X37-2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
1
X42 X42 S5 S4 S17 S18

2 3 X46
X47 X46
2
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
86 30
K10
X41 X39 1 X38 X40 1
E4 E3 E18 E6 E5 E19 3 3
87a
85 12 3 2 12 3 2
87
31b
31b
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
53a
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M13 M7 M2 M M3 M M4 M
2,5
X37-1 31
3 M5 M 31 31
X42
1
X4 H17 X46 X46
I 3 3
2,5
31/15 31
2
Stromlaufplan .

All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 Options wired, not equipped Current Flow Diagramm PR 752 F/N xxx - 20022026
Note:
Continuations from page 00 /1 step 7 to X4 = panel plug panel plug are shown on page 00 /4

ge = yellow
gn = green


off
F6 5A instruments, indicator lights, horn, monitoring - engine oil level 5,6,10
fan drive B28, oil level sensor - travel gear -
cone seal area
F10 5A quick drop, fan drive B29 pin puller 5,8,11,15
suspension
F13 refueling pump 10
F15 3A float position, fan drive B30 4,15
rear
light right
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date
PR752 F/N xxx-20272062
Page
Feuille 9.1.51.00
A1 electronic box - connection /7 see group 10.2. M5 windshield wiper rear /21
A2 (option) radio /2 M6 fresh air fan - heater /9
A6 (option) refueling pump /10 M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /21
A7 (option) operators seat with air suspension /12 M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /10
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 M11 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser left /right /9
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /5 M12 (option) - compressor operators seat with air suspension /12
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (500 mWs = 50 mbar vacuum) /5 M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /21
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /5 P1 hour meter /5
B7 horn /6 P2 fuel gauge /5
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm (1,5bar /13 P3 coolant temperature gauge /5
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm (1,5bar) /13 P4 engine oil pressure gauge /5
B24 (option) electronic thermostat air conditioner /9 R11 (option) - potentiometer - air conditioner /9
B27 temperature sending unit - hydraulic oil (96C) /5 R12 flame glow plug /3
B32 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area /5 S3 emergency off switch /4
mounted from machine PR752 F /N xxx-2007 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /21
E1 (option) light front left /14 S6 (option) push button switch - working light front /14
E2 (option) light front right /B14 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /17
E5 working light rear left /17 S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
E6 working light front right /17 S11 push button switch - float position /8
E7 dome light /16 S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
E11 heater /9 S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
E18 2. working light front left /17 S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /21
E19 2. working light front right /17 S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /21
S44 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
G1 alternator /1 S48 (option) push button switch hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
G2 batteries /1 S52 push button switch - pin puller /11
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20

H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 V2 diode 1A (K2) /4
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 V3 diode 1A (H5) /5
H8 indicator light - float position /8 V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /10
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7 V34 (option) diode 1A (H35) /5
H13 beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /18
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /B27 /19 X1 electrical outlet 24V /5
H18 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /10 X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5 X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole
H35 indicator light - hydraulic oil overheating /5 X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10) /5
mounted from machine PR752 F /N xxx-2007 X37-1 plug
X37-2 plug
K6 relay - electronic fault indicator /7 X46 plug to M7,M13 /21
K7 step relay - float position /8 X47 plug to U1, A2 /20
K10 relay - warning light /19 X64 plug wiring harness-motor 18 pole
K11 (option) relay - condenser /9
K12 (option) relay - solenoid clutch - air conditioner /9 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3
K37 (option) relay - refueling pump - shut off /10 Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
K38 relay - working light /17 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
K39 relay - power guard /4 Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
K53 time relay - glow plug system /3 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
K70 (option) relay - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15 Y34 solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /2
K71 relay - glow plug system /3 Y25 2. solenoid valve - float position /8
K73 relay - shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) (Y49) /3 Y45 (option) solenoid valve - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
K74 (option) relay - light front /14 Y46 (option) solenoid valve - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
K75 2. relay - working light /17 Y49 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /3
1 = pull, 2 = hold
M1 starter /2 Y50 solenoid valve - quick drop on the quick drop block /8
M2 windshield wiper front /21 Y51 (option) solenoid valve - pin puller /11
M3 windshield wiper left door /21 Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive /5
1 2 Startanlage 3 Flammstartanlage 4 5 6 7 Kabinenanschl.-X4,
Boxanschl.-A1
Stromversorgung Sicherheitseinrichtung Steckdose, Anzeigeinstrumente, Warnlampen Lftersteuerung lstandsberwachung Hupe Electronic System Guard,Low Speed Select,
Alimentation Dmarrage Prchauffage Installation de scurit Prise, Instruments de mesure, Voyants de contrle Commande Ventilateur Monitorage Niveau D`Huile Klaxon Contrle electronique,Petite vitesse,
Conn. Cabine-X4, Conn.-E-Box-A1
30
30/8
58 58 58 58
58/8
8A
5A
30 30
2,5 F4
Y4/8
F3 P,0,1,
S11/+/8
D+/8
2.5
P 0 123
58 15 54 19 17 50a +24V/8
S1
15/8
86
X32 A1-A(*)
86 30 30
X2
65
+ F3
85 87
87a
87
87a
85 5A
3A
F10
5A
5A
F6 F6
5A
K4 K39 F15
S S1 31
S12
X2
X2 X2 X2 6
2.5 2.5 48 15 44 X32 A1-J(*)
10A
5A
F5 F6
25A
X64
20A
F2
3A
F9 F15
3A
F8 X64
H1 H2 12
9
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
> 50 > 60 > 85

< 55 < 65 < 90
t t t
D+ D+ D+
30
B30 B29 B28
85 86 30
X4-C,E/16
K2 13 10
X64 X64
87a
87
87 86 85
87a
2X1,5 X4-A,B/16
K73
2.5
X4-I/16
X2 X2 X2 X2 V3
29 25 37 13 X4-D/16
1 X2 X2 X2 X2
1 43 62
2.5
17
X64 S1
16 45A
2
P1 D+ P2 + P3 + P4 + X64
F1
2.5
2.5 rt o
6
Q t p 11
2 S
+
70
- - G - G - G
H3 H4 H23 H35 H5 V4 H36 S8 H11 H12
X64 45A
12V
+
1 1 5
X2 F32 V34 X5
- 26 1
G2 - X2
2.5 rt
30 86 39
X1
50
V1 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
6
+ 49 49a 88 86 27 51 63 4 52 46 16 28 40 69 71 41
2 3
K3 20s S2 X64
X64
12V
87a
85
87
17
18
- 31 85
G2 K53 K71 88a
G G W GW G W 30 85 30 85
B+ D+ 30 50 96 96
X2 0,5 + A
G
X64 X64 p p p p
3 53 M
15 6 X2 Q t
o p 500 17 2,5 t
o
8 Q
S C
50
14 64 - B
U
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 B7 86
87a
87a
87
X64 86
87
G1
31 M1 31 R2 B2 B3 B4 B5 B22 B27 B6 B32 K5 K6
2.5
88 86(85)
1 2 X2 X2
18 30
6
Y34 Y1 S3 Y52
88a Y49
K1 R12 R1 X64
A1 - B(*) 7 X2
X32 A1-D(*)
50
50
54
X32 A1-d(*)
2.5
+24V X32 A1-C(*)

31 31/8
2
2
Options wired, not equipped Stromlaufplan .

9 10 11
Schnellsenken Klimaanlage,Heizung,Geblse Betankungspumpe Bolzenzieher
Solenoid Valves: Float Position, Quick Drop, Servo cut off Air conditioner, Heating, Fresh air fan Refueling pump Pin Puller/Ripper
30/7 30/12
58/7 58/12
20A
S2-3/4 F13
S2-3/4
D+/7 D+/12
K4(+24V)/4 K4(+24V)/12
15/7 15/12
10A
5A
5A
5A
F11 F6 F6 F10
10A
F12
F10
S11 + 5A
+ + S
31 S1 S
S52
S1
S S1 S1 S
S28 S29
2.5
S S1 31
X2 X2 X2 86 30 86 30
14
+ 21 50
S16 V18
X56 87 87
87a
85
87a
85
K11 30 86 K12 86 30 K9
2 4 K37
S1 X8
1.5
1
87a
87a
87 85
87
85
2.5
+
S10 S2 X2
38 7
0 12 3
X56 X4 X4 X2 X8
1 K J 35 6 S9 1 2 3 4
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
5 10 11 8 47
3 2
+ 1 C
X43
p 7 R11
18bar X57
K7 1 4 5 X4 B A
1.5
3
B17 G
X43 X43 X43 X2

5 4 6 23
p
24bar X4
H M
B11 31
1.5
X2 H18
33
M8 Y51
A6
8 6
t t
X2 X8
5 7 R3
3
4 3 9 10 1 8 7 6 5 X57
1.5
2.5
B
)A(+ S (C)
gn

t
M Q
E17 B24
Y25 Y3 H8 Y6 Y50 M6 (B)
Y4 M M M V17
E16 E15 2
M11 M10 X8
Y14 3
31/7 31/12
Stromlaufplan .


12 13 14 15
30/11 30
58/11 58
D+/11 D+
K4(+24V)/11 +24V
15/11 15
10A
5A
5A
F11 F3 F10
+
30 86
1,5
S6 S S1 31
K70
87a
87
85
2,5
X2
42
X2
22
30 86 X2 X2 X2
72 67 68
K74
87a
87
85
2
2,5
X8
3
8A
F7
p S48
1,5
1,5
31
M B9
A7
M12 X2 X2
p 49 61
B8 31
1,5
1,5
4
X8
1
E1 E2
Y45 Y46
1,5
1,5
B10
31/11 31
Stromlaufplan
.

2
16 Fahrerstandbeleuchtung
17 Arbeitsscheinwerfer 18
Rundumleuchte
19 20 Radio 21 Wisch-Waschanlage:Hinten, Vorne, Links, Rechts
+24V
1,5
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5 X47
5
-
1,5
1,5
S44 1 24V
1 12V
S7
U1
1,5
1,5
86 30 86 30
8A
8A
F26 F25
K38 K75 H13 M
85 87 85 87
+ L
X4-C,E/7 E7 3A
(F3/7)
- R
A2
10A
10A
X4-A,B/7 F29
2A
F27 F28
(F8/4+24V)
X4-I/7 X4
21 0
0,12 1 0
21 0
0,1 0
21
(X5-5/5) D 7 7 7 7
0,1
0,1
X4-D/7 5 5 5 5
(P4/5) X37-2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
1
X42 X42 S5 S4 S17 S18

2 3 X46
X47 X46
2
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
86 30
K10
X41 X39 1 X38 X40 1
E4 E3 E18 E6 E5 E19 3 3
87a
85 12 3 2 12 3 2
87
31b
31b
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
53a
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M13 M7 M2 M M3 M M4 M
2,5
X37-1 31
3 M5 M 31 31
X42
1
X4 H17 X46 X46
I 3 3
2,5
31/15 31
2
Stromlaufplan .

Note:

off
F6 5A instruments, indicator lights, horn, oil level monitoring - engine oil level 5,6,10
sensor - travel gear - cone seal area
F10 5A quick drop, fan drive pin puller, hydr. pitch angle 5,8,11,15
adjustment
suspension
F13 20A refueling pump 10
rear
light right
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-20635071

Page 9.1.52.00
Feuille
A1 electronic box - connection /7 see group 10.2. M6 fresh air fan - heater /9
A2 (option) radio /20 M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /21
A4 (option) refueling pump /10 M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /10
A5 (option) operators seat with air suspension /12 M10 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser middle /9
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 M12 (option) - compressor operators seat with air suspension /12
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /5 M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /21
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (500 mWs = 50 mbar vacuum) /5
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (17 bar) /5 P1 hour meter /5
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /5 P2 fuel gauge /5
B7 horn /6 P3 coolant temperature gauge /5
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm (1,5bar /13 P4 engine oil pressure gauge /5
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm (1,5bar) /13
B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /13 R1 flame glow plug /3
B19 (option) electronic thermostat air conditioner /9 R6 (option) potentiometer - air conditioner /9
B26 temperature sending unit - hydraulic oil (96C) /5 S3 emergency off switch /4
B27 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area /5 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /21
E1 (option) light front left /14 S6 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
E2 (option) light front right /14 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /17
E5 working light rear left /17 S11 push button switch - float position /8
E6 working light front right /17 S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
E7 dome light /16 S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
E12 evaporator /9 S20 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /21
E13 condenser /9 S21 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /21
E18 2. working light front left /17 S23 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
E19 2. working light front right /17 S27 push button switch - pin puller /11
S32 (option) push button switch hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
G1 alternator /1
G2 batteries /1 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 V1 diode 1A (K1) /1

H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3 V2 diode 1A (K2) /4
H3 indicator light - air filter /5 V3 diode 1A (H5) /5
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 V7 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /10
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 V8 (option) diode 1A (H20) /5
H8 indicator light - float position /8 V14 (option) diode 1A (K29) /9
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /7
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7 X1 electrical outlet 24V /5
H13 (option) beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /18 X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole
H14 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /B27 /19 X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole
H15 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /10 X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10) /5
H16 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5 X8 coupling - cab - heater
H19 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area /5 X33 plug /8
H20 indicator light - hydraulic oil overheating /5 X37-1 plug
X37-2 plug
K16 relay - electronic fault indicator /7 X43 plug /9
K7 step relay - float position /8 X46 plug to M7,M13 /21
K8 relay - power guard /4 X47 plug to U1, A2 /20
K10 relay - warning light /19 X64 plug wiring harness-motor 18 pole
K11 (option) relay - condenser /9
K12 (option) relay - solenoid clutch - air conditioner /9 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3
K14 time relay - glow plug system /3 Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
K17 relay - working light /17 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
K19 (option) relay - light front /14 Y5 2. solenoid valve - float position /8
K26 relay - glow plug system /3 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
K27 relay - shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) (Y49) /3 Y15 solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /2
K28 2. relay - working light /17 Y23 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
K29 (option) relay - refueling pump - shut off /10 Y24 solenoid valve - quick drop on the quick drop block /8
K31 (option) relay - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15 Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive /5
Y26 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /3
M1 starter /2 Y27 (option) solenoid valve - pin puller /11
M2 windshield wiper front /21 Y29 (option) solenoid valve - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
M3 windshield wiper left door /21 Y30 (option) solenoid valve - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
M5 windshield wiper rear /21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Kabinenanschl.-X4,
Boxanschl.-A1
Stromversorgung Startanlage Flammstartanlage Sicherheitseinrichtung Steckdose, Anzeigeinstrumente, Warnlampen Lftersteuerung lstandsberwachung Hupe Electronic System Guard,Low Speed Select,
Contrle electronique,Petite vitesse,
Alimentation Dmarrage Prchauffage Installation de scurit Prise, Instruments de mesure, Voyants de contrle Commande Ventilateur Monitorage Niveau D`Huile Klaxon Conn. Cabine-X4, Conn.-E-Box-A1
30
S1-30/8
58 58 58 58
S1-58/8
8A
5A
30 30
2,5 F4
Y4/8
F3 P,0,1,
S11/+/8
D+
2.5
P 0 123
58 15 54 19 17 50a +24V/8
S1
S1-15/8
1
X32-A1-A(*)
86 30 3
F10
5A
X2
17
F3
85 87 2 4 5
87a
5A
X2
5A
K4 K8 F6
8
> 50
< 55
t
B25
2.5 2.5 X64
10A
5A
F5 F6 13
> 60
25A
20A
F2
3A
F9 F15
3A
F8 < 65
t
H1 H2 B24
> 85
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
< 90
t
B23
D+ D+ D+
30 85 86 30
X4-C,E/18/20
K2
87
87a
87 86 85
87a
2X1,5 X4-A,B/17/19/21
K27
2.5
X4-I/19
X2 X2 X2 X2 V2
43 61 49 25 X4-D/16
1 X2 X2 X2 X2
39 42 64
2.5
28
X64 S1
16 45A
2
D+ P2 + P3 + P4 + X64
F1
2.5
2.5 rt o
6
Q t p 11
2 S
+
70
- - G - G - G
H3 H4 H16 H20 H5 V3 H19 S8 H11 H12
X64 45A
P1
12V
+
1 1 5
X2 F31 V8 X5
- 67 1
G2 - X2
2.5 rt
3 1 52
X1
50
V1 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
6
+ 49 49a 88 86 51 53 54 55 56 3 41 7 6 39 71 41
2 3
K3 20s S2 X64
X64
12V
5 4 2 17
18
- 31 85
G2 K14 K26 88a
G G W GW G W 3 2 3 2
B+ D+ 30 50 96 96
X2 t 0,5 t + A
G
X64 X64 p p p p
3 26 M
15 6 X2 Q p 500 17 2,5 8 Q
S C
50
14 40 - B
U
X64 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 B7 5 4 1 5 4 1
G1
31 M1 31 R2 B2 B3 B4 B5 B18 B26 B6 B27 K15 K16
2.5
88 86(85)
1 2 X2 X2
19
6 Y25 18
Y15 Y1 S3
K1
88a Y26
R7 R1 X64
X32-A1/B(*) 7 X2
X32-A1-D(*)
50
50
50
X32-A1-d(*)
2.5
+24V X32- A1/C(*)

31 31/8

All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 Options wired, not equipped Stromlaufplan .

9 10 11
Schnellsenken, Abschleppschaltung Klimaanlage,Heizung,Geblse Betankungspumpe Bolzenzieher
Solenoid Valves: Float Position, Quick Drop, Servo cut off, safety device towing Air conditioner, Heating, Fresh air fan Refueling pump Pin Puller/Ripper
S1-30/7 S1-30/12
S1-58/7 S1-58/12
20A
S2-3/4 F13
S2-3/4
D+ D+
F8-+24V/4 F8-+24V/12
S1-15/7 S1-15/12
10A
5A
5A
5A
F11 F6 F6 F10
10A
F12
F10
S11 + 5A
+ + S
31 S1 S
S27
S1
S S1 S1 S
S30 S31
2.5
S S1 31
X2 X2 X2 86 30 86 30
65
+ 21 50
S16 V14
87
X33 85 87
87a
85
87a
2
30 86 86 30 K9
4 K29
S1 X8
K11 K12
1.5
85 1
87 85
87
87a
87a
2.5
+
S6 S2 X2
66 7
0 12 3
X33 X4 X4 X2 X8
1 2 3 4
1 K J 35 6 S9
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
5 10 11 1 47
15 30
+ 1 C
X43
p 7
18 R6
K7 31
87a
87 B
X4
1.5
3
B17 G
X43 X43 X43 X2

5 4 6 23
p
24 X4
H M
B22 31
1.5
X2 H15
70
M8 Y51
A4
8 6
t t
X2 X8
5 7 R3
44
4 3 9 10 1 8 7 6 5 X57
1.5
2.5
B
gn
rt br-ge rt-ws bl-ws )A(+ S (C)

t
M Q
E13 B24
Y5 Y3 H8 Y23 Y24 M6 (B)
Y4 M M M V7
E12 E11 2
M11 M10 X8
Y14 3
31/7 31/12
Stromlaufplan .


2 Options non equipes 01 01 Schmas lectriques 9.1.52.00/2
12 13 14 15
S1-30/11 S1-30
S1-58/11 S1-58
D+ D+
F8-+24V/11 F8-+24V
S1-15/11 S1-15
10A
5A
5A
F11 F3 F10
30 86
1,5
S1 31
S18S K31
87
87a
85
2,5
X2
14
X2
46
30 86 X2 X2 X2
72 69 71
K19
85
87
87a
rt
bl
5
2,5
X8
8
F7
8A
p S32
1,5
1,5
1,5
M
B9 31
A5
M12 X2 X2
p 29 31
1,5
31
B8
1,5
1,5
X8
1
E1 E2
Y29 Y30
1,5
1,5
B10
31/11 31
Stromlaufplan
.

2
16 17 Arbeitsscheinwerfer
18 19 20 21
Fahrerstandbeleuchtung Rundumleuchte Radio Wisch-Waschanlage:Hinten, Vorne, Links, Rechts
+24V
1,5
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5 X47
5
-
1,5
1,5
S23 1 24V
1 12V
S7
U1
1,5
1,5
86 30 86 30
8A
8A
F26 F25
K17 K28 H13 M
85 87 85 87
F3/7 + L
E7 3A
F8-+24V/4 - R
A2
10A
10A
F29
2A
F27 F28
X5-5(5) X4
D
P4(5)
21 0
0,12 1 0
21 0
0,1 0
21
X37-2 7 7 7 7
0,1
0,1
1 5 5 5 5
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
X42 X42 S5 S4 S20 S21

2 3 X46
X47 X46
2
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1 3
K10
X41 X39 1 X38 X40 1
E4 E3 E18 E6 E5 E19 2 4 5 12 3 2 3 12 3 2 3
31b
31b
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
53a
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M13 M7 M2 M M3 M M4 M
2,5
X37-1
3 M5 M 31 31 31
X42
1 X46
X4 H14 X46
3
I 3
2,5
31 31
Stromlaufplan .

2
Note:

off, safety device towing
F6 5A instruments, indicator lights, horn, oil level monitoring - engine oil level 5,6,10
F10 5A quick drop, fan drive pin puller, hydr. pitch angle 5,8,11,15
adjustment
suspension
F13 20A refueling pump 10
rear
light right
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date
PR 752 F/N xxx-5072 5599

Page 9.1.53.00
Feuille
A1 electronic box - connection /7 see group 10.2. M6 fresh air fan - heater /9
A2 (option) radio /20 M7 motor - windshield washer system front, left, right /21
A4 (option) refueling pump /10 M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /10
A5 (option) operators seat with air suspension /12 M10 (option) - fresh air fan - condenser middle /9
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96C) /5 M12 (option) - compressor operators seat with air suspension /12
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /5 M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /21
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (500 mWs = 50 mbar vacuum) /5
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (17 bar) /5 P1 hour meter /5
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /5 P2 fuel gauge /5
B7 horn /6 P3 coolant temperature gauge /5
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm (1,5bar /13 P4 engine oil pressure gauge /5
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm (1,5bar) /13
B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /13 R1 flame glow plug /3
B19 (option) electronic thermostat air conditioner /9 R6 (option) potentiometer - air conditioner /9
B26 temperature sending unit - hydraulic oil (96C) /5 S3 emergency off switch /4
B27 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area /5 S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /21
E1 (option) light front left /14 S6 push button switch - right joystick - float position /8
E2 (option) light front right /14 S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /17
E5 working light rear left /17 S11 push button switch - float position /8
E6 working light front right /17 S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /7
E7 dome light /16 S16 (option) push button switch - air conditioner /9
E12 evaporator /9 S20 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /21
E13 condenser /9 S21 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /21
E18 2. working light front left /17 S23 (option) rocker switch beacon light /18
E19 2. working light front right /17 S27 push button switch - pin puller /11
S32 (option) push button switch hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
G1 alternator /1
G2 batteries /1 U1 (option) transformer - radio /20
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /1 Vx diode 1A (Y4) /8

H2 indicator light - glow plug system /3 V1 diode 1A (K1) /1
H4 indicator light - parking brake /5 V3 diode 1A (H5) /5
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /5 V7 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /10
H8 indicator light - float position /8 V8 (option) diode 1A (H20) /5
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /7
H13 (option) beacon light, operated manually or via start switch /18 X1 electrical outlet 24V /5
H14 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /B27 /19 X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole
H15 (option) indicator light - refueling pump /10 X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole
H16 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /5 X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10) /5
H20 indicator light - hydraulic oil overheating /5 X33 plug /8
X37-1 plug
K1 battery main switch /1 X37-2 plug
K15 relay - reduced travel speed range indicator light /7 X41 plug to M5 /21
K16 relay - electronic fault indicator /7 X42 plug to E3, E4, E5, E6, E18, E19 /17
K7 step relay - float position /8 X43 plug /9
K8 relay - power guard /4 X46 plug to M7,M13 /21
K9 (option) relay - refueling pump /10 X47 plug to U1, A2 /20
K10 relay - warning light /19 X57 plug to Y51
K11 (option) relay - condenser /9 X64 plug wiring harness-motor 18 pole
K12 (option) relay - solenoid clutch - air conditioner /9
K14 time relay - glow plug system /3 Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /3
K17 relay - working light /17 Y3 solenoid valve - float position /8
K19 (option) relay - light front /14 Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /8
K26 relay - glow plug system /3 Y5 2. solenoid valve - float position /8
K27 relay - shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) (Y49) /3 Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /9
K28 2. relay - working light /17 Y15 solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /2
K29 (option) relay - refueling pump - shut off /10 Y23 solenoid valve - quick drop (return flow cut off) /8
K31 (option) relay - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15 Y24 solenoid valve - quick drop on the quick drop block /8
Y25 solenoid valve - fan drive /5
M1 starter /2 Y26 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /3
M2 windshield wiper front /21 Y29 (option) solenoid valve - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
M3 windshield wiper left door /21 Y30 (option) solenoid valve - hydr. pitch angle adjustment /15
M4 windshield wiper right door /21 Y43 solenoid valve - safety device towing /8
M5 windshield wiper rear /21 Y51 (option) solenoid valve - pin puller /11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Elektronikberwachung,Reduz. Fahrgeschw.,
Kabinenanschl.-X4, Boxanschl.-A1
Stromversorgung Startanlage Flammstartanlage Sicherheitseinrichtung Steckdose, Anzeigeinstrumente, Warnlampen Lftersteuerung lstandsberwachung Hupe Electronic System Guard,Low Speed Select,
Contrle electronique,Petite vitesse,
Alimentation Dmarrage Prchauffage Installation de scurit Prise, Instruments de mesure, Voyants de contrle Commande Ventilateur Monitorage Niveau D`Huile Klaxon Conn. Cabine-X4, Conn.-E-Box-A1
30
S1-30/8
58 58 58 58
S1-58/8
8A
5A
2,5 F4 Y43/8
30 30 Y4/8
F3 P,0,1,
S11/+/8
D+
2.5
P 0 123
58 15 54 19 17 50a +24V/8
S1
S1-15/8
1
X32-A1-A(*)
86 30 3
F10
5A
X2
17
F3
85 87 2 4 5
87a
5A
X2
5A
K4 K8 F6
8
> 50
< 55
t
B25
2.5 2.5 X64
10A
5A
F5 F6 13
> 60
25A
20A
F2
3A
F9
3A
F8 < 65
t
H1 H2 F15 B24
> 85
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
< 90
t
B23
D+ D+ D+
30 85 86 30
X4-C,E/18/20
K2
87
87a
87 86 85
87a
2X1,5 X4-A,B/17/19/21
K27
2.5
X4-I/19
X2 X2 X2 X2 V2
43 61 49 25 X4-D/16
1 X2 X2 X2 X2
39 42 64
2.5
28
X64 S1
16 45A
2
D+ P2 + P3 + P4 + X64
F1
2.5
2.5 rt o
6
Q t p 11
2 S
+
70
- - G - G - G
H3 H4 H16 H20 H5 V3 H19 S8 H11 H12
X64 45A
P1
12V
+
1 1 5
X2 F31 V8 X5
- 67 1
G2 - X2
2.5 rt
3 1 52
X1
50
V1 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
6
+ 49 49a 88 86 51 53 54 55 56 3 41 7 6 39 71 41
2 3
K3 20s S2 X64
X64
12V
5 4 2 17
18
- 31 85
G2 K14 K26 88a
G G W GW G W 3 2 3 2
B+ D+ 30 50 A 96 A
t t +
G X2 X64
0,5
p p
A
3 26 M
15 6 X2 Q 96
p 500 2,5 Q
S C
50
14 40 - B
U
31 31 31 31 p 31 31 p B7 5 4 1
31 M1 31 X64 X64 R2 B2 B3 B4 B18 B26
4 1 5
G1 17 8
B27 K15 K16
2.5
B5 B
B6
88 86(85)
1 2
B X2 X2
19
6 Y25 18
Y15 Y1 S3
K1
88a Y26
R7 R1 X64
X32-A1/B(*) 7 X2
X32-A1-D(*)
50
50
50
X32-A1-d(*)
2.5
+24V X32- A1/C(*)

31 31/8

All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 Options wired, not equipped Stromlaufplan .

9 10 11
Schnellsenken, Abschleppschaltung Klimaanlage,Heizung,Geblse Betankungspumpe Bolzenzieher
Solenoid Valves: Float Position, Quick Drop, Servo cut off, safety device towing Air conditioner, Heating, Fresh air fan Refueling pump Pin Puller/Ripper
S1-30/7 S1-30/12
S1-58/7 S1-58/12
S3/4
20A
S2-3/4 F13
S2-3/4
D+ D+
F8-+24V/4 F8-+24V/12
S1-15/7 S1-15/12
10A
5A
5A
5A
F11 F6 F6 F10
10A
F12
F10
S11 + 5A
+ + S
31 S1 S
S27
S1
S S1 S1 S
S30 S31
2.5
S S1 31
X2 X2 X2 86 30 86 30
65
+ 21 50
S16 V14
87
X33 85 87
87a
85
87a
2
30 86 86 30 K9
4 K29
S1 X8
K11 K12
1.5
85 1
87
85
87
87a
87a
2.5
+
S6 S2 X2
66 7
0 12 3
X33 X4 X4 X2 X8
1 2 3 4
1 K J 35 6 S9
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
5 10 11 1 47
15 30
+ 1 C
X43
p 7
18 R6
K7 31
87a
87 B
X4
1.5
3
B17 G
X43 X43 X43 X2

5 4 6 23
p
24 X4
H M
B22 31
1.5
X2 H15
70
M8 Y51
A4
8 6
Y43 t t
X2 X8
5 7 R3
44
4 3 9 10 1 8 7 6 5 X57
1.5
2.5
B
gn
rt br-ge rt-ws bl-ws )A(+ S (C)

Vx t
M Q
E13 B24
Y5 Y3 H8 Y23 Y24 M6 (B)
Y4 M M M V7
E12 E11 2
M11 M10 X8
Y14 3
31/7 31/12
Stromlaufplan .
2 Options wired, not equipped Current Flow Diagramm PR 752 F/N xxx - 50725599

2 Options non equipes 01 02 Schmas lectriques 9.1.53.00/2
12 13 14 15
S1-30/11 S1-30
S1-58/11 S1-58
D+ D+
F8-+24V/11 F8-+24V
S1-15/11 S1-15
10A
5A
5A
F11 F3 F10
30 86
1,5
S1 31
S18S K31
87
87a
85
2,5
X2
14
X2
46
30 86 X2 X2 X2
72 69 71
K19
85
87
87a
rt
bl
5
2,5
X8
8
F7
8A
p S32
1,5
1,5
1,5
M
B9 31
A5
M12 X2 X2
p 29 31
1,5
31
B8
1,5
1,5
X8
1
E1 E2
Y29 Y30
1,5
1,5
B10
31/11 31
Stromlaufplan
.

16 17 Arbeitsscheinwerfer
18 19 20 21
Fahrerstandbeleuchtung Rundumleuchte Radio Wisch-Waschanlage:Hinten, Vorne, Links, Rechts
+24V
1,5
1,5
1,5
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
C B A A E B A
X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-2 X37-1 X37-2 X37-2

2 3 4 4 2 3 4
F30
5A
5 X47
5
-
1,5
1,5
S23 1 24V
1 12V
S7
U1
1,5
1,5
86 30 86 30
8A
8A
F26 F25
K17 K28 H13 M
85 87 85 87
F3/7 + L
E7 3A
F8-+24V/4 - R
A2
10A
10A
F29
2A
F27 F28
X5-5(5) X4
D
P4(5)
21 0
0,12 1 0
21 0
0,1 0
21
X37-2 7 7 7 7
0,1
0,1
1 5 5 5 5
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
X42 X42 S5 S4 S20 S21

2 3 X46
X47 X46
2
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1 3
K10
X41 X39 1 X38 X40 1
E4 E3 E18 E6 E5 E19 2 4 5 12 3 2 3 12 3 2 3
31b
31b
53a
53a
53a
31b
31b
53a
31
31
31
31
53 53 53 53
M M
M13 M7 M2 M M3 M M4 M
2,5
X37-1
3 M5 M 31 31 31
X42
1 X46
X4 H14 X46
3
I 3
2,5
31 31
Stromlaufplan .

1. Panel plug X2 (72 poles) central wiring harness (Harting HAN 72 DD)
Socket on wiring harness Plug in instrument panel
Socket
Pin
pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no.
1 314 8 911 15 22 924 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 934
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 930 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 923 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 929 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 926 53 302 60 939 67 910
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 919 40 403 47 932 54 600 61 706 68 916
6 615 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 909 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 918 28 407 35 931 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928
2. Panel plug X4 (14 poles) cab wiring harness (Cannon CA COM-E-20-27S-B-01)

Socket
Pin
pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no. pole c.no.
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905

PR 712 B F/N xxx-05012999
Plugs - positioning chart PR 732 B F/N xxx-25012999

Page
Feuille 9.2.14.01
3. Plug (8 poles) - cab - heater (AMP)
Socket on wiring harness /heater Plug in cab Positioning chart
Socket on central wiring harness
pole c.no. pole c.no.
1 - 5 -
2 - 6 -
3 sw 7 -
4 102 8 -
Socket on wiring harness /heater
1 102 5 -
2 sw 6 -
3 - 7 -
4 - 8 -
4. Plug (2 poles) - back up alarm (AMP)

Assignment acc. to application / see schematic
Plug in back up alarm Socket on wiring harness
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black

PR 712 B F/N xxx-05012999
Wiring list PR 732 B F/N xxx-25012999

Page
Feuille 9.2.14.02
wire wire wire
Connector plugs Connector plugs Connector plugs
no. no. no.
power supply 407 B2- X2 -X5 /5 673 S3- - -S11
100 S1- - -K3 408 R2- X2 -P2 674 S11- X2 -S10
101 F4- X2 -S2 409 B4- X2 -H3 679 Y25- - -Y3
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 410 K53- - -H2 681 A1- X2 -X5 /2
103 G1- - -M1 412 K7- - -H8 6270 A1- X2 -X5 /3
105 F1- - -S1 415 X5 /5- - -V4
107 S1- - -K4 416 F3- - -H1 electrical installation lights
108 K4- - -F11 417 H11- - -K5 700 F28- - -E6
109 F11- - -F10 418 H12- - -K6 701 F27- - -E4
110 F10- - -F5 442 B22- X2 -H23 703 E3- - -E4
111 F5- - -F6 443 F29- - -K10 704 E5- - -E6
113 S1- - -F4 444 K10- - -H17 705 F7- X2 -E1
114 F4- - -F3 445 X5 /5- X4 /I -K10 706 F7- X2 -E2
116 F8- - -S6 708 F28- X37 /2-X4 /D -P2,3,4
118 F5- - -X1 electrical installation 719 F27- - -S5
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 500 S5- X41 -M5 720 S5- - -S18
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 501 F26- X41 -M5 721 S18- - -S4
123 F6- - -H12 502 S5- X41 -M5 722 S4- - -S17
126 S11- - -K7 503 S17- X38 -M3 723 S17- - -S7
149 K4- - -F8 504 F25- X38 -M3 724 K38- - -F27
150 F4- - -K39 505 S17- X38 -M3 725 K38- - -F28
172 F3- X4 /C-X37 /2 -E7 506 F25- X40 -M4
173 F8- X4 /B-X37 /2 -F26 507 F26- X39 -M2 open wires
174 F8- X4 /B-X37 /2 -F25 508 S18- X40 -M4 900 open connection X2
175 F26- - -K38 509 S4- X39 -M2 901
176 S7- - -K38 512 S17- X46 -M7 open connections cab
178 F3- X4 /I-X37 /1 X47-U1 514 F26- - -S4 907
1040 S1- - -K53 515 S4- - -S5 908 open connection X2
1050 F25 - -F29 516 S9- - -R3 /M6 910
engine start / safety 517 S9- - -R3 /M6 open connections X2
installations 518 S9- - -M6 /R3 942
300 G1- X2 -K2 533 S4- - -M2
301 S1- X2 -Y1 534 S18- - -M4
302 K1- X2 -V1 535 F25- - -S17
303 K3- - -V1 536 S17 - -S18 MASSE K1- - -A1
304 S2- X2 -V3 546 S4 - -S17
305 V3- - -K2 547 S4 - -S18 wo.no. ground wire black
306 K3- - -K2 548 S5 - -M13
307 K3- - -H1 valves,
308 H1- - -P1 electronic connections
311 F3- X2 -B9 600 S3- X2 -A1
312 B9- - -B8 601 S10- X2 -K7
313 B8- - -B10 602 F10- X2 -B11
314 F2- X2 -R1 604 K7- X2 -Y3
315 S1- - -F2 605 B11- X2 -Y6
317 K2- X2 -M1 607 S2- - -Y4
318 K39 - -S1 610 S12- X2 -A1
319 V1- - -K39 615 S12- X2 -A1
320 S1- - -K2 643 A1- X2 -X5 /1
321 S1- - -K39 665 A1- X2 -X5 /3
323 S2- X2 -S3 667 A1- X2 -K6
324 S12- - -K5,6 670 A1- X2 -K5
325 S8- X2 -B7
335 K4- - -K39
392 F10- X2 -Y2
instrumentation
400 B5- X2 -H4
401 B6- X2 -H5
402 B3- X2 -P4
403 B3- X2 -X5 /5
405 V4- - -H5
406 B2- X2 -P3
Description parts list /schematic:
e.g. pos. description /area
A1 electronic box /B
/B = area basic machine with operators platform
/P = area instrument panel
/C = area cab
Wire - identifications
Connection wires in the machine (wiring harness):
red(rt) with number, e.g.105 = wires for main power supply

black(sw) without number = ground wire
white(ws) with MASSE = minus supply to electronic-box (wire from K1 to A1)
white(ws) with number, e.g. 600 = other wires

br = brown rt = red
ge = yellow sw = black
gn = green
d = connections option air conditioner
MP = ground connection main frame / area battery box

instrument panel
roof panel (cab)
pos. Ampere application - standard - option area

F1 35A automatic circuit breaker /power supply B
F2 16A glow plug system P
F3 5A charge indicator, dome light back up alarm, radio P
F4 8A electronic supply P
F5 10A electrical outlet 24V P
F6 5A instruments, indicator lights, horn P
F7 8A light front P
F8 25A power supply roof panel P
F10 5A quick drop P
F11 10A heater operators seat with air suspension P
F15 2A float position P
F25 8A windshield wiper and washer system front C
F26 8A windshield wiper and washer system rear C
F27 8A working light front left, rear right, instrument C
lights
F28 8A working light front right, rear left C
F29 2A warning light cab warning light canopy C

PR 712 B F/N xxx-05012999
Parts list - Electrical schematic PR 732 B F/N xxx-25012999

Page
Feuille 9.2.14.00
pos. description /area pos. description /area
A1 electronic box - connection /B see group 10.2. S1 starter switch w. preheat position /P
A2 (option) radio /C S2 neutral starting switch /B
A8 diode combination V1-V4 /P S3 emergency off switch /P
S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /C
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96) /B S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system rear /C
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure (0.5 bar) /B S6 (option) push button switch additional lights /P
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (0,05bar) /B S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /C
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12bar) /B S8 push button switch - horn /P
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /B S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /B
B7 horn /B S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /B
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm (1.5 bar) /B S11 push button switch - float position /P
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm (1.5 bar) /B S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /P
B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /B S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /C
B11 pressure switch - quick drop (17 bar) /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /C
B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2.5 bar) /B
U1 (option) transformer - radio /C
E1 (option) light front left /B
E2 (option) light front right /B V1 diode 1A (K1) /P
E3 working light rear right /C V3 diode 1A (K2) /P
E4 working light front left /C V4 diode 1A (H5) /P
E5 working light rear left /C V5 diode 1A (free) /P
E6 working light front right /C
E7 dome light /C
E15 heater /B X1 electrical outlet 24V /P
X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole /P
Fx F1 - F29 see front page for listing X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole /P
X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
G1 alternator /B identification) /P
G2 batteries /B X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
X37-1 plug to U1,K10 /C
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /P X38 plug to M3 /C
H3 indicator light - air filter /P X39 plug to M2 /C
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P X40 plug to M4 /C
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P X41 plug to M5 /C
H8 indicator light - float position /P X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /C
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
Y3 solenoid valve - float position /B
K1 battery main switch /B Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /B
K2 relay - starter cut off /P Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
K3 relay - power guard /P Y25 solenoid valve - float position /B
K4 relay 35A - power supply /P
K5 relay - reduced travel speed range indicator light /P
K6 relay - electronic fault indicator /P
K7 step relay - float position /P
K10 relay - warning light /C
K38 relay 35A - working light /C
K39 relay - power guard /P
K53 time relay - glow plug system /P
MP ground connections /B /P /C see front page for listing
M1 starter /B
M2 windshield wiper front /C
M3 windshield wiper left door /C
M4 windshield wiper right door /C
M5 windshield wiper rear /C
M6 fresh air fan - heater /C
M7 motor - windshield washer system front /C
M13 motor - windshield washer system rear /C
P1 hour meter /P
P2 fuel gauge /P
P3 coolant temperature gauge /P
P4 engine oil pressure gauge /P
R1 flame glow plug /B

R2 fuel level sending unit /B
R3 resistor - blower motor - heater /B
Socket
Pin
1 314 8 519 15 942 22 531 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 934
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 522 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 542 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 sw 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 926 53 302 60 939 67 910
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 524 40 403 47 932 54 600 61 706 68 916
6 615 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 392 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 521 28 407 35 553 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928

Socket
Pin
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905

PR 712 B F/N xxx-30013083
Plugs - positioning chart
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.15.01
3. Plug (2 poles) solenoid valves (AMP Junior Timer)
Plug in solenoid valve Socket on wiring harness

1 - 5 -
2 - 6 553
3 sw 7 521
4 102 8 522
1 102 5 522
2 sw 6 521
3 - 7 553
4 - 8 -
5. Plug (3 poles) - neutral starting switch (Cannon - Deutsch)

Plug in neutral starting switch Socket on wiring harness
Positioning chart
pole c.no.
A 304
B 101
C 323
6. Plug (4 poles) - cab /roof panel (MATE-N-LOK)

Plug in cab Socket on wiring harness

8. Plug (2 poles) - air conditioner (Cannon - Deutsch)
Plug in compressor Socket on wiring harness
9. Plug (3 poles) - sensor Diesel tank, - travel gear - cone seal area (Cannon)
Plug in sensor Socket on wiring harness
10. Plug (4 poles) - windshield wiper motors (AMP)

Plug in windshield wiper motors Socket on wiring harness

PR 712 B F/N xxx-30013083
Plugs - positioning chart
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.15.02
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black

PR 712 B F/N xxx-30013083
Wiring list
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.15.03
wire wire wire
no. no. no.
power supply 407 B2- X2 -X5/5 673 S3- - -S11
100 S1- - -K3 408 R2- X2 -P2 674 S11- X2 -S10
101 F4- X2 -S2 409 B4- X2 -H3 679 Y25- - -Y3
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 410 K53- - -H2 681 A1- X2 -X5/2
103 G1- - -M1 412 K7- - -H8 6270 A1- X2 -X5/3
105 F1- - -S1 415 X5/5- - -V4
108 K4- - -F11 417 H11- - -K5 700 F28- - -E6
109 F11- - -F10 418 H12- - -K6 701 F27- - -E4
110 F10- - -F5 442 B22- X2 -H23 703 E3- - -E4
111 F5- - -F6 443 F29- - -K10 704 E5- - -E6
113 S1- - -F4 444 K10- - -H17 705 F7- X2 -E1
114 F4- - -F3 445 X5/5- X4/I -K10 706 F7- X2 -E2
116 F8- - -S6 708 F28- X37/2-X4/D -P2,3,4
118 F5- - -X1 electrical installation 719 F27- - -S5
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 500 S5- X41 -M5 720 S5- - -S18
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 501 F26- X41 -M5 721 S18- - -S4
123 F6- - -H12 502 S5- X41 -M5 722 S4- - -S17
126 S11- - -K7 503 S17- X38 -M3 723 S17- - -S7
149 K4- - -F8 504 F25- X38 -M3 724 K38- - -F27
150 K4- - -K39 505 S17- X38 -M3 725 K38- - -F28
172 F3- X4/C-X37/2 -E7 506 F25- X40 -M4
173 F8- X4/B-X37/2 -F26 507 F26- X39 -M2 open wires
174 F8- X4/B-X37/2 -F25 508 S18- X40 -M4 900 open connection X2
175 F26- - -K38 509 S4- X39 -M2 901
176 S7- - -K38 512 S17- X46 -M7 open connections cab
178 F3- X4/I-X37/1 X47-U1 514 F26- - -S4 907
1040 S1- - -K53 515 S4- - -S5 908 open connection X2
1050 F25 - -F29 516 S9- - -R3/M6 910
engine start / safety 517 S9- - -R3/M6 open connections X2
installations 518 S9- - - M6/R3 942
300 G1- X2 -K2 519 X2- - -A6/M8
301 S1- X2 -Y1 521 X2- - -X8
302 K1- X2 -V1 522 X2- - -X8
303 K3- - -V1 524 X2- - -Y14 MASSE K1- - -A1
304 S2- X2 -V3 531 F11- X2 -A7
305 V3- - -K2 533 S4- - -M2 wo.no. ground wire black
306 K3- - -K2 534 S18- - -M4
307 K3- - -H1 535 F25- - -S17
308 H1- - -P1 536 S17 - -S18
311 F3- X2 -B9 542 X2 - -V17
312 B9- - -B8 546 S4 - -S17
313 B8- - -B10 547 S4 - -S18
314 F2- X2 -R1 548 S5 - -M13
315 S1- - -F2 553 X2- - -X8
317 K2- X2 -M1 valves,
318 K39 - -S1 electronic connections
319 V1- - -K39 600 S3- X2 -A1
320 S1- - -K2 601 S10- X2 -K7
321 S1- - -K39 602 F10- X2 -B11
323 S2- X2 -S3 604 K7- X2 -Y3
324 S12- - -K5,6 605 B11- X2 -Y6
325 S8- X2 -B7 607 S2- - -Y4
335 K4- - -K39 610 S12- X2 -A1
instrumentation 615 S12- X2 -A1
400 B5- X2 -H4 643 A1- X2 -X5/1
401 B6- X2 -H5 665 A1- X2 -X5/3
402 B3- X2 -P4 667 A1- X2 -K6
403 B3- X2 -X5/5 670 A1- X2 -K5
405 V4- - -H5
406 B2- X2 -P3
/C = area cab

white(ws) with MASSE = minus supply to electronic-box(wire from K1 to A1)

br = brown rt = red
gn = green

instrument panel
roof panel (cab)

F4 8A electronic supply, servo cut off, starter cut P
off
F7 8A light front P
F10 5A shut off solenoid (Diesel engine), quick drop P
lights

PR 712 B F/N xxx-30013083
Parts list - Electrical schematic
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.15.00
A6 (option) refueling pump /B S3 emergency off switch /P
A7 (option) operators seat with air suspension /B S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /C
A8 diode combination V1-V4 /P S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system rear /C
S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /C
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96) /B S8 push button switch - horn /P
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure (0.5 bar) /B S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /B
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (0,05bar) /B S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /B
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12bar) /B S11 push button switch - float position /P
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /B S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /P
B7 horn /B S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /C
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm (1.5 bar) /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /C
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm (1.5 bar) /B
B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /B U1 (option) transformer - radio /C
B11 pressure switch - quick drop (17 bar) /B
B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2.5 bar) /B V1 diode 1A (K1) /P
V2 diode 1A (K2) /P
E1 (option) light front left /B V3 diode 1A (H5) /P
E2 (option) light front right /B V4 diode 1A (free) /P
E3 working light rear right /C V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /B
E4 working light front left /C
E5 working light rear left /C X1 electrical outlet 24V /P
E6 working light front right /C X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole /P
E7 dome light /C X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole /P
E11 heater /B X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
identification) /P
Fx F1 - F29 see front page for listing X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
G1 alternator /B X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
G2 batteries /B X38 plug to M3 /C
X39 plug to M2 /C
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X40 plug to M4 /C
H3 indicator light - air filter /P X42 plug to E3,E4,E5,E6 /C
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
H8 indicator light - float position /P X65 (option) plug operators seat with air suspension /B
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /C Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /B
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P Y3 solenoid valve - float position /B
Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /B
K1 battery main switch /B Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
K2 relay - starter cut off /P Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /B
M1 starter /B
M8 (option) motor - refueling pump /B
M12 (option) motor - operators seat with air suspension /B
P1 hour meter /P
P2 fuel gauge /P

MP
R3
516 Instrumentenpult
517 Instrument Panel
518 Pupitre
1 2 3 4
0 12 3
M
126
674
Y25 Y3 Y6 Y4 610
679
+ M6 S
S9
605
604
+
S1
673
E15 615
S1 S MP
324
br sw
Machine de base avec poste de conduite
S12 S11
S1 31 2 3
Basic Machine with Operator Platform
102
553
522
521
S2 100 rt 118
17
S2 bl 1 rt rt
1 2 4 8 3 7 5 6 +
S10 601 B11 rt 105
674
Grundgert mit Fahrerstand
B A C X8 rt 107
30 30
607
X2 X1
1,5
4 3 1 5 2 6 8 7
-
P,0,1,
X34
102
553
522
521
MP MP
101
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 2.5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
MP
601
MP
674
21
S1
320
1.5 521 521 174
531
602
392
315
101
102
315
23
1.5 522 522 301 173
35
118
1.5 553 553
113
24
304
936 936 318
323
12 F7 F15 F4 F11 F10 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
935 935
1040
71
934 934 1.5 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 674 114
705
706
26
321
2.5
301 301
314
311
416
178
149
172
108
109
110
113
123
111
38
602 602
107
50
102 102
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
B22 p 101
62
101
49
442 705 1,5 705 705 1.5
31 2.5 61
706 1,5 706 706 1.5 335 410
3
604 604 150
B6 8 p 392
55
392
30 86 30 86 49 49a
20s
401 E1 E2 408
27
408
31 39
406 406 K4 K39 K53
51
B5
87a
8 p 402 402 87 85 85 31
87
63
31
400 MP 409
4
409 708
400 400 149 2,5
B4 16
500
p 401 401 108 2,5 110

28
409 407 407
31 40
403 403
MP B3 p 0.5 442
52
442 318
64 A
402 323 323 300 307 174
31 G 5 B
403 601 601 415 173
W 72 C
324
940 940 172
306
100
324
o
320
306
319
31 t G 17 D
406 304 304 304 708
87a
87a
87
87
29 2 4 8 9 85 30 30 86 85 85 I
W 300 300 445
407 V5 V4 V3 V1
B2 325
41
325 178
E
53 A8 F
31
Q 302 302 1 6 7 5 K2 K3 K5 K6 941
G
G 65
405
408 610 610 305 86 87 85 86 30 86 30 901
87
87a
87a
R2 615
6
615 902
H
670
417
418
667
25 J
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 302 303 903
126
37 K
325 rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 904
18 3 2 L
670 670 + 905
601
B7 667
30
667 906
M
42 N
311 311 907
2,5 314
1
314 2.5 K7
13 1 4 5
105
105
2,5 317 317 2.5 317 X4

314
54
600 600
1 66
643 643
412
604
665
7
665
MP
19
R1
300
F1 35A 681 681
308
2
708
2 6270 6270 123
301
392
43
rt 70 908 908 2.5
317
rt
31
417
418
70
rt 103 900 900 119 119 119 120
323
123
307
308
416
410
412
120
120
120
+ 67
B+ D+ 30 50 910 910 2.5 673
120
46 S1 D+ + + +
G 926 926 2.5
12V
M 20
o
3
Y1 Y2 912
32
912 2.5
Q t p
U
- 913
44
913 2.5
- - - - H3 H4 H5 H23
G2 S8 H11 H12
rt
50
31 31 914 914 2.5 S G G G

H1 H2 H8
401
S3
400
409
G1
442
+ M1 56 P1 P2 P3 P4
405
A1 915
68
915 2.5 325
6270
665
916 916 2.5

643
681
12V
302
408
9
406
402
917 917 2.5
600
60
- 939
48
939
2 3 5 MP
G2 938 938
1 4
311
rt
50
45
MASSE 920 920 1.5 MP
88 86(85) 15
p p 942 942 1.5 X5
57
313 312 921 921 1.5
K1 31 1.5 31 1.5 69
922 922 1.5 415
88a B8 B9 927
58
927 445 445
50
70
MP 928
34
928
925 925
B10 8
519 519
10
542 542
M 11
SW SW
22
M12 B
531 531
33
M 1,5 524 524 1,5
36
937 937 .
Q 47 .
A7 M8 932 932 1,5
59
V17 S + 933 933 1,5 .
Y14
X65
A6 . . PR 712B F/N xxx - 30013083
Kabelschema PR 722B F/N xxx - 30013170
519
----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt .
531

Electrical - Schematic
542
SW Options non equipes
MP Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm

2
2
2
01 01 Schmas de cblage lectriques 9.2.15.00/1

Instrumentenpult MP
Instrument Panel
Pupitre MP MP
31
M
674
126
610
31
31
S MP
M2
53
31b
53a
M M
+
S1
673
sw-gr
615
gr
sw
S1 S MP
324
M3 M4
31
53
53
31b
31b
53a
53a
S12 S11
sw-gr
sw-gr
M
gr
gr
sw
sw
100 rt 118
rt rt M M
M5
53
31b
+
53a
rt 105
rt 107
30 30 M13 M7
bl
sw
gn
X1
512
548
X2
1,5
P,0,1,
-
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
21 MP
506
S1
502
500
534
501
508
504
505
503
320
521 174
531
602
392
101
102
315
315
23
522 301 173
35
118
553
24 113 X38 X40 X41
936 318 X39
12 F7 F15 F4 F11 F10 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
935
1040
71
934 1.5 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
705
706
26
321
2.5
301
149
311
109
314
178
108
416
172
110
123
113
111
38
602
107
50 S17 S4 S18 S5
102
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
62
101
534
533
210
210
210
210
500
49
705 1.5
502
508
509
0,1
0,1
61
0,1
0,1
7 7
706 1.5 335 410 503
3 5 5 5 7 5 7
604 150 505
55 30 86 30 86 49 49a 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
392 20s 512 548
27
515
535
536
536
515
514
546
547
408 721 720
39
546
547
51
406 K4 K39 K53 MP MP MP MP
722
722
719
721
720
87a
402 87 85 85 31
87
63
409 708
4
400 149 2,5
723
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407
40
403
52
442 318
64 A
323 300 307 174 174
5 B
601 415 173 173
C
535
506
504
72
501
507
514
306
940 100 172 172
324
324
306
319
320
17 D
304 304 708 708
87a
87a
MP
87
87
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 30 86 85 85 I
300 V5 V4 V3 V1 445
41 E
325 178
53 A8 F
X37 F26
302 1 6 7 5 K2 K3 K5 K6 941 F25 8A
65 86 87 85
G 1-2 8A
87
87a
610 305 86 30 86 30 901 1,5

405
87a
6
615 902
H
X46 Kabine
670
417
418
667
25 J 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
105 2,5 rt 302 303 903
Cab
126
173
174
175
1050
37
105 2,5 rt 904
K 1 2 MP
18
670 +
3 2
905
L
E7 Cabine
601
30 M
172
667 906
42 N
311 907 1,5
1
314 2.5 K7 1,5
13 1 4 5
317 2.5 317 X4
54
600 1,5
66
643 1,5
412
604
7
445
1050
19
665 MP
719
175
723
681
308
2
708
6270 123 1,5

43 MP 1
908 2.5 F29 176 MP 704
86
5
85
31 2A
417
418
323
900 119 119 119 120 725
308
307
416
410
123
412
1,5
120
120
120
67
178
724
30
910 2.5
87
673
120
46 S1 D+ + + + S7 E3
176
926 2.5 1,5
20 K38 F27 F28 E6
700
443
32
912 2.5
Q t
o
p 1,5
913 2.5
44 - - - - H3 H4 H5 H23 X47 8A 8A
914 2.5 S8 S G G G H11 H12 H1 H2 H8 S3 719
401
400
409
442
1.5
56 P1 P2 P3 P4
405
1.5
915 2.5 325 708 700 1,5
3
68
6270
681
665
643
916 2.5 701 1,5 701

MP
1.5
1.5
1 2
9
408
406
402
917 2.5 2,5 2,5

600
60
939 85 30
48
938 1 2 3 4 5 MP X42
703
MP
443
45
920 1.5 MP
15 E4
942 1.5 X5
704
1.5
57 86 H17
87a
K10
178
87
921 1.5
69
922 1.5 415
- +
444
58 24V
927 445 445 U1
70 12V E5
928
34
925
8
519
10
542
11
SW 12V
22
531
33 1460
524 1,5
36
937
47 + + L
932 1,5
59
933 1,5 3A A2
- R
SW
----- Option verkabelt nicht bestckt .

Option wired not equipped . . PR 712B F/N xxx - 30013083
Options non equipes
Kabelschema .
PR 722B F/N xxx - 30013170
Socket
Pin
1 314 8 519 15 942 22 531 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 934
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 522 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 542 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 sw 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 926 53 302 60 939 67 461
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 524 40 403 47 462 54 600 61 706 68 465
6 615 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 392 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 521 28 407 35 553 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928

Socket
Pin
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905

PR 712 F/N xxx-3084 5599
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.16.01

1 - 5 -
2 - 6 553
3 sw 7 521
4 102 8 522
1 0102 5 522
2 sw 6 521
3 - 7 553
4 - 8 -

Positioning chart
pole c.no.
A 304
B 101
C 323

7. Plug (2 poles ) - back up alarm (AMP)

9. Plug (3 poles) - sensor Diesel tank /- travel gear - cone seal area(Cannon)


PR 712 F/N xxx-3084 5599
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.16.02
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black

PR 712 F/N xxx-3084 5599
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.16.03
wire wire wire
no. no. no.
power supply 407 B2- X2 -X5 /5 673 S3- - -S11
100 S1- - -K3 408 R2- X2 -P2 674 S11- X2 -S10
101 F4- X2 -S2 409 B4- X2 -H3 679 Y25- - -Y3
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 410 K53- - -H2 681 A1- X2 -X5 /2
103 G1- - -M1 412 K7- - -H8 6270 A1- X2 -X5 /3
105 F1- - -S1 415 X5 /5- - -V4
108 K4- - -F11 417 H11- - -K5 700 F28- - -E6
109 F11- - -F10 418 H12- - -K6 701 F27- - -E4
110 F10- - -F5 442 B22- X2 -H23 703 E3- - -E4
111 F5- - -F6 443 F29- - -K10 704 E5- - -E6
113 S1- - -F4 444 K10- - -H17 705 F7- X2 -E1
114 F4- - -F3 445 X5 /5- X4 /I -K10 706 F7- X2 -E2
116 F8- - -S6 461 F6- X2 -B34 /B35 708 F28- X37 /2-X4 /D -P2,3,4
118 F5- - -X1 462 B34- X2 -H36 719 F27- - -S5
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 465 B35- X2 -H39 720 S5- - -S18
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 721 S18- - -S4
123 F6- - -H12 electrical installation 722 S4- - -S17
126 S11- - -K7 500 S5- X41 -M5 723 S17- - -S7
149 K4- - -F8 501 F26- X41 -M5 724 K38- - -F27
150 K4- - -K39 502 S5- X41 -M5 725 K38- - -F28
172 F3- X4 /C-X37 /2 -E7 503 S17- X38 -M3
173 F8- X4 /B-X37 /2 -F26 504 F25- X38 -M3 open wires
174 F8- X4 /B-X37 /2 -F25 505 S17- X38 -M3 900 open connection X2
175 F26- - -K38 506 F25- X40 -M4 901
176 S7- - -K38 507 F26- X39 -M2 open connections cab
178 F3- X4 /I-X37 /1 X47-U1 508 S18- X40 -M4 907
1040 S1- - -K53 509 S4- X39 -M2 908 open connection X2
1050 F25 - -F29 512 S17- X46 -M7 910
engine start / safety 514 F26- - -S4 open connections X2
installations 515 S4- - -S5 942
300 G1- X2 -K2 516 S9- - -R3 /M6
301 S1- X2 -Y1 517 S9- - -R3 /M6
302 K1- X2 -V1 518 S9- - - M6 /R3
303 K3- - -V1 519 X2- - -A6 /M8 MASSE K1- - -A1
304 S2- X2 -V3 521 X2- - -X8
305 V3- - -K2 522 X2- - -X8 wo.no. ground wire black
306 K3- - -K2 524 X2- - -Y14
307 K3- - -H1 531 F11- X2 -A7
308 H1- - -P1 533 S4- - -M2
311 F3- X2 -B9 534 S18- - -M4
312 B9- - -B8 535 F25- - -S17
313 B8- - -B10 536 S17 - -S18
314 F2- X2 -R1 542 X2 - -V17
315 S1- - -F2 546 S4 - -S17
317 K2- X2 -M1 547 S4 - -S18
318 K39 - -S1 548 S5 - -M13
319 V1- - -K39 553 X2- - -X8
320 S1- - -K2 valves,
321 S1- - -K39 electronic connections
323 S2- X2 -S3 600 S3- X2 -A1
324 S12- - -K6 601 S10- X2 -K7
325 S8- X2 -B7 602 F10- X2 -B11
335 K4- - -K39 604 K7- X2 -Y3
392 F10- X2 -Y2 605 B11- X2 -Y6
instrumentation 607 S2- - -Y4
400 B5- X2 -H4 610 S12- X2 -A1
401 B6- X2 -H5 615 S12- X2 -A1
402 B3- X2 -P4 643 A1- X2 -X5 /1
403 B3- X2 -X5 /5 665 A1- X2 -X5 /3
405 V4- - -H5 667 A1- X2 -K6
406 B2- X2 -P3 670 A1- X2 -K5
/C = area cab

white(ws) withMASSE = minus supply to electronic-box(wire from K1 to A1)

br = brown rt = red
gn = green

instrument panel
roof panel (cab)

off
F6 5A instruments, indicator lights, horn, oil level P
F7 8A light front P
F11 10A heater operator's seat with air suspension P
lights

PR 712 F/N xxx-3084 5599
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.16.00
A7 (option) operator's seat with air suspension /B S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system front /C
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant /B S8 push button switch - horn /P
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /B S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /B
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /C
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm /B
B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /B V1 diode 1A (K1) /P
B34 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area left /B V2 diode 1A (K2) /P
B35 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area right /B V3 diode 1A (H5) /P
V4 diode 1A (free) /P
E1 (option) light front left /B V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /B
E2 (option) light front right /B
E3 working light rear right /C X1 electrical outlet 24V /P
E4 working light front left /C X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole /P
E5 working light rear left /C X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole /P
E6 working light front right /C X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
E7 dome light /C identification) /P
E11 heater /B X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
Fx F1 - F29 see front page for listing X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
X38 plug to M3 /C
G1 alternator /B X39 plug to M2 /C
X41 plug to M5 /C
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X42 plug to E3,E4,E5,E6 /C
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /P X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
H3 indicator light - air filter /P X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P X65 (option) plug operator's seat with air suspension /B
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P
H8 indicator light - float position /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /B
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P Y3 solenoid valve - float position /B
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /C Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /B
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area left /P Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /B
H39 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area right /P Y25 solenoid valve - float position /B
K1 battery main switch /B

K2 relay - starter cut off /P
M1 starter /B
M12 (option) motor - operator's seat with air suspension /B
P1 hour meter /P
P2 fuel gauge /P

MP
R3
1 2
518 Pupitre
3 4
0 12 3
M
126
674
Y25 Y3 Y6 Y4 610
679
+ M6 S
S9
605
604
+
S1
673
E15 615
S1 S MP
324
br sw
S12 S11
S1 31 2 3
102
553
522
521
17
S2 100 rt 118
S2 bl 1 rt rt
1 2 4 8 3 7 5 6 +
S10 B11 rt 105
601
674
B A C X8 rt 107
30 30
607
X2 X1
1,5
4 3 1 5 2 6 8 7
-
P,0,1,
X34
102
553
522
521
MP MP
101
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 2.5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
MP
601
MP
674
21
S1
320
1.5 521 521 174
531
602
392
315
101
102
315
23
1.5 522 522 301 173
35
118
1.5 553 553
113
24
304
936 936 318
323
12 F7 F15 F4 F11 F10 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
935 935
1040
71
934 934 1.5 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 674 114
705
706
26
321
2.5
301 301
314
311
416
178
149
172
108
109
110
113
123
111
38
602 602
107
50
102 102
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
B22 p 101
62
101
49
442 705 1,5 705 705 1.5
31 2.5 61
706 1,5 706 706 1.5 335 410
3
604 604 150
B6 8 p 392
55
392
30 86 3 1 49 49a
20s
31
401 E1 E2 408
27
408
39
406 406 K53
51
B5 12 p
402 402 K4 87 85 K39 5 4 2 31
31 63
400 MP 409
4
409 708
400 400 149 2,5
B4 16
500
p 401 401 108 2,5 110

31 28
409 407 407
40
403 403
MP B3 p 0,5 442
52
442 318
31 64 A
402 323 323 300 307 174
G 5 B
403 601 601 415 173
W 72 C
324
940 940 172
306
100
324
320
306
96 G
319
31 t 17 D
406 304 304 304 708
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5 I
W 300 300 445
407 V5 V4 V3 V1
B2 325
41
325 178
E
53 A8 F
Q 302 302 1 6 7 5 K2 941
G
31 G 65
405
5 4 2 1 3 3
408 610 610 305 86 87 K3 K5 K6 1 901
87a
R2 615
6
615 902
H
670
417
418
667
25 J
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 302 303 903
126
37 K
325 rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 904
18 15 30 L
670 670 + 905
601
B7 667
30
667 906
M
42 N
311 311 907
2,5 314
1
314 2.5 K7
87a
13 31
87
105
105
2,5 317 317 2.5 317 X4

314
54
600 600
1 66
643 643
412
604
665
7
665
MP
19
R1
300
F1 35A 681 681

308
2
708
2 6270 6270 123
301
392
43
rt 70 908 908 2.5
317
rt
31
417
418
70
rt 103 900 900 119 119 119 120
323
123
307
308
416
410
412
120
120
120
+ 67
B+ D+ 30 50 910 910 2.5 673
120
46 S1 D+ + + +
G 926 926 2.5
12V
M 20
o
3
Y1 Y2 912
32
912 2.5
Q t p H39 H38
U
- 913
44
913 2.5
- - - - H3 H4 H5 H23
G2 S8 H11 H12
rt
50
31 31 914 914 2.5 S G G G

H1 H2 H8
401
S3
400
409
G1
442
+ M1 56 P1 P2 P3 P4
405
A1 915
68
915 2.5 325
6270
665
916 916 2.5

643
681
465
462
461
12V
302
408
9
406
402
917 917 2.5
600
60
- 939
48
939
2 3 5 MP
G2 938 938
1 4
311
rt
50
45
MASSE 920 920 1.5 MP
88 86(85) 15
p p 942 942 1.5 X5
57
313 312 921 921 1.5
K1 31 1.5 31 1.5 69
922 922 1.5 415
88a B8 B9 927
58
927 445 445
50
70
MP 928
34
928
925 925
B10 8
519 519
10
542 542
M 11
SW SW
22
M12 B
531 531
33
M 1,5 524 524 1,5
68
0,75 465 465 .
Q 47 .
A7 M8 0,75 462
67
462
V17 S + 0,75 461 461 .
Y14
A6 . . PR 712B F/N xxx - 30845599
461
461
462
465
SW
SW
X65
519 C A B C A B
----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt .
531

542
SW - - Options non equipes
+
+
S S
MP Q Q Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm2

All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 01 02 Schmas de cblage lectriques 9.2.16.00/1
B34 B35 Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2
Instrumentenpult MP
Instrument Panel
Pupitre MP MP
31
M
674
126
610
31
31
S MP
M2
53
31b
53a
M M
+
S1
673
sw-gr
615
gr
sw
S1 S MP
324
M3 M4
31
53
53
31b
31b
53a
53a
S12 S11
sw-gr
sw-gr
M
gr
gr
sw
sw
100 rt 118
rt rt M M
M5
53
31b
+
53a
rt 105
rt 107
30 30 M13 M7
bl
sw
gn
X1
512
548
X2
1,5
P,0,1,
-
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
21 MP
506
S1
502
500
534
501
508
504
505
503
320
521 174
531
602
392
101
102
315
315
23
522 301 173
35
118
553
113
24
936 318 X38 X39 X40 X41
12 F7 F15 F4 F11 F10 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
935
1040
71
934 1.5 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
705
706
26
321
2.5
301
149
311
109
314
178
108
416
172
110
123
113
111
38
602
107
50 S17 S4 S18 S5
102
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
62
101
534
533
210
210
210
210
500
49
705 1.5
502
508
509
0,1
0,1
61
0,1
0,1
7 7
706 1.5 335 410 503
3 5 5 5 7 5 7
604 150 505
55 30 86 3 1 49 49a 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
392 20s 512 548
27
515
535
536
536
515
514
546
547
408 721 720
39
546
547
51
406 MP MP MP MP
722
722
719
721
720
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 5 4 2
K53 31
409 708
4
400 149 2,5
723
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407
40
403
52
442 318
64 A
323 300 307 174 174
5 B
601 415 173 173
C
535
506
504
72
501
507
514
306
940 100 172 172
324
324
306
319
320
17 D
304 304 708 708
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5 I MP
300 V5 V4 V3 V1 445
41 E
325 178
53 A8 F
X37 F26
302 1 6 7 5 K2 941 F25 8A
65 86 87 K5
G 1-2 8A
610 305 K3 5 4 2 901 1,5
405
K6
87a
1 3 1 3
6
615 902
H
X46 Kabine
670
417
418
667
25 J 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
105 2,5 rt 302 303 903
Cab
126
173
174
175
1050
37
105 2,5 rt 904
K 1 2 MP
15 30
18
670 + 905
L
E7 Cabine
601
30 M
172
667 906
42 N
311 907 1,5
1
314 2.5 K7 1,5
87a
13 31
X4
87
317 2.5 317
54
600 1,5
66
643 1,5
412
604
7
445
1050
19
665 MP
719
175
723
681
308
2
708
6270 123 1,5

43 MP 1
908 2.5 F29 176 MP 704
86
5
85
31 2A
417
418
323
900 119 119 119 120 725
308
307
416
410
123
412
1,5
120
120
120
67
178
724
30
910 2.5
87
673
120
46 S1 D+ + + + S7 E3
176
926 2.5 1,5
20 K38 F27 F28 E6
700
443
32
912 2.5
Q t
o
p H39 H38 1,5
913 2.5
44 - - - - H3 H4 H5 H23 X47 8A 8A
914 2.5 S8 S G G G H11 H12 H1 H2 H8 S3 719
401
400
409
442
1.5
56 P1 P2 P3 P4
405
1.5
915 2.5 325 708 700 1,5
3
68
6270
681
665
643
916 2.5 701 1,5 701

MP
1.5
1.5
1 2
462
465
9
461
408
406
402
917 2.5 2,5 2,5

600
60
939 2 3
48
938 1 2 3 4 5 MP X42 703
MP
443
45
920 1.5 MP
15 E4
942 1.5 X5
704
1.5
57 1 4 5 H17
178
921 1.5 K10
69
922 1.5 415
- +
444
58 24V
927 445 445 U1
70 12V E5
928
34
925
8
519
10
542
11
SW 12V
22
531
33 1460
524 1,5
68
465
47 + + L
462
67
461 3A A2
- R
SW

Option wired not equipped PR 712B F/N xxx - 30845599
Options non equipes
Socket
Pin
1 314 8 519 15 942 22 531 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 6062
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 522 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 542 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 sw 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 1780 53 302 60 939 67 461
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 524 40 403 47 462 54 600 61 706 68 465
6 615 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 392 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 521 28 407 35 553 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928

Socket
Pin
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905

PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 5921
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.17.01

1 - 5 -
2 - 6 553
3 sw 7 521
4 102 8 522
1 0102 5 522
2 sw 6 521
3 - 7 553
4 - 8 -

Positioning chart
pole c.no.
A 304
B 101
C 323



11. Plug (15 poles) - Electronic - fan drive (Bosch-AMP)
Socket on wiring harness

Positioning chart
1 6061 10 ws
2 6071 11 -
3 467 12 -
4 466 13 -
Plug in electronic box 5 sw 14 -
6 1780 15 -
7 469
8 468
9 ws

PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 5921
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.17.02
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black

PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 5921
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.17.03
wire wire wire
no. no. no.
100 S1- - -K3 3180 B9- - -B8 6003 F28- X42 -E6
101 F4- X2 -S2 3190 B9- - -B8 6004 E5- - -E6
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 6005 E3- - -E4
103 G1- - -M1 400 B5- X2 -H4 6006 F27- - -S5
105 F1- - -S1 401 B6- X2 -H5 6007 F28- X37 /2 -X4 /D
107 S1- - -K4 402 B3- X2 -P4 6011 S5 - -M13
108 K4- - -F11 403 B3- X2 -X5 /5 6012 S7- - -K17
109 F11- - -F10 405 V4- - -H5 6013 K10- - -H14
110 F10- - -F5 406 B2- X2 -P3 6014 X4 /I- X37 /1 -K10
111 F5- - -F6 407 B2- X2 -X5 /5 6015 F26- - -S5
113 S1- - -F4 408 R2- X2 -P2 6016 F26- X41 -M5
114 F4- - -F3 409 B4- X2 -H3 6017 F26- X39 -M2
116 F8- - -S6 410 K53- - -H2 6018 S5- - -S4
118 F5- - -X1 412 K7- - -H8 6019 S5- X41 -M5
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 415 X5 /5- - -V4 6020 S4- X39 -M2
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 416 F3- - -H1 6021 S5- X41 -M5
123 F6- - -H12 417 H11- - -K5 6022 S4- X39 -M2
126 S11- - -K7 418 H12- - -K6 6033 F25- - -S20
149 K4- - -F8 442 B22- X2 -H23 6034 S20- - -S21
150 K4- - -K39 443 F29- - -K10 6035 F25- X40 -M4
172 F3- - -X4 /C 444 K10- - -H17 6036 F25- X38 -M3
173 F8- - -X4 /B 445 X5 /5- - -X4 /I 6037 S5- - -S21
174 F8- - -X4 /B 461 F6- X2 -B34 /B35 6038 S21- - -S4
178 F3- - -X4 /I 462 B34- X2 -H36 6039 S4- - -S20
465 B35- X2 -H39 6040 S20- - -S7
1015 X4 /A- X37 /2,F25 -F29 466 B38- - -A18 6041 S4 - -S21
1016 X4 /B- X37 /2 -F26 467 A18- - -B38 6042 S4 - -S20
1017 X4 /C- X37 /2 -E7 468 B39- - -A18 6043 S20- X46 -M7
1019 X4 /E- X37 /1,X47 -U1 469 A18- - -B39 6044 S21- X40 -M4
1028 F26- - -K17 6045 S21- X40 -M4
1029 K17- - -S7 516 S9- - -R3 /M6 6046 S20- X38 -M3
1030 F29- - -K10 517 S9- - -R3 /M6 6047 S20- X38 -M3
1031 K10- - -K10 518 S9- - - M6 /R3 6061 A18- - -Y64
1032 U1- - -A2 519 X2- - -A6 /M8 6062 S3- X2 -Y63
1040 S1- - -K53 521 X2- - -X8 6071 Y64- - -A18
1050 F25 - -F29 522 X2- - -X8 6270 A1- X2 -X5 /3
1350 G2- - -F31 524 X2- - -Y14
1360 F31- - -K71 531 F11- X2 -A7 705 F7- X2 -E1
1780 F6- X2 /X71 -A18 542 X2 - -V17 706 F7- X2 -E2
546 S4 - -S17 708 X4 /D - - -P2,3,4
300 G1- X2 -K2 547 S4 - -S18
301 S1- X2 -Y1 548 S5 - -M13 900 open connection X2
302 K1- X2 -V1 553 X2- - -X8 901
303 K3- - -V1 open connections cab
304 S2- X2 -V3 600 S3- X2 -A1 907
305 V3- - -K2 601 S10- X2 -K7 908 open connection X2
306 K3- - -K2 602 F10- X2 -B11 910
307 K3- - -H1 604 K7- X2 -Y3 open connections X2
308 H1- - -P1 605 B11- X2 -Y6 942
311 F3- X2 -B9 607 S2- - -Y4
312 B9- - -B8 610 S12- X2 -A1
313 B8- - -B10 615 S12- X2 -A1 wo.no. ground wire black
314 F2- X2 -R1 643 A1- X2 -X5 /1
315 S1- - -F2 665 A1- X2 -X5 /3
317 K2- X2 -M1 667 A1- X2 -K6
318 K39 - -S1 670 A1- X2 -K5
319 V1- - -K39 673 S3- - -S11
320 S1- - -K2 674 S11- X2 -S10
321 S1- - -K39 679 Y25- - -Y3
323 S2- X2 -S3 681 A1- X2 -X5 /2
324 S12- - -K6
325 S8- X2 -B7 6000 K17- - -F27
335 K4- - -K39 6001 F27- X42 -E4
392 F10- X2 -Y2 6002 K17- - -F28
/C = area cab

Color codes: bl = blue sw = black

br = brown sw-bl = black-blue
ge = yellow sw-gr = black-gray
gn = green ws = white
gr = gray ws-bl = white-blue
rt = red ws-sw = white-black

instrument panel
roof panel (cab)

sensor - travel gear - cone seal area,
electronic box - fan drive
F7 8A light front P
lights

PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 5921
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.17.00
A18 electronic box - fan drive /B S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /C
S8 push button switch - horn /P
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant /B S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /B
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /B S10 push button switch - right joystick - float position /B
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (0,05bar) /B S11 push button switch - float position /P
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12bar) /B S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /P
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /B S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /C
B7 horn /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /C
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm /B
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm /B U1 (option) transformer - radio /C
B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /B
B11 pressure switch - quick drop (17 bar) /B V1 diode 1A (K1) /P
B34 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area left /B V3 diode 1A (H5) /P
B35 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area right /B V4 diode 1A (free) /P
B38 temperature sensor - fan drive (coolant temperature) /B V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /B
B39 temperature sensor - fan drive (hydraulic oil temperature) /B
X1 electrical outlet 24V /P
E1 (option) light front left /B X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole /P
E2 (option) light front right /B X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole /P
E3 working light rear right /C X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
E4 working light front left /C identification) /P
E5 working light rear left /C X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
E6 working light front right /C X37-1 plug to U1,K10 /C
E7 dome light /C X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
E11 heater /B X38 plug to M3 /C
X39 plug to M2 /C
Fx F1 - F29 see front page for listing X40 plug to M4 /C
X41 plug to M5 /C
G1 alternator /B X42 plug to E3,E4,E5,E6 /C
G2 batteries /B X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X65 (option) plug operators seat with air suspension /B
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /P X71 plug to A18 /B
H3 indicator light - air filter /P
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /B
H8 indicator light - float position /P Y3 solenoid valve - float position /B
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /B
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /C Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /B
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P Y25 solenoid valve - float position /B
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area left /P Y63 solenoid valve - safety device towing /B
H39 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area right /P Y64 proportional solenoid valve - fan drive /B

M1 starter /B
P1 hour meter /P
P2 fuel gauge /P

MP
Instrumentenpult
Instrument Panel
2 2 2 2 2 Pupitre
674
126
1 1
1 1
Y63 Y25 679
Y3 Y6 Y4 1 610
S
6062
604
605
+
br sw S1
673
615 S1
+
2 3 MP
324
S1 31 S12 S11
p
100 rt 118
17
S2 bl 1 rt rt
S2 +
S10 B11 rt 105
rt 107
601
674
30 30
607
B A C X2 X1
1,5
P,0,1,
-
X34 2,5
1780
MP MP
304
101
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 2,5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
21
S1
320
521 174 MP
392
101
531
102
602
315
601
674
315
23
522 301 173
113
321
35
118
553
24
318
323
936
F11
MP
F10
12
935 F7 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46
p 1780 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
31 14
442 674 674 114
2,5
673
705
706
26
301 301
108
109
314
113
149
110
B22
111
321
123
178
311
416
172
38
2,5
602 602
107
50
2 8 p 1 102
1,5
62
1,5
1,5
1,5
401 101 101
49
B6 61
705 1,5
2 15 p 1 706 1,5 335 410
3
400 604 604 150
55 49 49a
B5 392
27
392
30 86 30 86
20s
500
p 408 408
31 39
409 406 406
51
402
87a
85
87
B4 p 0,5 409
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
G 409
31 4
402 400 400 149 2,5
W 16
403 401 108 2,5 110
B3 407
28
401
407 708
31 t 96 G 40 A
406 403 403 174
52 B
W 407 442 442 318 173
B2 323
64
5
323 300 307 172
C
D
Q 601 601 415 708
31 G 71 I
6062 445
306
408 6062
100
324
319
324
306
320
17 E
R2 304
29
304 304
2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5
178
F
300 300 941
41 V5 V4 V3 V1 G
325 325 325 901
53 H
302 302 902
6
B7 65
A8 1 7 5 J
405
87a
610 610 5 4 2 903
6 K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
K
0,75 615 615 305 904
670
417
418
667
25 L
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
126
37 M
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 906
105
18 3 2 N
0,75 670 670 + 907
30
601
1
667 667
300
42
1
311 X4
314 314 2,5
35A
2 317
13
317 2,5 317
K7 1 4 5
F1 rt 70 0,75 600
54
600
317
66
6 0,75 643 643
412
103 rt
604
392
301
7
B+ D+ 30 50 0,75 665 19
665 MP
G 681
rt 70
681
M 2
rt 6
308
708
3 0,75 6270 6270
U R1 43
908 2,5
+ 31
H11417
418
G1 31 M1 31
Y1 Y2 900 119 119 119 120
323
123
308
307
416
410
412
120
120
120
59
H12
933 1,5 673
12V
S1 1
120
72 D+ + + +
940
G2 -
20
32
912 2,5 Q t
o p
H23
913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8
44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1
50
2
914 2,5 S3
409
400
401
442
P1 P2 P3 P4
405
56
H39
H36
915 2,5 325
+ 36
937
408
9
406
402
6062
917 2,5
600
465
462
461
12V
60
6270
643
681
939
665
302
G2 -
48
938 MP
45
9201,5 MP
15
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5
57
50
9211,5
69
58
9221,5X5
927
88 86(85) 70
928 415
34
925 445
8
519 2,5
K1 88a
10
542
11
SW
22
50
531
33
A1 68
524 1,5
465
47
462
67
461 .
PR 712B F/N xxx - 56005921

2 Options wired, not equipped
Options non equipes
R3 Instrumentenpult
516
517
Instrument Panel
518
Pupitre
1 2 3 4
0 123
M
674
126
610
S9 + M6 S
+
S1
673
E15 615 S1
+
MP
324
S12 S11
102
100 rt 118
rt rt
1 2 4 8 3 7 5 6 +
rt 105
rt 107 30 30
X8 X2 X1
1,5
4 3 1 5 2 6 8 7 P,0,1,
-
2,5
1780
553
522
521
102
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2,5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
MP 21
S1
320
1,5 521 521 174 MP
392
101
531
102
602
315
315
23
1,5 522 522 301 173
113
321
35
118
1,5 553 553
24
936 936 318
F11
F10
12
935 935 F7 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46 8A
1780 1780 1780 8A 2A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
673
705
706
26
301
108
109
314
113
149
110
111
321
123
178
311
416
172
38
2,5
602
E1
107
50
102 102
1,5
62
1,5
1,5
1,5
101
49
MP 705 1,5 705 705 1,5
61
706 1,5 706 706 1,5 335 410
3
604 150
E2 55
392
30 86 30 86 49 49a
27 20s
408
39
406
51
87a
85
87
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
409
4
400 149 2,5
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407 708
40 A
A18 > 60
< 65
> 85
< 90 52
403 174
B
442 318 173
5 9 10 7 8 3 4 1 2 6 64 C
323 300 307 172
5 D
601 415 708
X71 71
445
I
306
6062
100
324
319
324
306
320
6061
6071
17
1780
E
304 304 178
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5 F
300 941
V5 V4 V3 V1
SW
41 G
WS
WS
469
468
467
466
325 901
53 H
302 902
6
65
A8 1 7 5 J
405
87a
1 610 5 4 2 903
6
615
K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
904
K
305
670
417
418
667
25 L
105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
126
37 M
1 2 1 2 105 2,5 rt 906
18 3 2 N
670 + 907
30
601
MP 667
42
t t 311
1
311 X4
314 2,5
13 K7 1 4 5
B39 B38 54
317 2,5 317
Y64 2
66
600
643
412
604
7
19
665 MP
681
2
308
708
6270
43
3180 908 908 2,5
31
H11417
418
900 119 119 119 120
323
900
123
308
307
416
410
412
120
120
120
59
H12
p p 933 933 1,5 673
S1 1
120
72 D+ + + +
MP 313
31 31
311 940
20
940
912 912 2,5 o p
B10 B8 B9 32 Q t
H23
913 913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8
44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1 2
3190 914 914 2,5 S3
409
400
401
442
P1 P2 P3 P4
405
56
H39
H36
915 915 2,5 325
36
937 937
408
9
406
402
6062
917 917 2,5
600
465
462
461
60
6270
643
681
939 939
665
M
938
48
938 MP
B
M 920
45
9201,5 MP
M12 Q 942
15
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5
57
M8 921 9211,5
69
A7
S + 922 9221,5X5
V17 A6 927
58
927
70
928 928 415
34
X65 925
8
925 445
519 2,5 519 519 2,5
531
10
542 542 542
11
SW SW SW
22
531 531
MP 33
1,5 524 524 1,5
68
0,75 465 465
524
47
0,75 462 462
67
0,75 461 461
462
461
465
461
sw
sw
Y14
C A B C A B
PR 712B F/N xxx - 56005921
S + - S + -
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm2 ----- Option verkabelt nicht bestckt
2 Q Q
Option wired not equipped Electrical - Schematic
Options non equipes
B34 B35 01 02 Schmas de cblage lectriques 9.2.17.00/2
Instrumentenpult
Instrument Panel MP MP
Pupitre
31
31
M M
M M
674
126
610
31b
53a
53b
53
53b
53a
53a
31b
31b
53b
31b
53a
53b
M2
31
31
53
53
53
S
M5
+
S1 M3 M4
673
ws/sw
sw-gr
ws/bl
615 S1
sw-bl
2 4 1 3 5 2 4 1 3 5
+
MP
sw
gr
gr
324
bl
S12 S11
M M
100 rt 118
rt rt
M13
M7
+ 3 4 2 1
rt 105
6045
6044
6047
6046
6035
6036
6011
6043
rt 107 30 30
X2 X1
1,5
P,0,1,
6021
6019
6016
-
2,5
1780
MP
4
P 0 12 3 MP
2,5 MP
58 15 54 19 17 50a
21
S1
320
521 174 MP
392
101
531
102
602
315
315
23
522 301 173
113 X381 X391 X401 X411
321
35 2 3 2 3 2 3
118
2 3
553
24
936 318
F11
F10
12
935 F7 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46 8A
1780 8A 2A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
S20 S4 S21 S5
673
705
706
26
301
108
109
314
113
149
110
111
321
123
178
311
416
172
38
6044
6046
6020
6019
2,5
602
0
0
0
0
107
50
6021
21
21
21
6045
6047
21
6022
102
1,5
0,1
62 7
0,1
0,1
1,5
0,1
7
1,5
1,5
7 7
101
49 5 5 5 5
705 1,5 2 2
61 4 2 4 4 4 2
706 1,5 335 410 6043
3
6041
6034
6018
6018
6015
6034
6033
604 150
55 30 86 30 86 49 49a
392 MP MP MP MP
6042
6041
6039
6042
6039
6038
27 20s
6006
6011
6037
6038
6037
408 6040
39
406
51
87a
85
87
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
409
4
400 149 2,5
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407 708
40 A
403 174 1015
52
6033
B
6035
6036
442 318 173 1016
64 C
6015
6016
6017
323 300 307 172 1017
5
415 708
D
6007
MP
71 601
I
445 6014
306
6062
100
324
319
324
306
320
17 E
29
304 304
2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5
178
F
1019 F25
2 4 5
300 941 8A F26
41 V5 V4 V3 V1 G
325 901 8A 1,5
53 H
302 902
65
A8 1 6 7 5 J 1 2 3 1 2 3 X46
405
87a
610 5 4 2 903
6 K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
K
1015
1015
615 904
1028
1016
305
670
417
418
667
25
105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
L 1 2 3 4
MP E7
126
1017
37 M
105 2,5 rt 906
18
6014
2 N
1019
3
670 + 907 1,5
30
601
667 1,5
42
1
311 X4 X37/1
314 2,5
13
317 2,5
K7 1 4 5
1,5
1015
54
317 1,5
600 X37/2 Kabine
6040
1028
66
643
412
604
1,5
7
665 MP F29 Cab
85
19
86
5 1
2
681
MP 2A 1029 6012 MP Cabine
308
708
6270 1,5
43
1030
908 2,5 1,5
30
87
1029
31
H11417
418
S7
6002
119
6000
900 119 119 120
323
123
308
307
416
410
412
K17
120
120
120
59
H12
933 1,5 S1 673 1,5

1
120
72 D+ + + +
940 1,5 6004
20 o
32
912 2,5 Q t p F27 F28
H23
913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8 8A 8A
44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1 2 X47
914 2,5 S3 6006
409
400
401
442
P1 P2
6003
P3 P4 E6
405
56
H39
H36
915 2,5 325 6007

36 1,5
937 E3
408
9
406
402
3
6062
917 2,5 6003 1,5

600
465
462
461
6014
1030
60 2
1,5
1,5
6270
1,5
643
6001 1,5
681
939
665
6001
1019
48
938 MP 2,5
1
2,5
45 MP - + MP
15
9201,5 X42 6005
6004
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5 24V 2 3
57 MP E4
U1
1031
9211,5 12V
69
58
9221,5 X5 1032
1,5
927 H14 E5
70
34
928 415 K10 1 4 5
per+ + L
925 445 6013 3A
8
519 2,5
10
542 12V
11
SW
A2 - R
22 SW
531
33
524 1,5
68
465
47
462
67
461
.
PR 712B F/N xxx - 56005921
----- Option verkabelt nicht bestckt

All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 Option wired not equipped
Options non equipes
Socket
Pin
1 314 8 519 15 942 22 531 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 6062
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 522 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 542 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 sw 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 1780 53 302 60 939 67 461
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 524 40 403 47 462 54 600 61 706 68 465
6 944 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 392 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 521 28 407 35 553 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928

Socket
Pin
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905

PR 712B F/N xxx-5922 6199
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.18.01

1 - 5 -
2 - 6 553
3 sw 7 521
4 102 8 522
1 0102 5 522
2 sw 6 521
3 - 7 553
4 - 8 -

Positioning chart
pole c.no.
A 304
B 101
C 323




Positioning chart
1 6061 10 ws
2 6071 11 -
3 467 12 -
4 466 13 -
6 1780 15 -
7 469
8 468
9 ws

PR 712B F/N xxx-5922 6199
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.18.02
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black

PR 712B F/N xxx-5922 6199
Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.18.03
wire wire wire
no. no. no.
100 S1- - -K3 3180 B9- - -B8 6003 F28- X42 -E6
101 F4- X2 -S2 3190 B9- - -B8 6004 E5- - -E6
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 6005 E3- - -E4
103 G1- - -M1 400 B5- X2 -H4 6006 F27- - -S5
105 F1- - -S1 401 B6- X2 -H5 6007 F28- X37/2 -X4/D
107 S1- - -K4 402 B3- X2 -P4 6011 S5 - -M13
108 K4- - -F11 403 B3- X2 -X5/5 6012 S7- - -K17
109 F11- - -F10 405 V4- - -H5 6013 K10- - -H14
110 F10- - -F5 406 B2- X2 -P3 6014 X4/I- X37/1 -K10
111 F5- - -F6 407 B2- X2 -X5/5 6015 F26- - -S5
113 S1- - -F4 408 R2- X2 -P2 6016 F26- X41 -M5
114 F4- - -F3 409 B4- X2 -H3 6017 F26- X39 -M2
116 F8- - -S6 410 K53- - -H2 6018 S5- - -S4
118 F5- - -X1 412 K7- - -H8 6019 S5- X41 -M5
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 415 X5/5- - -V4 6020 S4- X39 -M2
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 416 F3- - -H1 6021 S5- X41 -M5
123 F6- - -H12 417 H11- - -K5 6022 S4- X39 -M2
126 S11- - -K7 418 H12- - -K6 6033 F25- - -S20
149 K4- - -F8 442 B22- X2 -H23 6034 S20- - -S21
150 K4- - -K39 443 F29- - -K10 6035 F25- X40 -M4
172 F3- - -X4/C 444 K10- - -H17 6036 F25- X38 -M3
173 F8- - -X4/B 445 X5/5- - -X4/I 6037 S5- - -S21
174 F8- - -X4/B 461 F6- X2 -B34/B35 6038 S21- - -S4
178 F3- - -X4/I 462 B34- X2 -H36 6039 S4- - -S20
465 B35- X2 -H39 6040 S20- - -S7
1015 X4/A- X37/2,F25 -F29 466 B38- - -A18 6041 S4 - -S21
1016 X4/B- X37/2 -F26 467 A18- - -B38 6042 S4 - -S20
1017 X4/C- X37/2 -E7 468 B39- - -A18 6043 S20- X46 -M7
1019 X4/E- X37/1,X47 -U1 469 A18- - -B39 6044 S21- X40 -M4
1028 F26- - -K17 6045 S21- X40 -M4
1029 K17- - -S7 516 S9- - -R3/M6 6046 S20- X38 -M3
1030 F29- - -K10 517 S9- - -R3/M6 6047 S20- X38 -M3
1031 K10- - -K10 518 S9- - - M6/R3 6061 A18- - -Y64
1032 U1- - -A2 519 X2- - -A6/M8 6062 S3- X2 -Y63
1040 S1- - -K53 521 X2- - -X8 6071 Y64- - -A18
1050 F25 - -F29 522 X2- - -X8 6270 A1- X2 -X5/3
1350 G2- - -F31 524 X2- - -Y14
1360 F31- - -K71 531 F11- X2 -A7 705 F7- X2 -E1
1780 F6- X2/X71 -A18 542 X2 - -V17 706 F7- X2 -E2
546 S4 - -S17 708 X4/D - - -P2,3,4
300 G1- X2 -K2 547 S4 - -S18
301 S1- X2 -Y1 548 S5 - -M13 900 open connection X2
302 K1- X2 -V1 553 X2- - -X8 901
304 S2- X2 -V3 600 S3- X2 -A1 907
306 K3- - -K2 602 F10- X2 -B11 910
308 H1- - -P1 605 B11- X2 -Y6 942
311 F3- X2 -B9 607 S2- - -Y4
312 B9- - -B8 610 K5- X2 -A1
313 B8- - -B10 643 A1- X2 -X5/1 wo.no. ground wire black
314 F2- X2 -R1 665 A1- X2 -X5/3
315 S1- - -F2 667 A1- X2 -K6
317 K2- X2 -M1 670 A1- X2 -K5
318 K39 - -S1 673 S3- - -S11
319 V1- - -K39 674 S11- X2 -S10
320 S1- - -K2 679 Y25- - -Y3
321 S1- - -K39 681 A1- X2 -X5/2
323 S2- X2 -S3
324 K5- - -K6 6000 K17- - -F27
325 S8- X2 -B7 6001 F27- X42 -E4
335 K4- - -K39 6002 K17- - -F28
392 F10- X2 -Y2
/C = area cab



instrument panel
roof panel (cab)

F7 8A light front P
lights

PR 712B F/N xxx-5922 6199
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.18.00
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12bar) /B S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /C
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /C
B7 horn /B
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm /B U1 (option) transformer - radio /C
B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /B V1 diode 1A (K1) /P
B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /B V3 diode 1A (H5) /P
B34 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area left /B V4 diode 1A (free) /P
B35 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area right /B V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /B
B38 temperature sensor - fan drive (coolant temperature) /B
B39 temperature sensor - fan drive (hydraulic oil temperature) /B X1 electrical outlet 24V /P
X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole /P
E1 (option) light front left /B X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole /P
E2 (option) light front right /B X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
E3 working light rear right /C identification) /P
E4 working light front left /C X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
E5 working light rear left /C X37-1 plug to U1,K10 /C
E6 working light front right /C X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
E7 dome light /C X38 plug to M3 /C
X40 plug to M4 /C
X42 plug to E3,E4,E5,E6 /C
G1 alternator /B X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
G2 batteries /B X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
X65 (option) plug operators seat with air suspension /B
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X71 plug to A18 /B
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /P
H3 indicator light - air filter /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /B
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P Y3 solenoid valve - float position /B
H8 indicator light - float position /P Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /B
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /B
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /C Y25 solenoid valve - float position /B
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P Y63 solenoid valve - safety device towing /B
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area left /P Y64 proportional solenoid valve - fan drive /B
H39 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area right /P

M1 starter /B
P1 hour meter /P
P2 fuel gauge /P

MP
Instrumentenpult
Instrument Panel
2 2 2 2 2 Pupitre
674
126
Basic Machine with Operator Platform 1 1 1 1
Y63 Y25 679
Y3 Y6 Y4 1
S
6062
604
605
+
br sw S1
673
2 3 MP
S1 31 S11
p rt
100 118
17
S2 bl 1 rt rt
S2 +
S10 B11 rt 105
rt 107
601
674
30 30
607
B A C X2 X1
1,5
P,0,1,
-
X34 2,5
1780
MP MP
304
101
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 2,5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
21
S1
320
521 174 MP
392
101
531
102
602
315
601
674
315
23
522 301 173
113
321
35
118
553
24
936 318
323
F11
F10
MP 12
935 F7 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46
p 1780 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
31 14
442 674 674 114
2,5
673
705
706
26
301 301
108
109
314
113
149
110
B22
111
321
123
178
311
416
172
38
2,5
602 602
107
50
2 8 p 1 102
1,5
62
1,5
1,5
1,5
401 101 101
49
B6 61
705 1,5
2 15 p 1 706 1,5 335 410
3
400 604 604 150
55 30 86 30 49 49a
B5 392
27
392
86
20s
500
p 408 408
31 39
409 406 406
51
402
87a
85
87
B4 p 0,5 409
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
G 409
31 4
402 400 400 149 2,5
W 16
403 401 108 2,5 110
B3 407
28
401
407 708
31 t 96 G 40 A
406 403 403 174
52 B
W 407 442 442 318 173
B2 323
64
5
323 300 307 172
C
D
Q 601 601 415 708
31 G 71 I
6062 445
306
408 6062
100
610
324
319
306
320
17 E
R2 304
29
304 304
2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5
178
F
300 300 941
41 V5 V4 V3 V1 G
325 325 325 901
53 H
302 302 902
6
B7 65
A8 1 7 5 J
405
87a
610 610 5 4 2 903
6
944 1,5
K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
904
K
305
670
417
418
667
25 L
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
126
37 M
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 906
105
18 3 2 N
0,75 670 670 + 907
30
601
1
667 667
300
42
1
311 X4
314 314 2,5
35A
2 317
13
317 2,5 317
K7 1 4 5
F1 rt 70 0,75 600
54
600
317
66
643 643
412
103 rt 6
604
392
0,75
301
7
B+ D+ 30 50 0,75 665 665 MP
19
G 681
rt 70
681
M 2
rt 6
308
708
3 0,75 6270 6270
U R1 43
908 2,5
+ 31
H11417
418
G1 M1 31
Y1 Y2 900 119 119 119 120
323
31
123
308
307
416
410
412
120
120
120
59
H12
933 1,5 673
12V
S1 1
120
72 D+ + + +
940
G2 -
20
32
912 2,5 Q t
o p
H23
913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8
44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1
50
2
914 2,5 S3
409
400
401
442
P1 P2 P3 P4
405
56
H39
H36
915 2,5 325
+ 36
937
408
9 406
402
6062
917 2,5
600
465
462
461
12V
60
6270
643
681
939
665
302
G2 -
48
938 MP
45
9201,5 MP
15
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5
57
50
9211,5
69
58
9221,5X5
927
88 86(85) 70
928 415
34
925 445
8
519 2,5
K1 88a
10
542
11
SW
22
50
531
33
A1 68
524 1,5
465
47
462
67
461 .
PR 712B F/N xxx - 59226199

Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2 Options wired, not equipped
Options non equipes
R3 Instrumentenpult
516
517
Instrument Panel
518
Pupitre
1 2 3 4
0 123
M
674
126
S9 + M6 S
+
S1
673
E15 MP
Machine de base avec poste de conduite S11
102
100 rt 118
rt rt
1 2 4 8 3 7 5 6 +
rt 105
rt 107 30 30
X8 X2 X1
1,5
4 3 1 5 2 6 8 7 P,0,1,
-
2,5
1780
553
522
521
102
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2,5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
MP 21
S1
320
1,5 521 521 174 MP
392
101
531
102
602
315
315
23
1,5 522 522 301 173
113
321
35
118
1,5 553 553
24
936 936 318
F11
F10
12
935 935 F7 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46 8A
1780 1780 1780 8A 2A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
673
705
706
26
301
108
109
314
113
149
110
111
321
123
178
311
416
172
38
2,5
602
E1
107
50
102 102
1,5
62
1,5
1,5
1,5
101
49
MP 705 1,5 705 705 1,5
61
706 1,5 706 706 1,5 335 410
3
604 150
E2 55
392
30 86 30 86 49 49a
27 20s
408
39
406
51
87a
85
87
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
409
4
400 149 2,5
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407 708
40 A
A18 > 60
< 65
> 85
< 90 52
403 174
B
442 318 173
5 9 10 7 8 3 4 1 2 6 64 C
323 300 307 172
5 D
601 415 708
X71 71
445
I
306
6062
100
610
324
319
306
320
6061
6071
17
1780
E
304 304 178
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5 F
300 941
V5 V4 V3 V1
SW
41 G
WS
WS
469
468
467
466
325 901
53 H
302 902
6
65
A8 1 7 5 J
405
1
87a
610 5 4 2 903
6
944 1,5
K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
904
K
305
670
417
418
667
25 L
105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
126
37 M
1 2 1 2 105 2,5 rt 906
18 3 2 N
670 + 907
30
601
MP 667
42
t t 311
1
311 X4
314 2,5
13 K7 1 4 5
B39 B38 54
317 2,5 317
Y64 2
66
600
643
412
604
7
19
665 MP
681
2
308
708
6270
43
3180 908 908 2,5
31
H11417
418
900 119 119 119 120
323
900
123
308
307
416
410
412
120
120
120
59
H12
p p 933 933 1,5 673
S1 1
120
72 D+ + + +
MP 313
31 31
311 940
20
940
912 912 2,5 o p
B10 B8 B9 32 Q t
H23
913 913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8
44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1 2
3190 914 914 2,5 S3
409
400
401
442
P1 P2 P3 P4
405
56
H39
H36
915 915 2,5 325
36
937 937
408
9 406
402
6062
917 917 2,5
600
465
462
461
60
6270
643
681
939 939
665
M
938
48
938 MP
B
M 920
45
9201,5 MP
M12 Q 942
15
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5
57
M8 921 9211,5
69
A7
S + 922 9221,5X5
V17 A6 927
58
927
70
928 928 415
34
X65 925
8
925 445
519 2,5 519 519 2,5
531
10
542 542 542
11
SW SW SW
22
531 531
MP 1,5 524
33
524 1,5
68
0,75 465 465
524
47
0,75 462 462
0,75 67
461 461
462
461
465
461
sw
sw
Y14
C A B C A B
PR 712B F/N xxx - 59226199
2
S + - S + -
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm ----- Option verkabelt nicht bestckt
2
2 Q Q
Options non equipes
B34 B35 01 03 Schmas de cblage lectriques 9.2.18.00/2
Instrumentenpult
Pupitre
31
31
M M
M M
674
126
31b
53a
53b
53
53b
53a
53a
31b
31b
53b
31b
53a
53b
M2
31
31
53
53
53
S
M5
+
S1 M3 M4
673
ws/sw
sw-gr
ws/bl
sw-bl
2 4 1 3 5 2 4 1 3 5
MP
sw
gr
gr
bl
S11
M M
100 rt 118
rt rt
M13
M7
+ 3 4 2 1
rt 105
6045
6044
6047
6046
6035
6036
6011
6043
rt 107 30 30
X2 X1
1,5
P,0,1,
6021
6019
6016
-
2,5
1780
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2,5 MP MP
58 15 54 19 17 50a
21
S1
320
521 174 MP
392
101
531
102
602
315
315
23
522 301 173
X381 X391 X401 X411
113
321
35 2 3 2 3 2 3
118
2 3
553
24
936 318
F11
F10
12
935 F7 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46 8A
1780 8A 2A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
114
674
S20 S4 S21 S5
673
705
706
26
301
108
109
314
113
149
110
111
321
123
178
311
416
172
38
6044
6046
6020
6019
2,5
602
0
0
0
0
107
50
6021
21
21
21
6045
6047
21
6022
102
1,5
0,1
62 7
1,5
0,1
0,1
0,1
1,5
1,5
7 7 7
101
49 5 5 5 5
705 1,5 2 2
61 4 2 4 4 4 2
706 1,5 335 410 6043
3
6041
6034
6018
6018
6015
6034
6033
604 150
55 30 86 30 86 49 49a
392 MP MP MP MP
6042
6041
6039
6042
6039
6038
27 20s
6006
6011
6037
6038
6037
408 6040
39
406
51
87a
85
87
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
409
4
400 149 2,5
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407 708
40 A
403 174 1015
52 B
6033
6035
6036
442 318 173 1016
64 C
6015
6016
6017
323 300 307 172 1017
5
415 708
D
6007
MP
71 601
I
445 6014
306
6062
100
610
324
319
306
320
17 E
29
304 304
2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5
178
F
1019 F25
300 941 8A F26
41 V5 V4 V3 V1 G
325 901 8A 1,5
53 H
302 902
65
A8 1 6 7 5 J 1 2 3 1 2 3 X46
405
87a
6
610
K2 86 87
K3 5 4 2
K5 1 3
K6 1 3 903
K
1015
1015
944 1,5 904
1028
1016
305
670
417
418
667
25
105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
L 1 2 3 4
MP E7
126
1017
37 M
105 2,5 rt 906
18 2
6014
N
1019
3
670 + 907 1,5
30
601
667 1,5
42
1
311 X4 X37/1
314 2,5
13
317 2,5 317
K7 1 4 5
1,5
1015
54
1,5
600 X37/2 Kabine
6040
1028
66
643
412
604
1,5
7
665 MP F29 Cab
85
19
86
5 1
2
681
MP 2A 1029 6012 MP Cabine
308
708
6270 1,5
43
1030
908 2,5 1,5
30
87
1029
31
H11417
418
S7
6002
119 119
6000
900 119 120
323
123
308
307
416
410
412
K17
120
120
120
59
H12
933 1,5 S1 673 1,5

1
120
72 D+ + + +
940 1,5 6004
20 o
32
912 2,5 Q t p F27 F28
H23
913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8 8A 8A
44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1 2 X47
914 2,5 S3 6006
409
400
401
442
P1 P2
6003
P3 P4 E6
405
56
H39
H36
915 2,5 325 6007

36 1,5
937 E3
408
9
406
402
6062 3
917 2,5 6003 1,5
600
465
462
461
6014
1030
60 2
1,5
1,5
6270
1,5
643
6001
681
939 1,5
665
6001
1019
48
938 MP 2,5
1
2,5
45 MP - + MP
15
9201,5 X42 6005
6004
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5 24V 2 3
57 MP E4
U1
1031
9211,5 12V
69
58
9221,5 X5 1032
1,5
927 H14 E5
70
34
928 415 K10 1 4 5
per+ + L
925 445 6013 3A
8
519 2,5
10
542 12V
11
SW
A2 - R
22 SW
531
33
524 1,5
68
465
47
462
67
461
.
PR 712B F/N xxx - 59226199

2 Option wired not equipped
Options non equipes
Socket
Pin
1 314 8 519 15 942 22 531 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 6062
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 522 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 542 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 sw 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 1780 53 302 60 939 67 461
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 524 40 403 47 462 54 600 61 706 68 465
6 944 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 392 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 521 28 407 35 553 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928

Socket
Pin
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905

Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.19.01

1 - 5 -
2 - 6 553
3 sw 7 521
4 102 8 522
1 0102 5 522
2 sw 6 521
3 - 7 553
4 - 8 -

Positioning chart
Socket on central wiring
harness
pole c.no.
A 304
B 101
C 323


9. Plug (3 poles) - sensor fueltank /- travel gear - cone seal area(Cannon)



Positioning chart
1 6061 10 ws
2 6071 11 -
3 467 12 -
4 466 13 -
6 1780 15 -
7 469
8 468
9 ws

Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.19.02
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black

Wiring
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.19.03
wire wire wire
no. no. no.
100 S1- - -K3 3177 V16- - -K49 6013 K10- - -H14
101 F4- X2 -S2 3178 V16- - -K49 6014 X4 /I- X37 /1 -K10
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 3180 V16- - -S4 6015 F26- - -S5
103 G1- - -M1 3181 K24- - -K49 6016 F26- X41 -M5
105 F1- - -S1 3182 V15- - -K24 6017 F26- X39 -M2
107 S1- - -K4 3183 V15- - -S35 6018 S5- - -S4
108 K4- - -F11 3185 V15- - -S4 6019 S5- X41 -M5
109 F11- - -F10 3186 S20- - -K51 6020 S4- X39 -M2
110 F10- - -F5 3187 S21- - -K52 6021 S5- X41 -M5
111 F5- - -F6 3188 V16- - -S20 6022 S4- X39 -M2
113 S1- - -F4 3189 V15- - -S20 6033 F25- - -S20
114 F4- - -F3 3190 V16- - -S21 6034 S20- - -S21
116 F8- - -S6 3191 V15- - -S21 6035 F25- X40 -M4
118 F5- - -X1 6036 F25- X38 -M3
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 400 B5- X2 -H4 6037 S5- - -S21
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 401 B6- X2 -H5 6038 S21- - -S4
123 F6- - -H12 402 B3- X2 -P4 6039 S4- - -S20
126 S11- - -K7 403 B3- X2 -X5 /5 6040 S20- - -S7
149 K4- - -F8 405 V4- - -H5 6041 S4 - -S21
150 K4- - -K39 406 B2- X2 -P3 6042 S4 - -S20
172 F3- - -X4 /C 407 B2- X2 -X5 /5 6043 S20- X46 -M7
173 F8- - -X4 /B 408 R2- X2 -P2 6044 S21- X40 -M4
174 F8- - -X4 /B 409 B4- X2 -H3 6045 S21- X40 -M4
178 F3- - -X4 /I 410 K53- - -H2 6046 S20- X38 -M3
412 K7- - -H8 6047 S20- X38 -M3
1015 X4 /A- X37 /2,F25 -F29 415 X5 /5- - -V4 6055 S35- - -S5
1016 X4 /B- X37 /2 -F26 416 F3- - -H1 6056 X100- - B52
1017 X4 /C- X37 /2 -E7 417 H11- - -K5 6057 X100- - B52
1019 X4 /E- X37 /1,X47 -U1 418 H12- - -K6 6058 X100- - B53
1028 F26- - -K17 442 B22- X2 -H23 6059 X100- - B53
1029 K17- - -S7 443 F29- - -K10 6061 A18- - -Y64
1030 F29- - -K10 444 K10- - -H17 6062 S3- X2 -Y63
1031 K10- - -K10 445 X5 /5- - -X4 /I 6071 Y64- - -A18
1032 U1- - -A2 461 F6- X2 -B34 /B35 6270 A1- X2 -X5 /3
1040 S1- - -K53 462 B34- X2 -H36
1050 F25 - -F29 465 B35- X2 -H39 705 F7- X2 -E1
1076 F26- - -K24 466 B38- - -A18 706 F7- X2 -E2
1077 F25- - -S35 467 A18- - -B38 708 X4 /D - - -P2,3,4
1078 S35- - -S35 468 B39- - -A18
1079 F26- - -K50 469 A18- - -B39 900 open connection X2
1080 F25- - -K52 901
1081 F25- - -K51 516 S9- - -R3 /M6 open connections cab
1093 X98- - -X97 517 S9- - -R3 /M6 907
1094 X98- - -X99 518 S9- - - M6 /R3 908 open connection X2
1350 G2- - -F31 519 X2- - -A6 /M8 910
1360 F31- - -K71 521 X2- - -X8 open connections X2
1780 F6- X2 /X71 -A18 522 X2- - -X8 942
524 X2- - -Y14
300 G1- X2 -K2 531 F11- X2 -A7
301 S1- X2 -Y1 542 X2 - -V17 wo.no. ground wire black
302 K1- X2 -V1 546 S4 - -S17
303 K3- - -V1 547 S4 - -S18
304 S2- X2 -V3 548 S5 - -M13
305 V3- - -K2 553 X2- - -X8
306 K3- - -K2
307 K3- - -H1 600 S3- X2 -A1
308 H1- - -P1 601 S10- X2 -K7
311 F3- X2 -B9 602 F10- X2 -B11
312 B9- - -B8 604 K7- X2 -Y3
313 B8- - -B10 605 B11- X2 -Y6
314 F2- X2 -R1 607 S2- - -Y4
315 S1- - -F2 610 K5- X2 -A1
317 K2- X2 -M1 643 A1- X2 -X5 /1
318 K39 - -S1 665 A1- X2 -X5 /3
319 V1- - -K39 667 A1- X2 -K6
320 S1- - -K2 670 A1- X2 -K5
321 S1- - -K39 673 S3- - -S11
323 S2- X2 -S3 674 S11- X2 -S10
324 K5- - -K6 679 Y25- - -Y3
325 S8- X2 -B7 681 A1- X2 -X5 /2
335 K4- - -K39
392 F10- X2 -Y2 6000 K17- - -F27
6001 F27- X42 -E4
3160 B9- - -B8 6002 K17- - -F28
3161 B9- - -B8 6003 F28- X42 -E6
3172 S4- - -K50 6004 E5- - -E6
3174 S35- - -K24 6005 E3- - -E4
3175 S35- - -K24 6006 F27- - -S5
3176 S35- - -V16 6007 F28- X37 /2 -X4 /D
3177 V16- - -K49 6011 S5 - -M13
3178 V16- - -K49 6012 S7- - -K17
Description Parts list /Scheme:
/C = area cab



instrument panel
roof panel (cab)

F3 6.3Acharge indicator, dome light back up alarm, radio P
F4 8Aelectronic supply, servo cut off, starter cut P
F7 8A light front P
lights
F50 8A electrical outlet 12V C

Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.19.00
A1 electronic box connection /B see group 10.2. P1 hour meter /P
A2 (option) radio /C P2 fuel gauge /P
A6 (option) refueling pump /B P3 coolant temperature gauge /P
A7 (option) operators seat with air suspension /B P4 engine oil pressure gauge /P
A8 diode combination V1-V4 /P
A9 diode combination V15-V16 /C R1 flame glow plug /B
A18 electronic box - fan drive /B R2 fuel level sending unit /B
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant /B
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /B S1 starter switch w. preheat position /P
B4 vacuum indicator - air filter (0,05bar) /B S2 neutral starting switch /B
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12bar) /B S3 emergency off switch /P
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /B S4 rocker switch - windshield wiper. front /C
B7 horn /B S5 rocker switch - windshield wiper rear /C
B8 (option) pressure switch right back up alarm /B S7 rocker switch - working light, instrument lights /C
B9 (option) pressure switch left back up alarm /B S8 push button switch - horn /P
B10 (option) horn back up alarm /B S9 rotary switch - heater /B
B11 pressure switch - quick drop (17 bar) /B S10 push button switch -joystick right - float position /P
B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /B S11 push button switch - float position /P
B33 temperature switch cold start device /B S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper door left /C
B34 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area left /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper door right /C
B35 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area right /B rocker switch - preselection interval switch / Waschanlage /C
B38 temperature sensor - fan drive (coolant temperature) /B S35 position 1 windshield washer position (push button style)
B39 temperature sensor - fan drive (hydraulic oil temperature) /B position 2 interval position
B52 speakers right /C
B53 speakers left /C U1 (option) transformer - radio /C
E1 (option) light front left /B V1 diode 1A (K1) /P

E2 (option) light front right /B V2 diode 1A (K2) /P
E3 working light rear right /C V3 diode 1A (H5) /P
E4 working light front left /C V4 diode 1A (free) /P
E5 working light rear left /C V15 diode 1A (interval switch) /C
E6 working light front right /C V16 diode 1A (interval switch) /C
E7 dome light /C V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /B
E11 heater /B
Fx F1 - F29 see front page for listing X1 electrical outlet 24V /P

X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72-poles /P
G1 alternator /B X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14-poles /P
G2 batteries /B X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal for K10, machine
identification) /P
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /P X37-1 plug to U1,K10 /C
H3 indicator light - air filter /P X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P X38 plug to M3 /C
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P X39 plug to M2 /C
H8 indicator light - float position /P X40 plug to M4 /C
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P X41 plug to M5 /C
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P X42 plug to E3,E4,E5,E6 /C
H14 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /C X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area left /P X65 (option) plug operators seat with air suspension /B
H39 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area right /P X71 plug to A18 /B
X97 electrical outlet 12V /C
K1 battery main switch /B X98 plug to X97, X99 /C
K2 relay - starter cut off /P X99 plug to A2 /C
K3 relay - power guard /P X100 plug to B52/B53 /C
K5 relay - reduced travel speed range indicator light /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
K6 relay - electronic fault indicator /P Y2 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /B
K7 step relay - float position /P Y3 solenoid valve - float position /B
K10 relay - warning light /C Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off Arbeitshydr. /B
K17 relay 35A - working light /C Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
K24 time relay - interval timer /C Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /B
K49 relay - interval switch on /C Y54 solenoid valve - cold start device /B
K50 relay - interval switch front /C Y63 solenoid valve - safety device towing /B
K51 relay - interval switch door left /C Y64 proportional solenoid valve - fan drive /B
K52 relay - interval switch door right /C
M1 starter /B
M3 windshield wiper door left /C
M4 windshield wiper door right /C
MP
Instrumentenpult
Instrument Panel
2 2 2 2 2 Pupitre

Vx
674
126
Basic Machine with Operator Platform 1 1 1 1
Y63 Y25 679
Y3 Y6 Y4 1
S
6062
604
605
+
br sw S1
673
2 3 MP
S1 31 S11
p rt
100 118
17
S2 bl 1 rt rt
S2 +
S10 B11 rt 105
rt 107
601
674
30 30
607
B A C X2 X1
1,5
P,0,1,
-
X34 2,5
1780
MP MP
304
101
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 2,5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
21
S1
320
521 174 MP
392
101
531
102
602
315
601
674
315
23
522 301 173
113
321
35
118
553
24
936 318
323
F11
F10
MP 12
935 F7 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46
p 1780 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
31 14
442 674 674 114
2,5
673
705
706
26
301 301
108
109
314
113
149
110
B22
111
321
123
178
311
416
172
38
2,5
602 602
107
50
2 8 p 1 102
1,5
62
1,5
1,5
1,5
401 101 101
49
B6 61
705 1,5
2 15 p 1 706 1,5 335 410
3
400 604 604 150
55 30 86 30 49 49a
B5 392
27
392
86
20s
500
p 408 408
31 39
409 406 406
51
402
87a
85
87
B4 p 0,5 409
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
G 409
31 4
402 400 400 149 2,5
W 16
403 401 108 2,5 110
B3 407
28
401
407 708
31 t 96 G 40 A
406 403 403 174
52 B
W 407 442 442 318 173
B2 323
64
5
323 300 307 172
C
D
Q 601 601 415 708
31 G 71 I
6062 445
306
408 6062
100
610
324
319
306
320
17 E
R2 304
29
304 304
2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5
178
F
300 300 941
41 V5 V4 V3 V1 G
325 325 325 901
53 H
302 302 902
6
B7 65
A8 1 7 5 J
405
87a
610 610 5 4 2 903
6
944 1,5
K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
904
K
305
670
417
418
667
25 L
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
126
37 M
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 906
105
18 3 2 N
0,75 670 670 + 907
30
601
1
667 667
300
42
1
311 X4
314 314 2,5
35A
2 317
13
317 2,5 317
K7 1 4 5
F1 rt 70 0,75 600
54
600
317
66
643 643
412
103 rt 6
604
392
0,75
301
7
B+ D+ 30 50 0,75 665 665 MP
19
G 681
rt 70
681
M 2
rt 6
308
708
3 0,75 6270 6270
U R1 43
908 2,5
+ 31
H11417
418
G1 M1 31
Y1 900 119 119 119 120
323
31
123
308
307
416
410
412
120
120
120
59
H12
933 1,5 673
12V
S1 1
120
72 D+ + + +
940
G2 -
20
32
912 2,5 Q t
o p
H23
> 50 913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8
< 35
X75
1 44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1
50
2
914 2,5 S3
409
400
401
442
P1 P2 P3 P4
405
t 56
H39
H36
2 1 915 2,5 325
+ 5791 5790 36
937
408
9 406
402
6062
917 2,5
600
465
462
461
B33
12V
60
6270
643
681
939
665
G2 -
48
938 MP
302
45
9201,5 MP
Y54 Y2 15
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5
57
50
9211,5
SW 69
58
9221,5X5
927
88 86(85) 70
928 415
34
925 445
8
519 2,5
K1 88a
10
542
11
SW
22
50
531
33
A1 68
524 1,5
465
47
462
67
461 .
PR 712B F/N xxx - 6200

2

Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2 Options wired, not equipped
Options non equipes
R3 Instrumentenpult
516
517
Instrument Panel
518
Pupitre
1 2 3 4
0 123
M
674
126
S9 + M6 S
+
S1
673
E15 MP
Machine de base avec poste de conduite S11
102
100 rt 118
rt rt
1 2 4 8 3 7 5 6 +
rt 105
rt 107 30 30
X8 X2 X1
1,5
4 3 1 5 2 6 8 7 P,0,1,
-
2,5
1780
553
522
521
102
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2,5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
MP 21
S1
320
1,5 521 521 174 MP
392
101
531
102
602
315
315
23
1,5 522 522 301 173
113
321
35
118
1,5 553 553
24
936 936 318
F11
F10
12
935 935 F7 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46 8A
1780 1780 1780 8A 2A 10A 5A 16A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
673
705
706
26
301
108
109
314
113
149
110
111
321
123
178
311
416
172
38
2,5
602
E1
107
50
102 102
1,5
62
1,5
1,5
1,5
101
49
MP 705 1,5 705 705 1,5
61
706 1,5 706 706 1,5 335 410
3
604 150
E2 55
392
30 86 30 86 49 49a
27 20s
408
39
406
51
87a
85
87
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
409
4
400 149 2,5
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407 708
40 A
A18 > 60
< 65
> 85
< 90 52
403 174
B
442 318 173
5 9 10 7 8 3 4 1 2 6 64 C
323 300 307 172
5 D
601 415 708
X71 71
445
I
306
6062
100
610
324
319
306
320
6061
6071
17
1780
E
304 304 178
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5 F
300 941
V5 V4 V3 V1
SW
41 G
WS
WS
469
468
467
466
325 901
53 H
302 902
6
65
A8 1 7 5 J
405
1
87a
610 5 4 2 903
6
944 1,5
K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
904
K
305
670
417
418
667
25 L
105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
126
37 M
1 2 1 2 105 2,5 rt 906
18 3 2 N
670 + 907
30
601
MP 667
42
t t 311
1
311 X4
314 2,5
13 K7 1 4 5
B39 B38 54
317 2,5 317
Y64 2
66
600
643
412
604
7
19
665 MP
681
2
308
708
6270
43
3161 908 908 2,5
31
H11417
418
900 119 119 119 120
323
900
123
308
307
416
410
412
120
120
120
59
H12
p p 933 933 1,5 673
S1 1
120
72 D+ + + +
MP 313
31 31
311 940
20
940
912 912 2,5 o p
B10 B8 B9 32 Q t
H23
913 913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8
44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1 2
3160 914 914 2,5 S3
409
400
401
442
P1 P2 P3 P4
405
56
H39
H36
915 915 2,5 325
36
937 937
408
9 406
402
6062
917 917 2,5
600
465
462
461
60
6270
643
681
939 939
665
M
938
48
938 MP
B
M 920
45
9201,5 MP
M12 Q 942
15
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5
57
M8 921 9211,5
69
A7
S + 922 9221,5X5
V17 A6 927
58
927
70
928 928 415
34
X65 925
8
925 445
519 2,5 519 519 2,5
531
10
542 542 542
11
SW SW SW
22
531 531
MP 1,5 524
33
524 1,5
68
0,75 465 465
524
47
0,75 462 462
0,75 67
461 461
462
461
465
461
sw
sw
Y14
C A B C A B
PR 712B F/N xxx - 6200
2
S + - S + -
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm ----- Option verkabelt nicht bestckt
Q Q
Options non equipes
B34 B35
31
31
31
M M
M
M2
53a
31b
53b
31
M3
53
M4
53a
31b
53b
53
31
53
31b
53a
53b
2 4 1 3 5 2 4 1 3 5
ws/sw
sw-gr
sw
gr
6047
6036
6046
6045
6035
6044
MP MP
31
X38 X39 X40 M
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
M5
53
31b
53a
53b
6047
6036
6046
6022
6017
6020
6045
6035
6044
M M
sw-bl
ws/bl
gr
bl
Instrumentenpult M13 M7 5 5 5
Instrument Panel 3 3 3
4 4 4
Kabine
6043
6011
Pupitre 1 2 1 2 1 2 Cab 3 4 2 1
Cabine
1079
3187
1080
6021
6016
1081
6019
K51 K50 K52
MP MP MP
3172
3186
X41
1 2 3
1,5
0
0
1
1,5
1
7 7 7
1,0
1,0
1,0
3188 3180 3190
5 5 5
6019
0
3189 3185 3191
21
6021
1
1
0,1
1
MP MP MP
172
174
175
5 7
S21
6040
178 S20 S4 4 2
MP
6015
6039 6038 6037
F8 F3 S5
6011
6006
6055
SW
25A 6.3A
X4
A
174 1015
B
6036
6035
1081
1080
1077
173 1016
C
6015
6016
6017
1079
1017
1076
172
D
708 6007
I MP
3183
3189
3188
3180
3190
3177
3178
3185
3191
445 6014
E
178
F
1019 F25
941
G
8A F26 5 1 7
901 8A 6
1,5
1078
H
1077
1078
2 3
A9
1
902
J 1 X46
0
903
1 2 3
E7 V15 V16
2
1015
1015
4
1016
8
1028
K 2 9
3
0,2
4
904
L 1 2 MP
5
3182
3176
1,5 905 6043 6043
M 4 7
1,5 906 6
N
6014
1019
1017
1,5 907 1,5
2
1,5 3174
3176
3175
3183
6055
SW
1,5 1015 1,5
S35
708
X37/1 1,5
F29
1028
6040
X37/2 MP 2A
3182
1030
86
85
5 1
119
X47 6014
MP
1029 6012 MP
1,5
+ 15
30
87
1,5 1076 5
1019
S7
1029
31b 3181 3
p K17 S
6002
2 3178
6000
3 4
- +
1031
2 1
- 24V 3177
P4 G U1 H14 1,5 6004 31
12V 1,5
10A
K10 1 4 5 K49
F27 F28 MP K24 I 86 MP
6013 8A 8A E6
6003
X5 1 2 3 4 5 X98 6006 3174
6007 1,5 E3 3175
3
1093 + 6003 1,5
2
1,5
1,5
1,5
F50 6001 1,5 6001
8A X97 2,5
1
2,5
445
415
415
445
sw -
X42 6005 Options wired, not equipped
6004
E4
1094
MP Options non equipes

sw
ws
1,5
8 4 7
X99 X100 B52 E5
5A 3
RT BL 6056
+ -
4
GE BL/SW 6057
PR 712B F/N xxx - 6200
2 per+ +
2 A2
Kabelschema .
PR 722B F/N xxx - 6200
Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2 - B53
BR
BR/SW
BR
6
5
6058
6059
-
+ Electrical - Schematic
01 03 Schma de cblage lectriques 9.2.19.00/3
Socket
Pin
1 314 8 519 15 942 22 531 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 934
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 522 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 542 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 sw 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 926 53 302 60 939 67 910
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 524 40 403 47 932 54 600 61 706 68 916
6 615 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 909 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 521 28 407 35 553 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928

Socket
Pin
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905
Mjfcifss!

Page
Feuille 9.2.30.01

1 - 5 -
2 - 6 553
3 sw 7 521
4 102 8 522
1 102 5 522
2 sw 6 521
3 - 7 553
4 - 8 -

Positioning chart
pole c.no.
A 304
B 101
C 323


9. Plug (3 poles) - sensor Diesel tank (Cannon)


Mjfcifss!

Page
Feuille 9.2.30.02
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black
Mjfcifss!
Wiring list PR 732 B F/N xxx-30013135

Page
Feuille 9.2.30.03
wire wire wire
no. no. no.
power supply 403 B3- X2 -X5/5 670 A1- X2 -K5
100 S1- - -K3 405 V4- - -H5 673 S3- - -S11
101 F4- X2 -S2 406 B2- X2 -P3 674 S11- X2 -S10
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 407 B2- X2 -X5/5 679 Y25- - -Y3
103 G1- - -M1 408 R2- X2 -P2 681 A1- X2 -X5/2
105 F1- - -S1 409 B4- X2 -H3 6270 A1- X2 -X5/3
107 S1- - -K4 410 K53- - -H2
108 K4- - -F11 412 K7- - -H8 electrical installation lights
109 F11- - -F10 415 X5/5- - -V4 700 F28- - -E6
110 F10- - -F5 416 F3- - -H1 701 F27- - -E4
111 F5- - -F6 417 H11- - -K5 703 E3- - -E4
113 S1- - -F4 418 H12- - -K6 704 E5- - -E6
114 F4- - -F3 442 B22- X2 -H23 705 F7- X2 -E1
116 F8- - -S6 443 F29- - -K10 706 F7- X2 -E2
118 F5- - -X1 444 K10- - -H17 708 F28- X37/2-X4/D -P2,3,4
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 445 X5/5- X4/I -K10 719 F27- - -S5
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 720 S5- - -S18
123 F6- - -H12 electrical installation 721 S18- - -S4
126 S11- - -K7 500 S5- X41 -M5 722 S4- - -S17
149 K4- - -F8 501 F26- X41 -M5 723 S17- - -S7
150 K4- - -K39 502 S5- X41 -M5 724 K38- - -F27
172 F3- X4/C-X37/2 -E7 503 S17- X38 -M3 725 K38- - -F28
173 F8- X4/B-X37/2 -F26 504 F25- X38 -M3
174 F8- X4/B-X37/2 -F25 505 S17- X38 -M3 open wires
175 F26- - -K38 506 F25- X40 -M4 900 open connection X2
176 S7- - -K38 507 F26- X39 -M2 901
178 F3- X4/I-X37/1 X47-U1 508 S18- X40 -M4 open connections cab
1040 S1- - -K53 509 S4- X39 -M2 907
1050 F25 - -F29 512 S17- X46 -M7 908 open connection X2
1350 G2- - -F31 514 F26- - -S4 912
1360 F31- - -K71 515 S4- - -S5 open connections X2
engine start / safety 516 S9- - -R3/M6 942
installations 517 S9- - -R3/M6
300 G1- X2 -K2 518 S9- - - M6/R3
301 S1- X2 -Y1 519 X2- - -A6/M8
302 K1- X2 -V1 521 X2- - -X8 MASSE K1- - -A1
303 K3- - -V1 522 X2- - -X8
304 S2- X2 -V3 524 X2- - -Y14 wo.no. ground wire black
305 V3- - -K2 531 F11- X2 -A7
306 K3- - -K2 533 S4- - -M2
307 K3- - -H1 534 S18- - -M4
308 H1- - -P1 535 F25- - -S17
311 F3- X2 -B9 536 S17 - -S18
312 B9- - -B8 542 X2 - -V17
313 B8- - -B10 546 S4 - -S17
314 F2- X2 -K71 547 S4 - -S18
315 S1- - -F2 548 S5 - -M13
317 K2- X2 -M1 553 X2- - -X8
318 K39 - -S1 valves,
319 V1- - -K39 electronic connections
320 S1- - -K2 600 S3- X2 -A1
321 S1- - -K39 601 S10- X2 -K7
323 S2- X2 -S3 602 F10- X2 -B11
324 S12- - -K6 604 K7- X2 -Y3
325 S8- X2 -B7 605 B11- X2 -Y6
335 K4- - -K39 607 S2- - -Y4
386 M1- - -Y34 610 S12- X2 -A1
392 F10- X2 -Y2 615 S12- X2 -A1
397 K71- - -R1 643 A1- X2 -X5/1
instrumentation 665 A1- X2 -X5/3
400 B5- X2 -H4 667 A1- X2 -K6
401 B6- X2 -H5
402 B3- X2 -P4
/C = area cab


br = brown rt = red
gn = green

instrument panel
roof panel (cab)

off
F7 8A light front P
F10 5A quick drop P
lights
F31 35A automatic circuit breaker /glow plug system B
Mjfcifss!
Parts list - Electrical schematic PR 732 B F/N xxx-3001 3135

Page
Feuille 9.2.30.00
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant (96) /B S8 push button switch - horn /P
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure (0.5 bar) /B S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /B
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm (1.5 bar) /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /C
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm (1.5 bar) /B
B22 pressure switch - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) (2.5 bar) /B V1 diode 1A (K1) /P
V2 diode 1A (K2) /P
E1 (option) light front left /B V3 diode 1A (H5) /P
E2 (option) light front right /B V4 diode 1A (free) /P
E3 working light rear right /C V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /B
E4 working light front left /C
E5 working light rear left /C X1 electrical outlet 24V /P
E6 working light front right /C X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole /P
E7 dome light /C X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole /P
E11 heater /B X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
identification) /P
Fx F1 - F31 see front page for listing X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
G1 alternator /B X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
X39 plug to M2 /C
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X40 plug to M4 /C
H3 indicator light - air filter /P X42 plug to E3,E4,E5,E6 /C
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
H8 indicator light - float position /P X65 (option) plug operators seat with air suspension /B
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /B
Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
K1 battery main switch /B Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /B
K2 relay - starter cut off /P Y25 solenoid valve - float position /B
K3 relay - power guard /P Y34 solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /B
K71 relay - glow plug system /B
M1 starter /B
P1 hour meter /P
P2 fuel gauge /P

MP
R3
518 Pupitre
1 2 3 4
0 12 3
M
126
674
Y25 Y3 Y6 Y4 610
679 + M6 S
S9
605
604
+
S1
673
E15 615
S1 S MP
324
br sw
S1 31 2 3 S12 S11
102
553
522
521
S2 100 rt 118
17
S2 bl 1 rt rt
1 2 4 8 3 7 5 6 +
S10 B11 rt 105
601
674
X8 rt 107
30 30
607
X2 X1
1,5
4 3 1 5 2 6 8 7
-
P,0,1,
102
553
522
521
MP MP
101
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 2.5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
MP
601
MP
674
21
S1
320
1.5 521 521 174
531
602
315
101
102
315
23
1.5 522 522 301 173
35
118
1.5 553 553
113
24
304
936 936 318
323
12 F7 F15 F4 F11 F10 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
935 935
1040
71
934 934 1.5 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 2A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 674 114
705
706
26
321
2.5
301 301
314
311
416
178
149
172
108
109
110
113
123
111
38
602 602
107
50
102 102
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
B22 p 101
62
101
49
442 705 1,5 705 705 1.5
31 2.5 61
706 1,5 706 706 1.5 335 410
3
604 604 150
B6 8 p 909
55
909 2,5
30 86 30 86 49 49a
20s
401 E1 E2 408
27
408
31 39
406 406 K4 K39 K53
51
B5
87a
8 p 402 402 87 85 85 31
87
63
31
400 MP 409
4
409 708
400 400 149 2,5
B4
500
p 16
401 401 108 2,5 110
28
409 407 407
31 40
403 403
MP B3 p 0.5 442
52
442 318
64 A
402 323 323 300 307 174
31 G 5 B
403 601 601 415 173
W 72 C
324
940 940 172
306
100
324
o
320
306
319
31 t G 17 D
406 304 304 304 708
87a
87a
87
87
29 2 4 8 9 85 30 30 86 85 85 I
W 300 300 445
407 V5 V4 V3 V1
B2 325
41
325 178
E
53 A8 F
31
Q 302 302 1 6 7 5 K2 K3 K5 K6 941
G
G 65
405
408 610 610 305 86 87 85 86 30 86 30 901
87
87a
87a
R2 615
6
615 902
H
670
417
418
667
25 J
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 302 303 903
126
37 K
325 rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 904
18 3 2 L
670 670 + 905
601
B7 667
30
667 906
M
42 N
311 311 907
314
1
314 K7
13 1 4 5
105
105
2,5 317 317 2.5 317 X4

54
1350 600 600
1 2 66
643 643
412
604
35A
665
7
665
MP
19
300
F1 35A 681 681

F31
308
2
708
2 1 6270 6270 123
301
386
43
rt 70 908 908 2.5
317
rt
31
417
418
70
10 rt
rt 103 900 900 119 119 119 120 120
323
123
307
308
416
410
412
120
120
120
+ 67
B+ D+ 30 50 910 910 2.5 673
46 S1 D+ + + +
G 926 926 2.5
12V
M 20
314
1360
o
3
Y34 Y1
912
32
912 2.5
Q t p H23
U
- 913
44
913 2.5
- - - - H3 H4 H5
G2 30 86
S8
rt
50
31 31 914 914 2.5 S G G G

H1 H2 H8
401
H11 H12 S3
400
409
G1
442
+ M1 56 P1 P2 P3 P4
405
K71 A1 915
68
915 2.5 325
6270
665
916 916 2.5

643
681
12V
85
408
9
406
87
402
917 917 2.5
600
302
60
- 939 939
397
G2 MP 938
48
938
4 1 2 3 5 MP
311
rt
50
45
Masse 920 920 1.5 MP
88 86(85) 15
10 sw
p p 942 942 1.5 X5

57
313 312 921 921 1.5
K1 31 1.5 31 1.5 69
922 922 1.5 415
88a B8 B9 927
58
927 445 445
50
R1 70
MP 928
34
928
925 925
B10 8
519 519
10
542 542
M 11
SW SW
22
M12 B
531 531
33
M 1,5 524 524 1,5
36
937 937
Q 47 .
A7 M8 932
59
932 1,5
V17 S + 933 933 1,5 .
Y14
A6 . .
X65
519
Kabelschema . PR 732B F/N xxx - 30013135
531
PR 742B F/N xxx - 30013088

542
SW
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm 2
MP All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2
2
Options non equipes 01 01 Schmas de cblage lectriques 9.2.30.00/1
Instrumentenpult MP
Instrument Panel
Pupitre MP MP
31
M
674
126
610
31
31
S MP
M2
53
31b
53a
M M
+
S1
673
sw-gr
615
gr
sw
S1 S MP
324
M3 M4
31
53
53
31b
31b
53a
53a
S12 S11
sw-gr
sw-gr
M
gr
gr
sw
sw
100 rt 118
rt rt M M
M5
53
31b
+
53a
rt 105
rt 107
30 30 M13 M7
bl
sw
gn
X1
512
548
X2
1,5
P,0,1,
-
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2.5
501
58 15 54 19 17 50a
21 MP
506
S1
502
500
534
508
504
505
503
320
521 174
531
602
101
102
315
315
23
522 301 173
35
118
553
24 113 X38 X40 X41
936 318 X39
12 F7 F15 F4 F11 F10 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
935
1040
71
934 1.5 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 2A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
705
706
26
321
2.5
301
149
311
109
314
178
108
416
172
110
123
113
111
38
602
107
50 S17 S4 S18 S5
102
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
62
101
534
533
210
210
210
210
500
49
705 1.5
502
508
509
0,1
0,1
61
0,1
0,1
7 7
706 1.5 335 410 503
3 5 5 5 7 5 7
604 150 505
55 30 86 30 86 49 49a 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
909 2,5 20s 512 548
27
515
535
536
536
515
514
546
547
408 721 720
39
546
547
51
406 K4 K39 K53 MP MP MP MP
722
722
719
721
720
87a
402 87 85 85 31
87
63
409 708
4
400 149 2,5
723
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407
40
403
52
442 318
64 A
323 300 307 174 174
5 B
601 415 173 173
C
535
506
504
72
501
507
514
306
940 100 172 172
324
324
306
319
320
17 D
304 304 708 708
87a
87a
MP
87
87
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 30 86 85 85 I
300 V5 V4 V3 V1 445
41 E
325 178
53 A8 F
X37 F26
302 1 6 7 5 K2 K3 K5 K6 941 F25 8A
65 86 87 85
G 1-2 8A
87
87a
610 305 86 30 86 30 901 1,5

405
87a
6
615 902
H
X46 Kabine
670
417
418
667
25 J 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
105 2,5 rt 302 303 903
Cab
126
173
174
175
1050
37
105 2,5 rt 904
K 1 2 MP
18
670 +
3 2
905
L
E7 Cabine
601
30 M
172
667 906
42 N
311 907 1,5
1
314 K7 1,5
13 1 4 5
317 2.5 317 X4
54
600 1,5
66
643 1,5
412
604
7
445
1050
19
665 MP
719
175
723
681
308
2
708
6270 123 1,5

43 MP 1
908 2.5 F29 176 MP 704
86
5
85
31 2A
417
418
323
900 119 119 119 120 120 725
308
307
416
410
123
412
1,5
120
120
120
67
178
724
30
910 2.5
87
673
46 S1 D+ + + + S7 E3
176
926 2.5 1,5
20 K38 F27 F28 E6
700
443
32
912 2.5
Q t
o
p H23 1,5
913 2.5
44 - - - - H3 H4 H5 X47 8A 8A
914 2.5 S8 S G G G
H11 H12 H1 H2 H8 S3 719
401
400
409
442
1.5
56 P1 P2 P3 P4
405
1.5
915 2.5 325 708 700 1,5
3
68
6270
643
916 2.5
681
665
701 1,5 701

MP
1.5
1.5
1 2
9
408
406
402
917 2.5 2,5 2,5

600
60
939 85 30
48
938 4 1 2 3 5 MP X42
703
MP
443
45
920 1.5 MP
15 E4
942 1.5 X5
704
1.5
57 86 H17
87a
K10
178
87
921 1.5
69
922 1.5 415
- +
444
58 24V
927 445 445 U1
70 12V E5
928
34
925
8
519
10
542
11
SW 12V
22
531
33 1460
524 1,5
36
937
47 + + L
932 1,5
59
933 1,5 3A A2
- R
SW

Option wired not equipped . .
Options non equipes

Kabelschema .
PR 732B F/N xxx - 30013135
PR 742B F/N xxx - 30013088
Socket
Pin
1 314 8 519 15 942 22 531 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 934
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 522 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 542 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 sw 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 926 53 302 60 939 67 461
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 524 40 403 47 462 54 600 61 706 68 465
6 615 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 392 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 521 28 407 35 553 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928

Socket
Pin
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905
Mjfcifss!
Wiring PR 732 B F/N xxx-3136 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-3089 5599

Page
Feuille 9.2.31.01

1 - 5 -
2 - 6 553
3 sw 7 521
4 102 8 522
Positioning chart
1 102 5 522
2 sw 6 521
3 - 7 553
4 - 8 -
Positioning chart
pole c.no.
A 304
B 101
C 323



Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-3089 5599

Page
Feuille 9.2.31.02
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-3089 5599

Page
Feuille 9.2.31.03
wire wire wire
no. no. no.
power supply 403 B3- X2 -X5 /5 670 A1- X2 -K5
100 S1- - -K3 405 V4- - -H5 673 S3- - -S11
101 F4- X2 -S2 406 B2- X2 -P3 674 S11- X2 -S10
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 407 B2- X2 -X5 /5 679 Y25- - -Y3
103 G1- - -M1 408 R2- X2 -P2 681 A1- X2 -X5 /2
105 F1- - -S1 409 B4- X2 -H3 6270 A1- X2 -X5 /3
107 S1- - -K4 410 K53- - -H2
108 K4- - -F11 412 K7- - -H8 electrical installation lights
109 F11- - -F10 415 X5 /5- - -V4 700 F28- - -E6
110 F10- - -F5 416 F3- - -H1 701 F27- - -E4
111 F5- - -F6 417 H11- - -K5 703 E3- - -E4
113 S1- - -F4 418 H12- - -K6 704 E5- - -E6
114 F4- - -F3 442 B22- X2 -H23 705 F7- X2 -E1
116 F8- - -S6 443 F29- - -K10 706 F7- X2 -E2
118 F5- - -X1 444 K10- - -H17 708 F28- X37 /2-X4 /D -P2,3,4
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 445 X5 /5- X4 /I -K10 719 F27- - -S5
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 461 F6- X2 -B34 /B35 720 S5- - -S18
123 F6- - -H12 462 B34- X2 -H36 721 S18- - -S4
126 S11- - -K7 465 B35- X2 -H39 722 S4- - -S17
149 K4- - -F8 723 S17- - -S7
150 K4- - -K39 electrical installation 724 K38- - -F27
172 F3- X4 /C-X37 /2 -E7 500 S5- X41 -M5 725 K38- - -F28
173 F8- X4 /B-X37 /2 -F26 501 F26- X41 -M5
174 F8- X4 /B-X37 /2 -F25 502 S5- X41 -M5 open wires
175 F26- - -K38 503 S17- X38 -M3 900 open connection X2
176 S7- - -K38 504 F25- X38 -M3 901
178 F3- X4 /I-X37 /1 X47-U1 505 S17- X38 -M3 open connections cab
1040 S1- - -K53 506 F25- X40 -M4 907
1050 F25 - -F29 507 F26- X39 -M2 908 open connection X2
1350 G2- - -F31 508 S18- X40 -M4 912
1360 F31- - -K71 509 S4- X39 -M2 open connections X2
engine start / safety 512 S17- X46 -M7 942
installations 514 F26- - -S4
300 G1- X2 -K2 515 S4- - -S5
301 S1- X2 -Y1 516 S9- - -R3 /M6
302 K1- X2 -V1 517 S9- - -R3 /M6 MASSE K1- - -A1
303 K3- - -V1 518 S9- - - M6 /R3
304 S2- X2 -V3 519 X2- - -A6 /M8 wo.no. ground wire black
305 V3- - -K2 521 X2- - -X8
306 K3- - -K2 522 X2- - -X8
307 K3- - -H1 524 X2- - -Y14
308 H1- - -P1 531 F11- X2 -A7
311 F3- X2 -B9 533 S4- - -M2
312 B9- - -B8 534 S18- - -M4
313 B8- - -B10 535 F25- - -S17
314 F2- X2 -K71 536 S17 - -S18
315 S1- - -F2 542 X2 - -V17
317 K2- X2 -M1 546 S4 - -S17
318 K39 - -S1 547 S4 - -S18
319 V1- - -K39 548 S5 - -M13
320 S1- - -K2 553 X2- - -X8
321 S1- - -K39 valves,
323 S2- X2 -S3 electronic connections
324 S12- - -K6 600 S3- X2 -A1
325 S8- X2 -B7 601 S10- X2 -K7
335 K4- - -K39 602 F10- X2 -B11
386 M1- - -Y34 604 K7- X2 -Y3
392 F10- X2 -Y2 605 B11- X2 -Y6
397 K71- - -R1 607 S2- - -Y4
instrumentation 610 S12- X2 -A1
400 B5- X2 -H4 615 S12- X2 -A1
401 B6- X2 -H5 643 A1- X2 -X5 /1
402 B3- X2 -P4 665 A1- X2 -X5 /3
667 A1- X2 -K6
/C = area cab


br = brown rt = red
gn = green

instrument panel
roof panel (cab)

off
F7 8A light front P
F10 5A quick drop P
lights
Mjfcifss!
Parts list - Electrical schematic PR 732 B F/N xxx-3136 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-3086 5599

Page 9.2.31.00
Feuille
B2 temperature sending unit - coolant /B S8 push button switch - horn /P
B3 pressure switch - engine oil pressure /B S9 rotary switch - heater - fresh air fan /B
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /C
B34 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area left /B V2 diode 1A (K2) /P
B35 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area right /B V3 diode 1A (H5) /P
V4 diode 1A (free) /P
E1 (option) light front left /B V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /B
E2 (option) light front right /B
E3 working light rear right /C X1 electrical outlet 24V /P
E4 working light front left /C X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole /P
E5 working light rear left /C X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole /P
E6 working light front right /C X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
E7 dome light /C identification) /P
E11 heater /B X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
Fx F1 - F31 see front page for listing X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
X38 plug to M3 /C
G1 alternator /B X39 plug to M2 /C
X41 plug to M5 /C
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X42 plug to E3,E4,E5,E6 /C
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /P X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
H3 indicator light - air filter /P X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P X65 (option) plug operator's seat with air suspension /B
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P
H8 indicator light - float position /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P Y3 solenoid valve - float position /B
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /B
H17 warning light - cab activated by B2 /B3 /B6 /C Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /B
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area left /P Y25 solenoid valve - float position /B
H39 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area right /P Y34 solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /B

M1 starter /B
P1 hour meter /P
P2 fuel gauge /P

MP
R3
1 2
518 Pupitre
3 4
0 12 3
M
126
674
Y25 Y3 Y6 Y4 610
679
+ M6 S
S9
605
604
+
S1
673
E15 615
S1 S MP
324
br sw
S12 S11
S1 31 2 3
102
553
522
521
S2 100 rt 118
17
S2 bl 1 rt rt
1 2 4 8 3 7 5 6 +
S10 B11 rt 105
601
674
B A C X8 rt 107
30 30
607
X2 X1
1,5
4 3 1 5 2 6 8 7
-
P,0,1,
X34
102
553
522
521
MP MP
101
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 2.5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
MP
601
MP
674
21
S1
320
1.5 521 521 174
531
602
315
101
102
315
23
1.5 522 522 301 173
35
118
1.5 553 553
113
24
304
936 936 318
323
12 F7 F15 F4 F11 F10 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
935 935
1040
71
934 934 1.5 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 2A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 674 114
705
706
26
321
2.5
301 301
314
311
416
178
149
172
108
109
110
113
123
111
38
602 602
107
50
102 102
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
B22 p 101
62
101
49
442 705 1,5 705 705 1.5
31 2.5 61
706 1,5 706 706 1.5 335 410
3
604 604 150
B6 8 p 909
55
909 2,5
30 86 3 1 49 49a
20s
401 E1 E2 408
27
408
31 39
406 406
51
B5 12 p
402 402 K4 87 85 K39 5 4 2 K53 31
63
31
400 MP 409
4
409 708
400 400 149 2,5
B4 16
500
p 401 401 108 2,5 110

28
409 407 407
31 40
403 403
MP B3 p 0.5 442
52
442 318
64 A
402 323 323 300 307 174
31 G 5 B
403 601 601 415 173
W 72 C
324
940 940 172
306
100
324
320
306
96 G
319
31 t 17 D
406 304 304 304 708
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5 I
W 300 300 445
407 V5 V4 V3 V1
B2 325
41
325 178
E
53 A8 F
31
Q 302 302 1 6 7 5 K2 941
G
G 65
405
5 4 2 1 3 1 3
408 610 610 305 86 87
K3 K5 K6 901
87a
R2 615
6
615 902
H
670
417
418
667
25 J
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 302 303 903
126
37 K
325 rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 904
18 15 30 L
670 670 + 905
601
B7 667
30
667 906
M
42 N
311 311 907
1
314 314 K7
87a
13 31
87
105
105
2,5 317 317 2.5 317 X4

54
1350 600 600
1 2 66
643 643
412
604
35A
665
7
665
MP
19
300
F1 681 681
35A F31
308
2
708
2 1 6270 6270 123
301
386
43
rt 70 908 908 2.5
317
rt
31
417
418
70
10 rt
rt 103 900 900 119 119 119 120
323
123
307
308
416
410
412
120
120
120
+ 59
B+ D+ 30 50 933 933 1.5 673
120
46 S1 D+ + + +
G 926 926 2.5
12V
M 20
314
1360
o
3
Y34 Y1
912
32
912 2.5
Q t p H39 H36
U
- 913
44
913 2.5
- - - - H3 H4 H5 H23
G2 30 86
S8 H11 H12
rt
50
31 31 914 914 2.5 S G G G

H1 H2 H8
401
S3
400
409
G1
442
+ M1 56 P1 P2 P3 P4
405
K71 A1 915
36
915 2.5 325
6270
665
937 937
643
681
465
462
461
12V
85
408
9
406
87
402
917 917 2.5

302
600
60
- 939 939
397
G2 MP 938
48
938
4 1 2 3 5 MP
311
rt
50
45
MASSE 920 920 1.5 MP
88 86(85) 15
10 sw
p p 942 942 1.5 X5

57
313 312 921 921 1.5
K1 31 1.5 31 1.5 69
922 922 1.5 415
88a B8 B9 927
58
927 445 445
50
R1 70
MP 928
34
928
925 925
B10 8
519 519
10
542 542
M 11
SW SW
22
M12 B
531 531
33
M 1,5 524 524 1,5
68
0,75 465 465 .
Q 47 .
A7 M8 0,75 462
67
462
V17 S + 0,75 461 461 .
Y14
A6 . .
461
461
462
465
SW
SW
X65
519 C A B C A B
----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt Kabelschema . PR 732B F/N xxx - 31365599
531

PR 742B F/N xxx - 30895599
542
SW - - Options non equipes
+
+
S S
MP Q Q Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm2

All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 01 02 Schmas de cblage lectriques 9.2.31.00/1
B34 B35 Cable sans prescription de section = 1mm2
Instrumentenpult MP
Instrument Panel
Pupitre MP MP
31
M
674
126
610
31
31
S MP
M2
53
31b
53a
M M
+
S1
673
sw-gr
615
gr
sw
S1 S MP
324
M3 M4
31
53
53
31b
31b
53a
53a
S12 S11
sw-gr
sw-gr
M
gr
gr
sw
sw
100 rt 118
rt rt M M
M5
53
31b
+
53a
rt 105
rt 107
30 30 M13 M7
bl
sw
gn
X1
512
548
X2
1,5
P,0,1,
-
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
21 MP
506
S1
502
500
534
501
508
504
505
503
320
521 174
531
602
101
102
315
315
23
522 301 173
35
118
553
113
24
936 318 X38 X39 X40 X41
12 F7 F15 F4 F11 F10 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
935
1040
71
934 1.5 8A 2A 8A 10A 5A 2A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
705
706
26
321
2.5
301
149
311
109
314
178
108
416
172
110
123
113
111
38
602
107
50 S17 S4 S18 S5
102
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
62
101
534
533
210
210
210
210
500
49
705 1.5
502
508
509
0,1
0,1
61
0,1
0,1
7 7
706 1.5 335 410 503
3 5 5 5 7 5 7
604 150 505
55 30 86 3 1 49 49a 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
909 2,5 20s 512 548
27
515
535
536
536
515
514
546
547
408 721 720
39
546
547
51
406 MP MP MP MP
722
722
719
721
720
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 5 4 2 K53 31
409 708
4
400 149 2,5
723
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407
40
403
52
442 318
64 A
323 300 307 174 174
5 B
601 415 173 173
C
535
506
504
72
501
507
514
306
940 100 172 172
324
324
306
319
320
17 D
304 304 708 708
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5 I MP
300 V5 V4 V3 V1 445
41 E
325 178
53 A8 F
X37 F26
302 1 6 7 5 K2 941 F25 8A
65
610 305 86 87 K3 4
G 1-2 8A
5 2
K6 1 901 1,5
405
87a
3 3
K5 1
6
615 902
H
X46 Kabine
670
417
418
667
25 J 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
105 2,5 rt 302 303 903
Cab
126
173
174
175
1050
37
105 2,5 rt 904
K 1 2 MP
15 30
18
670 + 905
L
E7 Cabine
601
30 M
172
667 906
42 N
311 907 1,5
1
314 K7 1,5
87a
13 31
X4
87
317 2.5 317
54
600 1,5
66
643 1,5
412
604
7
445
1050
19
665 MP
719
175
723
681
308
2
708
6270 123 1,5

43 MP 1
908 2.5 F29 176 MP 704
86
5
85
31 2A
417
418
323
900 119 119 119 120 725
308
307
416
410
123
412
1,5
120
120
120
59
178
724
30
933 1.5
87
673
120
46 S1 D+ + + + S7 E3
176
926 2.5 1,5
20 K38 F27 F28 E6
700
443
32
912 2.5
Q t
o
p H39 H36 1,5
913 2.5
44 - - - - H3 H4 H5 H23 X47 8A 8A
914 2.5 S8 S G G G H11 H12 H1 H2 H8 S3 719
401
400
409
442
1.5
56 P1 P2 P3 P4
405
1.5
915 2.5 325 708 700 1,5
3
36
6270
643
701 701
681
665
937 1,5
MP
1.5
1.5
1 2
462
465
9
461
408
406
402
917 2.5 2,5 2,5

600
60
939 2 3
48
938 4 1 2 3 5 MP X42 703
MP
443
45
920 1.5 MP
15 E4
942 1.5 X5
704
1.5
57
K10 1 4 5 H17
178
921 1.5
69
922 1.5 415
- +
444
58 24V
927 445 445 U1
70 12V E5
928
34
925
8
519
10
542
11
SW 12V
22
531
33 1460
524 1,5
68
465
47 + + L
462
67
461 3A A2
- R
SW

Option wired not equipped
Options non equipes
PR 742B F/N xxx - 30895599
Socket
Pin
1 314 8 519 15 942 22 531 29 300 36 937 43 908 50 102 57 921 64 323 71 6072
2 6270 9 917 16 401 23 522 30 667 37 105 44 914 51 402 58 927 65 610 72 940
3 604 10 542 17 304 24 936 31 900 38 602 45 920 52 442 59 933 66 643
4 400 11 sw 18 670 25 105 32 913 39 406 46 1780 53 302 60 939 67 461
5 601 12 935 19 681 26 301 33 524 40 403 47 462 54 600 61 706 68 465
6 615 13 317 20 912 27 408 34 925 41 325 48 938 55 309 62 101 69 922
7 665 14 674 21 521 28 407 35 553 42 311 49 705 56 915 63 409 70 928

Socket
Pin
A 174 D 708 G 901 J 903 M 906
B 173 E 178 H 902 K 904 N 907
C 172 F 941 I 445 L 905
Mjfcifss!
Wiring PR 732B F/N xxx-5600 5883
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.32.01

1 - 5 -
2 - 6 553
3 sw 7 521
4 102 8 522
Positioning chart
1 102 5 522
2 sw 6 521
3 - 7 553
4 - 8 -
Positioning chart
pole c.no.
A 304
B 101
C 323




Positioning chart
1 6061 10 ws
2 6071 11 -
3 467 12 -
4 466 13 -
6 1780 15 -
7 469
8 468
9 ws
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.32.02
Notes
Color codes:
bl = blue
br = brown
ge = yellow
gn = green
gr = gray
rt = red
sw = black
Mjfcifss!
Datum Edition Date

Page
Feuille 9.2.32.03
wire wire wire
no. no. no.
100 S1- - -K3 392 F10- X2 -Y2 6003 F28- X42 -E6
101 F4- X2 -S2 397 K71- - -R1 6004 E5- - -E6
102 F11- X2, X8 -S9 6005 E3- - -E4
103 G1- - -M1 3180 B9- - -B8 6006 F27- - -S5
105 F1- - -S1 3190 B9- - -B8 6007 F28- X37 /2 -X4 /D
107 S1- - -K4 6011 S5 - -M13
108 K4- - -F11 400 B5- X2 -H4 6012 S7- - -K17
109 F11- - -F10 401 B6- X2 -H5 6013 K10- - -H14
110 F10- - -F5 402 B3- X2 -P4 6014 X4 /I- X37 /1 -K10
111 F5- - -F6 403 B3- X2 -X5 /5 6015 F26- - -S5
113 S1- - -F4 405 V4- - -H5 6016 F26- X41 -M5
114 F4- - -F3 406 B2- X2 -P3 6017 F26- X39 -M2
116 F8- - -S6 407 B2- X2 -X5 /5 6018 S5- - -S4
118 F5- - -X1 408 R2- X2 -P2 6019 S5- X41 -M5
119 P4- - -P3, P2, S8 409 B4- X2 -H3 6020 S4- X39 -M2
120 H12 - H11,H23,H5,H4,H3, P4 410 K53- - -H2 6021 S5- X41 -M5
123 F6- - -H12 412 K7- - -H8 6022 S4- X39 -M2
126 S11- - -K7 415 X5 /5- - -V4 6033 F25- - -S20
149 K4- - -F8 416 F3- - -H1 6034 S20- - -S21
150 K4- - -K39 417 H11- - -K5 6035 F25- X40 -M4
172 F3- - -X4 /C 418 H12- - -K6 6036 F25- X38 -M3
173 F8- - -X4 /B 442 B22- X2 -H23 6037 S5- - -S21
174 F8- - -X4 /B 443 F29- - -K10 6038 S21- - -S4
178 F3- - -X4 /I 444 K10- - -H17 6039 S4- - -S20
445 X5 /5- - -X4 /I 6040 S20- - -S7
1015 X4 /A- X37 /2,F25 -F29 461 F6- X2 -B34 /B35 6041 S4 - -S21
1016 X4 /B- X37 /2 -F26 462 B34- X2 -H36 6042 S4 - -S20
1017 X4 /C- X37 /2 -E7 465 B35- X2 -H39 6043 S20- X46 -M7
1019 X4 /E- X37 /1,X47 -U1 466 B38- - -A18 6044 S21- X40 -M4
1028 F26- - -K17 467 A18- - -B38 6045 S21- X40 -M4
1029 K17- - -S7 468 B39- - -A18 6046 S20- X38 -M3
1030 F29- - -K10 469 A18- - -B39 6047 S20- X38 -M3
1031 K10- - -K10 6061 A18- - -Y64
1032 U1- - -A2 516 S9- - -R3 /M6 6062 S3- X2 -Y63
1040 S1- - -K53 517 S9- - -R3 /M6 6071 Y64- - -A18
1050 F25 - -F29 518 S9- - - M6 /R3 6270 A1- X2 -X5 /3
1350 G2- - -F31 519 X2- - -A6 /M8
1360 F31- - -K71 521 X2- - -X8 705 F7- X2 -E1
1780 F6- X2 /X71 -A18 522 X2- - -X8 706 F7- X2 -E2
524 X2- - -Y14 708 X4 /D - - -P2,3,4
300 G1- X2 -K2 531 F11- X2 -A7
301 S1- X2 -Y1 542 X2 - -V17 900 open connection X2
302 K1- X2 -V1 553 X2- - -X8 901
304 S2- X2 -V3 600 S3- X2 -A1 907
306 K3- - -K2 602 F10- X2 -B11 912
308 H1- - -P1 605 B11- X2 -Y6 942
311 F3- X2 -B9 607 S2- - -Y4
312 B9- - -B8 610 S12- X2 -A1
313 B8- - -B10 615 S12- X2 -A1 wo.no. ground wire black
314 F2- X2 -K71 643 A1- X2 -X5 /1
315 S1- - -F2 665 A1- X2 -X5 /3
317 K2- X2 -M1 667 A1- X2 -K6
318 K39 - -S1 670 A1- X2 -K5
319 V1- - -K39 673 S3- - -S11
320 S1- - -K2 674 S11- X2 -S10
321 S1- - -K39 679 Y25- - -Y3
323 S2- X2 -S3 681 A1- X2 -X5 /2
324 S12- - -K6
325 S8- X2 -B7 6000 K17- - -F27
335 K4- - -K39 6001 F27- X42 -E4
386 M1- - -Y34 6002 K17- - -F28
/C = area cab



instrument panel
roof panel (cab)

F7 8A light front P
F9 20A shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) P
F10 5A quick drop P
lights
Mjfcifss!
Parts list - Electrical schematic PR 732B F/N xxx-5600 5883
Datum Edition Date

Page 9.2.32.00
Feuille
B5 pressure switch - parking brake (12bar) /B S12 push button switch - travel speed range selection /P
B6 pressure switch - repl. oil pressure (8bar) /B S17 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system left door /C
B7 horn /B S18 rocker switch - windshield wiper and washer system right door /C
B8 (option) pressure switch right - back up alarm /B
B9 (option) pressure switch left - back up alarm /B U1 (option) transformer - radio /C
B10 (option) horn - back up alarm /B
B34 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area left /B V3 diode 1A (H5) /P
B35 oil level sensor - travel gear - cone seal area right /B V4 diode 1A (free) /P
B38 temperature sensor - fan drive (coolant temperature) /B V17 (option) sensor - fuel level - fuel tank /B
B39 temperature sensor - fan drive (hydraulic oil temperature) /B
X1 electrical outlet 24V /P
E1 (option) light front left /B X2 panel plug - central wiring harness 72 pole /P
E2 (option) light front right /B X4 panel plug - cab wiring harness 14 pole /P
E3 working light rear right /C X5 serial connecting terminal (ground signal to K10, machine
E4 working light front left /C identification) /P
E5 working light rear left /C X8 coupling - cab - heater /B
E6 working light front right /C X37-1 plug to U1,K10 /C
E7 dome light /C X37-2 plug to F28, E7, F26, F25 /C
X39 plug to M2 /C
X41 plug to M5 /C
G1 alternator /B X42 plug to E3,E4,E5,E6 /C
G2 batteries /B X46 plug to M7,M13 /C
X47 plug to U1, A2 /C
H1 indicator light - charge indicator /P X65 (option) plug operator's seat with air suspension /B
H2 indicator light - glow plug system /P X71 plug to A18 /B
H3 indicator light - air filter /P
H4 indicator light - parking brake /P Y1 solenoid valve - glow plug system /B
H5 indicator light - repl. oil pressure /P Y3 solenoid valve - float position /B
H8 indicator light - float position /P Y4 solenoid valve - servo cut off /B
H11 indicator light - reduced travel speed range /P Y6 solenoid valve - quick drop /B
H12 indicator light - electronic fault indicator /P Y14 (option) solenoid clutch air conditioner /B
H23 indicator light - hydr. filter monitoring (tank) /P Y34 solenoid valve - starting fuel quantity /B
H36 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area left /P Y49 shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) /B
H39 indicator light - oil level - travel gear - cone seal area right /P 1=pull, 2=hold
Y63 solenoid valve - safety device towing /B
K1 battery main switch /B Y64 proportional solenoid valve - fan drive /B
K73 relay - shut off solenoid (Diesel engine) Y49 /P
M1 starter /B
P1 hour meter /P
P2 fuel gauge /P

MP
Instrumentenpult
Instrument Panel
2 2 2 2 2 Pupitre
674
126
1 1 1 1 610
Y63 Y25 Y3 Y6 Y4 1
6062 679 S
604
605
+
S1
673
br sw
615 S1
+
2 3 MP
324
S12 S11
S1 31
p rt
100 118
17
S2 bl 1 rt rt
S2 +
S10 B11 rt 105
rt 107 1400 rt 2,5
601
674
30 30
607
B A C X2 X1
1,5
P,0,1,
-
X34
1780
MP MP
304
101
4
P 0 12 3
2.5 2,5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
21
S1
320
1400
521 174 MP
101
531
102
602
315
601
674
315
23
522 301 173
113
321
398
35
118
553
24
936 318
323
F11
F10
MP 12
935 F7 F9 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46
p 1780 8A 20A 2A 8A 10A 5A 2A 5A 25A 10A 5A
31 14
442 674 674 114
2,5
673
705
706
26
301
rt 2,5
301
108
109
314
113
149
110
B22
111
123
178
311
416
172
38
602 602
107
50
2 8 p 1 102
1,5
321
62
1,5
1,5
1,5
2,5
401 101 101
1390
398
49
B6 61
705 1,5
2 15 p 1 706 1,5 335 410
3 86 30
400 604 604 150
55 49 49a
B5 2,5 309
27
309 2,5
30 86 30 86
20s
500
p
31
408
39
408 K73
409 406
87a
406 85 87
51
402
87a
85
87
B4 p 0,5 409
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
309
G 409 2,5
31 4
402 400 400 149 2,5
W 16
403 401 108 2,5 110
B3 407
28
401
708
96 G 407
31 t 403
40 A
406 403 174
52 B
W 407 442 442 318 173
B2 323
64
323 300 307 172
C
5 D
Q 601 601 415 708
31 G 71 I
6062 445
306
408 6062
100
324
319
324
306
320
17 E
R2 304
29
304 304
2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5
178
F
300 300 941
41 V5 V4 V3 V1 G
325 325 325 901
53 H
302 302 902
6
B7 65
A8 1 7 5 J
405
610
87a
610 5 4 2 903
6 K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
K
0,75 615 615 305 904
670
417
418
667
25 L
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
126
37 M
rt 2,5 105 105 2,5 rt 906
105
18 3 2 N
0,75 670 670 + 907
30
601
1
667 667
42
2,5 1
311 X4
309
300
314 314
35A
2 317
13
317 2,5 317
K7 1 4 5
F1
386
317
54
rt 70 0,75 600 600
66
103 rt 6 0,75 643 643
412
rt 10
604
1350 7
2 B+ D+ 30 50 0,75 665 665 MP
19
G 681
rt 70
1350
35A 681
M 2
rt 6
308
1 2
708
3 0,75 6270 43
6270
U
908 2,5
+ 31
H11417
418
1
F31 Y49 G1 M1 31 119 119 119 120
2,5
31 900
323
123
308
307
416
410
412
120
120
120
59
H12
933 1,5 673
rt 10
12V
S1 1
120
72 D+ + + +
940
G2 - MP 20
912 2,5 Q t
o p
32
H23
913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8
44
S8 S - - G - G - H1
50
G 2
914 2,5 S3
409
400
401
442
P1 P2 P3 P4
1360
405
56
314
H39
H36
915 2,5 325
386
301
+ 36
937
408
9
406
402
30 86
6062
917 2,5
600
465
462
461
12V
6270
60
643
681
939
665
302
G2 - K71 87 85
48
938 MP
45 MP
Y1 Y34 15
9201,5
397
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5
57
MP
50
9211,5
69
58
9221,5X5
sw 10
927
88 86(85) 70
928 415
34
925 445
8
519 2,5
K1 88a
10
542
11
SW
R1 22
50
531
33
A1 68
524 1,5
465
47
462
67
461
.
Kabel ohne Querschnittsangabe 1mm2 ----- Optionen verkabelt, nicht bestckt Kabelschema PR 732B F/N xxx - 56005883
All unmarked wires have a cross section of 1mm2 Options wired, not equipped
2
Options non equipes Electrical - Schematic
R3 Instrumentenpult
516
Instrument Panel
517
Pupitre
518
1 2 3 4
0 123
M
674
126
610
S9 + M6 S
+
S1
673
E15 615 S1
+
MP
324
S12 S11
102
100 rt 118
rt rt
1 2 4 8 3 7 5 6 +
rt 105
rt
rt 107 1400 2,5

30 30
X8 X2 X1
1,5
4 3 1 5 2 6 8 7 P,0,1,
-
1780
553
522
521
102
MP
4
P 0 12 3
2,5 58 15 54 19 17 50a
MP 21
S1
320
1400
1,5 521 521 174 MP
101
531
102
602
315
315
23
1,5 522 522 301 173
113
321
398
35
118
1,5 553 553
24
936 936 318
F11
F10
12
935 935 F7 F9 F15 F4 F2 F3 F8 F5 F6
1040
46 8A
1780 1780 1780 8A 20A 2A 10A 5A 2A 5A 25A 10A 5A
14
674 114
673
705
706
26
rt 2,5
301
108
109
314
113
149
110
111
123
178
311
416
172
38
602
E1
107
50
102 102
1,5
321
62
1,5
1,5
1,5
2,5
101
1390
398
49
MP 705 1,5 705 705 1,5
61
706 1,5 706 706 1,5 335 410
3 86 30
604 150
E2 55
309 2,5
30 86 30 86 49 49a
27 20s
39
408 K73
87a
406 85 87
51
87a
85
87
63
402 K4 87 85
K39 K53 31
309
409 2,5
4
400 149 2,5
16
401 108 2,5 110
28
407 708
40 A
A18 > 60
< 65
> 85
< 90 52
403 174
B
442 318 173
5 9 10 7 8 3 4 1 2 6 64 C
323 300 307 172
5 D
601 415 708
X71 71
445
I
306
6062
100
324
319
324
306
320
6061
6071
17
1780
E
304 304 178
29 2 4 9 8 85 30 3 1 2 4 5 2 4 5 F
300 941
V5 V4 V3 V1
SW
41
WS
WS
G
469
468
467
466
325 901
53 H
302 902
1 6 7 5
65
A8 J
405
1
87a
610 5 4 2 903
6
615
K2 86 87
K3 K5 1 3
K6 1 3
904
K
305
670
417
418
667
25 L
105 2,5 rt 302 303 905
126
37 M
1 2 1 2 105 2,5 rt 906
18 3 2 N
670 + 907
30
601
MP 667
42
t t 311
1
311 X4
314
13 K7 1 4 5
B39 B38 54
317 2,5 317
Y64 2
66
600
643
412
604
7
19
665 MP
681
2
308
708
6270
43
3180 908 908 2,5
31
H11417
418
900 119 119 119 120
323
900
123
308
307
416
410
412
120
120
120
59
H12
p p 933 933 1,5 673
S1 1
120
72 D+ + + +
MP 313
31 31
311 940
20
940
912 912 2,5 o p
B10 B8 B9 32 Q t
H23
913 913 2,5 H3 H4 H5 H2 H8
44
S8 S - - G - G - G H1 2
3190 914 914 2,5 S3
409
400
401
442
P1 P2 P3 P4
405
56
H39
H36
915 915 2,5 325
36
937 937
408
9
406
402
6062
917 917 2,5
600
465
462
461
6270
60
643
939
681
939
665
M
938
48
938 MP
B
M 920
45
9201,5 MP
M12 Q 942
15
942 1,5 1 2 3 4 5
57
M8 921 9211,5
69
A7
S + 922 9221,5X5
V17 A6 927
58
927
70
928 928 415
34
X65 925
8
925 445
519 2,5 519 519 2,5
531
10
542 542 542
11
SW SW SW
22
531 531
MP 1,5 524
33
524 1,5
68
0,75 465 465
524
47
0,75 462 462
67
0,75 461 461
462
461
465
461
sw
sw
.
C A B C A B
Y14

2
S + - S + -

Q Q
2
B35
Option wired not equipped
Options non equipes Electrical - Schematic
B34
Instrumentenpult
Pupitre
31
31
M M
M M
674
126
610
31b
53a
53b

Liebherr 712 752 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Liebherr 712 752 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

en

2 Special Tools, Application Guidelines

3 Technical Data - Maintenance Guidelines

Service Manual 4 Engine

Book No.: 17 Operators Platform, Heater, Air Conditioner

Name of Manual Owner: 18 Special Attachments

Safety guidelines 1.2.01

Service items 1.3.01

Table - charts 1.4

Tightening torques standard screws 1.4.02

Tightening torques SAE screws 1.4.03

Hole diameter before tapping 1.4.04

ISO - tolerances 1.4.06

Code letters + terminal designations electric 1.5

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

01 01 General information Blatt

Printed and published by

Explanation of structure (page numbers)

main group sub group model group page No.

LIEBHERR-Werk Telfs GmbH.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

01 03 General Information Blatt

1. Service fluids for Diesel engines with turbo chargers

1.1. Engine lube oil

1.1.1 Oil quality

ACEA (CCMC) - classification : E2 (D4), E3 (D5), E4, E5

1.1.2 Oil viscosity

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

01 04 Service Items Blatt

above -10C to 0,5% 250 hrs. 500 hrs.

below -10C to 0,5% 125 hrs. 250 hrs.

1.2. Diesel fuels

Approved fuel specifications:

Additives to Diesel fuel (flow improvers)

Antifreeze protection chart

Percentage of antifreeze (%)

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

01 04 Service Items Blatt

Fresh water guidelines:

Presently approved anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids (as of December 2003):

BP Antifrost X 2270 A Deutsche BP AG, Hamburg / BRD

Caltex Engine Coolant DB Caltex (UK) ltd., London / England

Esso Khlerfrostschutz Esso AG, Hamburg / BRD

Fricofin Fuchs Mineraloelwerke GmbH, Mannheim / BRD

Glacelf Auto Supra Total

Havoline XLC ARTECO

Labo FP 100 Labo Industrie, Nanterre / Frankreich

Motul Anti-freeze Motul SA, Aubervilliers Cedex / Frankreich

OMV-Khlerfrostschutzmittel OMV AG, Schwechat / sterreich

Total Antigel S-MB 486 Total Deutschland GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD

Veedol Antifreeze O Deutsche Veedol GmbH, Hamburg / BRD

Wintershall Khlerschutz Wintershall Minerall GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD

Brand name Manufacturer

1.3.1 Coolant with DCA4 (DCA = Diesel Coolant Additive)

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

01 04 Service Items Blatt

Use of products from Caltex / Chevron Texaco / Havoline / Total

Presently approved anti corrosion fluids (as of December 2003):

2.1. Oil quality

2.1.1 Approved engine oil classifications

2.1.2 Special oils

2.2. Oil viscosity

Single grade oils